FeResPost Web Site                     FeResPost Online User Manual

FeResPost User Manual

Version 5.2.0

2026/08/14

Renaud Sizaire



THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Introduction

This document presents the manual of FeResPost.

FeResPost

When sizing a structure with FE software, the engineer is often led to use or develop tools that automate the computation of margins of safety, reserve factors or other results from outputs obtained with a FE solver. Then the engineer is facing several problems:

All these problems create difficulties in the management of automated post-processing. The scripts must be as simple and clearly written as possible to allow easy understanding by everyone. Their architecture must also be flexible to make modifications easy to implement and reduce the risk of errors.

The problems mentioned above are very similar to the kind of problems a programmer is facing when writing a large program. To help the programmer in this task, object-orientation emerged as a key programming language concept. Object-oriented languages allow the development of more flexible programs with a better architecture and allow the re-usability of code. Many object-oriented languages are now available. They can be compiled languages (C++, Fortran 90,...) or interpreted ones (Ruby, Python, Visual Basic,...).

FeResPost is a compiled library devoted to the programming of automated post-processing of finite element results. It provides the definition of several classes and one module. It uses object orientation at two levels:

1.

With object-oriented languages, it allows the writing of interpreted, object-oriented automated post-processing. An example of such an object-oriented post-processing program is given in Chapter IV.4.

2.

The FeResPost library is mainly written in C++, which is also an object-oriented language. Then a Ruby wrapping is provided around the C++ code.

During the development of FeResPost, the developer has been trying to maintain as much as possible the simplicity and clarity of the language in which post-processing programs are written.

FeResPost can be accessed from different languages and on different platforms:

How to learn FeResPost?

Some advice is given here to people starting to use FeResPost. The order in which knowledge is acquired matters. One of the worst ways to try to learn FeResPost is to read the manual while writing bits of code meant to solve the particular problem the user has in mind. Instead, the following sequence of knowledge acquisition is suggested:

1.

FeResPost is an extension of ruby programming language. This means that the examples provided in the document are small ruby programs. Therefore a basic knowledge of ruby is necessary. People who try to learn ruby and FeResPost simultaneously will likely struggle with both.

Very good books on ruby language are available in libraries. Internet resources are also a source of information (newsgroups, tutorials with examples...).

Note that people already familiar with one or several object-oriented programming languages will have no difficulty acquiring a basic knowledge of ruby.

2.

Then, the user may test FeResPost by running the small examples. These are provided in the sub-directories in “RUBY” directory. Note that the Nastran bdf files should first be run in order to have the op2 result files available. It may be a good idea to try first to understand the structure of the bdf files and of the organization of the finite element model.

The small examples are meant to be increasingly difficult. So, the user should first run the examples in “EX01” directory, then in “EX02”... For each example, every statement should be understood, and the corresponding pages of the user manual should be carefully read.

3.

When all the small examples have been run and understood, the user will probably have acquired a reasonable understanding of the various capabilities of FeResPost. Then it may be a good idea to start to read the user manual. For example, to read a few pages each day in such a way that the information can be digested efficiently.

4.

The two examples “PROJECTa” and “PROJECTb” illustrate the programming of more complex post-processing of Results involving loops on load-cases, on several types of post-processing calculations... These two projects should be studied at the very end.

“PROJECTa” is meant to be studied before “PROJECTb”. Indeed, “PROJECTa” is easier to understand than “PROJECTb”, because it is less object-oriented. However, it is also less complete and less elegant from a programming point of view.

The reason why the advice above is given is that many users send emails with questions or complaints because they fail to understand something about FeResPost that is clearly illustrated in the examples. Sometimes, the problems faced by users are simply related to a lack of understanding of the ruby programming language.

Structure of the document

This document is organized as follows:

A list of the different classes defined in FeResPost with pointers to Tables listing the methods defined by these classes is given in Table 1.


Table 1: Classes defined by FeResPost, and links to the corresponding lists of methods.

Future developments

FeResPost is still at the very beginning of its development and much work is still necessary to cover a wider range of applications. A few examples of possible improvements are given below, roughly sorted by order of urgency or ease of implementation:

1.

Correction of bugs...

2.

Addition of specialized post-processing modules programmed at C++ level to provide efficiency. For example:

3.

Extension of FeResPost by providing interfaces towards other FE software like Abaqus,...

4.

...

Of course, we are open to constructive remarks and comments about the ruby library in order to improve it.

Contents

I  FeResPost Reference Manual
I.0 Introduction
I.1 Generic “DataBase” class
I.1.1 Methods for FEM definition
I.1.2 “Group” methods
I.1.2.1 Simple manipulation of Groups
I.1.2.2 Construction of Groups by association operations
I.1.3 “Result” methods
I.1.3.1 Manipulation of Results
I.1.3.2 Enabling composite Results reading operations
I.1.4 Manipulation of abbreviations
I.1.5 Composite methods
I.1.6 Iterators
I.1.7 General purpose methods
I.1.8 “Gmsh” methods
I.2 The “CoordSys” class
I.2.1 The CoordSys object
I.2.2 Construction or manipulation functions
I.2.2.1 “initWith3Points” method
I.2.2.2 Six “initWithOViVj” methods
I.2.2.3 “updateDefWrt0” method
I.2.3 Transformation of point coordinates
I.2.3.1 “changeCoordsA20” method
I.2.3.2 “changeCoords02B” method
I.2.3.3 “changeCoordsA2B” method
I.2.4 Transformation of vector and tensor components
I.2.4.1 “changeCompsA20” method
I.2.4.2 “changeComps02B” method
I.2.4.3 “changeCompsA2B” method
I.2.5 Other methods
I.2.5.1 “initialize” method
I.2.5.2 “clone” method
I.2.5.3 “to_s” method
I.2.5.4 “Id” attribute
I.3 The “Group” class
I.3.1 The concept of “Group”
I.3.2 Creation of a Group object
I.3.3 Manipulation of entities stored in a Group
I.3.4 Group operators
I.3.5 “BLOBs”
I.3.6 Iterators of Group class
I.3.7 Other methods
I.4 The “Result” class
I.4.1 The concept of “Result”
I.4.1.1 “Keys”
I.4.1.2 “Values”
I.4.1.3 Identification of Result objects
I.4.1.4 Other characteristics
I.4.1.5 Tensorial Results, symmetric or non-symmetric
I.4.2 FeResPost Results’ characteristics
I.4.3 Extraction methods
I.4.3.1 “extractResultOnEntities” method
I.4.3.2 “extractResultOnLayers” method
I.4.3.3 “extractResultOnSubLayers” method
I.4.3.4 “extractResultOnRkl” method
I.4.3.5 “extractResultOnResultKeys” method
I.4.3.6 “extractResultOnRange” method
I.4.3.7 “extractResultForNbrVals” method
I.4.3.8 “extractResultMin” method
I.4.3.9 “extractResultMax” method
I.4.3.10 “extractRklOnRange” method
I.4.3.11 “extractRklForNbrVals” method
I.4.3.12 “extractRklMin” method
I.4.3.13 “extractRklMax” method
I.4.3.14 “extractRkl” method
I.4.3.15 “extractGroupOnRange” method
I.4.3.16 “extractGroupForNbrVals” method
I.4.3.17 “extractGroup” method
I.4.3.18 “extractLayers” method
I.4.3.19 “extractSubLayers” method
I.4.4 Derivation monadic methods
I.4.4.1 “deriveScalToScal” method
I.4.4.2 “deriveScalPerComponent” method
I.4.4.3 “deriveVectorToOneScal” method
I.4.4.4 “deriveVectorToTwoScals” method
I.4.4.5 “deriveVectorToVector” method
I.4.4.6 “deriveVectorToTensor” method
I.4.4.7 “deriveTensorToOneScal” method
I.4.4.8 “deriveTensorToTwoScals” method
I.4.4.9 “deriveTensorToThreeScals” method
I.4.4.10 “eigenQR” method
I.4.4.11 “deriveByRemapping” method
I.4.5 Dyadic derivation method
I.4.6 Methods modifying the object
I.4.6.1 Access to and modification of Result data
I.4.6.2 “setRefCoordSys”
I.4.6.3 “renumberLayers”
I.4.6.4 “renumberSubLayers”
I.4.6.5 “removeLayers”
I.4.6.6 “removeSubLayers”
I.4.6.7 “modifyRefCoordSys”
I.4.6.8 “modifyPositionRefCoordSys” method
I.4.6.9 Linear combination of Results
I.4.6.10 Rotations of vectorial and tensorial Results
I.4.7 Operators
I.4.7.1 Addition operator
I.4.7.2 Subtraction operator
I.4.7.3 Multiplication operator
I.4.7.4 Division operator
I.4.7.5 Exponent operator
I.4.8 “calcResultingFM” method
I.4.9 Complex Results
I.4.9.1 Rectangular-Polar conversions
I.4.9.2 Conjugate Complex Result
I.4.9.3 Rotation of Complex Result
I.4.9.4 Extractions from Complex Results
I.4.9.5 Assembling Complex from Real Results
I.4.10 “getData”
I.4.11 “BLOBs”
I.4.12 Iterators
I.4.13 A few singleton (static) methods
I.4.14 Other methods
I.4.14.1 “new”
I.4.14.2 “initialize”
I.4.14.3 “clone”
I.4.14.4 “cloneNoValues”
I.4.14.5 “initZeroResult”
I.4.14.6 “Size” attribute
I.4.14.7 “to_s”
I.5 The “ResKeyList” class
I.5.1 Creating and filling ResKeyList object
I.5.2 Extraction functions
I.5.3 Methods modifying the object
I.5.3.1 “renumberLayers” method
I.5.3.2 “renumberSubLayers”
I.5.3.3 “removeLayers”
I.5.3.4 “removeSubLayers”
I.5.4 Dyadic operators
I.5.5 Iterators
I.5.6 “getData” method
I.5.7 Other methods
I.6 The “Post” module, and other topics...
I.6.1 Manipulation of FeResPost standard output
I.6.2 Monadic functions for new Result creation
I.6.3 Dyadic functions for new Result creation
I.6.4 “Operator” methods
I.6.5 Reading and writing of Groups
I.6.6 Setting verbosity for debugging purposes
I.6.7 Conversion of CLA identifiers
I.6.8 SQL“BLOB” methods
I.6.9 Random or PSD integration methods
I.6.10 Predefined criteria
I.6.11 Loading HDF5 library
I.6.12 Exceptions
I.7 Arguments coercion for “Result” class operators
II  Composite Reference Manual
II.0 Introduction
II.0.1 Remarks and limitations
II.1 Theoretical background
II.1.1 Conventions
II.1.2 Rotation in XY plane and algebraic notations
II.1.2.0.1 Rotation of base vectors
II.1.2.0.2 Transformation of vector and tensor components
II.1.2.0.3 Matricial notations
II.1.2.0.4 Introduction of a short notation
II.1.3 Materials and plies
II.1.3.1 Plies
II.1.3.2 Materials and constitutive equations
II.1.3.3 In-plane properties
II.1.3.4 Out-of-plane shear properties
II.1.4 Thickness and mass of laminate
II.1.5 In-plane and flexural laminate behavior
II.1.6 Out-of-plane shear of laminate
II.1.6.1 Out-of-plane shear equilibrium equations
II.1.6.2 Triangular distribution of in-plane stresses
II.1.6.3 Out-of-plane shear stress partial derivative equations
II.1.6.4 Integration of out-of-plane shear stress equation
II.1.6.5 Approximations with out-of-plane shear forces
II.1.6.5.1 The “(μx,μy)” approach
II.1.6.5.2 “Uncoupled X-Y” approach
II.1.6.5.3 “Resolution in shear force axes” approach
II.1.6.5.4 Comparison of the three approaches
II.1.6.6 Out-of-plane laminate shear stiffness
II.1.6.6.1 Limitations of shear stiffness calculation
II.1.6.6.2 Introduction of new notations
II.1.6.6.3 Energetic approach
II.1.6.7 Calculation algorithm for shear stiffness
II.1.6.8 Ply out-of-plane shear stresses
II.1.6.8.1 With (μx,μy) approach
II.1.6.8.2 With “resolution in shear force axes” approach
II.1.7 CTE and CME calculations
II.1.7.1 In-plane and flexural thermo-elastic behavior
II.1.7.2 Out-of-plane shear thermo-elastic behavior
II.1.7.3 Hygrometric behavior of laminates
II.1.7.4 Full sets of equations
II.1.8 Calculation of load response
II.1.8.1 In-plane and flexural response
II.1.8.2 Out-of-plane shear response
II.1.8.3 Out-of-plane T/C deformation
II.1.9 Accelerating the calculation of load response
II.1.9.1 Calculation of laminate loads and strains
II.1.9.2 Calculation of plies stresses and strains
II.1.9.2.1 Loading in ply axes
II.1.10 Failure theories
II.1.10.1 Tresca criterion (2D)
II.1.10.2 Von Mises criterion (2D)
II.1.10.3 Von Mises criterion (3D)
II.1.10.4 Maximum stress criterion
II.1.10.5 Maximum stress criterion (3D)
II.1.10.6 Maximum strain criteria (2D)
II.1.10.7 Maximum strain criterion (3D)
II.1.10.8 Combined strain criterion (2D)
II.1.10.9 Tsai-Hill criterion
II.1.10.10 Tsai-Hill criterion (version b)
II.1.10.11 Tsai-Hill criterion (version c)
II.1.10.12 Tsai-Hill criterion (3D)
II.1.10.13 Tsai-Hill criterion (3D version b)
II.1.10.14 Tsai-Wu criterion
II.1.10.15 Tsai-Wu criterion (3D)
II.1.10.16 Hoffman criterion
II.1.10.17 Puck criterion
II.1.10.18 Puck “b” criterion
II.1.10.19 Puck “c” criterion
II.1.10.20 Hashin criteria
II.1.10.21 Hashin criteria (3D)
II.1.10.22 Yamada-Sun criterion
II.1.10.23 Yamada-Sun criterion (version b)
II.1.10.24 3D honeycomb criterion
II.1.10.25 Honeycomb shear criterion
II.1.10.26 Honeycomb simplified shear criterion
II.1.10.27 Inter-laminar shear criterion
II.1.11 Temperature diffusion in laminates
II.1.11.1 Material thermal parameters
II.1.11.2 In-plane and out-of-plane components
II.1.11.3 In-plane rotations of vectorial and tensorial properties
II.1.11.4 Integration along the laminate thickness
II.1.11.4.1 In-plane conductivity
II.1.11.4.2 Out-of-plane conductivity
II.1.11.4.3 Thermal capacity
II.1.12 Moisture diffusion in laminates
II.1.13 Units
II.2 The “ClaDb” class
II.2.1 Creation of an object
II.2.2 Identifying a ClaDb
II.2.3 Manipulating entities stored in a ClaDb
II.2.4 Management of Units
II.2.5 Saving to or retrieving from a disk file
II.2.6 Saving or initializing with NDF lines
II.2.7 Iterators
II.2.8 Other methods
II.3 The “ClaMat” class
II.3.1 Creation of an object
II.3.2 Identifier and type
II.3.3 Manipulating Data
II.3.4 Calculated results
II.3.5 Management of Units
II.3.6 Saving or initializing with NDF lines
II.3.7 Other methods
II.4 The “ClaLam” class
II.4.1 Class Methods
II.4.2 Creation of an object
II.4.3 Identifying a laminate
II.4.4 Manipulation of plies
II.4.5 Other data
II.4.6 Laminate properties
II.4.7 Laminate load response for a simple loading
II.4.7.1 Calculation of the load response
II.4.7.2 Laminate internal loads and strains
II.4.7.3 Ply stresses and strains
II.4.7.4 Temperatures and moistures at ply level
II.4.7.5 Other ply results
II.4.8 Laminate finite element load response
II.4.8.1 Calculation of laminate loads, stresses and strains
II.4.8.1.1 Units
II.4.8.2 Acceleration
II.4.9 Calculation of criteria from FE stresses or strains
II.4.10 Management of Units
II.4.11 Saving or initializing with NDF lines
II.4.12 One iterator
II.4.13 Other methods
II.5 The “ClaLoad” class
II.5.1 Creation of an object
II.5.2 Identifying a ClaLoad
II.5.3 Thermo-elastic and hygro-elastic contributions
II.5.4 Setting and getting mechanical parts
II.5.5 Linear combinations of loads
II.5.6 Finite element Results
II.5.7 Management of Units
II.5.8 Saving or initializing with NDF lines
II.5.9 Other methods
III  Solver Preferences
III.0 Introduction
III.1 Nastran Preferences
III.1.1 “NastranDb” class
III.1.1.1 Reading a BDF
III.1.1.2 “OP2” methods for reading a FEM
III.1.1.3 Reading FEM from HDF file
III.1.1.4 Superelements and Modules
III.1.1.4.1 Modules
III.1.1.4.2 Superelements
III.1.1.5 Writing Bulk lines
III.1.1.6 Accessing FEM information or modifying the FEM
III.1.1.7 “CoordSys” methods
III.1.1.7.1 “getCoordSysCopy”
III.1.1.7.2 “addCoordSys”
III.1.1.7.3 “makeAllCoordSysWrt0”
III.1.1.8 Construction of Groups by associations
III.1.1.9 “OP2” methods for reading Results
III.1.1.10 “XDB” methods for extracting XDB information
III.1.1.10.1 “getXdbLcNames” method
III.1.1.10.2 “getXdbScNames” method
III.1.1.10.3 “getXdbResNames” method
III.1.1.10.4 “getXdbLcScNames” method
III.1.1.10.5 “getXdbLcScResNames” method
III.1.1.10.6 “getXdbLcInfos” method
III.1.1.10.7 “printXdbDictionary” method
III.1.1.10.8 “readXdb” method
III.1.1.10.9 “readXdb2H” method
III.1.1.10.10 A note on “endianness”
III.1.1.10.11 XDB tables activation
III.1.1.11 Attaching “XDB” files to a Nastran DataBase
III.1.1.11.1 Managing XDB file attachments
III.1.1.11.2 Extracting information from XDB file attachments
III.1.1.11.3 Extracting Results From XDB file attachments
III.1.1.11.4 Importing Results From XDB file attachments
III.1.1.11.5 Getting optimization data from XDB
III.1.1.11.6 Storage buffers for XDB result files random access
III.1.1.11.7 “Raw” access to XDB file content
III.1.1.12 Attaching “HDF” files to a Nastran DataBase
III.1.1.12.1 Reading the FEM from an HDF file
III.1.1.12.2 Reading Results from an HDF file
III.1.1.12.3 Managing HDF file attachments
III.1.1.12.4 Extracting information from HDF file attachments
III.1.1.12.5 Extracting Results From HDF file attachments
III.1.1.12.6 Raw access to HDF Datasets
III.1.1.13 GMSH outputs
III.1.1.14 Iterators
III.1.1.14.1 Iterating on FEM entities
III.1.1.14.2 Iterating on Tables in Result files
III.1.1.14.3 Iterating on BDF content
III.1.1.15 Other methods
III.1.1.16 Attributes
III.1.2 Nastran Result characteristics
III.1.2.1 General Results
III.1.2.2 Composite Results
III.1.2.3 Contact Results
III.1.3 Interaction with CLA classes
III.2 Samcef Preferences
III.2.1 “SamcefDb” class
III.2.1.1 Reading Samcef models
III.2.1.2 “CoordSys” methods
III.2.1.2.1 “getCoordSysCopy”
III.2.1.2.2 “addCoordSys”
III.2.1.2.3 “makeAllCoordSysWrt0”
III.2.1.3 Construction of Groups by association operations
III.2.1.4 Methods related to Results importation
III.2.1.4.1 “readDesFac” method
III.2.1.4.2 “readDesFac2H” method
III.2.1.4.3 Flags for reading of Results
III.2.1.5 Attaching “DES/FAC” files to a Samcef DataBase
III.2.1.5.1 Managing DES/FAC file attachments
III.2.1.5.2 Extracting information from DES/FAC attachments
III.2.1.5.3 Extracting Results from attachments
III.2.1.5.4 Storage buffers for result files random access
III.2.1.6 GMSH outputs
III.2.1.7 Production of additional Results
III.2.1.8 Iterators
III.2.1.9 Other methods
III.2.1.10 Attributes
III.2.2 Samcef Results characteristics
III.2.2.1 General Results
III.2.2.2 Composite Results
III.2.3 Methods defined in “Post” module
IV  FeResPost Examples with RUBY Extension
IV.0 Introduction
IV.0.1 Accessing the ruby extension
IV.1 A small satellite
IV.1.1 Presentation of the structure and its modeling
IV.1.2 Satellite FEM materials and properties
IV.1.3 Conventions for numbering and groups
IV.1.4 Loads and Boundary conditions
IV.1.4.1 Loads
IV.1.4.2 Boundary conditions
IV.1.5 Main data files
IV.1.5.1 Acceleration unit loads on entire structure
IV.1.5.2 Acceleration unit loads on parts of the structure
IV.1.5.3 Thermo-elastic load cases
IV.1.5.4 Other solution sequences
IV.1.6 Organization of FEM in files and directories
IV.2 A few small examples
IV.2.1 Utilities Module
IV.2.2 Examples without Results
IV.2.2.1 Reading Bulk Data
IV.2.2.1.1 Reading Nastran model into DataBase
IV.2.2.1.2 Reading Nastran cards
IV.2.2.2 Reading FEM from HDF file
IV.2.2.3 Group examples
IV.2.2.3.1 Printing the list of a DataBase’s Groups
IV.2.2.3.2 Content of DataBase’s Groups
IV.2.2.3.3 Printing a Patran session file
IV.2.2.4 Manipulating Group entities
IV.2.2.5 Adding Groups to a DataBase
IV.2.3 Examples with iterators
IV.2.4 Examples with Results
IV.2.4.1 Inspecting Results contained in a DataBase
IV.2.4.2 Calculations with Results
IV.2.4.3 Using predefined criteria
IV.2.4.4 Printing Results’ content
IV.2.4.5 Coordinate system transformations
IV.2.4.6 Manipulation of Complex Results
IV.2.4.6.1 Extracting xdb lists of load cases and Results
IV.2.4.6.2 Extracting xdb Results information
IV.2.4.6.3 Manipulation of Complex Results
IV.2.4.6.4 Working with XDB attachments
IV.2.4.7 Manipulation of XDB attachments
IV.2.4.7.1 Extracting information from XDB attached file
IV.2.4.7.2 Extracting Results from XDB attached file
IV.2.4.7.3 Extracting linear combination of Results from XDB
IV.2.4.7.4 Random analysis or integration of PSD functions
IV.2.5 A few useful tools
IV.2.5.1 Definition of acceleration fields
IV.2.5.2 Definition of temperature fields
IV.2.5.3 Calculation of a total force and moment
IV.2.5.4 Outputting a Gmsh file
IV.2.6 Saving and retrieving Results from an SQL database
IV.2.6.1 Saving objects in an SQLite database
IV.2.6.2 Retrieving objects from an SQLite database
IV.2.7 Reading optimization results
IV.2.8 “Raw” access to XDB file content
IV.2.8.1 Utilities
IV.2.8.2 Printing Coordinate System Table Matrix
IV.2.8.3 Accessing results
IV.2.8.4 Producing a “clean” model from topometric optimization
IV.2.8.5 Reading and saving the temperature distributions
IV.2.9 Reading Results From Nastran HDF file
IV.2.10 Raw reading of Nastran HDF file’s content
IV.2.11 Superelements
IV.2.11.1 Reading BDF file and accessing superelements
IV.2.11.2 Superelements and OP2 files
IV.2.11.3 Getting superelement Results from XDB files
IV.2.11.4 Reading superelement nodes from Result files
IV.2.11.5 Getting superelement Results from HDF files
IV.2.12 Other tests
IV.2.12.1 Reading RBE Results with Lagrange option
IV.2.12.2 Reading nonlinear analysis Results from HDF5 files
IV.2.12.3 Testing MPC Results
IV.2.13 CBEAM and CBAR intermediate stations
IV.2.14 Orthogonal tensor and rotations
IV.2.15 Reading Grid Point Forces on DMIG elements
IV.2.16 Manipulation of complex Grid Point Forces
IV.3 Using the composite classes
IV.3.1 Importing and exporting data
IV.3.2 Manipulating composite entities
IV.3.3 Composite thermal properties
IV.3.4 Extending composite classes
IV.3.4.1 Extension “extendedCLA.rb”
IV.3.4.1.1 Modification of “ClaLam” class
IV.3.4.1.2 Modification of “ClaMat” class
IV.3.4.2 A very simple example of use
IV.3.4.3 Properties of the laminates defined in an ESAComp file
IV.3.4.4 Properties of the laminates defined in an ESAComp file
IV.3.4.5 Properties of the materials defined in an ESAComp file
IV.3.5 Out-of-plane laminate shear response
IV.3.6 Producing composite finite element Results
IV.3.7 Modifying units
IV.4 Object-oriented post-processing
IV.4.1 Post-processing classes and modules
IV.4.1.1 Management of databases and load cases
IV.4.1.2 “Post-processing” classes
IV.4.1.2.1 “PostCauchyStress” class
IV.4.1.2.2 “PostLaminate” class
IV.4.1.2.3 “PostConnect” class
IV.4.1.2.4 “PostExtract” class
IV.4.1.2.5 “PostBuckling” class
IV.4.1.3 Other modules and classes
IV.4.1.3.1 “Util” module
IV.4.1.3.2 “SqlWrap” class
IV.4.2 Definition of data
IV.4.3 Sorting tools
IV.4.4 Recovery of results in excel and reporting word
IV.4.5 A few tricks...
IV.4.5.1 Exceptions
IV.4.5.2 Filtering the reading of Results
IV.4.6 Conclusions
V  FeResPost Python bindings
V.0 Introduction
V.0.1 Accessing the Python extension
V.0.2 Python versus ruby
V.0.2.1 Creating class instances
V.0.2.2 Associative containers and Arrays
V.0.2.3 Iterators
V.0.2.4 “nil” arguments
V.0.2.5 Exceptions
V.1 Python examples
V.1.1 Iterators
V.1.2 Accessing HDF and XDB results
V.1.3 SQLite examples
V.1.4 Superelements
VI  FeResPost as COM component
VI.0 Introduction
VI.0.1 Accessing the COM component
VI.0.1.1 Accessing the COM component in ruby
VI.0.1.2 Accessing the COM component in python
VI.0.1.3 Accessing the COM component in VBscript
VI.0.1.4 Accessing the COM component in VBA
VI.0.1.5 Accessing the COM component in compiled languages
VI.0.2 COM component versus ruby extension
VI.0.2.1 Creating class instances
VI.0.2.2 Associative containers and Arrays
VI.0.2.3 Iterators
VI.0.2.4 Operators
VI.0.2.5 Singleton methods
VI.0.2.6 “Clone” methods
VI.0.2.7 “Post” Module
VI.0.2.8 Complex arguments
VI.0.2.9 “nil” arguments
VI.0.2.10 Exceptions
VI.0.2.11 Selection of standard output for information messages
VI.1 CLA classes
VI.1.1 “ClaDb” class
VI.1.2 “ClaMat” class
VI.1.3 “ClaLam” class
VI.1.4 “ClaLoad” class
VI.2 Generic FeResPost classes
VI.2.1 FeResPost Application class
VI.2.1.1 Management of the Application
VI.2.1.2 Creation of other objects
VI.2.1.3 Methods corresponding to “Post” module in ruby extension
VI.2.1.4 Changing working directory
VI.2.2 Generic DataBase class
VI.2.3 Group class
VI.2.4 CoordSys class
VI.2.5 Result class
VI.2.6 ResKeyList class
VI.3 Supported Solvers
VI.3.1 The “NastranDb” class
VI.3.2 The “SamcefDb” class
VII  FeResPost Examples with COM Component
VII.0 Introduction
VII.1 COM examples with various languages
VII.1.1 Using COM component with several languages
VII.1.1.1 Using component with python
VII.1.1.2 Using component with ruby
VII.1.1.3 Using component with C++
VII.1.1.4 Using component with C
VII.1.2 Using COM component with excel
VII.1.2.1 An excel workbook illustrating the use of SQL databases
VII.2 COM examples translated from ruby
VII.3 CLA analyses in excel
VII.3.1 Preparing the application
VII.3.2 Workbook events
VII.3.3 Spreadsheets
VII.3.3.1 Spreadsheet “HiddenData”
VII.3.3.2 Spreadsheet “NeutralLines”
VII.3.3.3 Spreadsheet “ClaDbIds”
VII.3.3.4 Spreadsheet “DbUnitsEdit”
VII.3.3.5 Spreadsheet “MatEdit”
VII.3.3.6 Spreadsheet “LamEdit”
VII.3.3.7 Spreadsheet “LoadEdit”
VII.3.3.8 Spreadsheet “MatProperties”
VII.3.3.9 Spreadsheet “LamProperties”
VII.3.3.10 Spreadsheet “LamText”
VII.3.3.11 Spreadsheet “LamLoadResponse_A”
VII.3.3.12 Spreadsheet “LamLoadResponse_B”
VII.3.3.13 Spreadsheet “LamMinMaxCalcArray”
VII.3.3.14 Spreadsheet “LamMinRfCalcScal”
VII.3.4 VBA modules
VII.3.4.1 “calcMatProperties” module
VII.3.4.2 “calcLamProperties” module
VII.3.4.3 “calcLamLoadResponse” module
VII.4 Extraction and manipulation of Results with excel
VII.4.1 Preparing the application
VII.4.2 Accessing the FEM and Results
VII.4.3 Editing Groups
VII.4.4 Simple extraction of Results
VII.4.5 Extraction of linear combinations of Results
VII.4.6 Calculation of criteria
VII.4.7 Extraction of dynamic response Results
VII.4.8 Current limitations
VIII  FeResPost as .NET assembly
VIII.0 Introduction
VIII.0.1 Accessing the .NET assembly
VIII.0.2 Accessing FeResPost namespace
VIII.0.3 Creating class instances
VIII.0.4 Basic types as arguments and returned values
VIII.0.5 Associative containers and Arrays
VIII.0.6 Iterators
VIII.0.7 Operators
VIII.0.8 Singleton methods
VIII.0.9 “Clone” and “ToString” methods
VIII.0.10 “Post” static class
VIII.0.11 Complex arguments
VIII.0.12 FeResPost exceptions
VIII.0.13 Output for information messages
VIII.1 CLA classes
VIII.1.1 “ClaDb” class
VIII.1.2 “ClaMat” class
VIII.1.3 “ClaLam” class
VIII.1.4 “ClaLoad” class
VIII.2 Generic FeResPost classes
VIII.2.1 “Post” static class
VIII.2.2 Generic DataBase class
VIII.2.3 Group class
VIII.2.4 CoordSys class
VIII.2.5 Result class
VIII.2.6 ResKeyList class
VIII.3 Supported Solvers
VIII.3.1 The “NastranDb” class
VIII.3.2 The “SamcefDb” class
IX  FeResPost Examples with .NET Assembly
IX.1 Examples of use for .NET assembly
IX.1.1 Reading a Nastran model
IX.1.1.1 Reading a Nastran model with C-sharp
IX.1.2 “printStressMax” example
IX.1.3 Accessing FEM data
IX.1.4 Extending CLA classes
IX.1.5 Saving and retrieving Results from an SQL database
X  Appendices
X.A Installing FeResPost library
X.A.1 Binaries
X.A.1.1 Linux binaries (32-bit)
X.A.1.2 Linux binaries (64-bit)
X.A.1.3 Windows binaries (32-bit)
X.A.1.4 Windows binaries (64-bit)
X.A.1.5 Windows .NET assemblies
X.A.1.6 HDF shared libraries
X.A.2 Building from sources
X.A.3 Compilation options
X.A.4 Installation and configuration of binaries
X.A.4.1 Redistributable libraries
X.A.4.2 FeResPost C++ developer’s library and headers
X.A.4.3 Ruby extensions
X.A.4.4 Python extensions
X.A.4.5 COM component
X.A.4.5.1 Registration of COM component with “modifyRegistry.exe” program
X.A.4.5.2 Registration with “reg” files
X.A.4.6 .NET assembly
X.B Coordinate system transformations
X.B.1 Components of vectors and tensors
X.B.1.1 Vectors in a Cartesian coordinate system
X.B.1.2 Order 2 tensor in a Cartesian coordinate system
X.B.1.3 Cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems
X.B.2 Transformation of components
X.B.2.1 Transformation of vector components
X.B.2.2 Transformation of tensor components
X.B.3 Rotation of a coordinate system
X.B.4 Modification of coordinate systems
X.B.4.1 Local coordinate systems
X.B.4.2 Global coordinate systems
X.B.4.3 Projected coordinate systems
X.B.4.4 Local coordinate systems of CQUAD4 elements
X.B.4.5 Local coordinate systems of 3D elements
X.B.5 Coordinate systems and laminate properties
X.B.6 Eigenvectors of symmetric tensors and orthogonal matrices
X.B.7 Building rotation tensor from rotation vector
X.C Results characteristics
X.C.1 Real Results
X.C.2 Complex Results
X.D Predefined criteria
X.D.1 List of the predefined criteria
X.D.1.1 “HoneycombAirbusMoS” criterion
X.D.1.2 “HoneycombAirbusSR” criterion
X.D.1.3 “VonMisesMoS” criterion
X.D.1.4 “VonMisesSR” criterion
X.D.1.5 “SGI_SR” criterion
X.D.1.6 Interaction criteria
X.D.2 User predefined criteria
X.E An Excel workbook devoted to post-processing
X.E.1 Preparing the application
X.E.1.1 “Optimizing” excel
X.E.1.2 Referencing FeResPost in VBA
X.E.1.3 Installing “SQLite for Excel”
X.E.2 Worksheets
X.E.2.1 “LcSelector” worksheet
X.E.2.2 Worksheet for Definition of databases and load cases
X.E.2.3 Worksheet for Selection of load cases and associated parameters
X.E.2.4 Post-processing worksheets
X.E.2.5 “envelopeGMSH” worksheet
X.E.3 VBA modules
X.E.3.1 “DbAndLoadCases” VBA module
X.E.3.2 “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module
X.E.3.3 “ResultsExtraction” VBA module
X.E.3.4 “ResultsArchiver” VBA module
X.E.3.5 “ResultsGmsh” VBA module
X.E.3.6 “Sqlite3” VBA module
X.E.3.7 “UTIL” VBA module
X.E.4 “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module
X.E.4.1 Post-processing of stress Results
X.E.4.1.1 “getVonMisesMax” function
X.E.4.1.2 “getShellVonMisesMax” function
X.E.4.1.3 “getHoneycombCoreAirbusRF” function
X.E.4.1.4 “getHoneycombCoreMaxShearRF” function
X.E.4.2 Post-processing of connection loads
X.E.4.2.1 Calculation of the different components of connection loads
X.E.4.2.2 “getSlidingRF” function
X.E.4.2.3 “getGappingRF” function
X.E.4.2.4 “getInsertRF” function
X.E.4.2.5 “getShearBearingRF” function
X.E.4.2.6 “getPullThroughRF” function
X.E.4.3 composite post-processing
X.F Bolt group redistribution of connection loads
X.F.1 Assumptions
X.F.2 Group global stiffness
X.F.3 Distribution on a group of connections
X.F.4 Final remarks
X.G Copying FeResPost
X.G.1 Copyright
X.G.2 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
X.G.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
X.H Summary of changes
XI  References

Index

.NET505–517, 521–524

Abaqus6
abbreviations47–48, 318
Acceleration of computation118–119, 366–368, 567–577
asef321
Autodesk268, 681

Bacon317, 318, 583
bacon318
banque317–318
BBBTsee Binary Blocked Balanced Tree, see Binary Blocked Balanced Tree
Beam Intermediate Stations402
big endian277–279
Binary Blocked Balanced Tree272
BLOB65, 101, 115, 386–388, 454, 483, 524, 580, 585–586, 588–589
bolt group601–606

C482
C++62, 67, 71, 480–482
CLA465–466, 511–512
ClaDb125, 203–208, 465, 511
ClaLam125, 217–235, 466, 512
ClaLoad125, 237–243, 466, 512
ClaMat125, 209–215, 465–466, 511
Classical Laminate Analysis465–466, 511–512
code331–334
COM457–471, 475–501
Combined strain criterion182
Complex, Complex98–100
Component Object Model457–471, 475–501
Composite48–49, 125–243
CoordSys35, 53–59, 265–266, 318–319, 371
COPYING607–621
CRMS299

DataBase35, 37–52, 92, 93
DataBase, flags, readDesFac322
DataBase, flags, readDesFac321
DataBase, key43–44
des320–328
disable271, 278, 322
DMIG303, 403
dynam321

ECMAScript270
EDS268, 270
enable271, 278, 322
endianness277–279
EQEXINE288
EQEXING288
Equivalent Strain134, 166, 181, 182
ESAComp125, 207
excel421–423, 440, 442–444, 459, 482–483, 487–501, 579–600
exception119, 451, 463

fac320–328
Failure Index232
FEM267
FeResPost35
FIsee Failure Index
Fick199
finite elements35
Fourier195

General Public License607–621
Gmsh50–52, 386, 569, 580–583, 585–586, 588–589
GNU531
GPL607–621
Group35, 37, 41–43, 61–66, 79, 109, 266, 319–320, 359–363

Hash Key272
Hashin criteria189–191
HD5119, 394–395, 453–454
HDF119, 258–261, 290–295, 394–395, 400–401, 453–454, 530
HDF5400–401
HKsee Hash Key, see Hash Key
Hoffman criterion186
Honeycomb criterion193–194

I-DEAS268, 270
identifier125
IDispatch460, 482
Ilss criterion194–195
Ilss_b criterion194–195
include256
Inventor Nastran268, 681
iterator49–50, 65, 101–102, 107–108, 295–297, 328–329
iterators363

keysee DataBase, key, see Result, key

layersee Result, layer
Lesser General Public License607–621
LGPL607–621
little endian277–279

Makefile530
Maximum strain criterion181–182
Maximum stress criterion180
mecano321
Mechanical Strain134, 166, 181, 182
Microsoft460, 482
Microsoft Office422, 442–444
MINGW531
Mohr83
MoSsee Margin of Safety
MSYS531

Nastran64, 198, 249–313, 339
NET505–517, 521–524
non-symmetric tensor73–75, 550–553
NX318

op2258–261, 267–271, 299–313, 397–398, 400
orthogonal tensor550–553

Patran35, 41, 42, 61, 63, 97, 310, 348
Post35, 80, 89, 109–119
post-processing35
Predefined criterion118–119, 366–368, 567–577
PSD115–118, 299, 376–377
Puck criterion187
Puck_b criterion187–188
Puck_c criterion188
Python449–454
python477–479

random115–118, 272
random access279–290, 322–328
Regular expression269–271
Reserve Factor176, 186, 188, 190, 191, 232, 427
ResKeyList35, 71, 75, 77, 78, 105–108
Result35, 37, 38, 43–47, 67–103, 105, 109, 112, 119, 272–295, 299–313, 322–328, 363–377
Result, Complex98–100
Result, key70–71, 75, 78, 94, 100–102, 105, 108, 365
Result, layer70–71
Result, value44, 70, 73–74, 78, 100–102
Results555–563
results35
RFsee Reserve Factor
rfalter256
rfinclude256
RMSINT117
Rodrigue’s rotation formula94
Rodrigues’ rotation formula553
rotation tensor550–553
ruby35, 67, 479–480

Samcef47, 315–335, 495, 501, 581–584
scalar73, 77–84, 87, 92, 94, 97, 101
Siemens318
SQL65, 101, 115, 386–388, 454, 483, 524, 580, 585–586, 588–589
SQLite386–388, 454, 483, 524, 580, 585–586, 588–589
SRsee Strength Ratio
stabi321
Strength Ratio176, 232, 367, 427, 441–443
superelement258–261, 395–401

tensorial73, 82–84, 87, 92, 94, 101
Tresca criterion178–179
Tsai-Hill criterion183–184
Tsai-Wu criterion184–186
tuple450, 454

Unigraphics268, 270

valuesee Result, value
VBA421, 459, 482–483, 487–501, 579–600
vectorial73, 81, 82, 87, 92–94, 101
Von Mises83
Von Mises criterion179

word422, 442–444

xdb258–261, 272–290, 299–313, 398–400, 453–454

Yamada-Sun criterion192

Part I
FeResPost Reference Manual

Chapter I.0
Introduction

FeResPost is a library that allows the manipulation of finite element entities and results. Its purpose is to ease the development of post-processing programs. The supported solvers and corresponding program preferences are discussed in Part III of the document.

The various capabilities implemented in the ruby extension are mainly inspired by Patran capabilities. Several types of objects can be manipulated:

Finally, additional functions, not members of any class, are defined in a module called “Post”. The “Post” module is discussed in Chapter I.6. In the same chapter, other topics are also discussed, such as exceptions.

Chapter I.1
Generic “DataBase” class

Basically, a “DataBase” class is a container used to store a finite element model, Groups, Results, and other less important entities. The DataBase class also allows retrieval, manipulation and modification of these objects. The DataBase class is a generic class that cannot be instantiated. The specialized classes that inherit the generic DataBase class are described in Part III. Other solvers might be supported in the future. The class hierarchy is schematically represented in Figure I.1.1.


PICT

Figure I.1.1: Finite element DataBase classes hierarchy.

As three classes are represented in Figure I.1.1, the methods described in this Chapter may belong to the generic DataBase class or to the derived classes. A few basic principles should help the user to “guess” in which class some of the methods are defined:

Throughout the Chapter, for each method the class in which it is defined is specified. This Chapter is divided into several sections:

A list of the methods defined in “DataBase” class is given in Table I.1.1.

Table I.1.1: The different methods that have been defined in “DataBase” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
(new) I.1.1
(initialize) I.1.1
(clone) I.1.1
checkCoordSysExists I.1.1
checkElementExists I.1.1
checkNodeExists I.1.1
checkRbeExists I.1.1
getElementType I.1.1
getElementTypeName I.1.1
getElementDim I.1.1
getElementNbrNodes I.1.1
getElementNbrCornerNodes I.1.1
getElementNodes I.1.1
getElementCornerNodes I.1.1
Attributes
Name I.1.7 IV.2.2.1.1
NbrCoordSys I.1.1
NbrElements I.1.1
NbrNodes I.1.1
NbrAbbreviations I.1.4
NbrGroups I.1.2.1
Manipulation of Results
getResultLoadCaseNames I.1.3.1 “EX09/modifCS3D.rb”
getResultSubCaseNames I.1.3.1 “EX09/modifCS3D.rb”
getResultTypeNames I.1.3.1 “EX09/modifCS3D.rb”
checkResultExists I.1.3.1
getResultSize I.1.3.1
getResultLcInfos I.1.3.1
addResult I.1.3.1
generateCoordResults I.1.3.1 IV.2.4
generateElemAxesResults I.1.3.1
buildLoadCasesCombili I.1.3.1“PROJECTb/DATA/loadCases.rb”
renameResults I.1.3.1
copyResults I.1.3.1
removeResults I.1.3.1“PROJECTb/DATA/loadCases.rb”
removeAllResults I.1.3.1
getResultCopy I.1.3.1 IV.2.4.2
enableLayeredResultsReading (s)I.1.3.2
disableLayeredResultsReading (s)I.1.3.2 IV.2.4
enableSubLayersReading (s) I.1.3.2
disableSubLayersReading (s) I.1.3.2 IV.2.4
Manipulation of Groups
readGroupsFromPatranSession I.1.2.1 IV.2.2.3
writeGroupsToPatranSession I.1.2.1 IV.2.2.3
addGroupCopy I.1.2.1 IV.2.2.5
getAllGroupNames I.1.2.1 IV.2.2.3
checkGroupExists I.1.2.1
getGroupCopy I.1.2.1 IV.2.2.3
eraseGroup I.1.2.1
eraseAllGroups I.1.2.1
getGroupAllElements I.1.2.1
getGroupAllNodes I.1.2.1
getGroupAllRbes I.1.2.1
getGroupAllCoordSys I.1.2.1
getGroupAllFEM I.1.2.1 IV.2.4.4
Manipulation of abbreviations
clearAbbreviations I.1.4
addAbbreviation I.1.4
addAbbreviations I.1.4
Abbreviations I.1.4
getAbbreviation I.1.4
checkAbbreviationExists I.1.4
getAbbreviations I.1.4
CLA methods
getClaDb I.1.5 IV.3.1
calcFiniteElementResponse I.1.5 IV.3.6
calcFiniteElementCriteria I.1.5 IV.3.6
calcFemLamProperties I.1.5
Iterators
each_abbreviation I.1.6
each_groupName I.1.6 IV.2.2.3
each_resultKey I.1.6 IV.2.4
each_resultKeyCaseId I.1.6 IV.2.4
each_resultKeySubCaseId I.1.6 IV.2.4
each_resultKeyLcScId I.1.6 IV.2.4
each_resultKeyResId I.1.6 IV.2.4
Write methods
to_s I.1.7
writeGmsh I.1.8 IV.2.5.4
writeGmshMesh I.1.8 IV.2.5.4

I.1.1 Methods for FEM definition

No generic “DataBase” object can be created because “DataBase” class cannot be instantiated. This means that a statement like:

    db=DataBase.new()

leads to an error message. All the methods described in this section are defined in the specialized versions of the DataBase class. So no “new”, “initialize” or “clone” method is defined in DataBase class.

Three methods are defined that return the number of entities of certain types stored in the DataBase FE model:

Each of these methods has no argument and returns an integer. Other methods allow checking the existence of finite element entities:

Each of these four methods has one integer argument corresponding to the entity the existence of which is checked.

Several methods allow retrieval of element information. Each of the following methods has one integer argument corresponding to the element ID:

Normally one class corresponds to each solver supported by FeResPost. The preferences for the different supported solvers are described in Part III.

I.1.2 “Group” methods

Groups can be stored in, and retrieved from a DataBase object. The methods defined in generic class DataBase, or in its derived classes, that are devoted to the manipulation of Group objects, are presented here. In the DataBase, the Group objects are stored in a mapping associating their names to the Group, allowing retrieval of the Group when needed.

A distinction is made between the simple manipulation of Groups described in section I.1.2.1 and the more complicated operation where new Groups are created by association operations (section I.1.2.2). The methods related to these associative operations are often defined in the specialized versions of the Database class.

I.1.2.1 Simple manipulation of Groups

The methods that allow the manipulation of Groups stored in a generic DataBase object. All the methods described in this section are defined in generic DataBase class. These methods are described below:

I.1.2.2 Construction of Groups by association operations

This section is devoted to methods that allow the construction of a new Group by selecting entities associated with other entities of the finite element model. For all these methods, the association is checked by inspection of the finite element model stored in the DataBase. These methods are therefore systematically defined in specialized versions of the “DataBase” class. For each supported solver, a description of these methods is given. (See Part III.)

I.1.3 “Result” methods

As explained in the introduction of this Chapter, the DataBase can be used to store Results. Internally, a mapping between keys and Results allows to associate Result objects to an identifier. Each key1 is characterized by three String objects corresponding respectively to the load case name, to the subcase name and to the Result type name.

I.1.3.1 Manipulation of Results

The class “Result” is described in Chapter I.4. This section describes the methods of the generic “DataBase” class that deal with “Result” objects. The “Result” methods are:

Methods devoted to the importation of Results from binary Results files are specific to the specific solver that produced the Results. These methods are described in Part III.

I.1.3.2 Enabling composite Results reading operations

Four singleton methods allow enabling or disabling partially or totally the reading of composite layered Results from finite element result files. These methods influence the behavior of methods defined in the “specialized” versions of the “DataBase” class. (See Part III.) The four methods are:

By default the reading of layered composite Results is enabled for all sub-layers. The disabling may help to reduce the size of Results stored in specialized DataBases. In fact, the reading of composite results is no longer mandatory as most composite results can be produced with the appropriate methods of the “CLA” classes (Part II).

I.1.4 Manipulation of abbreviations

When a Samcef banque is read into a DataBase, the abbreviations defined in the Samcef model are read as well and stored into the Samcef DataBase in a mapping of string objects. Five methods allow the manipulation of abbreviations stored in the DataBase:

1.

“clearAbbreviations” has no argument and clears all the abbreviations stored into the DataBase.

2.

“addAbbreviation” adds one abbreviation to the DataBase. The method has two String arguments: the key and the value.

3.

“addAbbreviations” adds a list of abbreviations to the DataBase. The method has one argument: A Hash object containing the correspondence between keys and values. Each pair is of course a pair of String objects.

4.

“NbrAbbreviations” attribute has no argument and returns the number of abbreviations stored in the DataBase.

5.

“getAbbreviation” returns the String value of one abbreviation. The method has one String argument: the key of the abbreviation.

6.

“checkAbbreviationExists” returns “true” if the abbreviation exists. The method has one String argument: the key of the abbreviation.

7.

“getAbbreviations” returns a Hash object containing all the abbreviations stored in the DataBase. This method has no argument.

Note that, even though no abbreviation is defined in other solver models, the abbreviation methods defined in DataBase class can also be used when working with any model. This is why the methods listed above are defined in generic “DataBase” class and not in “SamcefDb” class described in Chapter III.2.

I.1.5 Composite methods

The DataBase Class provides one method that returns a ClaDb object corresponding to the materials, plies and Laminates stored in the DataBase. This method is called “getClaDb” and has no argument. The units associated with this ClaDb object are the default units as defined in Table II.1.4. If the finite element model is defined in another unit system, it is the responsibility of the user to define correctly the units of the ClaDb database and of all its entities using the method “setUnitsAllEntities” of ClaDb class. (See section II.2.4.)

Another method corresponding to the calculation of Results related to laminate load response has been added. This method called “calcFiniteElementResponse” has the same arguments as the corresponding method defined in the “ClaLam” class. The method and the meaning of its arguments are described in section II.4.8. The method defined in “DataBase” class differs from the one defined in “ClaLam” class by the fact that the algorithm tries to retrieve the Laminate corresponding to the element to which Result values are attached. The information is found in the DataBase object. More precisely, The algorithm performs as follows:

Similarly, the method “calcFiniteElementCriteria” is defined, which has exactly the same arguments and outputs as the corresponding method of “ClaLam” class described in section II.4.8. The difference between the two methods resides in the fact that the method in DataBase class retrieves the ClaLam object corresponding to the element to which the tensorial values are attached.

Finally, a third method allows to retrieve laminate engineering properties in the format of Result objects. The method “calcFemLamProperties” has three arguments:

1.

A ClaDb object which is used for the calculations of the different laminate properties.

2.

A ResKeyList object that corresponds to the finite element entities for which values shall be inserted in Result object. Note that the produced Result object are non layered. (Only the ElemId and NodeId of the ResKeyList keys matter.)

3.

A Hash with String keys and values corresponding to the requests. The key corresponds to the name by which the returned Result shall be referred. The value corresponds to the laminate engineering property that is requested. Presently, possible values of this parameter are: “E_f_xx”, “E_f_yy”, “E_k0_xx”, “E_k0_yy”, “E_xx”, “E_yy”, “G_f_xy”, “G_k0_xy”, “G_xy”, “nu_f_xy”, “nu_f_yx”, “nu_k0_xy”, “nu_k0_yx”, “nu_xy”, “nu_yx”, “thickness”, “surfacicMass”, “averageDensity”.

The method returns a Hash with String keys and Result values.

An example of use of this method follows:

    ...
    compDb=db.getClaDb

    res=db.getResultCopy("COORD","coord","coordinates")
    rkl=res.extractRkl

    requests={}
    requests["res1"]="thickness"
    requests["res2"]="E_xx"
    requests["res3"]="E_yy"

    resList=db.calcFemLamProperties(compDb,rkl,requests)

    resList.each do |id,res|
        Util.printRes(STDOUT,id,res)
    end
    ...

For the different “finite element” methods listed above, the units considered for the returned “Result” objects are the units of the “ClaDb” object argument. This characteristic differs from the behavior of the corresponding methods in “ClaLam” class.

I.1.6 Iterators

The iterators of the generic DataBase class only are described here. The iterators of the specialized versions of the class are described in Part III.

I.1.7 General purpose methods

A few more methods with general purpose are defined:

These methods are defined in the generic “DataBase” class.

I.1.8 “Gmsh” methods

The “writeGmsh” method defined in generic “DataBase” class is used to create a Gmsh result file in which parts of the model and of the Results are saved for later visualization. The purpose of the method is to allow the user to visualize parts of the model and Results. An example of use of the method is as follows:

    db.writeGmsh("brol.gmsh",0,[[res,"stress","ElemCenters"],\
                                         [displ,"displ","Nodes"]],\
                                        [[skelGrp,"mesh slat"]],\
                                        [[skelGrp,"skel slat"]])

The method has six parameters:

1.

A string containing the name of the file in which the model and Results will be output.

2.

An integer corresponding to the id of a coordinate system in which the positions are located and in which the components of Result values are expressed. The coordinate system must be defined in the dataBase db and must be a rectangular one.

3.

An Array containing the Results to be stored in the Gmsh file. Each element of the Array is an Array of three elements:

4.

An Array containing the Meshes to be stored in the Gmsh file. Each element of the Array is an Array of two elements:

5.

An Array containing the parts of the model for which a “skeleton” shall be saved in the Gmsh file. (A skeleton is a representation of the mesh with only a few edges.)

6.

A logical parameter specifying whether a binary output is requested. If the parameter is “true” a binary output is done, otherwise, the output is an ASCII one. The parameter is optional and binary output is the default. A binary output is significantly faster than an ASCII one.

Parameters 3, 4 and 5 are optional. They can be a void Array or replaced by nil argument. All the last nil parameters may be omitted. Parameter 6 is optional too. If no pair of key-values is found for a Result to be printed. Nothing is output in the gmsh file.

It is the responsibility of the user to provide Results that associate values to a single valid key. Otherwise, an error message is issued and exception is thrown. In particular, as Results written in GMSH files are not layered, the user should be careful not to output multi-layered Results. The details in error message output are controlled by the debugging verbosity level. (See I.6.6.)

Note also that if the values that the user tries to output are not valid, a substitution is done: Infinite float values are replaced by MAXFLOAT value, NaN values are replaced by MINFLOAT value. (Of course it is advised to output Result objects with valid values.)

The “writeGmshMesh” method defined in generic “DataBase” class saves a Gmsh mesh file. The method has up to four arguments (last argument is optional):

1.

A String containing the name of the file in which the mesh is output.

2.

An integer argument corresponding to the coordinate system in which the nodes are expressed.

3.

A Group corresponding to the entities to be saved in the mesh file.

4.

An optional Boolean argument specifying whether the mesh is output in binary format. The default value of the argument is “true” and corresponds to a binary output.

An example of use follows:

        db.writeGmshMesh("brol.msh",0,skelGrp,false)

Chapter I.2
The “CoordSys” class

It may be practical to manipulate coordinate systems at post-processing level. Therefore, a “CoordSys” class devoted to the manipulation of coordinate systems is proposed. The methods defined in that class are described in sections I.2.2 and I.2.5. A list of the methods defined in “CoordSys” class is given in Table I.2.1.

Table I.2.1: The different methods that have been defined in “CoordSys” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) I.2.2 IV.2.4.5
initialize I.2.5
clone I.2.5
Definition
initWith3Points I.2.2.1IV.2.4.5
initWithOV1V2 I.2.2.2
initWithOV2V3 I.2.2.2
initWithOV3V1 I.2.2.2
initWithOV2V1 I.2.2.2
initWithOV3V2 I.2.2.2
initWithOV1V3 I.2.2.2
updateDefWrt0 I.2.2.2
Modifying point coordinates
changeCoordsA20I.2.3.1IV.2.4.5
changeCoords02BI.2.3.2IV.2.4.5
changeCoordsA2BI.2.3.3IV.2.4.5
Modifying vector or tensor components
changeCompsA20I.2.4.1IV.2.4.5
changeComps02B I.2.4.2IV.2.4.5
changeCompsA2BI.2.4.3IV.2.4.5
Printing
to_s I.2.5
Attributes
Id I.2.5

I.2.1 The CoordSys object

A CoordSys object corresponds to a coordinate system. CoordSys objects are generally created in a DataBase when a model is imported.

Besides the data corresponding to the definition of the coordinate system, the CoordSys object also contains a definition of the coordinate system with respect to the most basic coordinate system “0”. The corresponding member data are used by functions like the Result methods of modification of reference coordinate systems to perform the transformations of components (sections I.4.6.7 and I.4.6.8). Practically those functions work in two steps:

1.

The components of the Result object are expressed with respect to the basic coordinate system “0”.

2.

Then, the components are expressed with respect to the new coordinate system.

The definition of the corresponding member data is done by calling the method “updateDefWrt0” (section I.2.2.3).

I.2.2 Construction or manipulation functions

Besides the “new” class method that returns a new coordinate system initialized to the “0” structural coordinate system, several functions can be used to modify the CoordSys objects.

I.2.2.1 “initWith3Points” method

“initWith3Points” method is used to define a coordinate system with the coordinates of three points A, B and C. (See the definition of “CORD2C”, “CORD2R” and “CORD2S” in [Sof04b].) This function has 5 arguments:

The three vectors mentioned above are actually Arrays of three real values corresponding to the coordinates of points given in coordinate system identified by the integer argument.

Note that no check is made in a DataBase to ensure that the data are consistent. (For example, checking that the reference coordinate system exists.)

I.2.2.2 Six “initWithOViVj” methods

The six methods are “initWithOV1V2”, “initWithOV2V3”, “initWithOV3V1”, “initWithOV2V1”, “initWithOV3V2” and “initWithOV1V3”. They produce CoordSys objects defined by their origin and two direction vectors corresponding to vector ei and to the orientation of vector ej respectively.

The six arguments of these methods are:

Note that the orientation vector ej is not necessarily orthogonal to ei. If the vectors are not orthogonal, then i is a unit vector parallel to ei, and vector j is the unit vector perpendicular to i closest to ej. The last vector k of the coordinate system is a unit vector perpendicular to both i and j.

Here again, no check is made in a DataBase to ensure that the data are consistent. (For example, checking that the reference coordinate system exists.)

I.2.2.3 “updateDefWrt0” method

“updateDefWrt0” method updates the definition of a CoordSys object with respect to to “0” (most basic coordinate system). This function has one argument: the DataBase in which the information needed to build the definition with respect to 0 is found.

Note that if one works with several DataBases, the responsibility of managing the correspondence of coordinate systems and DataBases lies with the user.

I.2.3 Transformation of point coordinates

The “CoordSys” class defines three methods devoted to the transformation of a point coordinates from one coordinate system to another.

I.2.3.1 “changeCoordsA20” method

Method “changeCoordsA20” is used to calculate the coordinates of a point with respect to basic or “0” coordinate system:

The method is called as follows:

   coords0=csA.changeCoordsA20(coordsA)

I.2.3.2 “changeCoords02B” method

Method “changeCoords02B” is used to calculate the coordinates of a point with respect to a given coordinate system “B”:

The method is called as follows:

   coordsB=csB.changeCoords02B(coords0)

I.2.3.3 “changeCoordsA2B” method

Method “changeCoordsA2B” is used to calculate the coordinates of a point with respect to a given coordinate system “B”. The initial coordinate system is a given “A” coordinate system:

The method is called as follows:

   coordsB=csA.changeCoordsA2B(coordsA,csB)

I.2.4 Transformation of vector and tensor components

The “CoordSys” class defines three methods devoted to the transformation of a vector or tensor components from one coordinate system to another. These methods are similar to the methods used to transform point coordinates in section I.2.3 but with the following differences:

I.2.4.1 “changeCompsA20” method

Method “changeCompsA20” is used to calculate the components of a vector or tensor with respect to basic or “0” coordinate system:

The method is called as follows:

   vm0=csA.changeCompsA20(coordsA,vmA)

I.2.4.2 “changeComps02B” method

Method “changeComps02B” is used to calculate the components of a vector or tensor expressed in a given coordinate system “B”:

The method is called as follows:

   vmB=csB.changeComps02B(coords0,vm0)

I.2.4.3 “changeCompsA2B” method

Method “changeCompsA2B” is used to calculate the components of a vector or tensor expressed in a given coordinate system “B”:

The method is called as follows:

   vmB=csA.changeCoordsA2B(coordsA,vmA,csB)

I.2.5 Other methods

The following methods do not fit in any of the categories listed above.

I.2.5.1 “initialize” method

Method “initialize” initializes or clears a CoordSys object. After initializing, the definition corresponds to the “0” structural coordinate system.

I.2.5.2 “clone” method

“clone” method returns a copy of the CoordSys object to which it is applied.

I.2.5.3 “to_s” method

“to_s” method is used for printing the CoordSys object.

I.2.5.4 “Id” attribute

“Id” integer attribute corresponds to the integer identifier of the CoordSys object. Both a “setter” and “getter” attribute are defined (“Id=” and “Id” methods respectively).

Chapter I.3
The “Group” class

The “Group” corresponds to the Patran notion of group. Group objects can be stored in a DataBase object, retrieved from it and manipulated outside the DataBase. The manipulation methods outside the DataBase class are described here.

A list of the methods defined in “Group” class is given in Table I.3.1.

Table I.3.1: The different methods that have been defined in “Group” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) I.3.2IV.2.5.1
initialize I.3.7
clone I.3.7
Identification (attributes)
Name= I.3.7IV.2.2.4
Name I.3.7
Manipulation of entities
getEntitiesByType I.3.3IV.2.2.3
getNbrEntities I.3.3
getNbrEntitiesByType I.3.3IV.2.2.3
setEntities I.3.3IV.2.5.1
setEntitiesByType I.3.3
addEntities I.3.3
addEntitiesByType I.3.3
removeEntities I.3.3
removeEntitiesByType I.3.3
clearAllEntitiesByTypeI.3.3
matchWithDbEntities I.3.3IV.2.5.1
importEntitiesByType I.3.3
containsEntity I.3.3
Operators
+ I.3.4IV.2.5.1
- I.3.4
* I.3.4IV.2.2.5
/ I.3.4
BLOBs for SQL
toBlob I.3.5
fromBlob I.3.5
Iterators
each_element I.3.6
each_rbe I.3.6
each_node I.3.6IV.2.2.3
each_coordsys I.3.6
Other methods
to_s I.3.7
Attribute readers
NbrElements I.3.7
NbrNodes I.3.7
NbrRbes I.3.7
NbrCoordSys I.3.7

I.3.1 The concept of “Group”

A Group is characterized by its name (a String object) and the entities it contains. Four types of entities can be contained in a FeResPost Group: coordinate systems, nodes, elements and rigid body elements (RBEs). At C++ level, for each type of entity, the class Group manages a set of integers corresponding to the identifiers of the entities.

Part of the operations dealing with Groups are done by methods defined in DataBase class. The methods of DataBase specially devoted to operations mainly related to Groups are described in section I.1.2.

I.3.2 Creation of a Group object

The singleton method “new” is used to create Group objects.

I.3.3 Manipulation of entities stored in a Group

The class “Group” provides a large choice of methods devoted to the manipulation of the list of entities in its storage. A distinction is made between operations that modify the content of a Group, and operations that allow inspection of this content.

The modification of the Group’s content can be done by calls to the following methods:

Four methods devoted to inspecting the Group content without modifying it are also defined:

A FeResPost Group cannot contain Nastran MPCs.

I.3.4 Group operators

Eight such operators have been defined. The meaning and behavior of the four elementary dyadic operations are first explained below.

I.3.5 “BLOBs”

Group objects can be saved in SQL database as “BLOB” objects.

Two methods are defined in Group class to convert object to and from Blobs:

I.3.6 Iterators of Group class

The class “Group” provides four iterators:

These iterators iterate on the corresponding entities stored in the Group object. They produce Integer values that are passed to the block.

I.3.7 Other methods

The following methods do not fit in any of the categories listed above:

The “Name” and “Name=” methods correspond to the “Name” attribute.

Chapter I.4
The “Result” class

The “Result” class is devoted to the manipulation of finite element Results. Examples of Results are stress tensor on volumetric or surface elements, displacements, grid point forces,... The ruby class “Result” is a wrapping around the C++ class “Result”.

Results can be read from various solver binary files. See Part III for more information.

The “Result” class allows the storage and manipulation of Real as well as Complex values. Note however that several of the methods of Result class do not allow the manipulation of Complex Results. Therefore, indications are inserted here and there in this Chapter to provide information about the “Complex capabilities” of the different methods.

An important note: Even though the results can be imported into a DataBase, this does not mean that the manipulation of the results is correct. Indeed, all manipulation that involve transformation of coordinate systems can be incorrect because geometric non-linearities are not taken into account. Methods that can be affected by this limitation are for example: “modifyRefCoordSys”, “modifyPositionRefCoordSys” and “calcResultingFM”.

A list of the methods defined in “Result” class is given in Table I.4.1.

Table I.4.1: The different methods that have been defined in “Result” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) I.4.14 IV.2.4.6
initialize I.4.14
clone I.4.14 IV.2.4.6
cloneNoValues I.4.14
Manipulation of data
Name= I.4.6.1
Name I.4.6.1
clearData I.4.6.1
getData I.4.10 IV.2.4.2
Size I.4.14 IV.2.4.1
Format= I.4.6.1
Format I.4.6.1
TensorOrder= I.4.6.1
TensorOrder I.4.6.1
setIntId I.4.6.1
getIntId I.4.6.1
setRealId I.4.6.1
getRealId I.4.6.1
insert I.4.6.1
assembleTensorFrom3Vectors (s)I.4.1.5 IV.2.14
insertRklVals I.4.6.1
insertResultValues I.4.6.1
removeKeysAndValues I.4.6.1
setComponent I.4.6.1
setRefCoordSys I.4.6.2
renumberLayers I.4.6.3
renumberSubLayers I.4.6.4
removeLayers I.4.6.5
removeSubLayers I.4.6.6
modifyRefCoordSys I.4.6.7 IV.2.4.5
modifyPositionRefCoordSys I.4.6.8 IV.2.5.2
directRotation (s) I.4.6.10 IV.2.14
inverseRotation (s) I.4.6.10 IV.2.14
setToCombili I.4.6.9
setToCombiliPerComponent I.4.6.9
Extraction methods
extractResultOnEntities I.4.3.1
extractResultOnLayers I.4.3.2
extractResultOnSubLayers I.4.3.3
extractResultOnRkl I.4.3.4 IV.2.4.2
extractResultOnResultKeys I.4.3.5
extractResultOnRange I.4.3.6
extractResultForNbrVals I.4.3.7
extractResultMin I.4.3.8
extractResultMax I.4.3.9 IV.2.4.2
extractRklOnRange I.4.3.10
extractRklForNbrVals I.4.3.11
extractRklMin I.4.3.12
extractRklMax I.4.3.13
extractRkl I.4.3.14 IV.2.4.2
extractLayers I.4.3.18
extractSubLayers I.4.3.19
extractGroup I.4.3.17
extractGroupOnRange I.4.3.15
extractGroupForNbrVals I.4.3.16
Derivation methods
deriveScalToScal I.4.4.1 IV.2.4.2
deriveScalPerComponent I.4.4.2 IV.2.4.2
deriveVectorToOneScal I.4.4.3 IV.2.5.4
deriveVectorToTwoScald I.4.4.4
deriveVectorToVector I.4.4.5
deriveVectorToTensor I.4.4.6
deriveTensorToOneScal I.4.4.7
deriveTensorToTwoScals I.4.4.8
deriveTensorToThreeScals I.4.4.9 IV.2.4.2
eigenQR I.4.4.10 IV.2.4.2
deriveDyadic I.4.5
deriveByRemapping I.4.4.11
Global Force and Moment
calcResultingFM (s) I.4.8 IV.2.5.3
Operators
+ I.4.7.1
- I.4.7.2
* I.4.7.3 IV.2.5.2
/ I.4.7.4
** I.4.7.5
BLOBs for SQL
toBlob I.4.11 IV.2.6,
fromBlob I.4.11
Iterators
each I.4.12 IV.2.4.4
each_key I.4.12 IV.2.4.5
each_values I.4.12 IV.2.4.5
Complex Results manipulation
set2RI I.4.9.1 IV.2.4.6
set2MP I.4.9.1 IV.2.4.6
conjugate I.4.9.2
getR I.4.9.4 IV.2.4.6
getM I.4.9.4 IV.2.4.6
getI I.4.9.4 IV.2.4.6
getP I.4.9.4 IV.2.4.6
rotateBy I.4.9.3
assembleComplex I.4.9.5 IV.2.4.6
A few singleton methods
layerStr2Int (s) I.4.13
layerInt2Str (s) I.4.13
subLayerStr2Int (s) I.4.13
subLayerInt2Str (s) I.4.13
Attributes
Name I.4.6.1
Other methods
to_s I.4.14
Attributes
Name I.4.6.1
Size I.4.14 (read only)
Format I.4.6.1
TensorOrder I.4.6.1

I.4.1 The concept of “Result”

Basically, a Result may be considered as a mapping between “keys” and “values”. These two concepts are discussed in sections I.4.1.1 and I.4.1.2 respectively.

Otherwise several member data of Result objects can be accessed at ruby level. This is the case for Result name, integer and real identifiers. Those are discussed in section I.4.1.3.

I.4.1.1 “Keys”

The “keys” of Results correspond to the entities to which “values” are associated. For example, a key may be:

So, at C++ level, each key is characterized by four integers:

At ruby level, one can work with either the C++ integer ids, or their String counterparts. The correspondence between Strings and integers are given in Tables I.4.2, I.4.3, I.4.4 and I.4.5. The data given in these Tables can be completed by additional data specific to the different supported solvers. (See Part III for more information.)

In Table I.4.4, the last layer IDs cannot be assigned to Result keys. The entries correspond to groups of layers and are used to perform extraction operations:


Table I.4.2: Correspondence between element strings and their integer ids.
No element association
"NONE" -1
For Results associated with elements
"elem 1" 1
"elem 2" 2
"elem 3" 3
"elem ..." ...


Table I.4.3: Correspondence between special nodes for element Results and their integer ids.
No node association
"NONE" -999
For Results associated with nodes
"node 1" 1
"node 2" 2
"node 3" 3
"node ..." ...


Table I.4.4: Correspondence between Result layer names and their integer ids.
For unlayered Results
NONE
-999
Undefined layer
UNDEF
-300
For stress recovery in bars and beams
"Point A" -201
"Point B" -202
"Point C" -203
"Point D" -204
"Point E" -205
"Point F" -206
For 2D elements
"Z0"1 -100
"Z1" -101
"Z2" -102
For Results in laminates (positive layers)
"layer 1" 1
"layer 2" 2
"layer 3" 3
"layer ..." ...
Group of layers for extraction operations
"Beam Points" -2001
"Shell Layers" -2002
"All Plies" -2003
"All Layers" -2004


Table I.4.5: Correspondence between Result sub-layer names and their integer ids. ("All Sub-Layers" is used for extractions only.)
"NONE" 0
"All Sub-Layers" 50
"Bottom" 101
"Mid" 102
"Top" 103

Note that the notion of “key” is also closely related to the “ResKeyList” ruby class which is simply a list of key objects (see Chapter I.5).

I.4.1.2 “Values”

The values of Result are characterized by an integer value (32 bits integer) and one or several real values. The integer value corresponds to the coordinate system into which the components are expressed:

Obviously, for several types of coordinate system, the values must be attached to an element to make sense. This is the case for “elemIJK”, “plyCS”, “matCS”, “elemCS”,...

The real values correspond to the components:

Note that the name of the components given above matter, as they may be used to extract a single component out of a vectorial or tensorial Result. For Complex Result, the numbers of components mentioned above is multiplied by two. They are presented in the following order:

The components are stored in single precision real values (float coded on 32 bits). This means that there is no advantage in using double precision real values in your programming as far as the manipulation of results is concerned.

I.4.1.3 Identification of Result objects

Besides the mapping from key to values, the Result objects contain information that allows their identification. The identification information is:

The methods used to access these member data are described in section I.4.6.1.

I.4.1.4 Other characteristics

A Result object is also characterized by two other integer values:

Methods used to manipulate these data are described in section I.4.6.1. These two integers are attributes of the class.

I.4.1.5 Tensorial Results, symmetric or non-symmetric

Most Tensorial results manipulated with FeResPost are symmetric. In a few cases, non-symmetric tensors can be useful. This is for example the case when an orthogonal tensor corresponding to a rotation in space is used to transform vectorial or tensorial components. (See section X.B.6.) In fact, orthogonal rotation tensors are so far the only application we have in mind for the non-symmetric tensors available in FeResPost. When using these tensors, one must consider that:

“assembleTensorFrom3Vectors” singleton method in “Result” class is specific to the construction of Non-symmetric type of Results. This method has three vectorial Result arguments. The key-value pairs of the three Result arguments must match.

I.4.2 FeResPost Results’ characteristics

When Results are read from a Result output file produced by a solver (Part III), the information found in these Result files are used to produce Results with characteristics that are defined according to FeResPost conventions. These characteristics are related to Result naming conventions, Result tensor type, sign conventions, layer associations...

The Nastran solver is considered as the reference for FeResPost solver support. Therefore, the naming conventions and other characteristics defined in section III.1.2 are considered as the reference (default) FeResPost Result’s characteristics.

Note also that the subcase names associated to Nastran Results read from XDB, OP2 or HDF files are also considered as the reference for other solvers.

I.4.3 Extraction methods

The class “Result” defines several methods allowing the construction of a new Result object, or of a “ResKeyList” object from a previously existing Result by an appropriate selection on the keys. The extraction methods defined in class Result are defined in the following sections.

I.4.3.1 “extractResultOnEntities” method

“extractResultOnEntities” method is used to extract a sub-set of keys and values from an existing Result object. The method returns the newly created Result object. The method has up to four arguments:

1.

The “Method” argument is a String object specifying the algorithm to be used to select the keys and values to be inserted in the new Result object. Possible values of this argument are provided in Table I.4.6.

2.

The “Target” argument is a Group containing the elements and/or nodes used by some of the algorithms described above to select sub-sets of Results.

3.

The “LayersList” argument is an Array containing the list of layers on which the pairs of key and value must be extracted. If the Array is void, then data corresponding to all layers are extracted. If the Array is not void, the elements must be String or integer objects

4.

The “SubLayersList” argument is an Array containing the list of sub-layers on which the pairs of key and value must be extracted. If the Array is void, then data corresponding to all sub-layers are extracted. If the Array is not void, the elements must be String or integer objects

The two last arguments are optional. Note that the “Method” argument described above is the same as the “Method” argument of the DataBase member method “getResultCopy” described in section I.1.3. Please refer to that part of the manual for more information on valid extraction data.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.


Table I.4.6: The different Result extraction methods.
“Elements” All the values associated with the elements of Group “Target” are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. This means that the new Result contains both values at center of element and at corners.
“ElemCenters” All the values associated with the elements of Group “Target” but not associated to any node are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. This means that the extraction returns only values at center of the elements.
“ElemCorners” All the values associated with the elements of Group “Target” and associated to any node are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. The extraction returns only values at corner of the elements. Note that the list of nodes of the “Target” Group is irrelevant for this extraction operation.
“Nodes” All the values associated with the nodes of Group “Target” are inserted in the values of the returned Result object.
“NodesOnly” All the values associated with the nodes of Group “Target” but associated to no elements are inserted in the values of the returned Result object.
“ElemNodes” All the values associated with the elements of Group “Target” AND to the nodes of the same Group are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. This means that the new Result contains only values at corners of elements.
“MPCs” All the values associated with the MPCs (RBEs) of Group “Target” are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. (This extraction method has been added to deal with Grid Point Forces MPC Forces or Moments Results when the “RIGID=LAGR” option is used.)
“MPCNodes” All the values associated with the MPCs (RBEs) of Group “Target” AND to the nodes of the same Group are inserted in the values of the returned Result object. This means that the new Result contains only values at corners of elements. (This extraction method has been added to deal with Grid Point Forces MPC Forces or Moments Results when the “RIGID=LAGR” option is used.)

I.4.3.2 “extractResultOnLayers” method

“extractResultOnLayers” method is used to extract a sub-set of keys and values from an existing Result object. The method returns the newly created Result object. The method has one “LayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of layers on which the pairs of key and value must be extracted. The elements of the Array argument are integers or String values.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.3 “extractResultOnSubLayers” method

“extractResultOnSubLayers” method is used to extract a sub-set of keys and values from an existing Result object. The method returns the newly created Result object. The method has one “SubLayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of sub-layers on which the pairs of key and value must be extracted. The elements of the Array argument are integers or String values.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.4 “extractResultOnRkl” method

“extractResultOnRkl” method returns a Result object built by extraction of the values corresponding to the keys contained in the ResKeyList “Target” argument.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.5 “extractResultOnResultKeys” method

“extractResultOnResultKeys” method returns a Result object built by extraction of the values corresponding to the keys contained in the Result “Target” argument. (This method is very similar to “extractResultOnRkl” method, except that the target is given by a Result argument.)

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.6 “extractResultOnRange” method

“extractResultOnRange” method returns a Result object built by extraction of the values selected by specifying a range. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only as the range is specified by one or two Real values. The arguments of the method are:

1.

The “Method” String argument specifies the extraction algorithm that is used. Four values are possible:

2.

The “LowerBound” argument is a real value specifying the lower bound of the range. For some algorithms, this value may be unused and irrelevant.

3.

The “UpperBound” argument is a real value specifying the upper bound of the range. For some algorithms, this value may be unused and irrelevant.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.7 “extractResultForNbrVals” method

“extractResultForNbrVals” method returns a Result object built by extraction of maximum “NbrVals” values. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only and has two arguments:

1.

The “Method” String argument specifies the extraction algorithm that is used. Two values are possible:

2.

“NbrVals” is an integer argument corresponding to the number of values to be kept.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.8 “extractResultMin” method

“extractResultMin” method returns a Result object built by extraction of the minimum value and corresponding key. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.9 “extractResultMax” method

“extractResultMax” method returns a Result object built by extraction of the maximum value and corresponding key. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.10 “extractRklOnRange” method

“extractRklOnRange” method works exactly as method “extractResultOnRange” described in section I.4.3.6 but returns a ResKeyList object instead of a Result object. This means that one returns only a list of keys, but not the associated values.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.11 “extractRklForNbrVals” method

“extractRklForNbrVals” method works exactly as method “extractResultForNbrVals” described in section I.4.3.7 but returns a ResKeyList object instead of a Result object. This means that one returns only a list of keys, but not the associated values.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.12 “extractRklMin” method

“extractRklMin” method returns a ResKeyList object built by extraction of the key corresponding to the minimum value. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.13 “extractRklMax” method

“extractRklMax” method returns a ResKeyList object built by extraction of the key corresponding to the maximum value. This method can be applied to scalar Result objects only.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.14 “extractRkl” method

“extractRkl” method returns a ResKeyList object built by extraction of all the keys of the Result object to which the method is applied.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.15 “extractGroupOnRange” method

“extractGroupOnRange” method works exactly as method “extractResultOnRange” described in section I.4.3.6 but returns a Group object instead of a Result object. The Group contains the element and node entities for which values in the specified range have been found.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.16 “extractGroupForNbrVals” method

“extractGroupForNbrVals” method works exactly as method “extractResultForNbrVals” described in section I.4.3.7 but returns a Group object instead of a Result object. The Group contains the element and node entities for which values in the specified range have been found.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.3.17 “extractGroup” method

“extractGroup” method returns a Group object containing the elements and nodes that are referenced in the Result object. This method has no argument.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.18 “extractLayers” method

“extractLayers” method returns an Array of String and integers corresponding to the layers that are referenced in the Result object. This method has no argument.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.3.19 “extractSubLayers” method

“extractSubLayers” method returns an Array of String and integers corresponding to the sub-layers that are referenced in the Result object. This method has no argument.

This method works for Real as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.4 Derivation monadic methods

All the methods presented in this section are devoted to the production of new results by performing operations on the values of the Result object to which they are applied. Each method produces Results with as many pairs “key-values” as in the Result object to which it is applied, but the number of components associated with each key may be different from the original number of components. Indeed, the original Result and derived Result have not necessarily a same tensor order.

Most of the methods presented below have only one argument: a Method String object corresponding to the algorithm of derivation. The use of the methods defined below leads sometimes to very heavy notations for simple or very often used operations. Therefore, short-cuts to some methods have been defined in the “Post” module (Chapter I.6).

I.4.4.1 “deriveScalToScal” method

“deriveScalToScal” method builds a new Result object by performing an operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. Both Result objects correspond to scalar values. The Possible values of the “Method” argument are:

The method works for Real Results as well as Complex Results. However, some of the methods are not available for Complex Results: “asin”, “acos”, “atan” and “sgn” can be used with Real Results only. Note that when used with a Complex Result object, the method returns a Complex Result object. There is however one exception to this rule: the “abs” derivation method returns a Real Result.

I.4.4.2 “deriveScalPerComponent” method

“deriveScalPerComponent” method builds a new Result object by performing a scalar operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. The Result object can be scalar, vectorial or tensorial. In case, of vectorial or tensorial Result, the scalar operation is performed component-per-component, regardless of the coordinate system in which the values are expressed. The Possible values of the “Method” argument are the same as for deriveScalToScal method. The method works for Real Results only. (Complex Results are not accepted and an exception is raised.)

I.4.4.3 “deriveVectorToOneScal” method

“deriveVectorToOneScal” method builds a new Result object by performing an operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. The Result object to which the method is applied must be vectorial. The created Result object is scalar. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

This method works for Real Results as well as for Complex Results. When applied to a Complex Result object, the method works as follows:

I.4.4.4 “deriveVectorToTwoScals” method

“deriveVectorToTwoScals” method returns an Array of two Result objects derived from the vectorial Result object on which the method is applied. The returned Results are scalar. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

In each case, the first scalar Result corresponds to the axial component along the selected axis, and the second scalar Result corresponds to the transverse shear magnitude (i.e. the Euclidean norm of the two remaining components). This method is intended for separating axial and shear contributions in connection or beam load Results.

This method works for Real Results only.

I.4.4.5 “deriveVectorToVector” method

“deriveVectorToVector” method builds a new Result object by performing an operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. The Result object to which the method is applied must be vectorial. The created Result object is vectorial too. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

This method works for Real Results as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.4.6 “deriveVectorToTensor” method

“deriveVectorToTensor” method builds a new Result object by performing an operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. The Result object to which the method is applied must be vectorial. The created Result object is tensorial too. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

This method works for Real Results as well as for Complex Results.

I.4.4.7 “deriveTensorToOneScal” method

“deriveTensorToOneScal” method builds a new Result object by performing an operation on all the values of the Result object to which it is applied. The Result object to which the method is applied must be tensorial. The created Result object is scalar. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

All the methods listed above work for Real Tensorial Results. For Complex Results, only the methods of Component extractions can be used.

All the derivation methods listed above are available for symmetric tensors (tensorOrder=2). On the other hand, several methods are not available for non-symmetric tensors (tensorOrder=-2). The methods available for the non-symmetric tensors are:

I.4.4.8 “deriveTensorToTwoScals” method

“deriveTensorToTwoScals” method returns an Array of two Result objects derived from the tensorial Result object on which the method is applied. The returned Results are scalar. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

These methods work for Real Results and symmetric tensors only.

I.4.4.9 “deriveTensorToThreeScals” method

“deriveTensorToThreeScals” method returns an Array of three Result objects derived from the tensorial Result object on which the method is applied. The returned Results are scalar. Possible values of the “Method” String argument are:

This method works for Real Results and symmetric tensors only.

I.4.4.10 “eigenQR” method

“eigenQR” method returns an Array of six Result objects derived from the tensorial Result object on which the method is applied. The method has no argument and the six Results returned correspond to:

1.

The first eigen-value.

2.

The first eigen-vector.

3.

The second eigen-value.

4.

The second eigen-vector.

5.

The third eigen-value.

6.

The third eigen-vector.

Eigen-values and vectors are sorted by order of increasing eigen-values. This method works for Real Results and symmetric tensors only.

I.4.4.11 “deriveByRemapping” method

“deriveByRemapping” method returns a Result object obtained by remapping the values of the Result object to which the method is applied. This method takes three parameters:

1.

“FromTo”: a String object specifying the correspondence between the keys of the old Result object and the keys of the new Result object. Eleven different values of the “FromTo” argument are allowed:

The different “fromTo” parameters are summarized in Table I.4.7. Note that a distinction is made between the “CornerNodes” (Result keys associated with elements and nodes at corner of elements) and the “ElemsAndNodes” (Result keys associated with elements and nodes of elements but not necessarily at their corners).

2.

“Method”: a String object used to specify the way values associated to different keys are merged into a single value (if this happens). An example of situation in which the case may occur is for example when one uses the “NodesToCenters” option and that the values of several nodes are merged into the value of a single element. Five values of “Method” argument are allowed:

Note that when vectorial or tensorial Results are merged (“sum” or “average” options, their respective coordinate systems must be identical. Otherwise an error message is issued.

3.

“DB”: a DataBase object used by the method to recover the association of node and elements. This association is often needed to perform the remapping.

The “deriveByRemapping” method can be used with Real as well as Complex Results. However, for Complex Results, there are some restrictions on the type of “Method” argument for merging values: the “min” and “max” values are not accepted for Complex Results.


Table I.4.7: The different “fromTo” arguments for “derivebyRemapping” method.
“fromTo” argument Source target Target key types
“CentersToCorners” Element Centers Element Corners EN**
“CentersToNodes” Element Centers Nodes of Elements -N**
“NodesToCenters” Nodes Element Centers E-**
“NodesToCorners” Nodes Element corners EN**
“CornersToCenters” Element Corners Element Centers E-**
“CornersToNodes” Element Corners Nodes of Elements -N**
“MergeLayers” Layers - EN-*
“MergeLayersKeepId” Layers Layers EN**
“MergeSubLayers” Sub-layers - EN*-
“MergeSubLayersKeepId” Sub-layers Sub-layers EN**
“MergeAll” All keys - —-
“CentersToElemsAndNodes”Element Centers Element Nodes EN**
“CornersToElemsAndNodes”Element Corners Element Nodes EN**
“CentersToCornerNodes” Element CentersElement Corner Nodes -N**
“ElemsAndNodesToCenters” Element Nodes Element Centers -N**
“ElemsAndNodesToNodes” Element Nodes Nodes -N**
“NodesToElemsAndNodes” Nodes Element Nodes EN**

I.4.5 Dyadic derivation method

Presently, only one such method is defined: the “deriveDyadic” method. This method returns a new Result object corresponding to the dyadic derivation. This method has two arguments:

Possible values for the “Method” argument are:

Note that several of the methods above for dyadic derivation have corresponding short-cuts in the “Post” module.

The different methods listed above are available for real Results. For Complex Results, only the methods “vectProduct”, “sumVectProduct”, “merge”, “mergeKeepFirst” and “mergeKeepLast” can be used. Of course, if the ”Second” argument is a Real object, the “deriveDyadic” method cannot be invoked on a Complex Result object.

Note also that all the dyadic derivation methods discussed here are invoked on a Result object which is the first argument. Dyadic derivation methods that allow to replace the first argument by a real or vector object are also defined in the Post module. (See section I.6.3.)

I.4.6 Methods modifying the object

The following methods modify the Result object to which they are applied.

I.4.6.1 Access to and modification of Result data

Each Result object is also characterized by two integer and two real identifiers. Several methods allow retrieval or modification of the Result data.

For the four last methods listed above, the value of index argument can be 0 or 1. Note that several of the methods listed above correspond to the “Name”, “Format” and “TensorOrder” attributes.

All these methods can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results.

I.4.6.2 “setRefCoordSys”

“setRefCoordSys” is used to attribute a reference coordinate system to the values of a Result. The method has one argument that can have two types:

Note that only the coordinate system ids of the pairs of key and values are modified. The components of the vectorial or tensorial values are left unchanged.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.3 “renumberLayers”

“renumberLayers” is a method used to renumber the layer integer ids of Result keys. The method has one Hash argument corresponding to the pairs of “old integers IDs” and “new integer IDs”.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.4 “renumberSubLayers”

“renumberSubLayers” is a method used to renumber the sub-layer integer ids of Result keys. The method has one Hash argument corresponding to the pairs of “old integers IDs” and “new integer IDs”.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.5 “removeLayers”

“removeLayers” is a method used to remove pairs of key and values selected on the basis of the layer ID of the key. The method has one “LayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of layers for which the pairs of key and value must be removed. The elements of the Array argument are integer or String values.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.6 “removeSubLayers”

“removeSubLayers” is a method used to remove pairs of key and values selected on the basis of the layer ID of the key. The method has one “SubLayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of sub-layers for which the pairs of key and value must be removed. The elements of the Array argument are integer or String values.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.7 “modifyRefCoordSys”

“modifyRefCoordSys” is used to modify the reference coordinate system with respect to which the components of a vectorial or a tensorial Result are applied. If the Result is vectorial it can represent any vectorial quantities except the coordinates. For coordinate vectorial Result, the method “modifyPositionRefCoordSys” must be used. This method has no effect on scalar Results.

The methods returns nil (no new Result object is created) and takes two, three or five arguments:

1.

A DataBase object.

2.

An object corresponding to the definition of the coordinate system to which one switches. This object may have different types:

(a)

A String object with one of the following values: “elemCS”, “nodeCS”, “matCS”, “plyCS”, “elemIJK”, “lamCS”. All those coordinate systems are local to an element or to a node.

More information about the particularities of “matCS”, “plyCS” and “lamCS” coordinate system transformations is given in section X.B.5.

(b)

The argument may be a CoordSys object. Then it must be defined with respect to a coordinate system defined in the DataBase argument.

(c)

The argument may also be an integer larger than or equal to 0. Then the coordinate system must be defined in the DataBase.

3.

The third argument is the direction vector used to build the projected coordinate system on surfacic elements. The vector is given by an Array of three real objects, and is expressed with respect to to the coordinate system given in second argument. If one does not wish to transform into a projected coordinate system, then the third argument must be omitted or nil. (However if arguments 4 and 5 are provided, the third argument cannot be omitted.)

4.

An object corresponding to the definition of the coordinate system from which one switches. This object may have the same values as the second argument.

5.

The last argument is a direction vector used to build the projected coordinate system on surfacic elements. The vector is given by an Array of three real objects, and is expressed with respect to to the coordinate system given in second argument. If one does not wish to transform into a projected coordinate system, then the third argument must be nil.

The reason why a DataBase object is given as argument is that for curvilinear coordinate systems, much information about the location of Result value is necessary to perform a correct transformation of the components. Also, all coordinate systems are stored in the DataBase object. Therefore, it is very important that the programmer keeps in mind that all Results are related to a DataBase.

Note that some coordinate system transformations of vectorial or tensorial Results cannot be reversed. For example, once a Result is expressed in a projected coordinate system, the original coordinate system cannot be recovered. Also, if a conversion has been done in a coordinate system that is not defined in the DataBase, the conversion is impossible. After transformation, the coordinate system referenced in Result values is altered (section I.4.1.2).

If arguments 4 and 5 are provided, the method assumes that the values are expressed in that coordinate system definition. This means that the CsId found in each pair “key-values” pair of the Result object is totally disregarded. The use of arguments 4 and 5 may allow the modification of Results expressed in a user or projected coordinate system.

More information on the transformation of coordinate systems is given in section X.B.4.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.8 “modifyPositionRefCoordSys” method

“modifyPositionRefCoordSys” method is used to modify the reference coordinate system with respect to which vectorial Results corresponding to coordinates are expressed. The Results must be vectorial.

The method returns nil (no new Result object is created) and takes two arguments:

1.

A DataBase object.

2.

An integer object corresponding to the index of the coordinate system to which one switches. This index must be larger than or equal to 0 and defined in the DataBase argument. One can also provide a CoordSys object instead of the integer argument.

For the reason of the presence of the DataBase argument, see section I.4.6.7.

This method can be used with real Results only and returns the modified “Result” object.

I.4.6.9 Linear combination of Results

“setToCombili” method fills the values of the Result object on which the method is called with the linear combination of the elementary Results given as arguments. The arguments are defined as follows:

1.

An Array of Real values containing the factors of the linear combination.

2.

An Array containing the elementary Results.

The lengths of the two Array arguments must match. Also the type of elementary Results (scalar, vectorial or tensorial) must be identical and the coordinate systems must be the same for each key.

This method can be used with Real Results as well as with Complex Results. Also, the real factors of the linear combination can be replaced by Complex values. However, all the elements of the Array must be of the same type (Real or Complex).

The “setToCombili” method returns the modified “Result” object.

“setToCombiliPerComponent” method fills the values of the Result object on which the method is called with the linear combination of the elementary Results given as arguments. The difference with “setToCombili” method is that the factors of the linear combination are given component-per-component. Practically, the “factors” argument is a 2D Array (Array of Arrays):

I.4.6.10 Rotations of vectorial and tensorial Results

Two singleton methods can be used to rotate tensorial or vectorial Results considering a non-symmetric tensor Result:

More precise information about the rotations is given in section X.B.6. In both cases, it is the responsibility of the user to verify that Q is orthogonal. (No check done by FeResPost.) R can be scalar, vectorial or tensorial. (Scalar Results are not modified by the method.)

Tensorial Result Q can be replaced by a vectorial Result r. Then, the methods convert this vectorial Result into an orthogonal rotation tensor R according to Rodrigue’s rotation formula presented in section X.B.7. Note however that according to the expressions in sections X.B.6 and X.B.7, R = QT . However, the rotation can easily be inverted using argument -r instead of r. (One can also switch “directRotation” and “inverseRotation”, of course.)

I.4.7 Operators

Five elementary operators on Result objects have been defined. Also, their corresponding assignment method have been defined. Unless otherwise specified, in the examples given below, x, y and z are Result objects. One of the two operands can be replaced by a “constant” value in most cases, but at least one of the operands must be a Result object:

By “constant” value, one means a scalar real value, a scalar complex value, a real vector (Array of three real values), a complex vector (Array of three complex elements), or a real matrix (Array of 3 × 3 real values). These arguments can be used in addition, subtraction and multiplication operations. Note that no constant complex matrix is supported.

For the division operation, y can be replaced by a scalar real or complex argument, but not by a vector or a matrix. On the other hand, x can be replaced by constant scalar, vectorial or matrix, real or complex (except for the matrix).

For the exponentiation operator, the two Results must be scalar. Either x or y can be replaced by a constant real value.

One can make a few general remarks:

The support for Complex Result operators depends on the type of dyadic operation. See the sub-sections below for more information.

I.4.7.1 Addition operator

The addition operator can be used as follows:

z = x + y.

In the previous expression, the Results x and y must have the same tensorial order. Of course, the returned z object is also of the same tensor order as x and y.

I.4.7.2 Subtraction operator

The subtraction operator can be used as follows:

z = x - y.

In the previous expression, the Results x and y must have the same tensorial order. Of course, the returned z object is also of the same tensor order as x and y.

I.4.7.3 Multiplication operator

The multiplication operator can be used as follows:

z = x * y.

The meaning of this operation depends on the tensorial orders of x and y. The various possibilities are summarized in Table I.4.8 with a short explanation of the meaning of the operation when deemed necessary.


Table I.4.8: Possible arguments of the Result multiplication operator, returned value, and meaning of the operation.
zxy meaning
S S S —
V S V —
M S M —
V V S —
S V V scalar product of two vectors
V V M left multiplication of a matrix by a vector
M M S —
V M V right multiplication of a matrix by a vector

I.4.7.4 Division operator

The division operator can be used as follows:

z = x∕y.

In the last expression x can have any tensorial order. The tensorial order of the returned Result z is identical to the tensorial order of x. The argument y can be either a scalar Result object, or a real value.

Complex Results are partially supported by the division operator. The limitations of the operator for complex arguments are the same as for the multiplication operator.

I.4.7.5 Exponent operator

The exponentiation operator can be used as follows:

z = x **y.

In the last expression x must be a scalar Result. The tensorial order of the returned Result z is identical to the tensorial order of x. The argument y can be either a scalar Result object, or a real value. Complex Results cannot be arguments to this operator. The real values of first Result argument must also be positive.

The three following expressions are equivalent:

            z=x**y
            z=Post.pow(x,y)
            z=Post.opPow(x,y)

I.4.8 “calcResultingFM” method

“calcResultingFM” method is a class method used to estimate the total force and moment corresponding to a distribution of forces and moments on several points. The method has between 4 and 6 arguments:

1.

A DataBase object containing the model used to calculate the total forces and moments.

2.

A first Result object corresponding to the vectorial forces.

3.

A second Result object corresponding to the vectorial moments.

4.

An object corresponding to the coordinate system in which results and position of recovery point are expressed. If the argument is an integer, it must correspond to the index of a CoordSys object defined in the dataBase. The argument can also be a CoordSys object, but its definition must refer a coordinate system defined in the dataBase.

5.

A vector (Array of three real values) corresponding to the position of the point with respect to which the total force and moment are calculated. The position of the point is defined with respect to the coordinate system corresponding to the previous argument. (This may differ from what other post-processing tools like Patran do.)

6.

A Result object corresponding to the coordinates of the connections that are used to estimate the global moment. (See additional remarks below.)

Note that the two last arguments are optional:

The sixth parameter containing the coordinates must be associated to the same Result keys as the forces Result. The parameter can be very useful when the forces are not associated with nodes. This is, for example, the case when the forces correspond to CBUSH element forces. For example, let us assume that the coordinate Results have been generated in the database:

        db.generateCoordResults("COORDS","COORDS","coords")

The coordinates corresponding to the forces can be obtained as follows:

        coords=db.getResultCopy("COORDS","COORDS","coords",forces.extractRkl())

And the global force and moment calculated as follows:

        fm=Result::calcResultingFM(db,forces,moments,csId,nil,Coords)

If argument Results are in Real format, the method returns an Array containing two vectors (i.e. two Arrays of Real objects). These vectors correspond to the total force and total moment respectively. Note that the method produces no new Result object.

If argument Results are Complex, the method returns an Array containing two Complex vectors (i.e. two Arrays of Complex objects). Note However that the Complex values in the resultants are always given in rectangular format (real and imaginary parts). This is true even when the argument Results are in polar (magnitude-phase) format.

I.4.9 Complex Results

Several methods correspond to operations specific to complex Results. These methods are described below.

I.4.9.1 Rectangular-Polar conversions

Two methods allow transformation of Complex Results expressed in real-imaginary format to magnitude-phase format, and reversely:

For these two methods, no complex conversion is performed if the Result is already in the requested format.

I.4.9.2 Conjugate Complex Result

“conjugate” produces a Result by initializing its values to conjugate of other values (z →z¯). The method has 0 or 1 argument. If the method has one argument, the object on which the method is called is set to the rectangular complex values of its argument. Otherwise, the object on which the method is called is modified. Note that the method can also be called on a Real Result but has then no effect.

I.4.9.3 Rotation of Complex Result

The method “rotateBy” is used to modify the values of a Complex Result by adding an angle specified in degrees to the corresponding phases. However, the method can be used indifferently with Complex Results in rectangular or in polar formats. The method may have one or two arguments:

Note that the rotation is done by multiplying the Result by a Complex value obtained as follows:

z = eiθ = cos ⁡ θ + i sin ⁡ θ.

Angle θ is always given in ∘.

I.4.9.4 Extractions from Complex Results

Four methods produce Real Results from Complex Results by extracting the appropriate components:

These methods must be called on Complex Results. The polar or rectangular format of the Complex Results does not matter: if needed a polar-rectangular conversion of the components is done before the extraction.

The two methods “getR” and “getI” may have an optional Real argument that corresponds to a rotation applied to the Result before extracting the Real or Imaginary component Result. More precisely, each component of each value is multiplied by eiθ before extracting the real or imaginary component. Angle θ is always given in ∘. Note that the Result on which the method is called is left unmodified.

I.4.9.5 Assembling Complex from Real Results

The “assembleComplex” method is used to assemble a Complex Result object from two Real Results. The method is called on a Result object and has three arguments:

1.

An integer corresponding to the format of the new Complex Result. The accepted values are 2 (real-imaginary or rectangular format) or 3 (polar or magnitude-phase format).

2.

A first Result object that will correspond to the real or magnitude components of the assembled Result.

3.

A second Result object that will correspond to the imaginary or phase components of the assembled Result.

Note that the two Result arguments must satisfy several requirements:

An example of valid (but not very useful) call to “assembleComplex” follows:

    resR=res2.getR
    resI=res2.getI

    resRI=Result.new
    resRI.assembleComplex(2,resR,resI)

(At the end, resRI should be the same as res2.)

I.4.10 “getData”

The getData method returns an Array of Arrays containing the data stored in a Result object. The returned Array may be considered as a two-dimensional Array with as many lines as there are pairs of key-value in the Result object. Each line of the Array contains 6, 8 or 11 elements:

1.

The first element corresponds to the elemId.

2.

The second element corresponds to the nodeId of the key.

3.

The third element corresponds to the layerId of the key.

4.

The fourth element corresponds to the subLayerId of the key.

5.

The fifth element corresponds to the coordinate system in which the value components are associated. The possible values are summarized in Table I.4.9.

6.

The other elements are real values corresponding to the components (1, 3 or 6 values for a scalar, vectorial or tensorial Result respectively). For the precise meaning of the returned value corresponding to coordinate system, see also section I.4.1.2.

The method may have 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 or no argument. The arguments correspond to the type of the Array elements corresponding to elemId, nodeId, layerId, subLayerId or coordSysId. In the returned Array, these elements may be of String or Integer types. Correspondingly the arguments are Strings the value of which can be "int", "string" or any other String. If any other String is used as argument (for example a void string), the default Integer or String type elements are returned.

For element, node and layer ids, the negative values correspond to “special” values. (See Tables I.4.2 to I.4.4.)


Table I.4.9: Correspondence between the integer in C++ “value” class and the value returned by Result member method “getData”.
integer in C++ “value” classreturned value in ruby
-9999 nil
-2000 "userCS"
-1000 "projCS"
-5 "elemIJK"
-4 "plyCS"
-3 "matCS"
-2 "nodeCS"
-1 "elemCS"
any other integer the same integer

I.4.11 “BLOBs”

Result objects can be saved in SQL database as “BLOB” objects.

Two methods are defined in Result class to convert object to and from Blobs:

I.4.12 Iterators

Three iterators are defined in the class:

For the meaning of the arguments, see more information in section I.4.10. One difference between the “each” iterator and the getData method is that the key and values elements are separated into two Arrays in the block. So the iterator is to be used as follows:

    strain.each("int","int","int") do |key,values|
        ...
    end
    ...
    strain.each("int","int","string","string") do |key,values|
        ...
    end

Note that, as the “each_key” and “each_values” iterators return Arrays, one can indifferently recover an Array argument, or its elements in the arguments of the block that follows the iterator. For example, in the following lines:

    stress.each_key do |stressKey|
        ...
    end

“stressKey” is an Array of three elements. However in the following lines:

    stress.each_key("int","int","int") do |elemId,nodeId,layerId|
        ...
    end

the arguments correspond to the different identifiers of the Result key.

I.4.13 A few singleton (static) methods

Four singleton methods allow conversion of layers and sub-layers string/integer IDs:

I.4.14 Other methods

One gives here a list of methods that do not fit in any category listed above.

I.4.14.1 “new”

“new” method is used to create a new Result object.

I.4.14.2 “initialize”

“initialize” method initializes or clears a Result object.

I.4.14.3 “clone”

“clone” method returns a copy of the Result object to which it is applied.

I.4.14.4 “cloneNoValues”

“cloneNoValues” method returns a copy of the Result object to which it is applied, except that no values are inserted. In practice, it means that attributes like the name, the tensor order, the format, etc. are copied.

I.4.14.5 “initZeroResult”

“initZeroResult” method is used to initialize a Result with zero values using the keys of an existing Result object. The Method has four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the Name of the Result.

2.

An integer corresponding to the tensor order (0, 1 or 2).

3.

An integer corresponding to the Format of the Result.

4.

A Result object that provides the keys to which the zero values of the new Result object will be associated.

The method returns the Result object on which it has been called.

I.4.14.6 “Size” attribute

“Size” returns an integer containing the numbers of pairs “key-value” contained in the Results object. This method has no argument. It corresponds to the “Size” read-only attribute.

I.4.14.7 “to_s”

“to_s” method is used for printing the Result object.

Chapter I.5
The “ResKeyList” class

A ResKeyList object is basically a set of Result keys (see Chapter I.4). In fact, a ResKeyList object is a kind of Result with no values associated with the keys.

As shown in section I.4.3, several methods of class Result allow building ResKeyList objects from Results, and extracting Results from other Results using ResKeyList objects.

A list of the methods defined in “ResKeyList” class is given in Table I.5.1.

Table I.5.1: The different methods that have been defined in “ResKeyList” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization
new (s) I.5.1 IV.2.5.1
initialize I.5.1
clone I.5.1
insert I.5.1
getData I.5.6
Size I.5.7
Identification
Name= I.5.7
Name I.5.7
Extractions
extractLayers I.5.2
extractSubLayers I.5.2
extractGroup I.5.2
Layers and sub-layers manipulation
renumberLayers I.5.3.1
renumberSubLayersI.5.3.2
removeLayers I.5.3.3
removeSubLayers I.5.3.4
Operators
+ I.5.4
- I.5.4
* I.5.4
/ I.5.4
Iterators
each_key I.5.5
Printing
to_s I.5.7
Attributes
Name I.5.7
Size I.5.7 (read only)

I.5.1 Creating and filling ResKeyList object

The usual “new” and “initialize” singleton methods are defined in the ResKeyList class. These methods have no arguments. The class member method “clone” has no argument and returns a copy of the object.

The user can fill their own ResKeyList object with the “insert” method. This method takes one Array argument with between 1 and 4 elements corresponding to the element identifier, the node identifier, the layer identifier and the sub-layer identifier. Each element can be a String or an integer.

I.5.2 Extraction functions

Three extraction functions have been defined:

These methods have no arguments.

I.5.3 Methods modifying the object

The two methods described below correspond to the methods with identical names defined in the “Result” class.

I.5.3.1 “renumberLayers” method

“renumberLayers” is a method used to renumber the layer integer ids of ResKeyList keys. The method has one Hash argument corresponding to the pairs of “old integers IDs” and “new integer IDs”.

I.5.3.2 “renumberSubLayers”

“renumberSubLayers” is a method used to renumber the sub-layer integer ids of ResKeyList keys. The method has one Hash argument corresponding to the pairs of “old integers IDs” and “new integer IDs”.

I.5.3.3 “removeLayers”

“removeLayers” is a method used to remove keys selected on the basis of the layer ID of the key. The method has one “LayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of layers for which the keys must be removed. The elements of the Array argument are integer or String values.

I.5.3.4 “removeSubLayers”

“removeSubLayers” is a method used to remove keys selected on the basis of the layer ID of the key. The method has one “SubLayersList” argument: it is an Array containing the list of sub-layers for which the keys must be removed. The elements of the Array argument are integer or String values.

I.5.4 Dyadic operators

Eight such operators have been defined. The meaning and behavior of the four elementary dyadic operations are explained first.

I.5.5 Iterators

One “each_key” iterator is defined in the class: it iterates on the data and produces Arrays of three elements corresponding to keys. The iterator may have between 0 and 4 arguments. The arguments are Strings that specify whether some of the data are to be returned in String or integer format.

In fact, the “each_key” iterator of ResKeyList class is identical to the “each_key” iterator of Result class.

I.5.6 “getData” method

“getData” method returns an Array of Arrays containing the data stored in a ResKeyList object. The returned Array may actually be considered as a two-dimensional Array with as many lines as there are pairs of keys in the ResKeyList object. Each line of the Array contains four elements:

1.

The first element corresponds to the elemId.

2.

The second element corresponds to the nodeId of the key.

3.

The third element corresponds to the layerId of the key.

4.

The fourth element corresponds to the subLayerId of the key.

The method may have 4, 3, 2, 1 or no argument. The arguments correspond to the type of the Array elements corresponding to elemId, nodeId, layerId or subLayerId. In the returned Array, these elements may be of String or Integer types. Correspondingly the arguments are Strings the value of which can be "int", "string" or any other String. If any other String is used as argument (for example a void string), the default Integer or String type elements are returned.

In fact, this method corresponds to the “getData” method of Result class (See section I.4.10). The special key names are the same as those listed in Tables I.4.2 to I.4.4.

I.5.7 Other methods

The following methods do not fit in any of the categories listed above:

Chapter I.6
The “Post” module, and other topics...

The “Post” module contains the definition of methods belonging to no particular class. These methods are all devoted to manipulation of Results or Groups.

A list of the methods defined in “Post” module is given in Table I.6.1.

Table I.6.1: The different methods that have been defined in “Post” module.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Manipulation of FeResPost standard output
setInfoStreamToKeep I.6.1
setInfoStreamToNone I.6.1
setInfoStreamToClientStream I.6.1
setInfoStreamToCppStream I.6.1
setInfoStreamToCppFile I.6.1
getInfoStreamContent I.6.1
clearInfoStreamContent I.6.1
getAndClearInfoStreamContent I.6.1
writeAboutInformation I.6.1
writeMsgOutputLine I.6.1
Monadic functions for new Result creation
exp I.6.2
log I.6.2
exp10 I.6.2
log10 I.6.2
abs I.6.2
inv I.6.2
sq I.6.2
sqrt I.6.2
sgn I.6.2
Dyadic functions for new Result creation
min I.6.3
max I.6.3
cmp I.6.3
merge I.6.3
mergeKeepFirst I.6.3
mergeKeepLast I.6.3
pow I.6.3
atan2 I.6.3
vectProduct I.6.3
sumVectProduct I.6.3
Dyadic operator functions
opAdd I.6.4
opSub I.6.4
opMul I.6.4
opDiv I.6.4
opPow I.6.4
Groups and Patran session files
readGroupsFromPatranSession I.6.5 I.6.5
writeGroupsToPatranSession I.6.5 I.6.5
readGroupsFromSamcefDat III.2.3
Control of verbosity for debugging purposes
setVerbosityLevel I.6.6
getVerbosityLevel I.6.6
Conversion of CLA identifiers
convertIdfierToString I.6.7
convertStringToIdfier I.6.7
BLOBs for SQL
convertBlob I.6.8
Random
calcRandomResponse I.6.9 IV.2.4.7
Predefined criteria
calcPredefinedCriterion I.6.10IV.2.4.3
Loading the HDF5 shared library
loadHdf5Library I.6.11
Exceptions
getLastErrorMessage I.6.12

I.6.1 Manipulation of FeResPost standard output

Several methods of “Post” Module allow to manipulate the information and warning messages issued by FeResPost. In C++ code, the messages are saved into a C++ ostrstream object. At the end of each FeResPost method, the content of this stream is flushed into the output selected by the client. Several methods allow to control how information and warning messages are output:

The default standard output generally corresponds to clients (ruby, in this case) standard output. This selection is done when FeResPost library is loaded.

The redirection of standard output is useful when FeResPost is not run in “console” mode. Moreover, it is sometimes useful to separate the outputs of FeResPost from those of the ruby post-processing program. Two methods allow adding content in the selected output stream:

I.6.2 Monadic functions for new Result creation

In section I.4.4, functions are defined that allow the creation of new Result objects from existing ones. Here, short-cuts to some of these functions are presented (for the following functions, x and y are Result objects):

I.6.3 Dyadic functions for new Result creation

In section I.4.4, functions are defined that allow the creation of new Result objects from existing ones. Here, short-cuts to some of these functions are presented (for the following functions, x, y and z are Result objects):

Other functions that have no direct correspondence in Result class methods can also be used to define new Results:

Most of the dyadic functions insert a pair “key-value” in the created Result only if the corresponding key is found in the two Result arguments. “Post.min”, “Post.max” and “Post.merge” methods are an exception: if a given key is found in only one of the two arguments, it is inserted in the new Result.

I.6.4 “Operator” methods

Five “operator” methods (functions) are defined in the “Post” module: “opAdd”, “opSub”, “opMul”, “opDiv” and “opPow”. The four first methods correspond to the four “+”, “-”, “*” and “/” operators defined in “Result”, “Group” and “ResKeyList” classes:

The “opPow” method is an alias to the “pow” method and at least one of its arguments must be a “Result” object.

I.6.5 Reading and writing of Groups

Method “readGroupsFromPatranSession” reads Groups from a Patran session file and returns a Hash containing the list of Groups. The keys are Group names, and the values are the Groups. The method has two arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the session file.

2.

A DataBase. This argument is optional. If it is provided, the reading method removes from the created Groups all the entities undefined in the DataBase argument.

The session file from which Groups are read is as defined in section I.1.2.1. Examples of use of the method follow:

        ...
        h=Post::readGroupsFromPatranSession("groups.ses")
        ...
        h=Post::readGroupsFromPatranSession("groups.ses",DB)
        ...

Method “writeGroupsToPatranSession” is used to save groups in a Patran session file. This method does the inverse of method “Post::readGroupsFromPatranSession”. The method has two arguments:

1.

The first argument of the method is a String containing the name of the output session file.

2.

The second argument is the list of Groups. This can be a Hash similar to the one produced by method “Post::readGroupsFromPatranSession”, or an Array of Group objects.

When the second argument is a Hash, the String keys are used as reference names for the groups. If the second argument is an Array of Groups, their names are used in the session file.

The following statements:

        ...
        h=Post::readGroupsFromPatranSession("groups.ses")
        ...
        Post::writeGroupsToPatranSession("hash.ses",h)
        Post::writeGroupsToPatranSession("values.ses",h.values)
        ...

produce equivalent Patran session files, but the order in which the Groups are defined may differ.

I.6.6 Setting verbosity for debugging purposes

Two methods allow setting the verbosity level of several operations. The level of verbosity is a parameter global for FeResPost and may be used to write several information messages during operations in which the risk of inconsistent data has been deemed high. These information messages may be used to debug FeResPost or the programs using FeResPost. In practice, the majority of programming errors will be related to the user’s own program, but the printing of FeResPost messages may help find them. The two methods defined in the “Post” Module are:

The verbosity level may presently range from 0 to 2. 0 corresponds to no information messages. The amount of information messages increases with verbosity level.

Presently, the operations influenced by the verbosity level are the operations related to reading finite element models, accessing Results in disk files, Gmsh output...

I.6.7 Conversion of CLA identifiers

Two methods are defined to convert CLA identifiers to Strings, or Strings to CLA identifiers. (See Chapter II.0 for the notion of identifier.) The two methods are defined in the “Post” Module:

Examples of valid Strings corresponding to CLA identifiers:

      "testLam",
      "15",
      "[15,testLam]",
      ...

I.6.8 SQL“BLOB” methods

The method “convertBlob” returns a “Result” or “Group” object corresponding to a String argument. The String must correspond to a valid FeResPost BLOB object produced by method “toBlob” of one of the FeResPost classes.

I.6.9 Random or PSD integration methods

Method “calcRandomResponse” is used to calculate a PSD and/or integrate a PSD and/or a transfer function. The theoretical background extracted from [Sof10] that is necessary to understand what the method does is summarized here. The reader is referred to [Sof10] for more information.

The purpose of a random calculation is to assess structural response as power spectral density assuming that structure behavior to a given type of excitation is known by its transfer function, and that the excitation is specified as an input power spectral density (PSD).

More precisely, a unique excitation a is assumed to be present, and the response at output location j is calculated as:

Sja = |Hja| 2S a.

In previous expression:

Note that the input and output PSD have always positive real values for all components.

Once a PSD is calculated, an equivalent RMS output can be calculated as follows:

u¯j = ∫ 0∞Sja(f)df.

In practice, FeResPost calculates the integral on a finite range of frequencies:

u¯j = ∫ f minfmaxSja(f)df.

Practically, the transfer function is known by its values at different frequencies fi, i = 1...N. Then the integrations above are replaced by integrations on smaller frequency ranges:

∫ 0∞S ja(f)df ≈∑ i=1N-1 ∫ fifi+1 Sja(f)df.

Assuming a log-log dependence of Sja(f) between fi and fi+1, one has

Sja(f) = Sja(fi) fiα fα with f i < f < fi+1,

in which

α = log ⁡ (Sja(fi+1)∕Sja(fi)) log ⁡ (fi+1∕fi) .

The integral in range [fi,fi+1] is then calculated by:

If it is assumed that function Sja(f) varies linearly between fi and fi+1, then the integral in range [fi,fi+1] becomes simply:

∫ fifi+1 Sja(f)df = (Sja(fi) + Sja(fi + 1)) (fi+1 - fi) 2 .

Note that in Nastran, the assumption of log-log or linear interpolation on each frequency interval is managed by the option RMSINT. In FeResPost , the “integTyp” parameter of method “calcRandomResponse” allows choosing the type of integration. (See below.)

“calcRandomResponse” method in “Post” Module can be used to calculate output PSD from a transfer function, to integrate the PSD, and/or calculate the RMS value. The method is called as follows:

        ...
        arr=Post.calcRandomResponse(bOutputPsd,bOutputIntPsd,
            inputResults,freqs,psdIn,integType,addRes)
        psdOut=arr[0]
        intPsdOut=arr[1]
        rms=arr[2]
        ...

The method has 6 or 7 arguments:

1.

“bOutputPsd” is a logical parameter that specifies whether the output PSD must be returned by the method.

2.

“bOutputIntPsd” is a logical parameter that specifies whether the integration of the output PSD at each frequency must be returned by the method. (If one does not require the value at each frequency, only the last value is returned.)

3.

“inputResults” is an Array of Result objects containing the transfer function Hja (complex Result) or only its magnitude |Hja| (Real result).

4.

“freqs” is an Array of real values corresponding to the frequencies at which the transfer function and input PSD have been discretized. The size of this array must correspond to the size of the “inputResults” Array.

5.

“psdIn” is an Array of real values corresponding to the input PSD level (excitation) at discretization frequencies. The number of elements in this Array must match the number of elements in “inputResults” and “freqs” Arrays.

6.

“integType” is a String that specifies the interpolation and integration rule on frequency intervals. Possible values are “LogLog” or “LinLin”. If another value is provided, “calcRandomResponse” raises an exception.

7.

“addRes” is a Real Result that must be considered as the initial value from which the integration of output PSD starts. (This parameter can be very useful when integration is “sliced” on sub-ranges of the entire frequency range.) If no starting value is required, the parameter can be omitted. A “nil” value is also treated as no starting value specified.

Note that the different Result arguments must have the same size and keys. The method returns an Array of 3 elements:

1.

The first element corresponds to the output PSD. It is an Array of Result objects that is filled if “bOutputPsd” argument is true. Otherwise, “nil” is returned.

2.

The second element corresponding to the integrated output PSD:

Note that the optional “addRes” parameter defines the start for the integration.

3.

The third output corresponds to the RMS value of the output PSD. This is a Result object. In practice, the components of the output RMS are calculated as the square root of the corresponding component of the integrated output PSD. (Or the last value of the integrated output PSD, if “bOutputIntPsd” is set to “true”.)

I.6.10 Predefined criteria

Method “calcPredefinedCriterion” allows calculation of a pre-defined criterion “hard-coded” in C++. The parameters of the method are:

The method returns an Array of “OutputValues” similar to the Array of input arguments.

Note that the arguments that are passed by reference in function calcPredefinedCriterion can be modified in the predefined criterion. Each predefined criterion should be documented, and the possible side effects of the method should be clearly explained.

Some advantages of using predefined criteria are listed below:

Of course, the adoption of pre-defined criteria has also some disadvantages:

So far, only a limited number of predefined criteria have been included in FeResPost. They are presented in Appendix X.C.2.

I.6.11 Loading HDF5 library

Method “loadHdf5Library” is used to load the HDF5 shared library. It is simply used as follows:

    Post.loadHdf5Library("C:/NewProgs/HDF5/HDF5-1.8.20-win32/bin/hdf5.dll")

This method has been introduced in the “Post” Module, even though it is presently used only as a prelude to loading results from HDF5 files in Nastran databases. It is hoped that other solvers like Samcef will also adopt this file format for their results.

Some work has been done to ensure the compatibility of FeResPost with different versions of the HDF5 library. For example, when FeResPost is compiled with the headers of HDF5 version 1.14.6, earlier versions of the library can be loaded dynamically. The test has been done successfully, with HDF5 version 1.8.20. On the other hand, when compiling FeResPost with HDF5 version 1.8.20 headers does not allow use of recent versions of HDF5, as version 1.14.6. This improvement should enhance the compatibility of distributed FeResPost binaries with different versions of HDF5 as as the sources are compiled with recent versions of HDF5.

An important remark: Since version 2024.1 of MSC Nastran, LZ4 or BLOSC compression algorithms are used by default in Nastran HDF5 outputs. (See release notes of MSC Nastran.) Plugins are needed to read corresponding files. These plugins can be found recent versions of HDF5 “lib/plugin” directory. They can also be found in MSC Nastran or Patran installation directories. To access these plugins you must set the environment variable “HDF5_PLUGIN_PATH” to point to plugin directories. For example, on Windows:

    set HDF5_PLUGIN_PATH=C:/NEWPROGS/HDF5/HDF5-1.14.6-win64/lib/plugin

The definition of this variable must be done before starting ruby, Python... (For example it can be done in a batch file.)

I.6.12 Exceptions

When something wrong happens, FeResPost raises an exception with a message providing some information about the problem. Exception information can be displayed, for example, by the following code:

    begin
        db.readBdf("unit_xyz_V1.bdf",["../../MODEL/MESH/"],"bdf",{},true)
    rescue Exception => x then
        printf("\n\nMaybe you should modify the two first include statements in main file!\n")
        printf("**********************************************************************\n\n")

        printf("We have an exception with the following information:\n\n")
        puts x.message
    end

Method “getLastErrorMessage” of the “Post” module retrieves the message associated with the last exception raised by FeResPost.

Chapter I.7
Arguments coercion for “Result” class operators

This chapter concerns the ruby extension only!

One class and some ruby methods are defined directly in the ruby language. This part of the code handles the operators in which the second argument is a “Result” object, but the first argument has another type (Real, Complex, Array...). In this case, a ruby type coercion is performed via the “Result” class “coerce” method. This small piece of code allows the operations to be performed using the different “Post.op???” methods.

It seems that the built-in “Array” class defines its own “coerce” method, which conflicts with the “Result” coerce mechanism. Therefore, a modification of the “Array” class was introduced in version 4.4.4 of FeResPost. (See below.)

This part of FeResPost is programmed in the “FeResPost.rb” file. Its content is as follows:

# encoding: utf-8

require "FeResPost.so"

module FeResPost
    class ROpResult
        @x=nil
        def initialize(res)
            @x=res
        end
        def +(other)
            return Post.opAdd(other,@x)
        end
        def -(other)
            return Post.opSub(other,@x)
        end
        def *(other)
            return Post.opMul(other,@x)
        end
        def /(other)
            return Post.opDiv(other,@x)
        end
        def **(other)
            return Post.pow(other,@x)
        end
    end
    class Result
        def coerce(x)
            [ROpResult.new(self),x]
        end
    end # Result
end # FeResPost

class Array
    alias _FeResPost_old_opAdd +
    alias _FeResPost_old_opSub -
    alias _FeResPost_old_opMul *
    def +(second)
        if second.class==Result then
            return Post.opAdd(self,second)
        else
            return self._FeResPost_old_opAdd(second)
        end
    end
    def -(second)
        if second.class==Result then
            return Post.opSub(self,second)
        else
            return self._FeResPost_old_opSub(second)
        end
    end
    def *(second)
        if second.class==Result then
            return Post.opMul(self,second)
        else
            return self._FeResPost_old_opMul(second)
        end
    end
    def /(second)
        if second.class==Result then
            return Post.opDiv(self,second)
        else
            raise "Invalid second operand for / operator"
        end
    end
end # Array
                                                                                      

                                                                                      

puts "End \"FeResPost\" module initialization.\n"
puts "\n\n"

Part II
Composite Reference Manual

Chapter II.0
Introduction

Four classes specific to Classical Laminate Analysis calculations have been defined in the FeResPost module:

Throughout the composite manual, the concept of identifier is frequently used. An identifier can be:

This concept was introduced to provide a general way to identify and access materials, laminates, or loads stored in a ClaDb object. The methods used to access these data must be compatible with several software packages (ESAComp, finite element solvers, etc.). Since entities manipulated by these packages are sometimes identified by integers, sometimes by strings, and sometimes by both an integer and a string, this flexible identification scheme had to be developed. For example, if a ClaLam object has been stored in a ClaDb, it can be retrieved with:

   ...
   db.insertLaminate(lam1)
   ...
   lam2=db.getLaminateCopy(5)
   ...
   lam2=db.getLaminateCopy("panel1")
   ...
   lam2=db.getLaminateCopy([5,"panel1"])
   ...

Note, however, that the identifier used to retrieve lam2 must match exactly the identifier of lam1. For example, if lam1 has the [5,"panel1"] identifier, only the third getLaminateCopy call will work.

This leads to a final remark about interfaces with other software. The composite classes are designed to be used together with the rest of FeResPost. Among other things, this makes it possible to:

The composite capabilities are based on Classical Laminate Analysis as widely presented in the literature. The implementation follows [Gay97]. For the in-plane and flexural parts of the laminate response, the approximations used in the derivation of the equations are consistent with those found throughout the literature. However, fewer references are available regarding the out-of-plane shear behavior of laminates. In [Gay97], this aspect of laminate analysis is presented under several simplifying assumptions. For instance, Gay assumes mirror symmetry of the laminate, which is not a property shared by all laminates. Therefore, the out-of-plane shear responses calculated by the composite classes should be used with care.

More information about the conventions used in FeResPost composite calculations is given in Chapter II.1.

II.0.1 Remarks and limitations

The following is a non-exhaustive list of known limitations:

1.

When a mechanical loading is applied to a laminate, it is characterized by an angle λ defining the orientation of the loading with respect to the laminate. The loading angle λ follows the same conventions as the ply angle ξ shown in Figure II.1.2. This convention for the loading angle may differ from those used in other software. For example, ESAComp appears to define the loading angle as the angle of the laminate with respect to the loading direction, resulting in a sign change for the corresponding angle.

2.

As the composite classes are still under development, the programming interface of the composite-related functions may still change.

Chapter II.1
Theoretical background

The purpose of this Chapter is to summarize the classical laminate theory, and to provide the information needed by the user of composite classes to understand a few conventions that have been assumed for the programming of Classical Laminate Analysis in FeResPost (axes, angles, numbering of layers,...).

The programmer will find a presentation of the classical laminate theory that follows closely what is programmed in C++ language in FeResPost. However, those who are interested in studying the theory, or who are not familiar with it, are referred to more extensive presentations of the classical laminate theory [Gay97, Pal99]. The presentation of the out-of-plane shear behavior of the laminate is original, even though inspired by information found in [Sof04a].

The Chapter is organized as follows:

II.1.1 Conventions

Figure II.1.1 represents some of the conventions used for the definition of laminate in FeResPost. The laminate coordinate system is defined in such a way that the z axis is perpendicular to laminate surface and points from bottom to top surface. x and y vectors are parallel to the laminate plies. Plies are numbered from the bottom to the top surface. If k is the index of a ply, it is bounded by z coordinates zk-1 and zk. The origin of the coordinate system is located at mid-laminate thickness, so that if t is the laminate total thickness and the laminate has N plies, top surface of the laminate is located at zN = +t∕2 and bottom surface at z0 = -t∕2. (The plies are numbered from 1 to N.)


PICT

Figure II.1.1: Conventions for the numbering of plies in a laminate and for the definition of the laminate coordinate system. (A six-ply laminate is represented.)

In the laminate, the plies are characterized by their material, thickness and by their angle in the laminate. Figure II.1.2 shows the convention for the orientation of a ply in a laminate. 1, 2 and 3 are the ply axes; x, y and z are the laminate axes. Of course, because only 2D laminates are considered here, one always has z = 3. If ξ is the angle of the ply in the laminate, this angle is as represented in Figure II.1.2: a positive angle corresponds to a rotation from axis x to axis y. If the angle is 0∘, the first ply axis 1 is parallel to the first laminate axis x.


PICT

Figure II.1.2: Conventions for the orientation of plies in the laminate.

II.1.2 Rotation in XY plane and algebraic notations

A common operation in classical laminate analysis is to rotate vectors, tensors and matrices. The operations used in the rest of this Chapter and in FeResPost are summarized here. This rotation is represented in Figure II.1.3.


PICT

Figure II.1.3: Rotation of angle θ around the origin in O12 plane.

II.1.2.0.1 Rotation of base vectors

For such a rotation, the vectors ex and ey are expressed as a function of e1 and e2 as:

( ex ey ) = ( cos ⁡ θ sin ⁡ θ - sin ⁡ θ cos ⁡ θ )⋅ (e1 e2 ) .

To simplify the notations, the symbols c = cos ⁡ θ and s = sin ⁡ θ are introduced. It is also preferable to write the more general 3D version of the transformation:

( ex ey ez ) = ( c s0 - s c 0 0 01 )⋅ (e1 e2 e3 ) .
(II.1.1)

The inverse relation corresponds to a rotation of angle - θ and is obtained by changing the signs of the sines in the rotation matrix:

( e1 e2 e3 ) = ( c - s0 s c 0 0 0 1 )⋅ (ex ey ez ) .
(II.1.2)

II.1.2.0.2 Transformation of vector and tensor components

The expressions (II.1.1) and (II.1.2) can be used to transform the components of vectors. For example:

( V x V y V z ) = ( c s0 - s c 0 0 01 )⋅ (V 1 V 2 V 3 ) .
(II.1.3)

For the transformation of 2D tensors, the transformation matrix is used twice. For example, a Cauchy stress tensor is transformed as follows:

( σxxσxyσzx σxyσyyσyz σzxσyzσzz ) = ( c s0 - s c 0 0 01 )⋅ (σ11σ12σ31 σ12σ22σ23 σ31σ23σ33 )⋅ (c - s0 s c 0 0 0 1 ) .
(II.1.4)

II.1.2.0.3 Matricial notations

As the Cauchy stress tensor is symmetric, expression (II.1.4) is more conveniently written in a matricial form as follows:

( σxx σyy σzz τyz τzx τxy ) = ( c2 s200 0 2cs s2 c200 0 - 2cs 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 c - s 0 0 0 0s c 0 - cscs00 0 c2 - s2 )⋅ (σ11 σ22 σ33 τ23 τ13 τ12 ) .
(II.1.5)

The same expression applies to the components of the strain tensor, which is also symmetric:

( ϵxx ϵyy ϵzz ϵyz ϵzx ϵxy ) = ( c2 s200 0 2cs s2 c200 0 - 2cs 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 c - s 0 0 0 0s c 0 - cscs00 0 c2 - s2 )⋅ (ϵ11 ϵ22 ϵ33 ϵ23 ϵ13 ϵ12 ) .

However, classical laminate analysis is conventionally written using angular shear components for the strain tensor:

γij = 2ϵij(i≠j).

Using the angular components, the matricial expression to be used for the rotation becomes:

( ϵxx ϵyy ϵzz γyz γzx γxy ) = ( c2 s2 00 0 cs s2 c2 00 0 - cs 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 c - s 0 0 0 0s c 0 - 2cs2cs00 0 c2 - s2 )⋅ (ϵ11 ϵ22 ϵ33 γ23 γ13 γ12 ) .
(II.1.6)

An interesting aspect of the transformations (II.1.5) and (II.1.6) is that the transformation can be applied separately to sub-groups of components:

This helps justify some of the simplifications of the classical laminate analysis; among others, the decoupling of in-plane and flexural deformation of the laminate on one hand from the out-of-plane shear on the other hand. The third direction is systematically neglected: σ33 = ϵ33 = 0. The inverse of relation (II.1.7) is:

( σ11 σ22 τ12 ) = ( c2 s2 - 2cs s2 c2 2cs cs - csc2 - s2 )⋅ (σxx σyy τxy ) ,
(II.1.9)

( ϵ11 ϵ22 γ12 ) = ( c2 s2 - cs s2 c2 cs 2cs - 2csc2 - s2 )⋅ (ϵxx ϵyy γxy )

II.1.2.0.4 Introduction of a short notation

In order to simplify the notations, the following are introduced:

[T+] (θ) = ( c2 s2 - 2cs s2 c2 2cs cs - csc2 - s2 ) ,

[T-](θ) = ( c2 s2 2cs s2 c2 - 2cs - cscsc2 - s2 ) ,

[T+′] (θ) = ( c2 s2 cs s2 c2 - cs - 2cs2csc2 - s2 ) ,

[T-′] (θ) = ( c2 s2 - cs s2 c2 cs 2cs - 2csc2 - s2 ) ,

[S-](θ) = ( c - s s c ),

[S+] (θ) = ( c s - s c ).
(II.1.10)

These matrices are not independent. For example:

[T-](θ) = ( [T+] (θ)) -1 = [T +] (-θ),

[T-](θ) = ( [T+] (θ)) -1 = [T +] (-θ),

[T+′] (θ) = ( [T+] (θ)) T ,

[S-](θ) = ( [S+] (θ)) T = ( [S +] (θ)) -1 = ( [S +] (-θ)) .

The transformations of the components of strain tensor (II.1.8) and stress tensor (II.1.9) are then written:

{ϵ}xy = [T+′] (θ) ⋅ {ϵ}12,

{σ}12 = [T+] (θ) ⋅ {σ}xy,

{ϵ}12 = [T-′] (θ) ⋅ {ϵ}xy,

{σ}xy = [T-](θ) ⋅ {σ}12.

Similarly, for the out-of-plane shear stresses and strains, the following relations hold:

{γs} xy = [S+] (θ) ⋅ {γs} 12,

{τs} xy = [S+] (θ) ⋅ {τs} 12,

{γs} 12 = [S-](θ) ⋅ {γs} xy,

{τs} 12 = [S-](θ) ⋅ {τs} xy.

II.1.3 Materials and plies

This section summarizes a few results that are commonly found in the literature on composite.

II.1.3.1 Plies

Each ply is defined by:

The orientation of the ply is given by an angle θ.

II.1.3.2 Materials and constitutive equations

When a material is used in the definition of a laminate, assumptions are made about the axes defined in the laminate. Axes 1 and 2 are parallel to the laminate plane and axis 3 is orthogonal to the laminate.

The classical laminate analysis is based on the assumption that the relation between stress and strain tensors is linear. Then, as these two tensors are symmetric, a 6 × 6 matrix contains all the elastic coefficients defining the material:

( σ11 σ22 σ33 τ23 τ13 τ12 ) = ( C1111C1122C1133C1123C1131C1112 C2211C2222C2233C2223C2231C2212 C3311C3322C3333C3323C3331C3312 C2311C2322C2333C2323C2331C2312 C1311C1322C1333C1323C1331C1312 C1211C1222C1233C1223C1231C1212 )⋅ (ϵ11 ϵ22 ϵ33 γ23 γ31 γ12 ) .
(II.1.11)

It can be shown that, owing to the particular choice of angular strain tensor components, the matrix [Cijkl] containing the elastic coefficients is symmetric. Therefore, the matrix has only 21 independent coefficients. [Cijkl] is the stiffness matrix of the material.

Equation (II.1.11) can be reversed as follows:

( ϵ11 ϵ22 ϵ33 γ23 γ31 γ12 ) = ( c1111c1122c1133c1123c1131c1112 c2211c2222c2233c2223c2231c2212 c3311c3322c3333c3323c3331c3312 c2311c2322c2333c2323c2331c2312 c1311c1322c1333c1323c1331c1312 c1211c1222c1233c1223c1231c1212 ) ⋅ (σ11 σ22 σ33 τ23 τ13 τ12 ) + ΔT ( α11 α22 α33 α23 α13 α12 ) + ΔH ( β11 β22 β33 β23 β13 β12 ) .(II.1.12)

In expression (12), the thermo-elastic and moisture expansion terms have been added to the previous expression. They are characterized by CTE and CME tensors noted {αkl} and {βkl} respectively. Note that shear components of these two tensors are angular components. Practically, it does not matter much as most materials have zero shear components for CTE or CME tensors. [cijkl] is the compliance matrix of the material. Obviously [cijkl] = [Cijkl] -1. Laminates are often defined with orthotropic materials:

For an isotropic material, defining E and either G or ν is sufficient to characterize the material, and one has:

E1 = E2 = E3 = E,

G12 = G23 = G13 = G,

ν12 = ν23 = ν13 = ν.

E, G and ν satisfy the following relation:

E - 2G(1 + ν) = 0.

Finally, shorter notations are introduced to rewrite expressions (II.1.11) and (12) respectively as follows:

{ϵ} = [c] ⋅ {σ} + ΔT {α} + ΔH {β},
(II.1.17)

{σ} = [C] ⋅ {ϵ} -ΔT [C] ⋅ {α} -ΔH [C] ⋅ {β}.

The “Mechanical Strain Tensor” is also introduced, estimated as follows:

{ϵMech} = [c] ⋅ {σ}.
(II.1.18)

This new strain tensor differs from the one defined by (II.1.17) by the fact that no thermo-elastic or hygro-elastic contribution is taken into account to estimate its components. It is the strain that corresponds to the actual material stress, when no thermo-elastic or hygro-elastic expansion is considered. This “Mechanical Strain Tensor” is also sometimes called “Equivalent Strain Tensor”.

II.1.3.3 In-plane properties

The ply properties in a plane parallel to the laminate are considered here. Then the constitutive equation (16) reduces to:

( ϵ11 ϵ22 γ12 ) = ( c1111c1122c1112 c2211c2222c2212 c1211c1222c1212 )⋅ (σ11 σ22 τ12 )+ΔT ( α11 α22 α12 )+ΔH ( β11 β22 β12 ) .
(II.1.19)

The indices in this notation are integers and indicate that the corresponding properties are given in ply coordinate system. The equation (II.1.19) is written more concisely as follows:

{ϵ}ply = [c]ply ⋅ {σ}ply + ΔT {α}ply + ΔH {β}ply.
(II.1.20)

Expression (II.1.20) introduces the material in-plane compliance matrix [c] ply. To avoid overly complicated notations, the same notation is used as for the 6 × 6 full material compliance matrix introduced in (II.1.17). This will be done systematically for the in-plane matricial and vectorial quantities in the rest of the document ( [c], [C], {α}, {β}, {ϵ},...

The inverse of expression (II.1.20) is noted:

{σ}ply = [C]ply ⋅ {ϵ}ply -ΔT [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply -ΔH [C]ply ⋅ {β}ply.
(II.1.21)

Expression (II.1.21) introduces the in-plane stiffness matrix [C] ply = [c]ply-1.

Plies are characterized by their orientation in the laminate. Let ξ be the angle of the ply in the laminate axes. Then, the laminate axes are obtained by rotating the ply axes by an angle - ξ. Equations (II.1.20) and (II.1.21) are expressed in the laminate coordinate system as follows:

{ϵ}lam = [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ [c]ply ⋅ [T+] (-ξ) ⋅ {σ}lam + ΔT [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ {α}ply + ΔH [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ {β}ply,

{σ}lam = [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ [T-′] (-ξ) ⋅ {ϵ}lam -ΔT [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply -ΔH [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ {β}ply.(II.1.22)

This leads to the new expression in laminate axes:

{ϵ}lam = [c]lam ⋅ {σ}lam + ΔT {α}lam + ΔH {β}lam,

{σ}lam = [C]lam ⋅ {ϵ}lam -ΔT [C]lam ⋅ {α}lam -ΔH [C]lam ⋅ {β}lam,

where new notations are introduced for in-plane ply properties rotated by an angle - ξ (in laminate axes):

[c]lam = [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ [c]ply ⋅ [T+] (-ξ),
(II.1.23)

{α}lam = [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ {α}ply,
(II.1.24)

{β}lam = [T+′] (-ξ) ⋅ {β}ply,
(II.1.25)

[C]lam = [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ [T-′] (-ξ),
(II.1.26)

[C]lam ⋅ {α}lam = [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply,

[C]lam ⋅ {β}lam = [T-](-ξ) ⋅ [C]ply ⋅ {β}ply.

When a matrix is transformed as in (II.1.23) or a vector as in (II.1.24), they are said to be rotated with the [T+′] (-ξ) rotation matrix.

II.1.3.4 Out-of-plane shear properties

Developments similar to those in the previous section are carried out here. The out-of-plane shear constitutive equations are written as follows:

{τs} ply = [g]ply ⋅ {γs} ply -ΔT [g]ply ⋅ {αs} ply -ΔH [g]ply ⋅ {βs} ply,
(II.1.27)

{γs} ply = [g-1] ply ⋅ {τs} ply + ΔT {αs} ply + ΔH {βs} ply.
(II.1.28)

If ξ is the angle of the ply in the laminate, the previous relations can be written in laminate axes by rotating them by an angle - ξ . For example:

{γs} lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ {γs} ply,

{τs} lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ {τs} ply,

{αs} lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ {αs} ply,

{βs} lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ {βs} ply,

{γs} ply = [S-](-ξ) ⋅ {γs} lam = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {γs} lam,

{τs} ply = [S-](-ξ) ⋅ {τs} lam = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {τs} lam,

{αs} ply = [S-](-ξ) ⋅ {αs} lam = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {αs} lam,

{βs} ply = [S-](-ξ) ⋅ {βs} lam = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {βs} lam.

Consecutive transformations of relations (II.1.27) are then applied as follows:

[S+] (ξ) ⋅ {τs} lam = [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {γs} lam -ΔT [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {αs} lam -ΔH [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {βs} lam, (II.1.29)

{τs} lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {γs} lam -ΔT [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {αs} lam -ΔH [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {βs} lam, (II.1.30)

{τs} lam = [g]lam ⋅ {γs} lam -ΔT [g]lam ⋅ {αs} lam -ΔH [g]lam ⋅ {βs} lam,

where the following notation is introduced:

[g]lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ [g]ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ).

Tensor [g] is said to be rotated by matrix [S+] (-ξ), which corresponds to the expression of the shear stiffness tensor in a new coordinate system obtained by rotating the previous one by an angle - ξ.

The transformation of the out-of-plane shear compliance tensor by the same angle - ξ is made with the same expression as for the stiffness tensor:

[g-1] lam = [S+] (-ξ) ⋅ [g-1] ply ⋅ [S+] (ξ).

II.1.4 Thickness and mass of laminate

The total laminate thickness is the sum of the thickness of each of its plies:

tlam = ∑ k=1Ne k.

Correspondingly, the areal mass is given by:

smlam = ∑ k=1Nρe k.

The laminate average density is then:

ρlam = smlam∕tlam.

II.1.5 In-plane and flexural laminate behavior

The classical laminate analysis is based on the assumption that in-plane and flexural behavior of the laminate is not related to out-of-plane shear loading. The corresponding laminate properties can be studied separately. The same remark is true for the load response calculation. In this section, the in-plane and flexural behavior of laminates are studied.

In this section the thermal and moisture expansions are not taken into account. The out-of-plane shear properties and loading of laminates is also discussed in a separate section. The results of classical laminate analysis are summarized here. The reader shall refer to the literature if more information on the developments that led to these results is needed. In this section, the different equations are written in laminate axes and the corresponding indices are noted x and y.

Laminate compliance and stiffness matrices relate the in-plane forces and bending moments on one hand to the average strain and curvatures on the other hand. Those different quantities are defined as follows:

Note that the average strain tensor, as well as the true tensor, are not “real” tensors because their shear components (i.e. the non-diagonal components) are angular components.

The relations between the four tensors are then given by two equations:

{N }lam = [A]lam ⋅ {ϵ0} lam + [B]lam ⋅ {κ}lam,

{M }lam = [B]lam ⋅ {ϵ0} lam + [D]lam ⋅ {κ}lam.

The different matrices and vectors introduced in these equations are defined below:

All the new matrices and vectors are obtained by summation of the ply contributions. In order to obtain the ply stiffness matrix in laminate axes [C]lamk and the ply thermo-elastic CTE coefficients in thermo-elastic axes {α} lamk, the transformations (II.1.24) and (II.1.26) are used respectively. Note however that if a ply is characterized by an orientation θ with respect to the laminate axes, the rotation of ply properties must be of an angle - θ.

The laminate compliance matrices [a]lam, [b] lam and [d] lam are obtained by inversion of the 6 × 6 [ABBD] lam matrix:

[ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] = [ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] -1,
(II.1.33)

Then, the average laminate strain and its curvature tensor can be calculated as follows:

{ϵ0} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {N }lam + [b]lam ⋅ {M }lam,

{κ}lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {N }lam + [d]lam ⋅ {M }lam.

Equivalent moduli corresponding to the calculated stiffness matrices A and D are often computed. We follow the expressions presented in [Pal99]:

II.1.6 Out-of-plane shear of laminate

One version of the out-of-plane shear theory for laminates, based on information found in Chapter 13 of [Sof04a], is presented here. However, a more general version of the calculation is given, which takes the xy and yz components of the out-of-plane shear stress into account simultaneously.

II.1.6.1 Out-of-plane shear equilibrium equations

In Chapter 13 of [Sof04a], the equilibrium in direction x of a small portion of the material (Figure II.1.4) of lengths dx and dz respectively:

∂τxz ∂z + ∂σxx ∂x = 0.

Similarly, the equilibrium of a portion dx of the full laminate is given globally by the expression:

Qxz -∂Mxx ∂x = 0.

PICT

Figure II.1.4: Out-of-plane XZ shear equilibrium in a laminate (from [Sof04a]).

Then, in Chapter 13 of [Sof04a], developments are carried out to calculate the relations between Qxz and τxz. All the developments are based on the local x equilibrium relation.

In this document, a more general presentation of the out-of-plane shear behavior of laminates is given. The x and y components of in-plane local equilibrium are written as follows:

σxx,x + τxy,y + τxz,z = 0,
(II.1.34)

τxy,x + σyy,y + τyz,z = 0.
(II.1.35)

Correspondingly, a global equilibrium is expressed by the two equations:

Mxx,x + Mxy,y = Qxz,
(II.1.36)

Mxy,x + Myy,y = Qyz.
(II.1.37)

These equations will be developed and will ultimately allow calculation of τxz and τyz from the global shear Qxz and Qyz.

II.1.6.2 Triangular distribution of in-plane stresses

In most expressions below, the components of tensors are expressed in laminate axes. Therefore, the “lam” underscore is often added to the different quantities used in the equations.

First, the components of the Cauchy stress tensor are calculated. However, a few simplifying assumptions must be made. The strain tensor components are calculated from the laminate average strain tensor and curvature as follows:

{ϵ}lam = {ϵ0} lam + z {κ}lam,

{ϵ0} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {N }lam + [b]lam ⋅ {M }lam,

{κ}lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {N }lam + [d]lam ⋅ {M }lam.

(The thermo-elastic contributions have been neglected.) In most out-of-plane shear theories presented in the literature, a decoupling between in-plane load response and out-of-plane shear response is assumed, allowing several terms in the equations to be neglected:

{ϵ0} lam ≈ [b]lam ⋅ {M }lam,

{κ}lam ≈ [d]lam ⋅ {M }lam.

A simple expression of the in-plane laminate deformation tensor is then written:

{ϵ}lam = {ϵ0} lam + z {κ}lam.

Then, the components of Cauchy stress tensor are given by:

{σ}lam(x,y,z) = [C]lam(z) ⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam) ⋅ {M }lam(x,y).
(II.1.38)

In this last expression, the 3 × 3 matrix [C]lam(z) corresponds to the plies in-plane moduli expressed in laminate axes. It depends on z because the components generally change from one ply to another. However, it is assumed that the components of the moduli matrix are constant in each ply.

Note that, in the local and global equilibrium relations (II.1.34) to (II.1.37), only partial derivatives of bending moments and Cauchy stress tensor components appear. The decoupling between the out-of-plane shear behavior and the absolute bending in laminate is assumed. However, as shown by expressions (II.1.36) and (II.1.37), the out-of-plane shear is related to the gradient of bending moment. Equation (II.1.38) is then differentiated with respect to x and y:

{ σxx,x(x,y,z) σyy,x(x,y,z) τxy,x(x,y,z) } lam = [C]lam(z)⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam)⋅ {Mxx,x(x,y) Myy,x(x,y) Mxy,x(x,y) } lam,

{ σxx,y(x,y,z) σyy,y(x,y,z) τxy,y(x,y,z) } lam = [C]lam(z)⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam)⋅ {Mxx,y(x,y) Myy,y(x,y) Mxy,y(x,y) } lam.

At this point, it is no longer necessary to assume a dependence of the gradient of bending moments with respect to x and y. The same is true for the gradient of the Cauchy stress tensor. A new notation is also introduced:

[F ]lam(z) = [C]lam(z) ⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam) .

Then, the components of Cauchy stress tensor gradient are obtained from the components of bending moments gradient with the following expression:

{ σxx,x(z) σyy,x(z) τxy,x(z) σxx,y(z) σyy,y(z) τxy,y(z) } lam = [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ]⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam.
(II.1.39)

II.1.6.3 Out-of-plane shear stress partial derivative equations

Note that the global equilibrium equation (II.1.36) and (II.1.37) do not contain the components Mxx,y and Myy,x of the bending moments tensor. Similarly, the local equilibrium equations do not contain the components σxx,y and σyy,x of the Cauchy stress tensor. Then, these components can be considered as zero without modifying the result of the developments. The corresponding lines and columns could be removed from the equations (II.1.39).

In fact, one can do better than that. The local equilibrium equations (II.1.34) and (II.1.35) are rewritten as follows:

{ τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [ - 10 00 0 - 1 0 0 - 1 0 - 1 0 ]⋅ {σxx,x(z) σyy,x(z) τxy,x(z) σxx,y(z) σyy,y(z) τxy,y(z) } lam.
(II.1.40)

The substitution of (II.1.39) in (II.1.40) leads to the following expression:

{ τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [ - 10 00 0 - 1 0 0 - 1 0 - 1 0 ] ⋅ [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ] ⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam.(II.1.41)

This yields a new expression of the relation between bending moment gradients and out-of-plane shear stress. A new matrix is first calculated as follows:

[J ]lam(z) = - [100001 0 0 1 0 1 0 ]⋅ [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ] .

[J ]lam(z) is a 2 × 6 matrix that relates the out-of-plane shear stress component partial derivatives with respect to z to the in-plane bending moment components:

{ τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [J ]lam(z)⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam.
(II.1.42)

The matrix [J ]lam(z) depends on z for two reasons: because of the triangular distribution of strains through the thickness, and because material moduli depend on plies material and orientation. In a given ply of index k, one has:

[Jk] lam(z) = [J0k] lam + z [J1k] lam,

in which the components of the two matrices [J0k] lam and [J1k] lam are constant. Similarly, one can write a polynomial expression for [F ]lam(z) if one splits the definition by plies:

[Fk] lam(z) = [Ck] lam ⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam) , = ( [Ck] lam ⋅ [b]lam) + ( [Ck] lam ⋅ [d]lam) z, = [F0k] lam + [F1k] lamz.

The following two relations hold:

[J0k] lam = - [P1]⋅ [ [F0k] lam 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F0k] lam ] ,

[J1k] lam = - [P1]⋅ [ [F1k] lam 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F1k] lam ] .

II.1.6.4 Integration of out-of-plane shear stress equation

The out-of-plane shear stress components are obtained by integration of expression (II.1.42) along the thickness. This leads to:

{ τxz(z) τyz(z) } lam = (∫ z0z [J ] lam(z) dz)⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam+ { τxz(z0) τyz(z0) } lam.

Zero shear stress along the bottom surface of the laminate is assumed. This corresponds to a free surface, or at least to a surface that receives no contact forces in direction x and y. This assumption leads to the following expression:

{ τxz(z) τyz(z) } lam = (∫ z0z [J ] lam(z) dz) ⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam, = [V ]lam(z) ⋅ {∇ ⁡M }lam, (II.1.43)

in which a new matrix notation is introduced:

[V ]lam(z) = ∫ z0z [J ] lam(z) dz,

and a new vector notation for the gradient of bending moments:

{∇ ⁡M }lam = { Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam.

The new matrix [V ]lam(z) is of course a 2 × 6 matrix.

An explicit expression of the integrated matrix is calculated ply-by-ply, from bottom layer to top layer. If zk-1 ≤ z ≤ zk:

[V ]lam(z) = [V k] lam(z), = ∫ z0z [Jk] lam(z) dz, = [V k] lam(zk-1) + ∫ zk-1z [Jk] lam(z) dz, = [V k] lam(zk-1) + ∫ zk-1z [J 0k] lam + z [J1k] lam dz, = [V k] lam(zk-1) + [J0k] lam (z - zk-1) + [J1k] lamz2 - z k-12 2 , = [V 0k] lam + [V 1k] lamz + [V 2k] lamz2. (II.1.44)

In expression (II.1.44), three new matrices are introduced, calculated as follows:

[V 0k] lam = [V k] lam(zk-1) - [J0k] lamzk-1 - [J1k] lamzk-12 2 ,

[V 1k] lam = [J0k] lam,
(II.1.45)

[V 2k] lam = [J1k] lam 2 .

Note that the expression above involve the a priori unknown quantity [V k] lam(zk-1). To calculate this expression, the continuity of [V k] lam(z) across ply interfaces is used:

[V k] lam(zk-1) = [V k-1] lam(zk-1).

This relation corresponds to the continuity of out-of-plane shear stress at each interface between two consecutive plies, and is developed as follows.

[V 0k] lam = [V k-1] lam(zk-1) - [J0k] lamzk-1 - [J1k] lamzk-12 2 , = [V 0k-1] lam + [V 1k-1] lamzk-1 + [V 2k-1] lamzk-12 - [J 0k] lamzk-1 - [J1k] lamzk-12 2 , = [V 0k-1] lam + ( [V 1k-1] lam - [J0k] lam) zk-1 + ( [V 2k-1] lam - [J1k] lam 2 ) zk-12. (II.1.46)

The last line of this development enables recursive calculation of the components of [V 0k] lam from the bottom ply to the top ply. For bottom ply, the condition τxz(z0) = τyz(z0) = 0 leads to the following expressions:

[V 1] lam(z0) = [V 01] lam + [V 11] lamz0 + [V 21] lamz02 = 0.

[V 01] lam = - [V 11] lamz0 - [V 21] lamz02, = - [J01] lamz0 - [J11] lam 2 z02. (II.1.47) Then, it becomes possible to calculate recursively the [V 0i] lam matrices.

It is easy to verify that the condition τxz(z0) = τyz(z0) = 0 also ensures that τxz(zN) = τyz(zN) = 0. Indeed:

[V ]lam(zN) = ∫ z0zN [J ]lam(z) dz, = - [P1] ⋅∫ z0zN [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ] dz, = - [P1] ⋅ [ ∫ z0zN [F ]lam(z) dz 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 ∫ z0zN [F ]lam(z) dz ].

The last line of previous equation contains twice the integral of [F ]lam(z) along the laminate thickness. This integral is expanded as follows:

∫ z0zN [F ]lam(z) dz = ∫ z0zN [C]lam(z) ⋅ ( [b]lam + z [d]lam) dz, = (∫ z0zN [C]lam(z) dz) ⋅ [b]lam + (∫ z0zN z [C]lam(z) dz) ⋅ [d]lam, = [A]lam ⋅ [b]lam + [B]lam ⋅ [d]lam.

On the other hand, equation (II.1.33) allows one to write:

[ [A] [B] [B ] [D] ] ⋅ [ [a] [b] [b ] T [d] ] = [ [A] ⋅ [a] + [B] ⋅ [b]T [A] ⋅ [b] + [B] ⋅ [d] [B] ⋅ [a] + [D] ⋅ [b]T [B] ⋅ [b] + [D] ⋅ [d] ], = [ [I] [0] [0 ] [I] ].

(The “lam” subscript has been omitted for conciseness.) The identification of the right upper corner of the last expression with the integration of [F ]lam(z) along the laminate thickness shows that this integral must be zero. Consequently:

[V ]lam(zN) = 0, τxz(zN) = 0, τyz(zN) = 0.

It is worth noting that the ply out-of-plane shear moduli have not been used in the calculations to obtain (II.1.43). The out-of-plane shear stresses depend only on laminate in-plane bending moments and ply in-plane material properties. As shown in section II.1.6.6, the calculation of out-of-plane shear strains caused by out-of-plane shear forces requires the knowledge of ply out-of-plane material constants.

II.1.6.5 Approximations with out-of-plane shear forces

Expression (41) shows that out-of-plane shear stresses in the laminate are related to partial derivatives of bending moment components, but not directly to out-of-plane shear force components. Intuitively, one would have expected a dependence of out-of-plane shear stresses on laminate out-of-plane shear forces:

In the end, we propose a calculation method based on out-of-plane shear force components because this is what most software do. The rest of this section is devoted to the presentation of different approaches to calculate dependence on shear forces.

II.1.6.5.1 The “(μx,μy)” approach

The goal is to eliminate the six x and y partial derivatives of bending moment tensor components from the previous expression, by using the global equilibrium equations (II.1.36) and (II.1.37). This leaves some arbitrary choice in the determination of dependence with respect to the out-of-plane shear. For example:

Mxx,x = μxQxz, Myy,x = 0, Mxy,y = (1 - μx)Qxz, Mxx,y = 0, Myy,y = μyQyz, Mxy,x = (1 - μy)Qyz.

{ Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] ⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam. The choice μx = μy = 1∕2 gives more symmetry to the relation between {τ }lam(z) and {Q}lam(z). Indeed, this choice leads to: { τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [J ]lam(z) ⋅ {Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam, = [J ]lam(z) ⋅ [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] ⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam, = -1 2 [ 100001 0 0 1 0 1 0 ] ⋅ [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ] ⋅ [10 0 0 01 0 0 01 1 0 ] ⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam.

It seems however that the choice μx = μy = 1 is more common.

If the (μx,μy) approach is adopted, a new 2 × 2 matrix can be introduced:

[X]lam(z) = [J ]lam(z) ⋅ [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] , = - [100001 0 0 1 0 1 0 ] ⋅ [ [F ]lam(z) 000 0 0 0 000 000 0 0 0 000 [F ]lam(z) ] ⋅ [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] .

This matrix allows one to write a simple relation between out-of-plane shear stresses in laminate and the total out-of-plane shear force:

{ τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [X]lam(z)⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam.

The [V ]lam(z) 2 × 6 matrix introduced in equation (II.1.43) also allows the introduction of a new 2 × 2 matrix:

[Y ]lam(z) = [V ]lam(z) ⋅ [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] , = ∫ z0z [X] lam(z) dz. (II.1.48)

II.1.6.5.2 “Uncoupled X-Y” approach

The presentation of laminate out-of-plane shear theory in Nastran Reference Manual [Sof04a] is based on a kind of beam theory in which laminate shear response is calculated separately in directions X and Y. This corresponds to a simplification of our (μx,μy) approach in which:

We investigated different ways to reproduce Nastran out-of-plane shear stress calculations with FeResPost and found a few modifications that allow the calculation of out-of-plane shear stresses very similar to those produced by Nastran. We modify the calculation method as follows:

1.

The 6 × 6 [ABBD]lam matrix is modified in such a way that one no longer has a coupling between XX, Y Y and XY components. Practically, this is done by setting matrix components responsible for this coupling to zero:

[ABBD2] lam = [ A11 0 0 0 A22 0 0 0 A33 B11 0 0 0 B22 0 0 0 B33 B11 0 0 0 B22 0 0 0 B33 D11 0 0 0 D22 0 0 0 D33 ] .

(The non-diagonal components of the four 3 × 3 matrices have been set to zero.) Note that the membrane-flexural coupling is maintained by this modification.

2.

Corresponding to this [ABBD2] lam matrix, we calculate a compliance matrix:

[abbd2] lam = [ABBD2] lam-1.

This new matrix has the same structure as [ABBD2] lam. (XX, Y Y and XY components are also mutually decoupled.)

3.

Uncoupling of XX, Y Y and XY components is also done for the 3 × 3 material stiffness matrix [C]lam(z):

[C2] lam(z) = [ C11lam(z) 0 0 0 C22lam(z) 0 0 0 C33lam(z) ] .
4.

Then, a new version of the [F ]lam(z) matrix is calculated:

[F2] lam(z) = [C2] lam(z) ⋅ ( [b2] lam + z [d2] lam) .

This new matrix also uncouples XX, Y Y and XY components of the equations.

5.

Finally, the XY components are no longer needed in the calculation. Practically, this means that equation (II.1.40) becomes

{ τxz,z(z) τyz,z(z) } lam = [ - 1000 00 0 0 0 0 - 1 0 ]⋅ {σxx,x(z) σyy,x(z) τxy,x(z) σxx,y(z) σyy,y(z) τxy,y(z) } lam,

and the relation between gradient of moments tensor, and out-of-plane shear forces can be written

{ Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = [ 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 ]⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam.
6.

The uncoupling also affects the calculation of out-of-plane shear stiffness matrix. (See section II.1.6.6.) In the corresponding equations in sections II.1.6.3 and II.1.6.4, matrix [F ]lam(z) is replaced by [F2] lam(z). A consequence of this approximation is that the out-of-plane shear stiffness matrix [G]lam is diagonal.

The “Uncoupled X-Y” approach is an impoverished version of the “(μx,μy)” approach.

II.1.6.5.3 “Resolution in shear force axes” approach

Using the “(μx,μy)” approaches, a special physical meaning is implicitly assigned to the laminate axes. This choice is arbitrary, however. For example, one can write the relation between bending moments and out-of-plane shear force in a coordinate system related to the shear loading direction.

Let us define a coordinate system associated with the shear loading, defined as follows:

eshrx = 1 Q { Qxz Qyz } ,

eshry = 1 Q { - Qyz Qxz } .

in which Q is the shear force magnitude. In this new coordinate system, the shear force vector has only one non-zero component:

Qshr = { Q 0 } .

Then, a simple relation between bending moments and out-of-plane shear force can be assumed:

Mxx,x = Q,

all the other components of bending moments gradient being zero. As the gradient of bending moments tensor is an order 3 tensor, previous relation can be written in laminate axes as follows:

{ Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = 1 Qxzlam ⋅ Qxzlam + Qyzlam ⋅ Qyzlam { Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam } .
(II.1.49)

It is easy to verify that this relation between shear forces and bending moments is non-linear. For example:

{ Qyz Qxz } lam = { 1 0 }  leads to  { Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = { 1 0 0 0 0 0 } ,
(II.1.50)

{ Qyz Qxz } lam = { 0 1 }  leads to  { Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = { 0 0 0 0 1 0 }
(II.1.51)

and

{ Qyz Qxz } lam = { 1 1 }  leads to  { Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = { 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 } .
(II.1.52)

Clearly, the gradient of bending moments tensor in (II.1.52) is not the sum of corresponding tensors in (II.1.50) and (II.1.51), but the out-of-plane shear force in (II.1.52) is the sum of corresponding vectors in (II.1.50) and (II.1.51). This demonstrates the non-linearity of an approach based on a calculation in shear loading axes.

II.1.6.5.4 Comparison of the three approaches

The main disadvantage of the (μx,μy) approach is that the laminate out-of-plane shear equations lose their objectivity with respect to rotations of the laminate axes around axis z, as illustrated by the example described in section IV.3.5. (This example also allows estimation of the effects of the approximation on the precision of results given by the theory.)

On the other hand, the (μx,μy) approach leads to linear calculations, which is an advantage compared to the “resolution in shear force axes” approach. Indeed, the “resolution in shear force axes” approach is somewhat paradoxical in this respect, as in many cases the laminate out-of-plane shear stress will be the only non-linear response of an otherwise linear problem.

This means that none of the three approaches is perfect, and the imperfections result from the fact that both approaches are approximations of the reality. Both approaches are inaccurate, and it is not possible to decide which one is better. In practical problems, the three approaches are expected to give good results.

To simplify the notations, we rewrite equation (II.1.49) as follows:

{∇ ⁡M }lam = {∇ ⁡M }lam ( {Qs} lam) .

In fact, this notation also applies to the (μx,μy) approach, except that the function is then linear:

{∇ ⁡M }lam = {∇ ⁡M }lam ( {Qs} lam) , = [ μx 0 0 0 0 (1 - μx) 0 0 0 μ y (1 - μy) 0 ] ⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam, = [P2] lam (μx,μy) ⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam.

Finally, we summarize below our recommendations regarding the calculation of out-of-plane shear in laminates:

Again, the three approaches are approximate, and none of them is better than the others as far as result accuracy is concerned.

II.1.6.6 Out-of-plane laminate shear stiffness

A linear relation between out-of-plane shear components of the strain tensor and the corresponding components of the Cauchy stress tensor is assumed:

{ γxz(z) γyz(z) } lam = [g]lam-1(z)⋅ {τxz(z) τyz(z) } lam.

To this relation should correspond a relation between the average out-of-plane shear strains and the out-of-plane shear force:

{ Γxz Γyz } lam = [G]lam-1⋅ {Qxz Qyz } lam.
(II.1.53)

This section attempts to justify the calculation of the [G] lam-1 matrix in the previous expression.

II.1.6.6.1 Limitations of shear stiffness calculation

By writing equation (II.1.53), one implicitly makes the assumption that there is a linear relation between the average out-of-plane shear strain tensor components and the out-of-plane shear forces tensor components. We have seen however in section II.1.6.5 that the calculation of laminate out-of-plane shear stress tensor in out-of-plane shear forces loading axes leads to a non-linear dependence of shear stresses on shear forces. A consequence of this non-linear dependence is that expression (II.1.53) is not valid if laminate out-of-plane shear equilibrium equations are solved in shear loading axes.

The developments in current section II.1.6.6 assume that the (μx,μy) approach of section II.1.6.5 is adopted for stiffness calculations. This does not prevent us from using the “out-of-plane shear forces loading axes” approach for the calculation of ply out-of-plane shear stresses however:

As the purpose of FeResPost and of its composite classes is to post-process finite element results, it makes sense to adopt approaches similar to those of other finite element solvers. Note, however, that other composite calculation software, like ESAComp, sometimes adopt different approaches.

II.1.6.6.2 Introduction of new notations

In the definition of loadings, the out-of-plane components of shear force Q can be replaced by average out-of-plane shear stress τ¯. Then the conversion between these two types of components is done simply by multiplication or division by laminate total thickness t:

τ¯ = Q t .

Notations are introduced that simplify the writing of equations:

{Γs} * = { Γxz Γyz } *,

{Qs} * = { Qxz Qyz } *,

{τs¯} * = { τ¯xz τ¯yz } *.

In these expressions the * subscripts can be replaced by a symbol specific to the coordinate system in which the components of the vector are expressed (for example "load", "ply", "lam"...).

II.1.6.6.3 Energetic approach

The components of matrix [g]lam(z) are easily obtained from the orientation and material of plies. The components of [G] lam are obtained by a calculation of out-of-plane shear strain surface energy. An estimate of this surface energy is first calculated using the local expression of shear strains:

Wshearlocal = 1 2 ∫ z0zN {γs(z)}T lam ⋅ {τs(z)} lam dz, = 1 2 ∫ z0zN {τs(z)}T lam ⋅ [g]lam-1(z) ⋅ {τ s(z)} lam dz, = 1 2 ∫ z0zN {Qs}T lam ⋅ [Y ]T lam(z) ⋅ [g]lam-1(z) ⋅ [Y ] lam(z) ⋅ {Qs} lam dz, = 1 2 {Qs}T lam ⋅ [∫ z0zN [Y ]T lam(z) ⋅ [g]lam-1(z) ⋅ [Y ] lam(z) dz]lam ⋅ {Qs} lam. (II.1.54)

Note that we have used the [Y ]lam(z) introduced by equation (II.1.48) in section II.1.6.5. This is possible only because we use the (μx,μy) approach.

Surface energy can also be estimated from the out-of-plane shear global equation:

Wshearglobal = 1 2 {Γs(z)}T lam ⋅ {Qs} lam, = 1 2 {Qs}T lam ⋅ [G]lam-1 ⋅ {Q s} lam. (II.1.55)

Then, as there is only one surface energy, Wshearglobal = Wshearlocal and one should have

[G]lam-1 = ∫ z0zN [Y ]T lam(z) ⋅ [g]lam-1(z) ⋅ [Y ] lam(z) dz, = ∫ z0zN [U ]lam(z) dz.

Here again, the integration can be calculated ply-by-ply. More precisely, the following is computed on ply k:

[Uk] lam(z) = [Y k]T lam(z) ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y k] lam(z), = [U0k] lam + [U1k] lamz + [U2k] lamz2 + [U 3k] lamz3 + [U 4k] lamz4.

where

[U0k] lam = [Y 0k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 0k] lam, [U1k] lam = [Y 0k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 1k] lam + [Y 1k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 0k] lam, [U2k] lam = [Y 0k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 2k] lam + [Y 1k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 1k] lam + [Y 2k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 0k] lam, [U3k] lam = [Y 1k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 2k] lam + [Y 2k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 1k] lam, [U4k] lam = [Y 2k]T lam ⋅ [gk] lam-1 ⋅ [Y 2k] lam.

Then the integral above develops as follows:

[G]lam-1 = ∫ z0zN [U ]lam(z) dz, = ∑ k=1N ∫ zk-1zk [Uk] lam(z) dz, = ∑ k=1N ∫ zk-1zk (∑ i=04 [U ik] lamzi) dz, = ∑ k=1N (∑ i=04 [U ik] lam ∫ zk-1zk zi dz), = ∑ k=1N ∑ i=04 ( [U ik] lamzki+1 - z k-1i+1 i + 1 ) .

The stiffness matrix [G]lam and the compliance matrix [G-1] lam are defined as above. Note that once the laminate out-of-plane shear stiffness and compliance matrices are known, the laminate out-of-plane shear equivalent moduli are calculated from the components of the compliance matrix with the following expressions:

Gxz = 1 t ⋅ [G-1] 11,

Gyz = 1 t ⋅ [G-1] 22,

in which the [G-1] lam matrix has first been rotated into the appropriate axes.

II.1.6.7 Calculation algorithm for shear stiffness

The calculation sequence used to calculate the laminate out-of-plane shear stiffness properties, and the out-of-plane shear stresses related to a given loading of the laminate, is described below.

The calculation sequence is described below. It involves two loops on the laminate layers.

1.

Calculate laminate in-plane and flexural properties. This is necessary because the matrices [b]lam and [d]lam are needed to calculate out-of-plane shear properties.

2.

The 2 × 2 matrix [G]lam-1 is initialized to zero.

3.

Then for each layer k with 1 ≤ k ≤ N, the following sequence of operations is performed:

(a)

The 3 × 3 matrix of in-plane stiffness coefficients in laminate axes [Ck] lam is computed. For other calculations, properties like the laminate thickness t and the positions zk of different layer interfaces are also needed.

(b)

This matrix is used to calculate the two matrices [F0k] lam and [F1k] lam. (See section II.1.6.3 for more details.) With:

[Fk] lam(z) = [F0k] lam + z [F1k] lam.
(c)

Two other 2 × 2 matrices [X0k] lam and [X1k] lam are then computed. (See section II.1.6.3.) With:

[Xk] lam(z) = [X0k] lam + z [X1k] lam.
(d)

The [Y ik] lam 2 × 2 matrices are then computed:

[Y 0k] lam = [Y 0k-1] lam + ( [Y 1k-1] lam - [X0k] lam) zk-1 + ( [Y 2k-1] lam - [X1k] lam 2 ) zk-12,

[Y 1k] lam = [X0k] lam,

[Y 2k] lam = [X1k] lam 2 .

As the expression of [Y 0k] lam is recursive, a separate expression is needed for the first value:

[Y 01] lam = - [Y 11] lamz0 - [Y 21] lamz02. = - [X01] lamz0 -1 2 [X11] lamz02.
(e)

The [Uik] lam 2 × 2 matrices are computed. (See the end of section II.1.6.6 for the expressions to be used.) The following term is then added to [G]lam-1:

[G]lam-1 = [G] lam-1 + ∑ i=04 ( [U ik] lamzki+1 - z k-1i+1 i + 1 ) .
4.

At the end of the loop on layers, the shear stiffness matrix [G]lam is calculated by inversion of [G]lam-1.

An out-of-plane shear compliance matrix is also defined, calculated as follows:

[g]lam = [G]lam-1.

This matrix allows calculation of the laminate out-of-plane shear moduli:

Gxz = 1 t ⋅ g11,

Gyz = 1 t ⋅ g22,

Note that the values calculated above do not correspond to an out-of-plane shear stiffness of a material equivalent to the defined laminate. This can be verified by defining a laminate with a single ply of orthotropic material: one will observe that Gxz = Gyz = 5G∕6 in which G is the material shear modulus. (The usual 5∕6 factor in shell theory is recovered.)

II.1.6.8 Ply out-of-plane shear stresses

II.1.6.8.1 With (μx,μy) approach

When the (μx,μy) approach is adopted, [Y k] lam(z) matrices allow the calculation of out-of-plane shear stress from the global out-of-plane shear force:

[Y k] lam(z) = [Y 0k] lam + [Y 1k] lamz + [Y 2k] lamz2,

{τs(z)} lam = [Y ]lam(z) ⋅ {Qs} lam.

In practice, stresses in ply axes are of interest, rather than in laminate axes. If ξ is the orientation of the ply in the laminate axes, then:

{τs(z)} ply = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ {τs(z)} lam.

Thus:

{τs(z)} ply = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ [Y ]lam(z) ⋅ {Qs} lam, = [Y ]plylam(z) ⋅ {Qs} lam.

A 2 × 2 matrix [Y ]plylam is stored for each station through the laminate thickness where out-of-plane shear stress might be requested. This is done at the top, mid and bottom surfaces in each ply, meaning that 3N 2 × 2 matrices [Y j] plylam are stored in the ClaLam object.

II.1.6.8.2 With “resolution in shear force axes” approach

The components of the bending moments gradient in laminate axes are first estimated with equation (II.1.49):

{∇ ⁡M }lam = { Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = 1 Qxzlam ⋅ Qxzlam + Qyzlam ⋅ Qyzlam { Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam } .

Then, the laminate out-of-plane shear stresses can be estimated by an expression like (II.1.43):

{ τxz(z) τyz(z) } lam = [V ]lam(z)⋅ {∇ ⁡M }lam.

In this expression, [V ]lam(z) is given by (II.1.44):

[V ]lam(z) = [V 0k] lam + [V 1k] lamz + [V 2k] lamz2.

The three 2 × 6 matrices [V 0k] lam, [V 1k] lam and [V 2k] lam are calculated recursively using the expressions (II.1.46), (II.1.45) and (II.1.45):

[V 0k] lam = [V 0k-1] lam + ( [V 1k-1] lam - [J0k] lam) zk-1 + ( [V 2k-1] lam - [J1k] lam 2 ) zk-12.

[V 1k] lam = [J0k] lam,

[V 2k] lam = [J1k] lam 2 .

To resolve the recursion for [V 0k] lam, an estimate for the first ply is needed, given by (II.1.47):

[V 01] lam = - [V 11] lamz0 - [V 21] lamz02.

Again, out-of-plane shear stresses in ply axes are of more interest than those in laminate axes.

{τs(z)} ply = [S+] (ξ) ⋅ [V ]lam(z) ⋅ {∇ ⁡M }lam, = [V ]plylam(z) ⋅ {∇ ⁡M }lam.

A 2 × 6 matrix [V ]plylam is stored for each station through the laminate thickness where out-of-plane shear stress might be requested. This is done at the top, mid and bottom surfaces in each ply, meaning that 3N 2 × 6 matrices [V j] plylam are stored in the ClaLam object.

II.1.7 CTE and CME calculations

A linear dependence of the temperature on the location through the laminate thickness is assumed:

T(z) = T0 + zT,z.

Similarly, the water uptake depends linearly on z:

H(z) = H0 + zH,z.

The calculation of laminate response to hygrometric loading is very similar to its response to thermo-elastic loading. Therefore, the following developments are carried out for thermo-elastic loading only, and are then transposed to hygrothermal loading.

II.1.7.1 In-plane and flexural thermo-elastic behavior

The stresses induced in plies for a thermo-elastic loading are calculated assuming that the material strain components are all constrained to zero. Equation (II.1.21) becomes:

{σ}ply = -ΔT [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply.

In laminate axes, the equation is rewritten:

{σ}lam = -ΔT [C]lam ⋅ {α}lam.

Substituting the assumed temperature profile in the equation gives:

{σ}lam = -[(T0 - Tref) + zT,z] [C]lam ⋅ {α}lam.

The corresponding laminate in-plane force tensor is obtained by integrating the Cauchy stress tensor along the thickness:

{N }lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2 {σ} lam dz, = -∫ -h∕2h∕2[(T 0 - Tref) + zT,z] [C]lam ⋅ {α}lam dz, = - (∫ -h∕2h∕2 [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz) (T0 - Tref) - (∫ -h∕2h∕2z [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz)T,z, = - {αEh}lam(T0 - Tref) - {αEh2} lamT,z.

In the previous expression, two new symbols have been introduced that are calculated as follows:

{αEh}lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2 [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {α} lamk (z k - zk-1) . (II.1.56)

{αEh2} lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2z [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {α} lamk (zk2 - z k-12 2 ) . (II.1.57) Similarly the bending moment tensor is obtained by integrating the Cauchy stress tensor multiplied by z along the thickness: {M }lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2z {σ} lam dz, = -∫ -h∕2h∕2z[(T 0 - Tref) + zT,z] [C]lam ⋅ {α}lam dz, = - (∫ -h∕2h∕2z [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz) (T0 - Tref) - (∫ -h∕2h∕2z2 [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz)T,z, = - {αEh2} lam(T0 - Tref) - {αEh3} lamT,z.

In the previous expression, one new symbol has been introduced:

{αEh3} lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2z2 [C] lam ⋅ {α}lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {α} lamk (zk3 - z k-13 3 ) . (II.1.58)

Because of the linearity of all the equations, the thermo-elastic loading may be considered as an additional loading applied to the laminate, and if an additional imposition of average in-plane strain and curvature is considered, the laminate in-plane forces and bending moments are given by:

{ {N }lam {M }lam } = [ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } - { {αEh}lam {αEh2} lam } (T0 - Tref) - { {αEh2} lam {αEh3} lam } T,z.(II.1.59)

Using relation (II.1.33), the previous expression is reversed as follows:

{ {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } = [ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {N }lam {M }lam } + [ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {αEh}lam {αEh2} lam } (T0 - Tref) + [ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {αEh2} lam {αEh3} lam } T,z.(II.1.60)

In the last expression, four new quantities can be identified:

{α0ϵ} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {αEh}lam + [b]lam {αEh2} lam,
(II.1.61)

{α1ϵ} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {αEh2} lam + [b]lam {αEh3} lam,
(II.1.62)

{α0κ} lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {αEh}lam + [d]lam {αEh2} lam,
(II.1.63)

{α1κ} lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {αEh2} lam + [d]lam {αEh3} lam.
(II.1.64)

So that finally, the “compliance” equation is:

{ {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } = [ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {N }lam {M }lam } + { {α0ϵ} lam {α 0κ} lam } (T0 - Tref) + { {α1ϵ} lam {α 1κ} lam } T,z.(II.1.65)

II.1.7.2 Out-of-plane shear thermo-elastic behavior

Starting with the out-of-plane shear constitutive equation (II.1.28) and the expression defining the out-of-plane shear force vectors {Qs} lam, developments similar to those of section II.1.7.1 are carried out, defining the following quantities:

{αsGh}lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2 [g] lam ⋅ {αs} lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [g] lamk ⋅ {α s} lamk (z k - zk-1) . (II.1.66)

{αsGh2} lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2z [g] lam ⋅ {αs} lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [g] lamk ⋅ {α s} lamk (zk2 - z k-12 2 ) . (II.1.67) They are used in the expression:

{Q}lam = [G]lam ⋅ {Γ} lam - {αsGh}lam(T0 - Tref) - {αsGh2} lamT,z.
(II.1.68)

Correspondingly, the laminate out-of-plane shear CTE vectors are defined:

{α0s} lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {αGh} lam
(II.1.69)

{α1s} lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {αGh2} lam
(II.1.70)

These two expressions allow one to write the inverse of (II.1.68):

[Γ] lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {Q} lam + {α0s} lam(T0 - Tref) + {α1s} lamT,z.

II.1.7.3 Hygrometric behavior of laminates

The results for thermo-elastic behavior are transposed below, simply by replacing the CTE α by the CME β in the definitions and equations.

{βEh}lam = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {β} lamk (z k - zk-1) , (II.1.71)

{βEh2} lam = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {β} lamk (zk2 - z k-12 2 ) , (II.1.72) {βEh3} lam = ∑ k=1N [C] lamk ⋅ {β} lamk (zk3 - z k-13 3 ) , (II.1.73)

{ {N }lam {M }lam } = [ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } - { {βEh}lam {βEh2} lam } (H0 - Href) - { {βEh2} lam {βEh3} lam } H,z, (II.1.74)

{β0ϵ} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {βEh}lam + [b]lam {βEh2} lam,
(II.1.75)

{β1ϵ} lam = [a]lam ⋅ {βEh2} lam + [b]lam {βEh3} lam,
(II.1.76)

{β0κ} lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {βEh}lam + [d]lam {βEh2} lam,
(II.1.77)

{β1κ} lam = [b]T lam ⋅ {βEh2} lam + [d]lam {βEh3} lam,
(II.1.78)

{ {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } = [ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {N }lam {M }lam } + { {β0ϵ} lam {β 0κ} lam } (H0 - Href) + { {β1ϵ} lam {β 1κ} lam } H,z, (II.1.79)

{βsGh}lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2 [g] lam ⋅ {βs} lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [g] lamk ⋅ {β s} lamk (z k - zk-1) , (II.1.80)

{βsGh2} lam = ∫ -h∕2h∕2z [g] lam ⋅ {βs} lam dz, = ∑ k=1N [g] lamk ⋅ {β s} lamk (zk2 - z k-12 2 ) , (II.1.81)

{Q}lam = [G]lam ⋅ {Γ} lam - {βsGh}lam(H0 - Href) - {βsGh2} lamH,z,

{β0s} lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {βGh} lam
(II.1.82)

{β1s} lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {βGh2} lam
(II.1.83)

[Γ] lam = [G]lam-1 ⋅ {Q} lam + {β0s} lam(H0 - Href) + {β1s} lamH,z.

II.1.7.4 Full sets of equations

Finally, the full set of constitutive equation written with stiffness matrices looks like:

[ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } = { {N }lam {M }lam } + { {αEh}lam {αEh2} lam } (T0 - Tref) + { {αEh2} lam {αEh3} lam } T,z + { {βEh}lam {βEh2} lam } (H0 - Href) + { {βEh2} lam {βEh3} lam } H,z, (II.1.84)

[G]lam ⋅ {Γ} lam = {Q}lam + {αsGh}lam(T0 - Tref) + {αsGh2} lamT,z + {βsGh}lam(H0 - Href) + {βsGh2} lamH,z.(II.1.85)

The two previous expressions are inverted as follows:

[ [a]lam [b]lam [b]T lam [d]lam ] ⋅ { {N }lam {M }lam } = { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } + { {α0ϵ} lam {α 0κ} lam } (T0 - Tref) + { {α1ϵ} lam {α 1κ} lam } T,z + { {β0ϵ} lam {β 0κ} lam } (H0 - Href) + { {β1ϵ} lam {β 1κ} lam } H,z, (II.1.86)

[G]lam-1 ⋅ {Q} lam = [Γ] lam - {α0s} lam(T0 - Tref) - {α1s} lamT,z - {β0s} lam(H0 - Href) - {β1s} lamH,z.(II.1.87)

II.1.8 Calculation of load response

A decoupling of the in-plane and flexural behavior of laminates on one side, and the out-of-plane shear behavior on the other side, is always assumed. These two aspects are discussed in sections II.1.8.1 and II.1.8.2 respectively.

II.1.8.1 In-plane and flexural response

Besides thermo-elastic or hygro-elastic loading, the composite classes of FeResPost allow the definition of different types of mechanical loads:

The type of loading is specified component-by-component. This means that a single loading may have some components imposed as normal forces and bending moments, with other components imposed as average strains, and other components as average stresses or flexural stresses. The mechanical part of loading is also characterized by a direction λ with respect to the laminate axes. The subscript “load” indicates that the components are given in loading axes. The laminate response is calculated as described below.

1.

The solver first checks if average or flexural stresses are imposed. If such components of the loading are found, they are converted to in-plane forces and bending moments with the following equations:

{N }load = h {σ0} load,

{M }load = h2 6 {σf} load,

in which h is the laminate thickness.

2.

The mechanical part of loading is characterized by a direction with respect to the laminate axes. This direction is given by an angle λ. In order to have laminate properties and loading given in the same coordinate system, the laminate stiffness matrices and CTE vectors are calculated in this new coordinate system. (It is more convenient for the elimination of components imposed as average strains or curvatures.) More precisely, the stiffness matrices and CTE vector are rotated with the following expressions:

[A]load = [T-](λ) ⋅ [A]lam ⋅ [T-′] (λ),

[B]load = [T-](λ) ⋅ [B]lam ⋅ [T-′] (λ),

[D]load = [T-](λ) ⋅ [D]lam ⋅ [T-′] (λ),

{αEh}load = [T-](λ) ⋅ {αEh}lam,

…

{βEh3} load = [T-](λ) ⋅ {βEh3} lam.

The calculation of CTE and CME related quantities is done only if the corresponding temperature or moisture contributions have been defined in the loading. The system of equations looks like:

[ [A]load [B]load [B]load [D]load ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} load {κ } load } = { {N }load {M }load } + { {αEh}load {αEh2} load } (T0 - Tref) + { {αEh2} load {αEh3} load } T,z + { {βEh}load {βEh2} load } (H0 - Href) + { {βEh2} load {βEh3} load } H,z.(II.1.88)

(Here again the CTE and CME related terms are optional.) In fact, one can write a single set of 6 equations with 6 unknowns. The general form of this system is

∑ j=1nK ijuj = bi, i = 1...n.
3.

Consider a case in which one component of vector uj is constrained to a certain value. For example uk = a. This equation replaces the kth equation of the system:

∑ j=1nK ijuj = bi, i = 1...n,i≠k uk = a.

The unknown uk can easily be eliminated from the linear system:

∑ j=1,j≠knK ijuj = bi - Kika, i = 1...n,i≠k uk = a.

The first line above corresponds to a new linear system of n - 1 equations with n - 1 unknowns. The set of two lines defines the algebraic operations that are performed in FeResPost when an average strain or curvature component is imposed.

In fact, the operation can be simplified. It is sufficient to replace line k in the linear system of equations by the constraint equation uk = a and perform the “usual” Gaussian elimination to solve the linear system of equations.

4.

When all the components of loading imposed as average strains or curvature have been eliminated from the linear system, a classical Gaussian elimination algorithm calculates the other unknowns of the system.

Then the components of tensors {ϵ0} and {κ} are known in loading axes.

5.

The normal forces and bending moments are then calculated in loading axes with the following equations:

{N }load = [A]load ⋅ {ϵ0} load + [B]load ⋅ {κ}load - {αEh}load(T0 - Tref) - {αEh2} loadT,z - {βEh}load(H0 - Href) - {βEh2} loadH,z, (II.1.89)

{M }load = [B]load ⋅ {ϵ0} load + [D]load ⋅ {κ}load - {αEh2} load(T0 - Tref) - {αEh3} loadT,z - {βEh2} load(H0 - Href) - {βEh3} loadH,z.(II.1.90)

(The CTE and CME related terms are optional.)

6.

If λ is the angle characterizing the loading orientation with respect to the laminate axes, a rotation of - λ of the two vectors gives the average strain and curvature tensors in laminate axes:

{ϵ0} lam = [T+′] (-λ) ⋅ {ϵ0} load,

{κ}lam = [T+′] (-λ) ⋅ {κ}load.

Similarly, the normal forces and bending moments components are re-expressed in laminate axes:

{N }lam = [T-](-λ) ⋅ {N }load,

{M }lam = [T-](-λ) ⋅ {M }load.
7.

For each ply, stresses and strains are calculated (if required) as follows:

(a)

The laminate average strain and curvature tensors are rotated to ply axes. If the ply is characterized by an angle ξ with respect to the laminate axes, the two tensors are rotated by the same angle ξ:

{ϵ0} ply = [T+′] (ξ) ⋅ {ϵ0} lam,

{κ}ply = [T+′] (ξ) ⋅ {κ}lam.

Note that, even though the components of these two tensors are now given in one of the plies coordinate system, they correspond to strain or curvature of the laminate at mid-thickness.

(b)

At the different stations through the thickness at which strains and stresses are required, the strain components are calculated with:

{ϵ}ply(z) = {ϵ0} ply + z {κ}ply.
(II.1.91)

In FeResPost z may have the values zinf, zmid, zsup. Then the stress components are given by:

{σ}ply(z) = [C]ply ⋅ {ϵ}ply(z) - [C]ply ⋅ ( {α}ply(T0 - Tref + zT,z) + {β}ply(H0 - Href + zH,z)) .(II.1.92)

(Here again the CTE and CME related terms are optional.) A particular version of the ply strain tensor that corresponds to ply stresses, but without thermo-elastic or moisture contribution, is calculated as follows:

{ϵMech} ply(z) = [c]ply ⋅ {σ}ply(z).

This version of the strain tensor is called the “Mechanical Strain Tensor” or “Equivalent Strain Tensor”. This is the version of the strain tensor that is used for the strain-based failure criteria. Note however that a “Total Strain” version of the criteria is also available.

At the end of the calculations, the laminate object which has been used to perform those calculations stores a few results:

The ply results may be used later to calculate failure indices or reserve factors.

II.1.8.2 Out-of-plane shear response

Some of the quantities calculated above, and stored in the ClaLam object are used to estimate laminate shear loading response.

The different steps of the calculation are described below:

1.

The first step of the calculation is to resolve the loading in out-of-plane shear forces in loading axes {Q}load (or {Γ} load), following the same approach as in section II.1.5, but with the following differences: the conversion of average out-of-plane shear strain to out-of-plane shear force components requires the knowledge of out-of-plane shear stiffness matrix in loading axes. This one is readily obtained by transforming the corresponding matrix in laminate axes:

[G]load = [S+] (λ) ⋅ [G]lam ⋅ [S-](λ).
2.

The out-of-plane shear loading can be expressed by specifying the out-of-plane shear forces, or the out-of-plane average shear strain, or a combination of the two. In all cases, the components are specified in loading axes.

If out-of-plane average shear forces are specified, the resolution of the following linear system of equations is used to calculate the corresponding out-of-plane shear strains:

[G]load ⋅ {Γ} load = {Q}load + {αsGh}load(T0 - Tref) + {αsGh2} loadT,z + {βsGh}load(H0 - Href) + {βsGh2} loadH,z.(II.1.93)

(The CTE and CME related terms are optional.) The resolution of this equation follows the same approach as for the in-plane and bending loading: a Gaussian elimination is performed in a 2 × 2 matrix. Constraints can be imposed if out-of-plane shear strains are specified for some components of the loading instead of out-of-plane lineic shear force.

3.

At this stage, whatever the type of loading applied to the laminate, {Γ} load is known. The lineic out-of-plane shear forces can then be obtained with

[Q]load = [G]load ⋅ {Γ} load - {α0s} load(T0 - Tref) - {α1s} loadT,z - {β0s} load(H0 - Href) - {β1s} loadH,z.(II.1.94)

(The CTE and CME related terms are optional.) Once {Q}load and {Γ} load are known, the corresponding loading in laminate axes is obtained with:

{Q}lam = [S-](λ) ⋅ {Q}load,

{Γ} lam = [S-](λ) ⋅ {Γ} load.
4.

For the calculation of ply out-of-plane shear stresses, a distinction is made depending on the calculation approach that has been adopted:

(a)

With (μx,μy) approach ply out-of-plane shear stress components are calculated at the different requested locations by:

{τsj(z)} ply = [Y j(z)] plylam ⋅ {Q s} lam,

in which the matrix [Y j] plylam is relative to the station at which the stress is requested.

(b)

If the “resolution in shear force axes” approach is adopted, an estimate of the gradient of bending moments tensor is first calculated with equation (II.1.49):

{ Mxx,x Myy,x Mxy,x Mxx,y Myy,y Mxy,y } lam = 1 Qxzlam ⋅ Qxzlam + Qyzlam ⋅ Qyzlam { Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q xzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q xzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qyzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam Qxzlam ⋅ Q yzlam ⋅ Q yzlam } .

Then, ply stresses are given by

{τsj(z)} ply = [V j(z)] plylam ⋅ {∇ ⁡M } lam,

in which the matrix [V j] plylam is relative to the station at which the stress is requested.

5.

Finally, for the stations where out-of-plane shear stresses have been calculated, the out-of-plane shear strain is also calculated using the corresponding ply material coefficients:

{γs(z)} ply = [g]ply-1 ⋅ {τ s(z)} ply + ( {α}ply(T0 - Tref + zT,z) + {β}ply(H0 - Href + zH,z)) .(II.1.95)

(The CTE and CME related terms are optional. This takes advantage of the “decoupling of out-of-plane shear” assumption.)

II.1.8.3 Out-of-plane T/C deformation

The Classical Lamination Theory is based on the assumption that σ33 = 0. Consequently, ϵ33 and ϵ33Mech are generally not zero. These strain tensor components can be estimated from (12):

ϵ33Mech = c 3311σ11 + c3322σ22 + c3333σ33 + c3323σ23 + c3331σ31 + c3312σ12,

ϵ33 = ϵ33Mech + α 33ΔT + β33ΔH.

II.1.9 Accelerating the calculation of load response

In section II.1.8, we explained the different steps to solve the laminate load response equation, and estimate ply stresses and strains. The number of operations involved in these calculations is very large, and when repetitive calculation of laminate load response is done, the computation time can increase unacceptably. This is the case, for example, when laminate load response analysis is performed on loads extracted from finite element model results.

However, many operations described in section II.1.8 will be the same for each different loading. This means that these operations could be done only once for the different laminate loads considered in the analysis. In this section the possible accelerations of laminate load response analysis are investigated.

II.1.9.1 Calculation of laminate loads and strains

We explain in this section how the laminate load response calculation can be accelerated. In particular, when the calculation of laminate load response is done repetitively with similar loading, the benefit of simplifying the sequence of operations to estimate laminate loading becomes obvious.

The calculation of laminate in-plane and flexural load response is explained in section II.1.8.1. The sequence of operations results in the building of 6 × 6 matrix K that depends on laminate definition and loading angle. For all the calculations done with a common laminate and loading angle, the operations can be simplified as follows:

1.

The matrix K is assembled.

2.

The components of loading that are specified as in-plane strain, or curvature lead to the imposition of constraints on matrix K. For example, if one imposes uk = a, it is sufficient to replace the elements of line k in matrix K by 0, except Kkk=1. When all the constraints have been imposed, one obtains a new 6 × 6 matrix that we call Kconstr.

3.

Finally, this matrix is inverted, yielding the 6 × 6 matrix Kconstr-1.

This Kconstr-1 matrix is the same for all the loadings that we apply with on the same laminate, with the same loading angle θ, and with the same constraints. When calculating load response, this matrix is used as follows:

1.

For each laminate load, one assembles the 6 components vector bconstr as explained in section II.1.8.1. The components usually correspond to shell forces or moments, but the “constrained components” (components specified as strains or curvature) are replaced by components of shell in-plane strains or curvatures.

2.

Shell in-plane strains and curvatures in loading axes are obtained by calculating the following matricial product:

{ {ϵ0} load {κ} load } = Kconstr-1⋅bconstr.
3.

Then, the shell strains and curvature components can be expressed in laminate axes by performing the following matricial operation:

{ {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } = [ [T+′] (-λ) [0] [0] [T+′] (-λ) ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} load {κ } load } , = [ [T+′] (-λ) [0] [0] [T+′] (-λ) ] ⋅ Kconstr-1 ⋅ bconstr.(II.1.96)

Finally, the last expression leads to the definition of a new 6 × 6 matrix

Kconstr, lam-1 = [ [T+′] (-λ) [0] [0] [T+′] (-λ) ]⋅Kconstr-1,

that allows one to write

{ {ϵ0} lam {κ} lam } = Kconstr, lam-1⋅bconstr.
(II.1.97)

This matrix can be constructed once and for all for a given laminate, loading angle and loading characteristics.

A similar approach can be used for the simplification of the laminate out-of-plane shear response calculation:

1.

The construction of a 2 × 2 Kconstr′-1 matrix allows one to write:

[Γ] load = Kconstr′-1 ⋅ bconstr′,

in which bconstr corresponds to the out-of-plane shear loads (forces or strains).

2.

Then

[Γ] lam = [S-](λ) ⋅ [Γ] load.
3.

And this leads to the definition of a new 2 × 2 matrix that allows one to write:

Kconstr, lam′-1 = [S -](λ) ⋅ Kconstr′-1,

[Γ] lam = Kconstr, lam′-1 ⋅ bconstr′.
(II.1.98)

Finally, now that the laminate strains and curvatures have been estimated in laminate axes, the corresponding laminate forces and moments are estimated as follows:

{ {N }lam {M }lam } = [ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] ⋅ { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam } - { {αEh}lam {αEh2} lam } (T0 - Tref) - { {αEh2} lam {αEh3} lam } T,z - { {βEh}lam {βEh2} lam } (H0 - Href) - { {βEh2} lam {βEh3} lam } H,z,(II.1.99)

[Q]lam = [G]lam ⋅ {Γ} lam - {α0s} lam(T0 - Tref) - {α1s} lamT,z - {β0s} lam(H0 - Href) - {β1s} lamH,z.(II.1.100)

Substituting (II.1.97) and (II.1.98) in expressions (99) and (100). This leads to the following expressions:

{ {N }lam {M }lam } = [ [ [A]lam [B]lam [B]lam [D]lam ] ⋅ Kconstr, lam-1 - { {αEh}lam {αEh2} lam } - { {αEh2} lam {αEh3} lam } - { {βEh}lam {βEh2} lam } - { {βEh2} lam {βEh3} lam } ] ⋅ { bconstr T0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } , = [ Kconstr, lamNM ] ⋅ {bconstrFM} ,(II.1.101)

[Q]lam = [ [G]lam ⋅ Kconstr, lam′-1 - {α 0s} lam - {α1s} lam - {β0s} lam - {β1s} lam ] ⋅ { bconstr′ T0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } , = [ Kconstr, lamQ ] ⋅ {bconstrQ} .(II.1.102)

From equations (II.1.97), (II.1.98), (101) and (102), one identifies four matrices and four vectors that allow the calculation of laminate stress/strain state in laminate axes:

The four matrices depend on laminate definition, angle θ of the loading with respect to the laminate axes, and on the set of components that are constrained to strain or curvature values. The four vectors also depend on the values of the particular loading that is examined. This means that the four matrices can be calculated once and for all the particular loadings. On the other hand, the four vectors must be re-estimated for each element defining the load.

II.1.9.2 Calculation of plies stresses and strains

The calculation of ply stresses and strains from the laminate loads is easily accelerated. Indeed, let us consider a laminate loading corresponding to:

These quantities correspond to 16 real values that characterize entirely the laminate loading. For a given ply, the stresses can be calculated at a given height (z value) from these 16 real values. All the calculations are linear.

If one defines a vector with 16 components as follows:

{LLd}lam = { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam {∇ ⁡M } lam T 0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } .

which contains all the laminate loading, there must exist a matrix [Kσ] ply(zi) that allows calculation of ply stresses as follows:

{σ}ply(zi) = [Kσ] ply(zi) ⋅ {LLd}lam.

Matrix [Kσ] ply(zi) is a 6 × 16 matrix that depends only on laminate definition. This means that this matrix can be calculated once and for all when the laminate is created in the database.

Similarly one can also define matrices [Kϵ] ply(zi) and [KϵMech] ply(zi) for the calculations of {ϵ}ply(zi) and {ϵMech} ply(zi) respectively. We explain here how these three matrices can be constructed.

II.1.9.2.1 Loading in ply axes

The first step of ply stress and strain calculations consists in expressing the laminate loading in ply axes. The following operations are performed:

{ϵ0} ply = [T+′] (ξ) ⋅ {ϵ0} lam,

{κ}ply = [T+′] (ξ) ⋅ {κ}lam,

{τsj(z)} ply = [V j(z)] plylam ⋅ {∇ ⁡M } lam.

The four real values corresponding to laminate temperature and moisture loading are not affected by the modification of coordinate system. The three relations above allow us to write the following equation:

{ {ϵ0} ply {κ} ply {τsj(z)} ply T0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } = [ [T+′] (ξ) [0] [0] 0000 [0] [T+′] (ξ) [0] 0000 [0] [0] [V j(z)] plylam0000 [0] [0] [0] 1000 [0] [0] [0] 0100 [0] [0] [0] 0010 [0] [0] [0] 0001 ]⋅ { {ϵ0} lam {κ } lam {∇ ⁡M } lam T 0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } .
(II.1.103)

Note that the out-of-plane shear response is now expressed as out-of-plane shear stresses at the specified height in selected ply and no longer as laminate out-of-plane shear forces.

The strains, temperatures and moisture at height z in the selected ply are easily obtained with the following expressions:

{ϵ}ply(z) = {ϵ0} ply + z {κ}ply,

T(z) - Tref = T0 - Tref + zT,z,

H(z) - Href = H0 - Href + zH,z.

The combination of these three expressions in a single matricial expression gives:

{ {ϵ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href } = [ [δ3] [δ3] z[0]0000 [0] [0] [δ2]0000 [0] [0] [0]1z00 [0] [0] [0]001z ]⋅ { {ϵ0} ply {κ } ply {τsj(z)} ply T0 - Tref T,z H0 - Href H,z } .
(II.1.104)

( [δ3] and [δ2] are 3 × 3 and 2 × 2 unit matrices respectively.) Then, considering equation (92), one writes:

{ {σ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href } = [ [C]ply[0] - [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply - [C]ply ⋅ {β}ply [0] [δ2] {0} {0} [0] [0] 1 0 [0] [0] 0 1 ]⋅ { {ϵ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href } .
(II.1.105)

The vector at left hand side of expression (II.1.105) contains all the ply stress components. One can remove the two lower lines of the equation as follows:

{ {σ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply } = [ [C]ply[0] - [C]ply ⋅ {α}ply - [C]ply ⋅ {β}ply [0] [δ2] {0} {0} ]⋅ { {ϵ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href } .
(II.1.106)

Then, the components can be reordered as follows:

{σ}mat(z) = ( σ11 σ22 σ33 τ23 τ13 τ12 ) (z) = [ 10000 0 1 0 0 0 00000 0 0 0 0 1 00010 0 0 1 0 0 ]⋅ { {σ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply } .
(II.1.107)

One will also use:

( {σ}mat(z) T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href ) = ( σ11 σ22 σ33 τ23 τ13 τ12 T - Tref H - Href ) (z) = [ 1000000 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0001000 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0000010 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ]⋅ { {ϵ}ply(z) {τsj(z)} ply T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href } .
(II.1.108)

Expression (12) is used to estimate the strain tensor:

{ϵ}mat(z) = ( ϵ11 ϵ22 ϵ33 γ23 γ31 γ12 ) (z) = ( [cijkl] {α}mat {β}mat )⋅ ( {σ}mat(z) T(z) - Tref H(z) - Href ) .
(II.1.109)

The so-called “mechanical strain tensor” is given by:

{ϵ}matMech(z) = ( ϵ11Mech ϵ22Mech ϵ33Mech γ23Mech γ31Mech γ12Mech ) (z) = [cijkl]⋅ {σ}mat(z).
(II.1.110)

All the operations (II.1.103) to (II.1.110) reduce to matricial products. The characteristics of the matrices used in these operations are summarized in Table II.1.1. Two of these matrices are “re-ordering” matrices, and do not depend on the ply material or position across the laminate thickness. The other matrices depend on the ply material. Only two of the matrices depend on height z.


Table II.1.1: Summary of the matrices that have been defined for the acceleration of ply stresses and strains calculation.
Matrix Reference Size Dependence on
[K1](II.1.103)12 × 16Ply angle, material and height z
[K2](II.1.104)7 × 12 Height z
[K3](II.1.105)7 × 7 Ply material
[K4](II.1.106)5 × 7 Ply material
[K5 ](II.1.107)6 × 5 —
[K6 ](II.1.108)8 × 7 —
[K7 ](II.1.109)6 × 8 Ply material
[K8 ](II.1.110)6 × 6 Ply material

Finally, one can write:

{σ}mat(z) = [K5] ⋅ [K4] ⋅ [K2] (z) ⋅ [K1] (z) ⋅ {LLd}lam, = [Kσ] (z) ⋅ {LLd}lam. (II.1.111)

{ϵ}mat(z) = [K7] ⋅ [K6] ⋅ [K3] ⋅ [K2] (z) ⋅ [K1] (z) ⋅ {LLd}lam, = [Kϵ] (z) ⋅ {LLd}lam. (II.1.112) {ϵ}matMech(z) = [K8] ⋅ {σ}mat(z), = [K8] ⋅ [Kσ] (z) ⋅ {LLd}lam, = [KϵMech] (z) ⋅ {LLd} lam. (II.1.113)

We have shown that to calculate stresses and strains in plies from the laminate loading {LLd} lam, at the three “bot”, “mid” and “sup” heights of laminate plies, one needs to compute 3 × 3 = 9 matrices per ply. Each of the matrices has 6 × 16 size and depends only on the laminate definition. This means that these matrices can be calculated once and for all when the laminate is defined.

Note that the acceleration matrices for the ply stresses and strains calculation must be re-estimated each time the laminate or one of its materials is modified. This is the reason why method “reInitAllPliesAccelMatrices” has been added to the “ClaLam” and “ClaDb” classes.

Finally, as usual, the out-of-plane shear calculation approach will influence the results, because the gradient of the bending tensor can be calculated in different ways:

The adoption of the first or second approach affects only the corresponding components of {LLd} lam vector. Matrices [Kσ] (z), [Kϵ] (z) and [KϵMech] (z) remain the same.

II.1.10 Failure theories

When stresses and strains have been calculated in plies (or some of the plies), the failure indices can be estimated too. The different failure theories proposed in FeResPost, and how they can be used to estimate laminate reserve factors, are presented below.

In this section, integer subscripts are conventionally used to denote that tensor components are given in ply axes and Roman subscripts to indicate principal components. Often, only in-plane components of ply stress or strain tensors are used to estimate criteria. Then, the principal components are estimated as follows:

σI,II = 1 2 (σ11 + σ22) ±1 4 (σ11 + σ22) 2 + τ122.

In the rest of this section all the allowables used in failure criteria have positive values. Even the compressive allowables are ≥ 0.

Table II.1.2 summarizes the criteria available in FeResPost. For each criterion, the Table provides:

1.

A String corresponding to the argument that identifies the selected criterion when a derived value is requested.

2.

A description of the type of material (metallic or isotropic, unidirectional tape, fabric,...).

3.

A reference to the section in which the criterion is presented and discussed.

4.

Specification of whether an equivalent stress for this criterion can be derived in FeResPost or not.

5.

Specification of whether a failure index can be derived with FeResPost. Generally, the failure index is calculated according to the “usual” definition in the literature. When no such standard failure index definition is available, a default definition is provided which corresponds to the inverse of the reserve factor calculated with FoS = 1.

6.

Specification of whether a reserve factor and/or strength ratio can be calculated with FeResPost:


Table II.1.2: Summary of failure criteria available in FeResPost and information on what can be calculated.
Criterion Material Section Derived
Name Type Number Stress F.I.R.F. and S. R.
“Tresca2D” metallic II.1.10.1 yes yes yes
“VonMises2D” metallic II.1.10.2 yes yes yes
“VonMises3D” metallic II.1.10.3 yes yes yes
“MaxStress” tape or fabricII.1.10.4 no yes yes
“MaxStress3D” tape or fabricII.1.10.5 no yes yes
“MaxStrain” tape or fabricII.1.10.6 no yes yes
“MaxStrain3D” tape or fabricII.1.10.7 no yes yes
“CombStrain2D” tape or fabricII.1.10.8 no yes yes
“MaxTotalStrain” tape or fabricII.1.10.6 no yes yes
“MaxTotalStrain3D” tape or fabricII.1.10.7 no yes yes
“CombTotalStrain2D”tape or fabricII.1.10.8 no yes yes
“TsaiHill” fabric II.1.10.9 no yes yes
“TsaiHill_b” fabric II.1.10.10 no yes yes
“TsaiHill_c” fabric II.1.10.11 no yes yes
“TsaiHill3D” fabric II.1.10.12 no yes yes
“TsaiHill3D_b” fabric II.1.10.13 no yes yes
“TsaiWu” fabric II.1.10.14 no yes yes
“TsaiWu3D” fabric II.1.10.15 no yes yes
“Hoffman” fabric II.1.10.16 no yes yes
“Puck” tape II.1.10.17 no yes yes
“Puck_b” tape II.1.10.18 no yes yes
“Puck_c” tape II.1.10.19 no yes yes
“Hashin” tape II.1.10.20 no yes yes
“Hashin_b” tape II.1.10.20 no yes yes
“Hashin_c” tape II.1.10.20 no yes yes
“Hashin3D” tape II.1.10.21 no yes yes
“Hashin3D_b” tape II.1.10.21 no yes yes
“Hashin3D_c” tape II.1.10.21 no yes yes
“YamadaSun” tape II.1.10.22 no yes yes
“YamadaSun_b” fabric II.1.10.23 no yes yes
“Honey3D” honeycomb II.1.10.24 no yes yes
“HoneyShear” honeycomb II.1.10.25 no yes yes
“HoneyShear_b” honeycomb II.1.10.26 yes yes yes
“Ilss” all II.1.10.27 yes yes yes
“Ilss_b” all II.1.10.27 yes yes yes

Note that many of the criteria presented here are particular cases of a general quadratic criterion that requires first the calculation of a failure index:

f = F11σ112 + F 22σ222 + F 33σ332 + F 44σ232 + F 55σ312 + F 66σ122 + 2F12σ11σ22 + 2F23σ22σ33 + 2F31σ33σ11 + F1σ11 + F2σ22 + F3σ33 + F4σ23 + F5σ31 + F6σ12, (II.1.115)

A test is then performed on the calculated value:

f ≤ 1.

This means that no failure occurs if f ≤ 1 (ply or laminate passes the failure test) and failure occurs if f > 1.

Several failure theories discussed below are obtained by expressing the coefficients in the expressions above by expressions depending on the material allowables. Also for the Tsai-Wu criteria discussed in section II.1.10.14 and II.1.10.15, the parameters Fij are directly characterized for the material.

Note that the 2D criteria defined in this section often correspond to the failure criteria defined in ESAComp.


Table II.1.3: Correspondence between the ESAComp failure criteria and the failure criteria defined in CLA module.
ESAComp failure criterion CLA criterion ID section
“Maximum Shear Stress (Tresca)” “Tresca2D” II.1.10.1
“Von Mises” “VonMises2D” II.1.10.2
“Maximum Strain” (in ply axes) “MaxStrain” II.1.10.6
“Maximum Stress” (in ply axes) “MaxStress” II.1.10.4
“Tsai-Wu” “TsaiWu” II.1.10.14
“Tsai-Hill” “TsaiHill” II.1.10.9
“Hoffman” “Hoffman” II.1.10.16
“Simple Puck” “Puck” II.1.10.17
“Modified Puck” “Puck_b” II.1.10.17
“Hashin” “Hashin” II.1.10.20

II.1.10.1 Tresca criterion (2D)

Using the stress tensor components a scalar equivalent shear stress is given by:

τeqTresca2D = max ⁡ (1 2 |σI - σII| , 1 2 |σI| , 1 2 |σII|) .

Ply passes the failure criterion if

τeqTresca2D ≤ σtall.

This equivalent shear stress allows definition of a Tresca failure index as follows:

FITresca2D = 2 ⋅ τeqTresca2D σtall ,

The reserve factor is given by:

RFTresca2D = 1 FoS ⋅ FITresca2D = σtall FoS ⋅ 2 ⋅ τeqTresca2D,

and the strength ratio by:

SRTresca2D = FoS ⋅ FITresca2D = FoS ⋅ 2 ⋅ τeqTresca2D σtall .

This criterion is referred to as “Tresca2D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.2 Von Mises criterion (2D)

Using the stress tensor components a scalar equivalent shear stress is given by:

σeqVonMises2D = σ11 2 + σ22 2 - σ11 σ22 + 3τ12 2.

Ply passes the failure criterion if

σeqVonMises2D ≤ σtall.

The corresponding failure index is:

FIVonMises2D = σeqVonMises2D σtall ,
(II.1.116)

The reserve factor is given by:

RFVonMises2D = 1 FoS ⋅ FIVonMises2D = σtall FoS ⋅ σeqVonMises2D,
(II.1.117)

and the strength ratio by:

SRVonMises2D = FoS ⋅ FIVonMises2D = FoS ⋅ σeqVonMises2D σtall .
(II.1.118)

This criterion is referred to as “VonMises2D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.3 Von Mises criterion (3D)

Using the stress tensor components a scalar equivalent shear stress is given by:

σeqVonMises3D = σ11 2 + σ22 2 + σ33 2 - σ11 σ22 - σ22 σ33 - σ33 σ11 + 3τ12 2 + 3τ23 2 + 3τ31 2.

Ply passes the failure criterion if

σeqVonMises3D ≤ σtall.

As for the 2D version, the corresponding failure index is given by II.1.116, the reserve factor by II.1.117 and the strength ratio by II.1.118. This criterion is referred to as “VonMises3D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.4 Maximum stress criterion

The failure index is calculated as follows:

FIMaxStress = max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , | σ22 σ22all | , | τ12 τ12all |) ,

in which the σ11all and σ22all allowables depend on the sign of σ11 and σ22 respectively. (Generally, tensile and compressive allowables are different for orthotropic materials.) Ply passes the test if the three following conditions are satisfied:

|σ11| ≤ σ11all,

|σ22| ≤ σ22all,

|τ12| ≤ τ12all.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFMaxStress = 1 FoS ⋅ FIMaxStress,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRMaxStress = FoS ⋅ FIMaxStress.

This criterion is referred to as “MaxStress” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.5 Maximum stress criterion (3D)

The failure index is calculated as follows:

FIMaxStress3D = max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , | σ22 σ22all | , | σ33 σ33all | , | τ12 τ12all | , | τ23 τ23all | , | τ31 τ31all |) ,

in which the σ11all, σ22all and σ33all allowables depend on the sign of σ11, σ22 and σ33 respectively. (Generally, tensile and compressive allowables are different for orthotropic materials.) Ply passes the test if the six following conditions are satisfied:

|σ11| ≤ σ11all,

|σ22| ≤ σ22all,

|σ33| ≤ σ33all,

|τ12| ≤ τ12all,

|τ23| ≤ τ23all,

|τ31| ≤ τ31all.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFMaxStress3D = 1 FoS ⋅ FIMaxStress3D,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRMaxStress3D = FoS ⋅ FIMaxStress3D.

This criterion is referred to as “MaxStress3D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.6 Maximum strain criteria (2D)

The criterion is very similar to maximum stress criterion, except that it is calculated from the mechanical (or equivalent) strain tensor components. The failure index is calculated as follows:

FIMaxStrain = max ⁡ ( |ϵ11Mech ϵ11all | , |ϵ22Mech ϵ22all | , |γ12Mech γ12all |) ,

in which the ϵ11all and ϵ22all allowables depend on the sign of ϵ11Mech and ϵ22Mech respectively. Ply or laminate passes the test if the three following conditions are satisfied:

|ϵ11| ≤ ϵ11all,

|ϵ22| ≤ ϵ22all,

|γ12| ≤ γ12all.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFMaxStrain = 1 FoS ⋅ FIMaxStrain,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRMaxStrain = FoS ⋅ FIMaxStrain.

This criterion is referred to as “MaxStrain” criterion in FeResPost.

FeResPost proposes a second version of the criterion where the “total” strain tensor {ϵ} is used instead of the mechanical strain tensor {ϵMech}. This version of the criterion is referred to as “MaxTotalStrain” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.7 Maximum strain criterion (3D)

The criterion is very similar to maximum stress criterion, except that it is calculated from the mechanical (or equivalent) strain tensor components. The failure index is calculated as follows:

FIMaxStrain3D = max ⁡ ( |ϵ11Mech ϵ11all | , |ϵ22Mech ϵ22all | , |ϵ33Mech ϵ33all | , |γ12Mech γ12all | , |γ23Mech γ23all | , |γ31Mech γ31all |) .

in which the ϵ11all, ϵ22all and ϵ33all allowables depend on the sign of the corresponding mechanical strain tensor component. Ply or laminate passes the test if the six following conditions are satisfied:

|ϵ11| ≤ ϵ11all,

|ϵ22| ≤ ϵ22all,

|ϵ33| ≤ ϵ33all,

|γ12| ≤ γ12all,

|γ23| ≤ γ23all,

|γ31| ≤ γ31all.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFMaxStrain3D = 1 FoS ⋅ FIMaxStrain3D,

and the strength ratio is given by

SRMaxStrain3D = FoS ⋅ FIMaxStrain3D.

This criterion is referred to as “MaxStrain3D” criterion in FeResPost.

FeResPost proposes a second version of the criterion where the “total” strain tensor {ϵ} is used instead of the mechanical strain tensor {ϵMech}. This version of the criterion is referred to as “MaxTotalStrain3D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.8 Combined strain criterion (2D)

The criterion is a strain criterion that uses a combination of several components of the strain tensor. This criterion can be considered as a Tsai-type criterion adapted to strain tensor. The combined strain failure index is calculated as follows:

FICombStrain2D = max ⁡ [ (ϵ11 Mech ϵ11all ) 2 + (γ12Mech γ12all ) 2, (ϵ22 Mech ϵ22all ) 2 + (γ12Mech γ12all ) 2] ,

in which the ϵ11all and ϵ22all allowables depend on the sign of ϵ11Mech and ϵ22Mech respectively. (The criterion is calculated from the mechanical or equivalent strain tensor components.) Ply or laminate passes the failure criterion if the two following conditions are satisfied:

(ϵ11Mech ϵ11all ) 2 + (γ12Mech γ12all ) 2 ≤ 1,

(ϵ22Mech ϵ22all ) 2 + (γ12Mech γ12all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFCombStrain2D = 1 FoS ⋅ FICombStrain2D,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRCombStrain2D = FoS ⋅ FICombStrain2D.

This criterion is referred to as “CombStrain2D” criterion in FeResPost.

FeResPost proposes a second version of the criterion where the “total” strain tensor {ϵ} is used instead of the mechanical strain tensor {ϵMech}. This version of the criterion is referred to as “CombTotalStrain2D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.9 Tsai-Hill criterion

The Tsai-Hill criterion is a quadratic criterion. The 2D version of this criterion has a failure index calculated as follows:

FITsaiHill = ( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 - σ11σ22 (σ11all) 2.

Here again, the allowables σ11all and σ22all depend on the signs of σ11 and σ22 respectively. Ply passes the failure criterion if

FITsaiHill ≤ 1.

The Tsai-Hill failure index depends quadratically on the different components of the stress tensor. Therefore, the reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFTsaiHill = 1 FoSF ITsaiHill,
(II.1.119)

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRTsaiHill = FoSF ITsaiHill.
(II.1.120)

This criterion is referred to as “TsaiHill” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.10 Tsai-Hill criterion (version b)

This criterion is very similar to the one described in section II.1.10.10. It differs by the fact that only the tensile allowables σ11t,all and σ22t,all are considered for the calculations.

The calculation of reserve factor is as for the more classical Tsai-Hill criterion (II.1.119) and (II.1.120). This criterion is referred to as “TsaiHill_b” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.11 Tsai-Hill criterion (version c)

This criterion is very similar to the one described in section II.1.10.9. The criterion has a failure index calculated as follows:

FITsaiHill_c = ( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 - σ11σ22 (σ11′all) 2.

The criterion differs from the previous one by the fact that the allowable σ11′all is used in the calculation. This allowable is set to σ11t,all or σ11c,all depending on the sign of σ11σ22.

The calculation of reserve factor is as for the more classical Tsai-Hill criterion (II.1.119) and (II.1.120). This criterion is referred to as “TsaiHill_c” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.12 Tsai-Hill criterion (3D)

The Tsai-Hill criterion is a quadratic criterion. The 3D version of this criterion has a failure index calculated as follows:

FITsaiHill3D = ( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( σ33 σ33all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2 - ( 1 (σ11all) 2 + 1 (σ22all) 2 - 1 (σ33all) 2 ) σ11σ22 - ( 1 (σ22all) 2 + 1 (σ33all) 2 - 1 (σ11all) 2 ) σ22σ33 - ( 1 (σ33all) 2 + 1 (σ11all) 2 - 1 (σ22all) 2 ) σ33σ11.(II.1.121)

The allowables σ11all, σ22all and σ33all depend on the signs of σ11, σ22 and σ33 respectively. Ply passes the failure criterion if

FITsaiHill3D ≤ 1.

The Tsai-Hill failure index depends quadratically on the different components of the stress tensor. The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFTsaiHill3D = 1 FoSF ITsaiHill3D,
(II.1.122)

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRTsaiHill3D = FoSF ITsaiHill3D.
(II.1.123)

This criterion is referred to as “TsaiHill3D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.13 Tsai-Hill criterion (3D version b)

This criterion is very similar to the one described in section II.1.10.13. It differs by the fact that only the tensile allowables σ11t,all, σ22t,all and σ33t,all are considered for the calculations.

The calculation of reserve factor is as for the more classical Tsai-Hill criterion (II.1.122) and (II.1.123). This criterion is referred to as “TsaiHill3D_b” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.14 Tsai-Wu criterion

The Tsai-Wu criterion is a quadratic criterion. The 2D version of this criterion has a failure index calculated as follows:

FITsaiWu = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22 + 2F12TWσ 11σ22.(II.1.124)

In this expression, F12TW is a material parameter to be obtained by characterization tests. This parameter must satisfy the following relation:

(F12TW) 2 < 1 σ11t,allσ11c,allσ22t,allσ22c,all.
(II.1.125)

Its units are, for example, [Pa-2]. Sometimes the corresponding dimensionless parameter is used instead:

F12* = F 12TWσ 11t,allσ11c,allσ22t,allσ22c,all.
(II.1.126)

This dimensionless parameter must satisfy the relation:

-1 ≤ F12* ≤ 1.
(II.1.127)

The value F12* = -1∕2 corresponds to a generalized Von Mises criterion. The value

F12TW = - 1 2σ11t,allσ11c,all
(II.1.128)

leads to the Hoffman criterion discussed in section II.1.10.16. Ply passes the failure criterion if

FITsaiWu ≤ 1.

In some of the terms of expression (124) the components of Cauchy stress tensor appear linearly, and other terms, they appear quadratically. Therefore, the reserve factor expression is a little more complicated. FeResPost calculates it as follows:

a = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + 2F 12TW σ 11σ22,

b = ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22,

c = -1,

RFTsaiWu = - b + b2 - 4ac 2 ⋅ FoS ⋅ a ,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRTsaiWu = 1 RFTsaiWu.

This criterion is referred to as “TsaiWu” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.15 Tsai-Wu criterion (3D)

The 3D version of Tsai-Wu failure criterion leads to the following expression of the failure index:

FITsaiWu3D = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + σ332 σ33t,allσ33c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2 + ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22 + ( 1 σ33t,all - 1 σ33c,all ) σ33 + 2F12TWσ 11σ22 + 2F23TWσ 22σ33 + 2F31TWσ 33σ11.(II.1.129)

The values of F23TW and F31TW are submitted to the same limitations as F12TW in section II.1.10.14. Ply passes the failure criterion if

FITsaiWu3D ≤ 1.

The RF calculation is done as follows:

a = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + σ332 σ33t,allσ33c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2 + 2F12TWσ 11σ22 + 2F23TWσ 22σ33 + 2F31TWσ 33σ11, (II.1.130)

b = ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22 + ( 1 σ33t,all - 1 σ33c,all ) σ33,

c = -1,

RFTsaiWu3D = - b + b2 - 4ac 2 ⋅ FoS ⋅ a ,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRTsaiWu3D = 1 RFTsaiWu3D.

This criterion is referred to as “TsaiWu3D” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.16 Hoffman criterion

The Hoffman criterion is very similar to the Tsai-Wu criterion. Only the last term of failure index is different:

FIHoffman = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22 - σ11σ22 σ11t,allσ11c,all.(II.1.131)

Ply passes the failure criterion if

FIHoffman ≤ 1.

In some of the terms of previous expression the components of Cauchy stress tensor appear linearly, and other terms, they appear quadratically. Therefore, the reserve factor expression is a little more complicated. FeResPost calculates it as follows:

a = σ112 σ11t,allσ11c,all + σ222 σ22t,allσ22c,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 - σ11σ22 σ11t,allσ11c,all,

b = ( 1 σ11t,all - 1 σ11c,all ) σ11 + ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) σ22,

c = -1,

RFHoffman = - b + b2 - 4ac 2 ⋅ FoS ⋅ a ,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRHoffman = 1 RFHoffman.

This criterion is referred to as “Hoffman” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.17 Puck criterion

This criterion is adapted to the qualification of laminates with unidirectional plies. This criterion distinguishes two failure modes: one fiber failure mode in direction 1 and one matrix failure mode. Three versions of the Puck criterion are distinguished.

The first version of Puck failure index is calculated as follows:

FIPuck = max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2) ,

in which the allowables σ11all and σ22all depend on the signs of σ11 and σ22 respectively. Ply passes the failure criterion if the two following conditions are satisfied

|σ11| ≤ σ11all,

( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is simply given by:

RFPuck = 1 FoS ⋅ max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2) ,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRPuck = FoS ⋅ max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2) .

This criterion is referred to as “Puck” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.18 Puck “b” criterion

A modified version of Puck criterion is defined as follows:

FIPuck_b = max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + σ 22 ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all )) .

Ply passes the failure criterion if the two following conditions are satisfied

|σ11| ≤ σ11all,

σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + σ 22 ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFa = σ11all FoS ⋅ σ11,

a = σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2,

b = σ22 ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) ,

c = -1,

RFb = - b + b2 - 4ac 2 ⋅ FoS ⋅ a ,

RFPuck_b = min ⁡ (RFa,RFb) .

The calculation of failure index is based on the calculation of the reserve factor:

FIPuck_b = 1 RFPuck_2,

in which the safety factor used in the calculation of the RF is 1. The advantage of this new expression is that the failure index is proportional to the components of stress tensor. This criterion is referred to as “Puck_b” criterion in FeResPost.

For the strength ratio, the same expression is used, but the safety factor is not fixed at 1:

SRPuck_b = 1 RFPuck_2.

II.1.10.19 Puck “c” criterion

Sometimes, an additional term is given in the expression corresponding to the fiber failure and the modified version of Puck criterion is defined as follows:

FIPuck_c = max ⁡ ( | σ11 σ11all | , ( σ11 2σ11t,all ) 2 + σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + σ 22 ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all )) .

Ply passes the failure criterion if the two following conditions are satisfied

|σ11| ≤ σ11all,

( σ11 2σ11t,all ) 2 + σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 + σ 22 ( 1 σ22t,all - 1 σ22c,all ) ≤ 1.

The calculation of reserve factor is done as for version “b” of Puck criterion, but with a modified expression for the a parameter:

a = ( σ11 2σ11t,all ) 2 + σ222 σ22c,allσ22t,all + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2.

This criterion is referred to as “Puck_c” criterion in FeResPost.

II.1.10.20 Hashin criteria

This criterion is meant to be used for unidirectional materials. Direction 1 is assumed to be the fiber direction. The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

Finally, the reserve factor is given by:

RFHashin = min ⁡ (RFb,RFc) .

Here again, the calculation of failure index is based on the calculation of the reserve factor:

FIHashin = 1 RFHashin,

in which the safety factor used in the calculation of the RF is 1, and the strength ratio is calculated as

SRHashin = 1 RFHashin,

in which the actual value of the safety factor is used.

The criterion presented above is referred to as “Hashin” criterion in FeResPost. Correspondingly, version “Hashin_b” is defined, in which only the fiber failure is checked, and version “Hashin_c”, in which only the matrix failure is checked.

II.1.10.21 Hashin criteria (3D)

A 3D version of the 2D criterion defined in section II.1.10.20 is defined as follows

Finally, the reserve factor is given by:

RFHashin3D = min ⁡ (RFb,RFc) .

Here again, the calculation of failure index is based on the calculation of the reserve factor:

FIHashin3D = 1 RFHashin3D,

in which the safety factor used in the calculation of the RF is set to 1, and the strength ratio is calculated as

SRHashin3D = 1 RFHashin3D,

in which the actual value of the safety factor is used.

The criterion presented above is referred to as “Hashin3D” criterion in FeResPost. Correspondingly, version “Hashin3D_b” is defined, in which only the fiber failure is checked, and version “Hashin3D_c”, in which only the matrix failure is checked. (These correspond to the values RFb and RFc calculated above.)

II.1.10.22 Yamada-Sun criterion

The Yamada-Sun criterion is a kind of Tsai criterion adapted to tape (unidirectional) materials. Its failure index is calculated as follows:

FIYamadaSun = ( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2.

The allowable σ11all depends on the sign of σ11. Ply passes the failure criterion if the following condition is satisfied

( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFYamadaSun = 1 FoSF IYamadaSun,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRYamadaSun = FoSF IYamadaSun.

This criterion is referred to as “YamadaSun” in FeResPost.

II.1.10.23 Yamada-Sun criterion (version b)

A second version of the Yamada-Sun criterion, better suited to fabrics, is proposed. The “tape” version of Yamada-Sun criterion is calculated in two directions, and the worst direction is considered for failure. The failure index is calculated as follows:

FIYamadaSun_b = max [ ( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2; ( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2] .

The allowables σ11all and σ22all depend on the signs of σ11 and σ22 respectively. Ply passes the failure criterion if the two following conditions are satisfied:

( σ11 σ11all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 ≤ 1,

( σ22 σ22all ) 2 + ( τ12 τ12all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFYamadaSun_b = 1 FoSF IYamadaSun_b,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRYamadaSun_b = FoSF IYamadaSun_b.

This criterion is referred to as “YamadaSun_b” in FeResPost.

II.1.10.24 3D honeycomb criterion

A general honeycomb criterion uses the out-of-plane tension/compression and the two out-of-plane shear components of the Cauchy stress tensor. The criterion read as follows:

FIHoney3D = ( σ33 σ33all ) 2 + ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2.

The allowable σ33all depends on the sign of σ33 (Generally, the compressive allowable is significantly smaller than the tensile one). The honeycomb material is generally defined in such a way that the allowable τ31all = τ L is in ribbon direction (longitudinal allowable) and τ23all is the transverse allowable τW . Core passes the failure criterion if the following condition is satisfied

( σ33 σ33all ) 2 + ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFHoney3D = 1 FoS ⋅ FIHoney3D,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRHoney3D = FoS ⋅ FIHoney3D.

This criterion is referred to as “Honey3D” in FeResPost.

II.1.10.25 Honeycomb shear criterion

Depending on the modelling, the component σ33 of the Cauchy stress tensor is sometimes zero. Then a simplified “shear” criterion is often used:

FIHoneyShear = ( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2.

Core passes the failure criterion if the following condition is satisfied

( τ23 τ23all ) 2 + ( τ31 τ31all ) 2 ≤ 1.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFHoneyShear = 1 FoS ⋅ FIHoneyShear,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRHoneyShear = FoS ⋅ FIHoneyShear.

This criterion is referred to as “HoneyShear” in FeResPost.

II.1.10.26 Honeycomb simplified shear criterion

Sometimes, one simplifies the criterion described in section II.1.10.25 by using the smallest shear allowable τW . This new criterion is referred to as “HoneyShear_b”.

As a single allowable is used, an equivalent shear stress can be defined:

τshear = τ13 2 + τ23 2.
(II.1.132)

The failure index is then calculated as follows:

FIHoneyShear_b = τshear τ23all .

Core passes the failure criterion if the following condition is satisfied

τ132 + τ232 ≤ τ23all.

The reserve factor is calculated as follows:

RFHoneyShear_b = 1 FoS ⋅ FIHoneyShear_b,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRHoneyShear_b = FoS ⋅ FIHoneyShear_b.

This criterion is referred to as “HoneyShear_b” in FeResPost.

II.1.10.27 Inter-laminar shear criterion

The inter-laminar shear criterion is based on the comparison of inter-laminar shear stress with resin shear allowable:

FIIlss = τinter-laminar τinter-laminarall,

in which the inter-laminar shear stress is a scalar stress calculated as follows:

τinter-laminar = τxz 2 + τyz 2.
(II.1.133)

An interface between two plies passes the failure criterion if the following condition is satisfied

τxz2 + τyz2 ≤ τinter-laminarall.

The reserve factor is of course:

RFIlss = 1 FoS ⋅ FIIlss,

and the strength ratio is given by:

SRIlss = FoS ⋅ FIIlss.

This criterion differs from the other criteria in that it does not use ply material allowables. Instead, the ply ilss allowable or the laminate ilss allowable is used.

Note also that FeResPost calculates the inter-laminar shear criterion on the lower face of plies only. This criterion is referred to as “Ilss” in FeResPost.

A second version of the inter-laminar shear stress criterion, referred to as “Ilss_b” criterion in FeResPost, is defined in FeResPost. This criterion differs from the more usual “Ilss” criterion by the fact that its calculation is not limited to the lower face of laminate plies. It can also be calculated at mid-ply or ply upper face. This can be useful when evaluating the ILSS criterion on finite element results that are extracted at mid ply thickness only. (Actually, the calculation of ILSS failure criterion using stresses extracted from FE results, or calculated from FE shell forces and moments, is the reason that motivated the introduction of this second version of ILSS criterion.)

II.1.11 Temperature diffusion in laminates

The thermal conservation equation in a solid material is written as follows:

ρCp∂T ∂t = -∇ ⁡⋅q + r,

where T is the temperature, Cp is the heat capacity of the material and vector q is the heat flux. Note that Cp and ρ are used for transient thermal calculations only. Generally, the heat flux is related to the gradient of temperature by Fourier’s law:

q = -λT ⋅∇ ⁡T,

where λT is the tensor of thermal conductivity coefficients. We consider that thermal conductivity tensor is symmetric. A justification of this symmetry can be found in [LLK+86] with part of the demonstration in [LL13].

When thermal conductivity calculations are performed with laminates, two homogenized quantities must first be calculated:

These two quantities are obtained by integrating material properties along laminate thickness.

II.1.11.1 Material thermal parameters

Two scalar parameters influence the transient thermal behavior of laminates: the density ρ and the heat capacity (per unit of mass) Cp. As these two parameters are scalar, their characteristics do not depend on the possible anisotropy of the material.

On the other hand, the thermal conductivity λT is a 2nd order tensor. Generally, for an anisotropic material, the thermal conductivity equation can be written as follows:

( q1 q2 q3 ) = - (λ11T λ 12T λ 31T λ12T λ 22T λ 23T λ31T λ 23T λ 33T )⋅∇ ⁡T.

For an orthotropic material, the previous equation reduces to:

( q1 q2 q3 ) = - (λ11T 0 0 0 λ22T 0 0 0 λ33T )⋅∇ ⁡T.

Then, only three material parameters define the thermal conductivity. Finally, for an isotropic material the thermal conductivity is defined by a single parameter λT :

( q1 q2 q3 ) = - (λT 0 0 0 λT 0 0 0 λT )⋅∇ ⁡T.

II.1.11.2 In-plane and out-of-plane components

As was done for the motion equations, a decoupling of in-plane laminate thermal conductivity and out-of-plane conductivity is assumed. Therefore, the thermal flux is separated into an in-plane flux:

{q12} = ( q1 q2 ) ,

and the out-of-plane component q3.

Correspondingly, the tensor of thermal conductivity coefficients is separated into an in-plane conductivity tensor:

[λT ] 12 = ( λ11T λ 12T λ12T λ 22T ) ,

and the out-of-plane conductivity λ33T . The “shear” components λ31T and λ23T are neglected in the homogenization theory. (This means that out-of-plane and in-plane conductivities are decoupled.)

II.1.11.3 In-plane rotations of vectorial and tensorial properties

The material scalar properties are left unmodified by in-plane rotations. The same is true for the out-of-plane quantities q3 and λ33T . The transformation of components for {q} and [λT ] is noted with the transformation matrices defined in expressions (II.1.10) to (II.1.10):

[λT ] 12 = [S-](θ) ⋅ [λT ] xy ⋅ [S+] (θ),

[λT ] xy = [S+] (θ) ⋅ [λT ] 12 ⋅ [S-](θ),

{q}xy = [S+] (θ) ⋅ {q}12,

{q}12 = [S-](θ) ⋅ {q}xy.

II.1.11.4 Integration along the laminate thickness

The laminate thermal in-plane conductivity, thermal out-of-plane conductivity and thermal capacity are considered separately.

II.1.11.4.1 In-plane conductivity

To calculate the laminate in-plane thermal conductivity properties, it is assumed that temperature is constant along the laminate thickness. Consequently, the temperature gradient does not depend on z. The thermal flux {q}xy however depends on z because the thermal conductivity does:

{q}xy(z) = [λT ] xy(z) ⋅ {∇ ⁡T }xy.

The laminate in-plane thermal conductivity is calculated as follows:

{Q}xy = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2 {q} xy(z) dz, = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2 [λT ] xy(z) ⋅ {∇ ⁡T }xy dz, = (∫ -h∕2+h∕2 [λT ] xy(z) dz) ⋅ {∇ ⁡T }xy, = (∫ -h∕2+h∕2 [S +] (θ)(z) ⋅ [λT ] 12(z) ⋅ [S-](θ)(z) dz) ⋅ {∇ ⁡T }xy, = [ΛT ] xy ⋅ {∇ ⁡T }xy.

In the previous equation, the laminate in-plane thermal conductivity is introduced:

[ΛT ] xy = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2 [S +] (θ)(z) ⋅ [λT ] 12(z) ⋅ [S-](θ)(z) dz, = ∑ k=1N [S +] (θk) ⋅ [λkT ] 12 ⋅ [S-](θk)ek,

where ek is the thickness of ply k.

II.1.11.4.2 Out-of-plane conductivity

The out-of-plane thermal flux is assumed constant across the laminate thickness. Then, as thermal conductivity depends on z, so does the out-of-plane gradient of temperature:

∇ ⁡Tz = qz λ33T .

The integration across the thickness gives the difference of temperature between upper and lower laminate surfaces:

Tsup - Tinf = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2∇ ⁡T z dz, = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2 qz λ33T dz, = (∫ -h∕2+h∕2 1 λ33T dz)qz, = R33T q z.

In the previous expression, the out-of-plane thermal resistance is introduced:

R33T = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2 1 λ33T dz, = ∑ k=1N 1 (λ33T )kek.

II.1.11.4.3 Thermal capacity

To estimate the laminate thermal capacity, a temperature constant across the laminate thickness is again assumed. Then, the heat energy stored per unit of surface is:

U = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2ρC pT dz, = (∫ -h∕2+h∕2ρC p dz)T, = (ρCph)lamT.

In the previous expression, the areal thermal capacity is introduced:

(ρCph)lam = ∫ -h∕2+h∕2ρC p dz, = ∑ k=1N (ρC p) kek.

Note that in Nastran, when a thermal material MAT4 or MAT5 is defined, the density ρ and the heat capacity per unit of mass Cp are defined separately. So it is the responsibility of the user to select appropriate values for these two quantities. Also, in Nastran, the thickness is defined separately in the PSHELL property card. (PCOMP or PCOMPG cards do not accept thermal materials.)

II.1.12 Moisture diffusion in laminates

The moisture conservation equation in a solid material is written as follows:

∂M ∂t = -∇ ⁡⋅qM,

where M is the moisture content (for example in [kg/m3]) and vector qM is the massic flux of moisture (in [kg/m2s]). When several materials are present in a structure, as often in laminates, it is more practical to work with moisture percentage H (in [%w]). The moisture percentage is related to moisture content by the following expression:

M = c ⋅ H,

where c is the moisture coefficient in [kg/(m3%w)].

Generally, the moisture flux is related to the gradient of moisture by Fick’s law, and the moisture diffusion equation can be written:

∂H ∂t = ∇ ⁡⋅ (λH ⋅∇ ⁡H).

Here λH is the tensor of moisture conductivity coefficients. This expression is very similar to the equation of thermal diffusion:

Since moisture percentages are used here, nothing equivalent to the laminate thermal capacity (ρCph) lam is defined for moisture.

II.1.13 Units

All the quantities introduced in this Chapter have been given without dimensions. Since version 3.0.1, units can be assigned to all the CLA quantities defined in FeResPost, except of course the dimensionless quantities. This allows the user to express all the CLA quantities in a unit system compatible, for example, with the one used for finite element modeling.

An engineer should be able to figure out the units of the different quantities introduced in this Chapter from the definitions given for the quantities or from the expressions used for their calculations. However, we think it might be useful to remind the units of the different quantities to avoid ambiguities.

In the rest of the section, a consistent set of units compatible with the MKS system is assumed. This is what we recommend for FeResPost, as well as for finite element models. The default “base” units are:

Note that units have been defined for force and energy, despite the fact that they can be derived from mass, length and time units. Practically, the definition of additional base units for force and energy is of interest to mechanical engineers.

All the other units of FeResPost are obtained by combining these base units. The most important ones are summarized in Tables II.1.4, II.1.5 and II.1.6.

If one of the base units above is modified, the user is responsible for modifying the derived units coherently. For example, we expressed the moisture content in [%w]. This influences the units of moisture content H as well as the units of coefficients of moisture expansion β.


Table II.1.4: Units of the different quantities related to loading, stresses or load responses.
Quantities Symbols Units
Strains ϵ, γ or Γ [L/L] or [-]
Stresses σ or τ [F/L2]
Curvatures κ [1/L]
Forces {N} or {Q} [F/L]
Moments {M} [FL/L] or [F]
Temperatures T [T]
Moistures H [W] (always [%w])
Failure indices F I []
Reserve factors RF []


Table II.1.5: Units of the different quantities related to material properties.
Quantities Symbols Units
Materials stiffnesses or moduli Cijkl, [C], E or G [F/L2]
Materials compliance matrices cijkl, [c], [g] [L2/F]
Poisson coefficients νij [-]
Thermal conductivity λijT [E/(LT)]
Coefficients of thermal expansion α [L/(LT)] or [1/T]
Moisture conductivity λij H [1/(Lt)]
Coefficients of moisture expansion β [L/(LW)] or [1/W]
Density ρ [M/L3]
Specific heat capacity Cp [E/(MT)]
Coefficients of quadratic failure criteria F i [L2/F]
Coefficients of quadratic failure criteria F ij [L4/F2]


Table II.1.6: Units of the different quantities related to laminate properties.
Quantities Symbols Units
Thicknesses t [L]
Membrane stiffness matrix [A] [F/L]
Membrane-bending coupling stiffness matrix [B] [F]
Bending stiffness matrix [D] [FL]
Out-of-plane shear stiffness matrix [G] [F/L]
Membrane compliance matrix [a] [L/F]
Membrane-bending coupling compliance matrix[b] [1/F]
Bending compliance matrix [d] [1/(FL)]
Out-of-plane shear compliance matrix [g] [L/F]
In-plane thermal conductivity matrix [ΛT ] [E/(tT)]
Out-of-plane thermal resistance R33 T [L2Tt/E]
Areal heat capacity (ρCp h ) lam [E/L2/T]
In-plane moisture conductivity matrix [ΛH ] [1/t]
Out-of-plane moisture resistance R33 H [L2t]

Other unit systems can be used with the CLA classes. Each CLA object has an attribute corresponding to the units system in which all its characteristics are defined.

The units of CLA object can be obtained with “getUnits” method that returns a Hash containing pairs of Strings. The first String describes the kind of dimension: “L” for length, “M” for mass, “t” for time, “T” for temperature, “E” for energy, “W” for moisture and “F” for force. The second String corresponds to one of the unit listed above for the selected quantity.

The units of a CLA object can also be modified by calling “setUnits” or “changeUnits” methods:

Both “setUnits” and “changeUnits” methods have a Hash argument corresponding to the object returned by “getUnits” method.

When laminate calculations are done, the properties of the material used in the laminate layup definition are converted to the laminate system of units if necessary. The same applies to loading units for the calculation of laminate load response. The ply results (shell forces, shell moments, stresses, temperatures...) are expressed in the laminate system of units. When a failure criterion is calculated, calculations are performed in the laminate system of units. This means that ply allowables are first converted to the laminate system of units. Of course, the use of a consistent system of units for all the composite calculations is recommended, as it reduces the risk of errors and the calculation time.

Chapter II.2
The “ClaDb” class

A ClaDb object may be considered as an object in which collections of materials, laminates and loads are stored. The ClaDb Class also provides the “glue” that bonds the objects of the other composite Classes together.

Table II.2.1 gives the list of methods defined in “ClaDb” class.

Table II.2.1: The different methods that have been defined in “ClaDb” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) II.2.1 IV.3.1
initialize II.2.1
clone II.2.8
Manipulation of data defining ClaDb object
insertMaterial II.2.3 IV.3.2
eraseMaterial II.2.3
getMaterialCopy II.2.3 IV.3.2
insertLaminate II.2.3 IV.3.2
eraseLaminate II.2.3
getLaminateCopy II.2.3IV.3.4.2
reInitAllPliesAccelMatricesII.2.3
insertLoad II.2.3
eraseLoad II.2.3
getLoadCopy II.2.3IV.3.4.2
Management of units methods
getDbUnits II.2.4
setDbUnits II.2.4
setUnitsAllEntities II.2.4
setUnitsAllMaterials II.2.4
setUnitsAllLaminates II.2.4
setUnitsAllLoads II.2.4
changeUnitsAllEntities II.2.4
changeUnitsAllMaterials II.2.4
changeUnitsAllLaminates II.2.4
changeUnitsAllLoads II.2.4
Iterators
each_material II.2.7
each_materialId II.2.7
each_laminate II.2.7IV.3.4.3
each_laminateId II.2.7
each_load II.2.7
each_loadId II.2.7
Disk IO methods
readEdf II.2.5 IV.3.1
writeNeutral II.2.5 IV.3.1
readNeutral II.2.5 IV.3.1
NDF lines
initWithNeutralLines II.2.6
getNeutralLines II.2.6
Attributes
Id II.2.2
materialsNbr II.2.3
laminatesNbr II.2.3
loadsNbr II.2.3

II.2.1 Creation of an object

The singleton method “new” is used to create ClaDb objects. This method has no argument. (The “initialize” method has no argument either.)

II.2.2 Identifying a ClaDb

Two methods allow the manipulation of the identifier of ClaDb objects (“Id” attribute):

II.2.3 Manipulating entities stored in a ClaDb

The ClaDb class provides three methods to insert objects in the collections, and three methods to retrieve objects stored in the collections:

The six “insert” and “get*Copy” methods described above create copies of the entities they store to, or retrieve from the ClaDb.

Internally, the ClaDb manages 3 associative containers that associate identifiers to materials, laminates or loads respectively. When an object is stored into the ClaDb, the key that allows retrieval of the object is the identifier one attributed to it with the “Id” attributes. (See Chapters II.3 to II.5.) Note that the identifier used to retrieve an object from the ClaDb must match exactly the key to which the object is associated. For example, if the identifier of a load is [17,"QS_and_bending"], then 17 or "QS_and_bending" will not allow retrieval of a copy of the object. [17,"QS_and_bending"] must be used as argument of the “getMaterialCopy” method.

When a ClaLam object is stored into the ClaDb, its properties are calculated automatically. (Stiffness matrix and <αEh> vector.)

Note also that when a CLA object is extracted from the database, or inserted into the database, the object keeps the units that are attributed to it. These units may be different from the database units. (See also section II.2.4.)

II.2.4 Management of Units

Units are associated with the database, and to all the entities stored in the database. The units associated with the stored entities are independent of each other, and of the database units.

The “ClaDb” class defines several methods for the management of units:

The Hash arguments or return values mentioned above have String keys and values as explained in section II.1.13. The difference between the “setUnits” and “changeUnits” methods is also explained in the same section.

II.2.5 Saving to or retrieving from a disk file

Presently, three interface functions are defined:

Note that the neutral data files (“ndf” files) mentioned above are files with a format specific to FeResPost.

II.2.6 Saving or initializing with NDF lines

Two methods allow saving or reading ClaDb objects from an Array of Strings in neutral format. For each of these two methods, instead of reading or saving the lines from or to a disk file, each line is saved or read from or to an Array of Strings. The two methods are:

II.2.7 Iterators

The ClaDb class provides 6 iterators:

These iterators have no argument.

II.2.8 Other methods

“clone” method has no argument and returns a copy of the ClaDb object.

Chapter II.3
The “ClaMat” class

The “ClaMat” class is used to store the materials used in the definition of laminates. Each material is characterized by:

Several methods of the ClaMat class allow access to data stored in an object. Table II.3.1 gives the list of methods defined in the class.

Table II.3.1: The different methods that have been defined in “ClaMat” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) II.3.1 IV.3.2
initialize II.3.1
clone II.3.7
Manipulation of data defining ClaMat object
clearModuli II.3.3
insertModuli II.3.3
fillModuli II.3.3 IV.3.2
getDataModuli II.3.3
clearCTEs II.3.3
insertCTEs II.3.3
fillCTEs II.3.3 IV.3.2
getDataCTEs II.3.3
clearCMEs II.3.3
insertCMEs II.3.3
fillCMEs II.3.3
getDataCMEs II.3.3
clearAllowables II.3.3
insertAllowables II.3.3
fillAllowables II.3.3
getDataAllowables II.3.3
clearThermalData II.3.3
insertThermalData II.3.3
fillThermalData II.3.3 IV.3.3
getThermalData II.3.3
clearMoistureData II.3.3
insertMoistureData II.3.3
fillMoistureData II.3.3
getMoistureData II.3.3
Extraction of calculated material properties
getCompliance II.3.4 “EX12/testCla.rb”
getStiffness II.3.4 IV.3.2
getInPlaneComplianceII.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneStiffness II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneAlfaE II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneBetaE II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneAlfa II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneBeta II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSCompliance II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSStiffness II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSAlfaG II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSBetaG II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSAlfa II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getOOPSBeta II.3.4“EX13/extendedCLA.rb”
getInPlaneLambdaT II.3.4 IV.3.3
getRho II.3.4 IV.3.3
getCp II.3.4 IV.3.3
getRhoCp II.3.4 IV.3.3
getInPlaneLambdaH II.3.4
Management of units methods
getUnits II.3.5
setUnits II.3.5
changeUnits II.3.5
Attributes
Id II.3.2
Type II.3.2
TypeName II.3.2 (read only)
NDF lines
initWithNeutralLines II.3.6
getNeutralLines II.3.6

II.3.1 Creation of an object

The singleton method “new” is used to create ClaMat objects. This method has no argument. (The “initialize” method has no argument either.)

II.3.2 Identifier and type

Two attributes are defined for the “ClaMat” object: “Id” and “Type”. Five methods allow the manipulation of the identifier of material and of its type:

Note that for the type definition, the integers are 0, 1, 2 or 3 and correspond to "NONE", "isotropic", "orthotropic" or "anisotropic" respectively.

II.3.3 Manipulating Data

Twelve methods are used to set moduli and Poisson’s coefficients, thermal expansion coefficients and allowables. These methods have one Hash argument that maps String keys to real values.

1.

“clearModuli” has no arguments and erases all the moduli stored in a ClaMat object.

2.

“insertModuli” is used to specify moduli and Poisson coefficients of the material. The keys used to insert mechanical data depend on the type of material:

3.

“fillModuli” is used to set material moduli and Poisson coefficients. This method has the same arguments as “insertModuli” but differs by the fact that moduli and Poisson coefficients are re-initialized before insertion of values.

4.

“clearCTEs” has no arguments and erases all the CTEs stored in a ClaMat object.

5.

“insertCTEs” is used to define different components of the thermal expansion coefficients. For orthotropic and anisotropic materials, possible keys are "alfa1", "alfa2", "alfa3", "alfa12", "alfa23" and "alfa31". For isotropic materials, only the key "alfa" can be used.

6.

“fillCTEs” is used to set material CTEs. This method has the same arguments as “insertCTEs” but differs by the fact that CTEs are re-initialized before insertion of values.

7.

“clearCMEs” has no arguments and erases all the CMEs stored in a ClaMat object.

8.

“insertCMEs” is used to define different components of the moisture expansion coefficients. For orthotropic and anisotropic materials, possible keys are "beta1", "beta2", "beta3", "beta12", "beta23" and "beta31". For isotropic materials, key "beta" only can be used.

9.

“fillCMEs” is used to set material CMEs. This method has the same arguments as “insertCMEs” but differs by the fact that CMEs are re-initialized before insertion of values.

10.

“clearAllowables” has no arguments and erases all the allowables stored in a ClaMat object.

11.

“insertAllowables” is used to add material allowables. The possible keys are "sc", "st", "ss", "ec", "et", "gs", "s1c", "s1t", "s2c", "s2t", "s12", "s23", "s31", "e1c", "e1t", "e2c", "e2t", "e3c", "e3t", "g12", "g23", "g31", "F12", "F23" and "F31". "st" is used to calculate isotropic stress criteria or reserve factors. "F12" "F23" and "F31" correspond to the F12TW, F23TW and F31TW of the Tsai-Wu failure criteria (sections II.1.10.14 and II.1.10.15). Note that the "ilss" allowable defined at material level has no effect because for Ilss criterion calculation, the allowable is always extracted from the laminate definition. (More precisely, the ilss laminate allowable, or the ply allowables are used.)

12.

“fillAllowables” is used to set material allowables. This method has the same arguments as “insertAllowables” but differs by the fact that material allowables are re-initialized before insertion of values.

13.

“clearThermalData” has no arguments and erases all the thermal data stored in a ClaMat object.

14.

“insertThermalData” is used to define the thermal data. For orthotropic and anisotropic materials, possible keys are "lambdaT1", "lambdaT2", "lambdaT3", "lambdaT12", "lambdaT23" and "lambdaT31". For isotropic materials, only the key "lambdaT" can be used. For all types of materials "rho" and "Cp" keys can be used.

15.

“fillThermalData” is used to set material thermal data. This method has the same arguments as “insertThermalData” but differs by the fact that thermal data are re-initialized before insertion of values.

16.

“clearMoistureData” has no arguments and erases all the Moisture data stored in a ClaMat object.

17.

“insertMoistureData” is used to define the moisture data. For orthotropic and anisotropic materials, possible keys are "lambdaH1", "lambdaH2", "lambdaH3", "lambdaH12", "lambdaH23" and "lambdaH31". For isotropic materials, only the key "lambdaH" can be used.

18.

“fillMoistureData” is used to set material Moisture data. This method has the same arguments as “insertMoistureData” but differs by the fact that moisture data are re-initialized before insertion of values.

The type of ClaMat object must have been set prior to the use of any of the three previous methods. (See “Type” attribute described in section II.3.2.) Several methods allow to retrieve the data that define a material:

1.

“getDataModuli” returns the moduli that define the ClaMat object.

2.

“getDataCTEs” returns the CTEs that define the ClaMat object.

3.

“getDataCMEs” returns the CMEs that define the ClaMat object.

4.

“getDataAllowables” returns the allowables that characterize the ClaMat object.

5.

“getThermalData” returns the thermal data that define the ClaMat object.

6.

“getMoistureData” returns the moisture data that define the ClaMat object.

Each of these “get” methods returns a Hash that associates String and Real objects. (See the “fill” corresponding methods for possible values.)

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaMat object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.3.4 Calculated results

Several methods allow to recover stiffness, compliance or conductivity matrices in a specified direction.

All these methods have one optional argument: an angle corresponding to the direction of observation with respect to the material axes, and in which the components of the matrix are expressed.

On the other hand, three methods return material scalar characteristics and have no argument:

The different calculated results from the ClaMat object are expressed in the units system associated with the object.

II.3.5 Management of Units

The “ClaMat” class defines three methods for the management of units:

The Hash arguments or return values mentioned above have String keys and values as explained in section II.1.13. The difference between the “setUnits” and “changeUnits” methods is also explained in the same section.

II.3.6 Saving or initializing with NDF lines

Two methods allow to save or read ClaMat objects from an Array of Strings in neutral format. These two methods are “initWithNeutralLines” and “getNeutralLines” that work in a similar way as the corresponding methods in “ClaDb” class (section II.2.6).

However, the lines transmitted to “initWithNeutralLines” or returned by “getNeutralLines” correspond to a single ClaMat object definition.

II.3.7 Other methods

“clone” method has no argument and returns a copy of the ClaMat object.

Chapter II.4
The “ClaLam” class

The “ClaLam” class is used to store lay-ups and calculate laminate mechanical properties and load responses. They are characterized by the lay-up they define.

Table II.4.1 gives the list of methods defined in “ClaLam” class.

Table II.4.1: The different methods that have been defined in “ClaLam” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) II.4.2 IV.3.2
initialize II.4.2
clone II.4.13
Class methods
setMuxMuy II.4.1
getMuxMuy II.4.1
setOopsApproach II.4.1
getOopsApproach II.4.1
Manipulations of the laminate plies
clearPlies II.4.4
addPly II.4.4 IV.3.2
setNbrPlies II.4.4
setPly II.4.4
getNbrPlies II.4.4
getPlyData II.4.4
Other laminate data
clearAllowables II.4.5
insertAllowables II.4.5 IV.3.6
fillAllowables II.4.5
getDataAllowables II.4.5
setRefT II.4.5
getRefT II.4.5
setRefH II.4.5
getRefH II.4.5
setLaminateIlss II.4.5 IV.3.4.3
setAllPliesIlss II.4.5 IV.3.4.3
Laminate properties
calcLaminateProperties II.4.6 IV.3.3
get_thickness II.4.6
get_surfacicMass II.4.6
get_averageDensity II.4.6
get_ABBD II.4.6 IV.3.2
get_G II.4.6 IV.3.5
get_alfaEh1 II.4.6 IV.3.2
get_alfaEh2 II.4.6
get_alfaEh3 II.4.6
get_alfaGh1 II.4.6
get_alfaGh2 II.4.6
get_betaEh1 II.4.6
get_betaEh2 II.4.6
get_betaEh3 II.4.6
get_betaGh1 II.4.6
get_betaGh2 II.4.6
get_abbd_complMat II.4.6
get_g_complMat II.4.6
get_alfae0 II.4.6
get_alfae1 II.4.6
get_alfak0 II.4.6
get_alfak1 II.4.6
get_alfas0 II.4.6
get_alfas1 II.4.6
get_betae0 II.4.6
get_betae1 II.4.6
get_betak0 II.4.6
get_betak1 II.4.6
get_betas0 II.4.6
get_betas1 II.4.6
get_engineering II.4.6 IV.3.4.1
get_LambdaT II.4.6 IV.3.3
get_R33T II.4.6 IV.3.3
get_RhoCpH II.4.6 IV.3.3
get_LambdaH II.4.6
get_R33H II.4.6
Laminate load response
calcResponse II.4.7.1IV.3.4.2
isThermalLoadingDefined II.4.7.2
getDeltaT II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getT0 II.4.7.2
getGradT II.4.7.2
isMoistureLoadingDefined II.4.7.2
getDeltaH II.4.7.2
getH0 II.4.7.2
getGradH II.4.7.2
isMechanicalLoadingDefined II.4.7.2
getNormalForces II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getMoments II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getShearForces II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getNormalStrains II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getCurvatures II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getShearStrains II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getAverageInPlaneStresses II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getFlexuralStresses II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getAverageShearStresses II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getAverageInPlaneStrains II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getFlexuralStrains II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getAverageShearStrains II.4.7.2IV.3.4.1
getPliesStrains II.4.7.3IV.3.4.1
getPliesStresses II.4.7.3IV.3.4.1
getPliesMechanicalStrains II.4.7.3IV.3.4.1
getPliesStrainsWrtLamAxes II.4.7.3
getPliesStressesWrtLamAxes II.4.7.3
getPliesMechanicalStrainsWrtLamAxesII.4.7.3
getPliesT II.4.7.4
getPliesDeltaT II.4.7.4
getPliesH II.4.7.4
getPliesDeltaH II.4.7.4
getDerived II.4.7.5IV.3.4.1
getMaxDerived II.4.7.5
getMinDerived II.4.7.5
getFailureIndices II.4.7.5IV.3.4.1
getMaxFailureIndices II.4.7.5
getMinFailureIndices II.4.7.5
getReserveFactors II.4.7.5IV.3.4.1
getMaxReserveFactors II.4.7.5
getMinReserveFactors II.4.7.5
getStrengthRatios II.4.7.5IV.3.4.1
getMaxStrengthRatios II.4.7.5
getMinStrengthRatios II.4.7.5
calcFiniteElementResponse II.4.8.1
reInitAllPliesAccelMatrices II.4.8.2
calcFiniteElementCriteria II.4.9 IV.3.6
Management of units methods
getUnits II.4.10
setUnits II.4.10
changeUnits II.4.10
Iterators
each_ply II.4.12 IV.3.5
NDF lines
initWithNeutralLines II.4.11
getNeutralLines II.4.11
Attributes
Id II.4.3

II.4.1 Class Methods

As shown in section II.1.6 that two arbitrary parameters μx and μy define the relations between x and y partial derivatives of laminate bending moment components and out-of-plane shear forces when the (μx,μy)” approach is adopted. The default values of these parameters are μx = μy = 1. Two Class Methods allow the manipulation of these parameters:

As these methods are Class methods, the modification of μx or μy affects all the laminates defined in all the CLA databases.

Similarly, one methods allows to select the laminate out-of-plane shear calculation approach. The method is called “setOopsApproach” and has one String parameter that has three acceptable values: “Standard”, “UncoupledXY” and “InShearLoadingAxes”. These values correspond to the calculation approaches discussed in section II.1.6.5. “Standard” is the default approach. Method “getOopsApproach” is used to check which approach has been selected. Here again, “setOopsApproach” affects all the laminates defined in all the CLA databases.

“setMuxMuy” and “setOopsApproach” should be used (if used) only once before the creation of the first laminate by FeResPost. Otherwise unexpected behaviour is possible. Indeed, intermediate matrices are stored in C++ laminate objects and the modification of the calculation approach after laminates have been created may lead to mixture of matrices and vectors obtained via different approaches.

II.4.2 Creation of an object

The singleton method “new” is used to create ClaLam objects. This method has no argument. (The “initialize” method has no argument either.)

II.4.3 Identifying a laminate

Two methods allow the manipulation of the identifier of ClaLam objects (“Id” attribute):

II.4.4 Manipulation of plies

The “clearPlies” method has no argument and erases all the plies defining a ClaLam object. After the method has been called, the number of plies of the laminate is zero.

One way to define the plies of the laminate is to add successively all the plies defined in the laminate starting at the bottom layer. The “addPly” method is used to insert plies in a ClaLam. This method has four or five arguments.

The sequence of plies in the laminate corresponds to the order of addition of the plies by calls to the “addPly” method. Of course each call of the method “addPly” increases the number of plies of the laminate by one.

Instead of defining the sequence of plies sequentially by successive calls to “addPly” method, the data of each ply can also be defined in random order by calls to “setPly” method. Its arguments are nearly the same as those of the “addPly” method:

As the “PlyId” second argument is optional, the method has 5 or 6 arguments. The “setPly” method is very handy when one defines a new laminate by modifying a few plies from a previously existing one. Of course, an entirely new laminate can also have its ply data initialized with “setPly” method, but then the number of plies must first be set... “setNbrPlies” method has one argument and sets the number of plies. Note that the ply definition data previously stored in the laminate may have random values after using this method.

Two methods are used to access and examine plies stored in a ClaLam object:

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaLam object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.4.5 Other data

The reference temperature of a laminate is accessed with the two following methods:

Note that when an ILSS criterion is calculated, the allowables are always extracted from the laminate definition. When no ClaDb argument is provided for the calculation of the criterion, the laminate “ilss” allowable is used; when a ClaDb argument is provided, the ply “ilss” allowables are used. This means that the “ilss” allowable provided in ClaMat materials is never used.

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaLam object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.4.6 Laminate properties

The method “calcLaminateProperties” calculates the laminate properties of the ClaLam object. This means that the stiffness and compliance matrices, the thermal-expansion vectors are estimated and stored into the laminate object. This method can be called only after all the plies of the laminate have been inserted into the object. The method has one argument: a ClaDb object in which all the materials used in the lay-up definition have to be stored (otherwise, an exception is raised). Note that when a ClaLam object is inserted into a ClaDb, the “calcLaminateProperties” method is called automatically, with this ClaDb object as argument.

Six methods allow retrieval of the properties of a laminate:

These five methods have one optional Real argument that corresponds to a rotation angle with respect to the laminate axes. If the argument is omitted, zero value is assumed and the engineering constants are calculated in laminate axes. The angle is specified in o.

Four methods return Real scalar values:

These methods have no arguments.

The different calculated results from the ClaLam object are expressed in the units system associated with the object.

II.4.7 Laminate load response for a simple loading

The calculation of the laminate response to a specified loading is always done in two steps:

1.

The laminate load response is calculated for a specific loading. This calculation is used to estimate laminate in-plane forces, bending moments, average strains, curvature, temperature variations... Also layered results are calculated if required. (See description of method “calcResponse” in section II.4.7.1.)

All these results are stored in the ClaLam object and remembered until the next calculation is performed.

2.

Then, the laminate can be “interrogated” to obtain a restitution of stored results, or the calculation of new results from the information stored since the last calculation. (See the methods described in sections II.4.7.2, II.4.7.3 and II.4.7.5.)

This way of working allows at the same time much flexibility in the recovery of results at an acceptable computational cost.

The different calculated results retrieved from the ClaLam object are expressed in the units system associated with the laminate object. This means that even if the loading units or the material units differ from laminate units, FeResPost performs the conversions needed to obtain stresses, forces, moments and other results in the units system associated with the laminate.

II.4.7.1 Calculation of the load response

The method “calcResponse” is used to calculate the laminate response to a specified loading. When this method is called, several results are systematically calculated and stored: in-plane forces, bending moments, average strains, curvature and temperature variation. The calculation and storage of ply results is optional and commanded by the Boolean arguments of the method.

The “calcResponse” may have from 3 up to 6 arguments:

The three last parameters are optional and default to false (no calculation of the corresponding layered results).

II.4.7.2 Laminate internal loads and strains

Several methods allow recovery of results calculated at laminate level. All these results correspond to the laminate results for the last call to method “calcResponse”:

The optional rotation is specified as an angle expressed in degrees. When the parameter is omitted, a zero value is assumed. When a tensor is returned the three components are given in the following order: XX, YY and XY.

II.4.7.3 Ply stresses and strains

Three methods give access to the ply results stored in ClaLam object:

These three methods:

The methods return an Array of which each element corresponds to the stresses/strains at one given location in the thickness of the laminate. More precisely, each element is an Array of 2+6=8 elements containing:

To the three methods listed above correspond three other methods that return the ply stresses or strains with components expressed in a coordinate system defined with respect to the laminate, and not expressed in ply axes. The three methods are called:

The first argument of these three methods are a real value corresponding to the rotation of restitution coordinate system with respect to the laminate axes. The following arguments are the same as those of the three first methods defined above.

II.4.7.4 Temperatures and moistures at ply level

Four methods give access to the temperature and moisture ply results stored in ClaLam object:

The arguments are the same as those of the method described in section II.4.7.3: they correspond to the identifiers of layers at which ply results are recovered. The methods return an Array of which each element corresponds to a layered Result. More precisely, each element is an Array of 3 elements containing:

II.4.7.5 Other ply results

Several methods of the ClaLam class allow estimation of values from the stored ply stresses and strains. Three such methods return the values calculated for several plies:

“getDerived” and “getFailureIndices” have the same parameters:

So for example, “getFailureIndices” method may be called as follows:

     criteria=["TsaiHill2D","MaxStress2D"]
     ...
     fiRes=getFailureIndices(criteria)
     ...
     fiRes=getFailureIndices(db,criteria)
     ...
     fiRes=getFailureIndices(db,criteria,[4,"Sup"],[7,"Inf"])
 

Note that several criteria can be calculated by a single call.

Methods “getReserveFactors” and “getStrengthRatios” have one additional parameter: the factor of safety. This parameter is a Real value provided after the list of criteria and before the optional layer identifiers. For example

     criteria=["TsaiHill2D","MaxStress2D"]
     ...
     rfRes=getReserveFactors(db,criteria,1.25,[4,"Sup"],[7,"Inf"])

Each of the four methods described above returns an Array containing two elements:

1.

The first element is an Array of Strings containing the list of criteria that have been calculated. Indeed, the criteria are calculated only if the criterion is available. This Array has X elements.

2.

The second element contains the new layered results. Each element of this Array contains 2+X elements:

The four methods “getDerived”, “getFailureIndices”, “getReserveFactors” and “getStrengthRatios” have “Min” and “Max” variants. This makes six additional methods: “getMinDerived”, “getMinFailureIndices”, “getMinReserveFactors”, “getMinStrengthRatios”, “getMaxDerived”, “getMaxFailureIndices”, “getMaxReserveFactors” and “getMaxStrengthRatios”. These methods have the same parameters as their basic corresponding methods and are used to return values associated with the most critical ply. (The ply leading to maximum or minimum calculated criterion.) The returned Array, however, is different. The returned value is an Array of which each element is an Array of four elements:

1.

The calculated criterion (String).

2.

Two elements identifying the critical layer (an integer and string value).

3.

A Real object corresponding to the critical value.

The criteria presently available are summarized in Table II.1.2.

II.4.8 Laminate finite element load response

II.4.8.1 Calculation of laminate loads, stresses and strains

The “calcFiniteElementResponse” method allows the calculation of finite element load response. More precisely the method calculates several Result objects containing laminate finite element results, from loading of which some components are finite element results. The method has up to nine arguments:

1.

The first argument is a “ClaDb” object in which the materials used in the laminate definition are stored.

2.

The second argument, “theta”, is a real value corresponding to the angle in degrees of loading with respect to the laminate axes. In most cases, this angle will be zero. Note that the same angle is used to calculate laminate load response for all elements and nodes on which it is required.

3.

The third argument is a ClaLoad object in which the loading is defined. This ClaLoad object must have some components defined as finite element results.

4.

The fourth argument is an Array of three logical values. Each logical value corresponds to the request of results at bottom, mid and top location respectively, in each ply. (The components are similar to three of the arguments of “calcResponse” method described in section II.4.7.1.)

5.

The fifth parameter is an Array of Strings specifying the non-layered laminate results that will be returned by the method.

6.

The sixth parameter is an Array of Strings specifying the layered laminate results that will be returned by the method. (Results at ply level.)

7.

The seventh parameter is a Real object corresponding to the safety factor. This parameter is used by the method only for the calculation of reserve factors, or strength ratios. (See the following argument.)

8.

The eighth parameter is an Array of Arrays describing the failure indices, reserve factors or equivalent scalar derived values requirements. Each element of the first Array is an Array of up to five elements:

(a)

A String corresponding to the key by which the corresponding result shall be referred in the Hash returned by “calcFiniteElementResponse” method.

(b)

A String corresponding to the name of the criterion. This name must be one of the names defined in Table II.1.2.

(c)

A string defining the type of Result that shall be defined. Values can be “FI”, “RF”, “SR” or “EQ”. They correspond to the calculation of Failure Indices, Reserve Factors, Strength Ratios or Scalar Derived values respectively. If a Reserve Factor or Strength Ratio is required, the factor of safety parameter is used for the calculation.

(d)

A logical value specifying whether the laminate allowables are used for the calculation of Result values. If this value is false, then the ply material allowables are used in the calculations.

(e)

A logical value specifying if Result values are required for all the plies. If the argument is “false”, the critical layer value only is inserted in the returned Result.

The Logical parameters are optional. If not defined, “false” values are assumed.

9.

An Array containing the list of plies on which stresses, strains or scalar failure indices are to be calculated. (For example, an Array of integers corresponding to ply identifiers.)

The method returns a Hash object containing pairs of Strings and Results. One can make a few remarks that should help to understand Results returned by the method:

The requirements for laminate non-layered and layered Results are summarized in Table II.4.2 and Table II.4.3 respectively.

An example of use of the method follows:

    criteria = []
    criteria << ["TS FI","TsaiHill2D","FI",true,true]
    criteria << ["TW FI","TsaiWu2D","FI",true,true]
    criteria << ["TW FI Critical","TsaiWu2D","FI",true,false]
    criteria << ["ILSS FI Critical","Ilss","FI",true,false]
    theta=0.0

    outputs=lam.calcFiniteElementResponse(compDb,theta,ld,[true,true,true],
        ["Shell Forces","Shell Moments", "Shell Curvatures",
         "Average Strain Tensor"],
        ["Stress Tensor","Strain Tensor","Mechanical Strain Tensor",
         "Ply Temperature Variation"],
        1.5,criteria)


Table II.4.2: Laminate non-layered Results requirements.
Requirement Finite Element Result
“Shell Forces” “Shell Forces”
“Shell Moments” “Shell Moments”
“Shell Curvatures” “Shell Curvatures”
“Average Strain Tensor”“Average Strain Tensor”


Table II.4.3: Laminate layered Results requirements.
Requirement Finite Element Result
“Stress Tensor” “Stress Tensor”
“Strain Tensor” “Strain Tensor”
“Mechanical Strain Tensor” “Mechanical Strain Tensor”
“Ply Temperature” “Ply Temperature”
“Ply Temperature Variation”“Ply Temperature Variation”
“Ply Moisture” “Ply Moisture”
“Ply Moisture Variation” “Ply Moisture Variation”

Note that the same method with exactly the same arguments has been defined in the DataBase class. (See section I.1.5.)

II.4.8.1.1 Units

The different calculated results from the ClaLam object are expressed in the units system associated with the object.

II.4.8.2 Acceleration

Section II.1.9.2 explains how the plies stresses and strains calculation can be significantly accelerated by calculating once and for all intermediate acceleration matrices for each ply. These matrices must be recalculated each time the laminate or one of its materials is modified.

Method “reInitAllPliesAccelMatrices” has been added to the “ClaLam” class to re-initialize the laminate plies acceleration matrices. This ensures that the matrices will be re-calculated next time they are required.

II.4.9 Calculation of criteria from FE stresses or strains

The “calcFiniteElementCriteria” method allows the calculation of ply failure criteria, reserve factors or equivalent stress or strain from layered Results. The method has four arguments:

The method returns a Hash object containing pairs of Strings and Results. In this case, only scalar Result objects are returned.

The different calculated results from the ClaLam object are expressed in the units system associated with the object.

II.4.10 Management of Units

The “ClaLam” class defines three methods for the management of units:

The Hash arguments or return values mentioned above have String keys and values as explained in section II.1.13. The difference between the “setUnits” and “changeUnits” methods is also explained in the same section.

II.4.11 Saving or initializing with NDF lines

Two methods allow saving or reading ClaLam objects from an Array of Strings in neutral format. These two methods are “initWithNeutralLines” and “getNeutralLines” that work in a similar way as the corresponding methods in “ClaDb” class (section II.2.6).

However, the lines transmitted to “initWithNeutralLines” or returned by “getNeutralLines” correspond to a single ClaLam object definition.

II.4.12 One iterator

The ClaLam class provides the iterator “each_ply” that iterates on the plies. This iterator returns pairs of elements corresponding to the ply index, and the ply definition. The ply definition is an Array of 5 elements identical to the one returned by “getPlyData” method.

II.4.13 Other methods

“clone” method has no argument and returns a copy of the ClaLam object.

Chapter II.5
The “ClaLoad” class

The “ClaLoad” class is used to define, store and manipulate loadings to be applied to laminates. A loading is characterized by:

A list of the methods defined in “ClaLoad” class is given in Table II.5.1.

Table II.5.1: The different methods that have been defined in “ClaLoad” class. Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) II.5.1IV.3.4.4
initialize II.5.1
clone II.5.9
Manipulation of data defining ClaLoad object
setT II.5.3IV.3.4.4
getTinf II.5.3
getTsup II.5.3
isTdefined II.5.3
unsetT II.5.3
setH II.5.3
getHinf II.5.3
getHsup II.5.3
isHdefined II.5.3
unsetH II.5.3
setMembrane II.5.4IV.3.4.4
setFlexural II.5.4IV.3.4.4
setOutOfPlane II.5.4
getMembrane II.5.4
getFlexural II.5.4
getOutOfPlane II.5.4
setToCombili II.5.5
setShellForces II.5.6 IV.3.6
getShellForcesCopy II.5.6
clearShellForces II.5.6
setShellMoments II.5.6 IV.3.6
getShellMomentsCopy II.5.6
clearShellMoments II.5.6
setShellStrains II.5.6 IV.3.6
getShellStrainsCopy II.5.6
clearShellStrains II.5.6
setShellCurvatures II.5.6 IV.3.6
getShellCurvaturesCopy II.5.6
clearShellCurvatures II.5.6
setShellTemperatures II.5.6
getShellTemperaturesCopyII.5.6
clearShellTemperatures II.5.6
setShellMoistures II.5.6
getShellMoisturesCopy II.5.6
clearShellMoistures II.5.6
Management of units methods
getUnits II.5.7
setUnits II.5.7
changeUnits II.5.7
NDF lines
initWithNeutralLines II.5.8
getNeutralLines II.5.8
Attributes
Id II.5.2

II.5.1 Creation of an object

The singleton method “new” is used to create ClaLoad objects. This method has no argument. (The “initialize” method has no argument either.)

II.5.2 Identifying a ClaLoad

Two methods allow the manipulation of the identifier of ClaLoad objects (“Id” attribute):

II.5.3 Thermo-elastic and hygro-elastic contributions

Ten methods allow the manipulation of scalar characteristics of the loadings. (The scalar characteristics are the thermo-elastic and hygro-elastic contributions to loading.) The methods are:

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaLoad object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.5.4 Setting and getting mechanical parts

Three methods are used to set the mechanical part of loading stored in the ClaLoad object:

Each of the three “set” methods described above has a corresponding “get” method:

Each of these three “get” methods returns an Array containing the arguments of the respective “set” methods. The first element of this Array is an Array of 3 or 2 Real values. Then follow 3 or 2 Strings corresponding to the types of solicitation of each component.

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaLoad object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.5.5 Linear combinations of loads

“setToCombili” method is used to define a ClaLoad as a linear combination of pre-defined ClaLoads. This method has four arguments:

1.

A reference temperature. This Real parameter is necessary because the top and bottom temperatures of the combined ClaLoad are calculated as follows:

Ttot = Tref + ∑ i=1Nf i ⋅ (Ti - Tref) .
2.

A reference moisture. (Same remarks as for the reference temperature.)

3.

An Array of Reals corresponding to the coefficients of the linear combination.

4.

An Array of ClaLoad objects.

The sizes of the two Array arguments must match. Also the types of the different components of mechanical part of the loadings must be the same.

II.5.6 Finite element Results

Eighteen methods are devoted to the manipulation of loading components defined as finite element Results. Six member data correspond to these methods: “Shell Forces”, “Shell Moments”, “Shell Strains”, “Shell Curvatures”, “Shell Temperatures” and “Shell Moistures”.

The mechanical components of loading correspond to non-layered Results. “Shell Temperatures” and “Shell Moistures” are defined at Shell lower and upper surfaces (layers “Z1” and “Z2” respectively). When calculating laminate load response, FeResPost does not check or take into account the coordinate system to which mechanical loading components are associated. This means that all the components are assumed to be given in loading axes. It is the responsibility of the user to first transform the components in such a way that their use by FeResPost makes sense.

Three methods allow the manipulation of Shell Forces stored in the ClaLoad object:

1.

“setShellForces” inserts a copy of the Result argument inside the ClaLoad object.

2.

“getShellForcesCopy” has no argument and returns a copy of the “Shell Forces” Result stored in the ClaLoad object. The method returns “Nil” if the “Shell Forces” are not initialized.

3.

“clearShellForces” erases the “Shell Forces” Result stored in the ClaLoad object.

For the other Results, the manipulation methods are built similarly. The other methods are:

Obviously, the different data inserted in, or retrieved from the ClaLoad object should be consistent with the set of units attributed to the same object. This set of units can be attributed to the object after initialization of the data.

II.5.7 Management of Units

The “ClaLoad” class defines three methods for the management of units:

The Hash arguments or return values mentioned above have String keys and values as explained in section II.1.13. The difference between the “setUnits” and “changeUnits” methods is also explained in the same section.

II.5.8 Saving or initializing with NDF lines

Two methods allow saving or reading ClaLoad objects from an Array of Strings in neutral format. These two methods are “initWithNeutralLines” and “getNeutralLines” that work in a similar way as the corresponding methods in “ClaDb” class (section II.2.6).

However, the lines transmitted to “initWithNeutralLines” or returned by “getNeutralLines” correspond to a single ClaLoad object definition.

II.5.9 Other methods

“clone” method has no argument and returns a copy of the ClaLoad object.

Part III
Solver Preferences

Chapter III.0
Introduction

In this Part of the document, the preferences for the different solvers supported by FeResPost are described. Most preferences are defined as methods and member data of the classes specializing the “DataBase” class defined in Chapter I.1. Presently, two solvers are supported: Nastran and Samcef. The corresponding classes specializing the “DataBase” class are “NastranDb” and “SamcefDb” classes. The corresponding preferences are described in Chapters III.1 and III.2 respectively. The diagram of Figure I.1.1 representing the “DataBase” hierarchy can be more precisely represented as in Figure 1.


PICT

Figure 1: Finite element DataBase classes hierarchy.

Chapter III.1
Nastran Preferences

Most methods specific to the post-processing of Nastran finite element Results and models are defined in the class “NastranDb” that inherits the “DataBase” class. This class is described in section III.1.1. A list of the methods defined in the “NastranDb” class is given in Table III.1.1.

Table III.1.1: The different methods that have been defined in “NastranDb” class. See also the methods defined in generic DataBase class (Table I.1.1). Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
(See also methods in generic DataBase class.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) III.1.1 IV.2.2.1.1
initialize III.1.1
Reading model
readBdf III.1.1.1 IV.2.2.1.1
readFemFromHdf III.1.1.3 IV.2.2.2
Reading model or Results from OP2
readOp2 III.1.1.2, III.1.1.9 IV.2.4.1
readOp2FilteredResults III.1.1.9 IV.2.4.1
readOp22H III.1.1.2, III.1.1.9
readOp2FilteredResults2H III.1.1.9
getXdbLcNames (s) III.1.1.10
getXdbScNames (s) III.1.1.10
getXdbResNames (s) III.1.1.10
getXdbLcScNames (s) III.1.1.10
getXdbLcScResNames (s) III.1.1.10 IV.2.4.6
getXdbLcInfos (s) III.1.1.10 IV.2.4.6
printXdbDictionary (s) III.1.1.10
readXdb III.1.1.10 IV.2.4.6
readXdb2H III.1.1.10
XDB attachments
attachXdb III.1.1.11
detachXdb III.1.1.11
removeAllAttachments III.1.1.11
getNbrAttachments III.1.1.11
getAttachmentNames III.1.1.11
checkAttachmentExists III.1.1.11
getAttachmentWordsSize III.1.1.11 IV.2.8
getAttachmentSwapEndianness III.1.1.11 IV.2.8
getAttachmentLcInfos III.1.1.11
getAttachmentNbrLoadCases III.1.1.11
getAttachmentLcNames III.1.1.11
getAttachmentLcScNames III.1.1.11
getAttachmentLcScResNames III.1.1.11
getAttachmentNbrSubCases III.1.1.11
getAttachmentScNames III.1.1.11
getAttachmentNbrResults III.1.1.11
getAttachmentResIds III.1.1.11
getAttachmentResNames III.1.1.11
getAttachmentResults III.1.1.11
importAttachmentResults III.1.1.11
getAttachmentResultsCombili III.1.1.11
getAttachmentDesVarHistory III.1.1.11 IV.2.7
getAttachmentConstrDefinitions III.1.1.11 IV.2.7
getAttachmentConstrHistory III.1.1.11 IV.2.7
getAttachmentObjectiveHistory III.1.1.11 IV.2.7
getAttachmentDesRespHistory III.1.1.11
setStorageBufferMaxCapacity (s) III.1.1.11
getStorageBufferMaxCapacity (s) III.1.1.11
getAttachmentElementExtId III.1.1.11.7
getAttachmentNodeInfo III.1.1.11.7
getAttachmentDictKeys III.1.1.11.7
getAttachmentDictionary III.1.1.11.7
each_xdbRaw III.1.1.11.7 IV.2.8
each_xdbBinRaw III.1.1.11.7 IV.2.8
binDataToValues (s) III.1.1.11.7 IV.2.8
HDF attachments. (See also section I.6.11.)
readHdf III.1.1.12
readHdf2H III.1.1.12
attachHdf III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
detachHdf III.1.1.12
removeAllHdfAttachments III.1.1.12
getNbrHdfAttachments III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentNames III.1.1.12
checkHdfAttachmentExists III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentLcInfos III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
getHdfAttachmentNbrLoadCases III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentLcNames III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
getHdfAttachmentLcScNames III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentLcScResNames III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentNbrSubCases III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentScNames III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
getHdfAttachmentNbrResults III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentResIds III.1.1.12
getHdfAttachmentResNames III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
getHdfAttachmentResults III.1.1.12
readHdfAttachmentResults III.1.1.12 IV.2.9
getHdfAttachmentDataSets III.1.1.12 IV.2.10
getHdfAttachmentCompoundMemberNames III.1.1.12 IV.2.10
getHdfAttachmentDataSetNbrItems III.1.1.12 IV.2.10
each_hdfAttachmentNasSetItem III.1.1.12 IV.2.10
getHdfAttachmentDataSet III.1.1.12 IV.2.10
Enabling/Disabling bulk cards or Results
enableBulkCards (s) III.1.1.9
disableBulkCards (s) III.1.1.9
getBulkCardsEnableInfos (s) III.1.1.9
enableOp2ResElems (s) III.1.1.9
disableOp2ResElems (s) III.1.1.9
getOp2ResElemsEnableInfos (s) III.1.1.9
enableXdbTables (s) III.1.1.10
disableXdbTables (s) III.1.1.10
getXdbTablesEnableInfos (s) III.1.1.10
Coordinate system methods
getCoordSysCopy III.1.1.7
addCoordSys III.1.1.7
makeAllCoordSysWrt0 III.1.1.7
Group manipulation methods
getNodesAssociatedToElements III.1.1.8 IV.2.5.3
getNodesAssociatedToRbes III.1.1.8
getElementsAssociatedToNodes III.1.1.8 IV.2.5.3
getRbesAssociatedToNodes III.1.1.8
getElementsAssociatedToMaterials III.1.1.8
getElementsAssociatedToPlies III.1.1.8
getElementsAssociatedToProperties III.1.1.8
Iterators
each_coordSysId III.1.1.14.1
each_elemId III.1.1.14.1 IV.2.3
each_nodeId III.1.1.14.1
each_rbeId III.1.1.14.1
each_mpcId III.1.1.14.1
each_materialId III.1.1.14.1
each_propertyId III.1.1.14.1
each_nodeOfElement III.1.1.14.1 IV.2.3
each_cornerNodeOfElement III.1.1.14.1
each_xdbRaw III.1.1.11.7 IV.2.8
each_xdbBinRaw III.1.1.11.7 IV.2.8
each_hdfAttachmentNasSetItem III.1.1.12 IV.2.2
each_bdfCard (s) III.1.1.14.3 IV.2.2.1.2
each_bdfCard2 (s) III.1.1.14.3 IV.2.2.1.2
Write methods
writeBdfLines III.1.1.5
writeNastranCard (s) III.1.1.5 IV.2.5.1
writeNastranCards (s) III.1.1.5 IV.2.5.1
writeNastranCardToVectStr (s) III.1.1.5
writeNastranCardsToVectStr (s) III.1.1.5 IV.2.10
Other methods (access to FEM definition and FEM modification)
getMpcNodes III.1.1.15
getMpcDependentNodes III.1.1.15
getMpcIndependentNodes III.1.1.15
getRbeNodes III.1.1.15
getRbeDependentNodes III.1.1.15
getRbeIndependentNodes III.1.1.15
getElementPropertyId III.1.1.15
getNodeRcId III.1.1.15
getNodeAcId III.1.1.15
getNodeCoords III.1.1.15
fillCard III.1.1.6 IV.2.2 and IV.2.3
fillCards III.1.1.6
insertCard III.1.1.6
insertCards III.1.1.6 IV.2.2
Superelements
SEID III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
RefCounter III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
NbrSuperElements III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
getMaster III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
getSuperElementIdFromPos III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
getSuperElementFromId III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
getSuperElementFromPos III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
removeResultsAllSE III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
removeAllResultsAllSE III.1.1.4 IV.2.11
readSuperElementsFromHdf III.1.1.4 IV.2.11.4
readSuperElementsFromOp2 III.1.1.4 IV.2.11.4
readSuperElementsFromXdb III.1.1.4 IV.2.11.4
Other attributes
NbrRbes III.1.1.16
NbrMpcs III.1.1.16

III.1.1 “NastranDb” class

A “NastranDb” object can be created by a statement using “new” method like:

    db=NastranDb.new()

Method “initialize” initializes or clears a NastranDb object. This class is a specialization of the FeResPost “DataBase” class.

The model can be defined by reading a Bulk Data File, or an op2 file. (See the corresponding methods below.)

III.1.1.1 Reading a BDF

The finite element model can be imported from a Nastran Bulk Data File with method “readBdf”. The method has up to seven arguments.

1.

A String containing the name of the main Nastran Bulk Data File.

2.

An Array of Strings containing the list of directories in which files specified by “include” statements shall be searched. Its default value is a void Array.

3.

The name of an extension that may be added to the file names specified in include statements. Its default value is a void String. (This argument corresponds to the jidtype in Nastran.)

4.

A Hash with String keys and values corresponding to the list of “symbols” that can be used in “include” statements in the Bulk Data Files. The default value is a void Hash.

5.

A Logical that specifies verbosity for the reading of the Nastran Bulk Data File. Its default value is “false”. This parameter is redundant with “setVerbosityLevel” of “Post” Module: setting the parameter to “true” is equivalent to setting the “Post” verbosity level to 1.

6.

A Logical that specifies whether the file contains only Bulk Data Section lines. Its default value is “false”. If the parameter is “true”, the “BEGIN BULK” and “ENDDATA” lines are ignored, and all the input lines, except comments, are interpreted. (See also the remarks below.)

7.

A Hash with String keys and values corresponding to a list of “parameters” that influence the reading of the BDF file. The default value is a void Hash. See point III.1.1.1 in the list of limitations below.

Only the first argument of the method is mandatory. More information about the method is given in section III.1.1.1. Examples of valid “readBdf” statements follow:

    db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf",
                  [],"",{},true)
    db.readBdf("Z:/RD/ALCAS/TESTSAT/MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf",
                  [],"",{},true)
    db.readBdf("//CALC01/TESTSAT/MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf",
                  [],"",{},true)
    db.readBdf("//CALC01/TESTSAT/MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf",
                  [],"",{},true,true)
    db.readBdf("//CALC01/TESTSAT/MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf",
                  [],"",{},true,true,params)

The format of Nastran cards defined in a bulk data file is described in [Sof04b]. The user must take the following limitations of the interface into account:

At the end of reading, the method issues an information message with a list of cards that have been skipped.

The correct working of method “readBdf” has not been tested for many of the Nastran cards listed above. So, bugs are possible when testing FeResPost for new finite element models. In order to reduce the severity of such bugs, four singleton methods are defined in NastranDb class to disable or (re-)enable some of the Nastran cards. See section III.1.1.9 for the use of that method. Note that the disabling of Nastran cards also influences the “readOp2” method when model entities are read.

III.1.1.2 “OP2” methods for reading a FEM

It is also possible to read a finite element model from an “op2” file with “readOp2” method. The model stored in the file is imported into the NastranDb if the second string argument of the method is “Model” or “Model/Results”. The first String argument is the name of the “op2” file.

The format of these files is described in [Rey04]. The reading of finite element entities is described in section III.1.1.2, and the reading of Results in section III.1.1.9. The reading of 32-bit as well as 64-bit “op2” files is possible. However, there is no advantage in reading the 64-bit version. In fact, these files are larger and may take a longer time to read.

Note that the reading of “op2” files also checks the endianness of the file and, if needed, does corrections to the binary data. For example, it can switch the reading from little-endian to big-endian or vice versa. This allows “op2” files produced on a machine to be read on another machine with different “endianness” so that the portability of results is improved. Also, the 32/64 bits version is checked when the file is opened.

Finite element entities are read into the NastranDb with method “readOp2” if “Model” or “Model/Results” is specified for the entities to read. The finite element entities recognized by the method correspond to the Nastran cards supported by the “readBdf” method (see section III.1.1.1). The corresponding Data Blocks in the “op2” file are “GEOM1”, “GEOM2”, “GEOM3”, “GEOM4”, “EPT” and “MPT” (see [Rey04]).

Note that it is generally preferable to read FE entities from a Bulk Data File rather than from an “op2” file because the data stored are sometimes ambiguous in the “op2” file (orientation of material properties on 2D elements, ...). However, the reading of op2 files is faster than the reading of BDF files.

The correct working of method “readOp2” has not been tested for many of the Nastran cards listed above. So, bugs are likely to occur when testing FeResPost for new finite element models. In order to reduce the the severity of such bugs, the NastranDb class allows disabling or enabling some of the Nastran cards. See section III.1.1.9 for the use of the corresponding singleton methods. Note that the disabling of Nastran cards also influences the “readBdf” method.

III.1.1.3 Reading FEM from HDF file

It is also possible to read a finite element model from an “HDF5” file with “readFemFromHdf” method. The method has up to three arguments. Only the first argument is mandatory. The other two arguments are optional:

(See also the description of method “readSuperElementsFromHdf” in section III.1.1.4.2.

III.1.1.4 Superelements and Modules

III.1.1.4.1 Modules

Modules are not supported. However, with version 5.1.2 of FeResPost, Modules are considered in the reading of Results from OP2 and HDF5 file outputs. (Nastran does not output XDB files when Modules are present in the model.)

When FeResPost detects that Results read from HDF5 or OP2 files are associated with Modules, corresponding part of binary file is skipped and a warning message is printed to standard output. This prevents Module Results from being mixed with main partition Results.

III.1.1.4.2 Superelements

Since version 5.0.5 of FeResPost, Nastran superelements are partially supported. More precisely, PART and external superelements are supported. (See [Hex22] for a definition of the different types of superelements.) The support is limited to the reading of models containing superelements from BDF or op2 files, and to the reading of corresponding Results from op2, xdb or hdf5 files. The purpose of FeResPost is not to generate models, superelements, or manage the assembly of a model divided into several partitions.

The following Nastran BDF cards or instructions related to super elements are supported:

Other cards related to the management of superelements are unsupported: “SELABEL”, “SELOC”, “SECONCT”, “SEEXCLD”, “SEMPLN”, “SETREE”’,...

A finite element model can also be read from a Nastran op2 file, even though this is not recommended. The reading of op2 file identifies the different partitions and builds the corresponding superelement databases.

When a model containing several partitions is read, the corresponding NastranDb object contains sub-databases corresponding to the different superelements. Each database is a distinct NastranDb object. The main database is the “master” database. The sub-databases correspond to the different partitions. Several methods allow to obtain a superelement database from the master database. Also, it is possible to retrieve the master database from a superelement NastranDb object. Each database, including the master database, is identified by a positive integer SEID. For master database SEID=0.

To ease the management of NastranDb objects, a reference counter is added to the C++ nastran::database class. It ensures that the master database and the superelement databases are destroyed at the same time when all references to any of the database for a given model have been freed.

The following methods of the NastranDb class are related to the management of superelements:

Sometimes, the reading of superelements information from BDF files is not possible. This is the case when no partition is present in the BDF file. Then, the information can be read from OP2, XDB or HDF files with the following methods:

The last three methods are meant to help the user post-processing Results for models with condensed superelements, and complete the database with superelement information. Methods must be called after reading the model from a BDF file.

The behaviour of several other methods is affected by the presence of superelements:

Examples discussed in section IV.2.11 should clarify the management of models and Results with superelements, and the information provided here.

Three methods have been added with version 5.1.2 to read the partitioned FEM superelement parts from Nastran output files (XDB, OP2 or HDF5). These methods are called “readSuperElementsFromHdf”, “readSuperElementsFromOp2”, and “readSuperElementsFromXdb”. Each of these methods has a single argument corresponding to the path to the XDB, OP2 or HDF5 file from which superelement FEMs are read. The purpose of these methods is to read superelement FEM when this is not possible from the BDF. (For example, when the superelement is loaded via an ASSIGN statement, and only the main BULK section is present in model.) So far, the methods are limited:

What is available today should allow post-processing of superelement nodal results (displacements, accelerations, eigenmodes, grid point forces...)

III.1.1.5 Writing Bulk lines

Method “writeBdfLines” is used to output the model or part of the model into a text file with a format compatible with Nastran BDF cards. The method has 5 or 6 arguments:

1.

A string containing the name of the file to which the Nastran cards are printed.

2.

A string corresponding to the opening mode for the file. Valid values are “w” and “a” (for append mode).

3.

A first format String argument specifying whether the fields in the cards output are left or right aligned. This argument may have three values: “left”, “right” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “left”.

4.

A second format String argument specifying whether the fields in the cards output are narrow or wide. This argument may have three values: “short”, “wide” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “short”.

5.

A third String argument corresponding to the type of entities that must be printed. The method scans the String argument and searches sub-strings that specify whether an entity type is to be printed or not. The sub-strings that are searched are “All”, “CoordSys”, “Nodes”, “Elements”, “RBEs”, “MPCs”, “Properties”, “Materials”.

6.

The last argument is optional and corresponds to the Group for which cards are to be printed. It can be a String or a Group argument. If its type is String, then the corresponding Group defined in the DataBase is considered. Note that “Properties” and “Materials” are not printed if the Group argument is provided.

The “writeBdfLines” method must be used for debugging purposes only. The user must keep in mind that some entities are not totally supported and their output may be problematic.

A first singleton method may be used to output formatted Nastran cards. This method can be used, for example, to produce Nastran cards for inclusion in a Bulk Data File. The method name is “writeNastranCard” and has five or six arguments (the “output card name” argument is optional):

1.

A String containing the name of the file to which the Nastran card is printed.

2.

A String corresponding to the opening mode for the output file. Valid values are “w” and “a” (for append mode).

3.

A first format String argument specifying whether the fields in the card output are left or right aligned. This argument may have three values: “left”, “right” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “left”.

4.

A second format String argument specifying whether the fields in the card output are narrow or wide. This argument may have three values: “short”, “wide” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “short”.

5.

A String corresponding to the name of the output card. This name cannot have more than 8 characters and should correspond to a valid Nastran BDF card name. THIS ARGUMENT IS OPTIONAL.

6.

An Array containing the fields to be printed. Possible types for the elements of this Array are Real, Integer and String:

Examples of calls to the method follow:

   NastranDb.writeNastranCard("output.bdf","w+","right","short",card)
   NastranDb.writeNastranCard("output.bdf","w+","right","short","RBE2",card)

Another singleton method called “writeNastranCards” allows the output of several Nastran cards. This method has the same arguments as “writeNastranCard” except that the last argument is an Array of Arrays, each element of the “big” Array corresponding to one Nastran card. The other arguments are the same, which means:

Note that when “writeNastranCards” is called with 5 arguments, it is possible, with a single call, to output different types of Nastran cards (“FORCE”, “MOMENT”,...). This is not possible when the method is called with 6 arguments. Examples of calls to the method follow:

   NastranDb.writeNastranCards("output.bdf","w+","right","short",cards)
   NastranDb.writeNastranCards("output.bdf","w+","right","short","RBE2",cards)

The use of “writeNastranCard” and “writeNastranCards” methods is clarified in section IV.2.5.1.

Method “writeNastranCardToVectStr” is similar to “writeNastranCard”. It produces a formatted BDF output but returns it in an Array of Strings, each String corresponding to one line in the output. The three or four arguments of the method are as follows:

1.

A first format String argument specifying whether the fields in the card output are left or right aligned. This argument may have three values: “left”, “right” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “left”.

2.

A second format String argument specifying whether the fields in the card output are narrow or wide. This argument may have three values: “short”, “wide” or a void String. If the String is void, the format defaults to “short”.

3.

A String corresponding to the name of the output card. This name cannot have more than 8 characters and should correspond to a valid Nastran BDF card name. HERE AGAIN, THE ARGUMENT IS OPTIONAL.

4.

An Array containing the fields to be printed. Possible types for the elements of this Array are Real, Integer and String:

Examples of calls to these two methods follow:

   lines=[]
   lines+=NastranDb.writeNastranCardToVectStr("right","short",card)
   lines+=NastranDb.writeNastranCardToVectStr("right","short","RBE2",card)
   lines+=NastranDb.writeNastranCardsToVectStr("right","short",cards)
   lines+=NastranDb.writeNastranCardsToVectStr("right","short","RBE2",cards)
   puts lines

Similarly to the “writeNastranCard” method, a “writeNastranCardsToVectStr” singleton method is defined in the “NastranDb” class. A single call to the method allows the output of several Nastran cards in an Array of Strings. The last argument of the method is an Array or Arrays.

III.1.1.6 Accessing FEM information or modifying the FEM

The “fillCard” method allows retrieval of an Array corresponding to a Nastran BDF card. The method has two arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the type of entity whose definition is requested. Possible values of the argument are “CoordSys”, “Element”, “Node”, “RBE”, “MPC”, “Property” and “Material”.

2.

An integer corresponding to the ID of the FEM item whose definition is sought.

The method returns the definition in an Array:

Note that a Nastran model may contain several material cards sharing a common ID, or several MPC cards with the same ID. When this case occurs, an exception is thrown. Therefore, for MPC or material cards, it is advised to use “fillCards” method instead of “fillCard”. An exception is also thrown when no FEM item matching specified ID is found.

The “fillCards” method allows retrieval of an Array containing BDF cards as those returned by “fillCard” method. (This means that “fillCards” method returns an Array of Arrays.) The method has two or three arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the type of entity whose definition is requested. Possible values of the argument are “CoordSys”, “Element”, “Node”, “RBE”, “MPC”, “Property” and “Material”.

2.

An integer corresponding to the minimum ID of the FEM items whose definitions are sought.

3.

An integer corresponding to the maximum ID of the FEM items whose definitions are sought.

Third argument is optional. When omitted, one considers that maximum ID = minimum ID. In such cases, the method generally returns at most one BDF card. However, for materials and MPCs, a single ID may correspond to several items. The method returns the definition in an Array of Arrays. Each element of the main Array is a Nastran BDF card as those returned by “fillCard” method.

Method “insertCard” performs the reverse operation: it is used to update the “NastranDb” database by insertion of FEM entity (coordinate system, node, element, RBE, material...). The method “insertCard” has one argument: an Array containing the different fields of the card. The conventions for the components of the Array are exactly the same as for the Array returned by method “fillCard” discussed above. (This means that the first element of the Array, of index 0, is a String corresponding to the name of the Nastran card.)

Method “insertCards” corresponds to “insertCard” but allows insertion of several cards with a single call to the method. The argument of the method is then an Array of Arrays.

Remarks about the insertion methods:

III.1.1.7 “CoordSys” methods

The “CoordSys” class allows the manipulation of coordinate systems for post-processing purposes. This class is presented in Chapter I.2. The methods of the NastranDb class devoted to the manipulation of coordinate systems are presented below.

III.1.1.7.1 “getCoordSysCopy”

The “getCoordSysCopy” method returns a CoordSys object which is a copy of a coordinate system stored in the DataBase. The method has one integer argument which is the index of the coordinate system.

Note that the CoordSys returned by the method may be a “generic” CoordSys as presented in Chapter I.2, or a Nastran coordinate system.

III.1.1.7.2 “addCoordSys”

The “addCoordSys” method is used to add a coordinate system to the DataBase. The argument of the method is the CoordSys object. In the DataBase, the object is referenced by its index.

If a coordinate system with the same index already exists in the NastranDb, it is replaced by the new coordinate system. In that case, the user is responsible for all the modifications involved in the finite element model by the possible modification of the NastranDB coordinate system. Therefore, it is considered good practice not to modify a coordinate involved in the finite element model definition.

Note that the coordinate system index must be a strictly positive integer. Also, the CoordSys inserted by the method may be a “generic” CoordSys as presented in Chapter I.2, or a Nastran coordinate system.

III.1.1.7.3 “makeAllCoordSysWrt0”

This method updates the definition with respect to coordinate system 0 (the most basic coordinate system) of all the coordinate systems stored in a NastranDB. This operation is necessary when a coordinate system of the NastranDB has been modified, because the definitions of other coordinate systems with respect to 0 may be affected.

III.1.1.8 Construction of Groups by associations

The list of “NastranDb” methods returning Groups defined by association follows:

III.1.1.9 “OP2” methods for reading Results

Several methods allow the reading of results from an “op2” file or to tune the behavior of reading this file. These methods are described below. The reading of 32-bit as well as 64-bit “op2” files is possible. However, there is no advantage in reading the 64-bit version. In fact, these files are larger and may take a longer time to read.

Note that it is strongly recommended to assign an integer ID and a name to each sub-case defined in a Nastran BDF file. For example, in the following example, the sub-case integer ID is 201, and its name is “ORBIT_ONE_MS2_X”:

      SUBCASE 201
         SUBTITLE=ORBIT_ONE_MS2_X
         SPC=702001
         LOAD=601001

Presently, only some of the result data blocks of the file can be read:

The correspondence between the Nastran output requests and the DMAP data blocks written in the “op2” file is given in Tables III.1.7 to III.1.14. The type names of Results generated in the NastranDb by “readOp2” method. The solution sequences for which Results can be read from an “op2” are:

III.1.1.10 “XDB” methods for extracting XDB information

Several methods allow the reading of Result entities or characteristics stored in an xdb file. Real Results as well as Complex ones can be read from xdb files. This last format of Results can for example be read from a Nastran “xdb” result file corresponding to a SOL107, SOL108 or SOL111.

The reading of 64-bit XDB files, as well as 32-bit XDB files, is possible. Note however that the results that are read are stored in 32-bit integer/real values so that there is no advantage in using 64-bit XDB files with FeResPost. (It probably slows down the XDB access.)

The use of Nastran "DBCFACT=4" parameter is supported. This parameter generates XDB files with BBBT index (Binary Blocked Balanced Tree Method of entry key storage), instead of Hash storage. The default Nastran seems to be "DBCFACT=0" and corresponds to an Hash Key (HK) of key storage.

Note: it is strongly recommended to assign an integer ID and a name to each sub-case defined in a Nastran BDF file. For example, in the following example, the sub-case integer ID is 201, and its name is “ORBIT_ONE_MS2_X”:

      SUBCASE 201
         SUBTITLE=ORBIT_ONE_MS2_X
         SPC=702001
         LOAD=601001

For all the methods listed in this section, the first argument is a String containing the path to the XDB file. The methods do not require the XDB file to be attached to the Nastran database. However the corresponding methods exist for XDB result files that have been attached to a database. (The corresponding methods with XDB attachments are described in section III.1.1.11.)

The supported elements for extraction of Results is summarized in Table III.1.2. Note that the CPYRAM element does not appear in Table III.1.2. It seems that MSC Nastran outputs no stress/strain results in XDB file, despite the fact that results are saved in OP2 and HDF files.


Table III.1.2: Supported elements for the reading of results from XDB files.
Element Nastran MSC. AccessFeResPost
Name Element ID Element ID Element Id
CBAR 12 34 1
CQUAD4 1 33 2
CTRIA3 4 74 3
CHEXA 2 67 4
CROD 9 1 5
CBEAM 10 2 6
CPENTA 6 68 7
CBUSH 47 102 8
CTETRA 14 39 9
CTRIA6 7 75 10
CQUAD8 3 64 11
CQUAD4(X) 95 171 12
CELASi 16...19 11...14 13
CONM1 30 29 14
CONM2 31 30 15
CFAST ??? ??? 16
CONROD 8 10 17
CSHEAR 11 4 18
CGAP 15 38 19
CQUADR 29 82 20
CTRIAR 34 70 21
CWELD 53 200 22
CBAR(X) 13 100 23

III.1.1.10.1 “getXdbLcNames” method

“getXdbLcNames” singleton method returns an Array of String containing the list of load cases to which Results found in an xdb file correspond. The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

III.1.1.10.2 “getXdbScNames” method

“getXdbScNames” singleton method returns an Array of String containing the list of sub-cases to which Results found in an xdb file correspond. The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

III.1.1.10.3 “getXdbResNames” method

“getXdbResNames” singleton method returns an Array of String containing the Result type names to which Results found in an xdb file correspond. The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

III.1.1.10.4 “getXdbLcScNames” method

“getXdbLcScNames” singleton method returns an Array of two elements containing:

1.

An Array of Strings containing the list of load cases to which Results found in the xdb file correspond.

2.

An Array of Strings containing the list of sub-cases to which Results found in the xdb file correspond.

The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

III.1.1.10.5 “getXdbLcScResNames” method

“getXdbLcScResNames” singleton method returns an Array of three elements containing:

1.

An Array of Strings containing the list of load cases to which Results found in the xdb file correspond.

2.

An Array of Strings containing the list of sub-cases to which Results found in the xdb file correspond.

3.

An Array of Strings containing the list of Result types to which Results found in the xdb file correspond.

The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

III.1.1.10.6 “getXdbLcInfos” method

“getXdbLcInfos” singleton method returns information about the load cases and sub-cases for which Results are stored in a xdb file. The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the xdb file.

2.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second argument is optional.

The method returns an Array of Arrays. Each element of the Array contains the information for one load case and sub-case identification:

III.1.1.10.7 “printXdbDictionary” method

“printXdbDictionary” singleton method prints the dictionary of an XDB file. The arguments are:

1.

A String specifying the access path to the XDB file.

2.

A String specifying the access path to an output file.

3.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

The second and third arguments are optional. If the second argument is omitted or a void String, the dictionary is printed on standard output.

This method has been added for debugging purpose: it helps to identify the XDB tables that are read, and those which are not.

III.1.1.10.8 “readXdb” method

The “readXdb” method is used to read Results into the DataBase from an “xdb” file generated by Nastran. (Only Results can be read from a Nastran “xdb” file.) The method has up to five arguments:

1.

A String argument that corresponds to the name of the file from which Results are read.

2.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of load cases for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all load cases in xdb result files are considered when results are read.

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of subcases for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all sub-cases in xdb result files are considered when results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the identifiers of Results for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all Results of xdb result files are considered when results are read.

5.

A Boolean value specifying whether to force the swap of endianness when reading the XDB file.

All parameters, except the first one, can be omitted. Then the method assumes that a void Array has been passed as argument.

Results that can be read are listed below:

Composite failure indices do not seem to be output in the xdb file. Only a few elements are supported. However, the most important ones are read:

The different characteristics of imported Results correspond to the characteristics of corresponding Results read from “op2” files.

Note however, that Complex Results can also be read from xdb files. Generally, the complex Results are the same as the real Results. More information can be found in section X.C.2.

Four methods devoted to the enabling or disabling composite layered Results are defined in the generic “DataBase” class. These methods are presented in section I.1.3.2.

III.1.1.10.9 “readXdb2H” method

The “readXdb2H” method is used to read Results from an “xdb” file generated by Nastran and returns the Results in a Hash object. Arguments are the same as those of “readXdb” method.

III.1.1.10.10 A note on “endianness”

MSC.Nastran is distributed with “TRANS” and “RECEIVE” tools that allow the exchange of XDB files on machines with different ENDIAN conventions. This is sometimes necessary, for example, when Patran and Nastran are run on different machines. On the other hand, FeResPost allows the identification of endianness in XDB files (in most cases). In some cases, the user must “force” the choice.

The different methods devoted to XDB file access allow specifying a forced swap endianness. When the corresponding parameter is set to “TRUE”, FeResPost considers that the endianness of binary XDB file does not correspond to the endianness of the machine on which FeResPost executes. Then, a swap of endianness is performed when the binary file is read.

If the “SwapEndianness” parameter is set to false, no modification of endianness is done when the file is read.

If the “SwapEndianness” parameter is not given, FeResPost checks the endiannes of the file and, if needed, does corrections to the binary data that are read. The test is done as follows:

III.1.1.10.11 XDB tables activation

Three singleton methods allow activation or deactivation of the reading of Results from XDB files. More precisely, the XDB results are presented in different tables that correspond to:

Each type of Table can be enabled or disabled separately. This can be useful to filter the importation of Results. Also, if there is a FeResPost bug in the reading of a given Result table, the disabling of this table allows to continue to work with the other results while the development team works to fix the problem.

The three singleton methods devoted to XDB table activation are:

1.

“enableXdbTables” is used to re-enable an XDB Result table for XDB Result reading.

2.

“disableXdbTables” is used to disable an XDB Result table for XDB Result reading.

3.

“getXdbTablesEnableInfos” returns a Hash with String keys and Boolean values that associates the enabled/disabled status of the different XDB tables. (This method also gives you the names of the different XDB tables that can be read from XDB files.)

The two enable/disable methods take one String, or an Array of Strings argument. The Strings correspond to the names of the entities that must be disabled or enabled. The “enable info” method has no argument.

III.1.1.11 Attaching “XDB” files to a Nastran DataBase

Since version 3.4.0, FeResPost allows a random access to XDB result files. This method is more efficient than the methods that import XDB Results into the DataBase, and extracting copies of these Results. A particular case in which the random access methods will be more efficient is when only some small parts of the XDB file are of interest to the programmer.

The principle of random access is the same as the attachment of XDB files to a Patran DataBase:

The different methods called to perform these operations are described in the following sub-sections. These methods correspond more or less to the methods described in section III.1.1.10.

III.1.1.11.1 Managing XDB file attachments

The method “attachXdb” is used to attach an XDB file to the Nastran DataBase. This method has up to two arguments:

1.

The first argument is a String containing the name of the XDB file. (Full path name must be provided.)

2.

The second argument is an optional Boolean parameter specifying whether the endianness must be swapped when XDB file content is read. If the parameter is not given, the endianness of the file is automatically detected. Note however that this check might fail. (See also page 583 for more information.)

Several other methods are used to manage the Xdb attachments to a DataBase:

III.1.1.11.2 Extracting information from XDB file attachments

The following methods extract information related to the Results stored in an XDB file attached to the DataBase:

All these methods have a single String argument containing the name of the XDB file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. On the other hand, the following methods have one or two arguments:

The first argument is the name of the XDB file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. The second argument is optional and corresponds to the name of a load case found in the attached XDB file. If the argument is not provided, all the load cases are investigated to build the list of sub-cases or Result names or IDs. If the argument is provided, only the sub-cases or Results of the corresponding load case are considered. If the provided load case does not exist in the XDB attachment, an error message is issued.

III.1.1.11.3 Extracting Results From XDB file attachments

The method “getAttachmentResults” is used to read Results from the XDB file. The Results are directly returned by the method to the caller in a Hash object. They are not inserted in the DataBase from which the method is called.

The method has minimum four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of XDB file attachment from which Results are read. (This file must have been previously attached to the DataBase.)

2.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Results are read.

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of sub-cases for which Results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of Results for which Results are read. The Result name provided as arguments must be considered as “filters” or “hints” indicating which kind of Results are extracted. Practically, FeResPost checks whether possible extracted Results contain one of the Strings provided as argument. For example, that the Request “Stress Tensor” matches several Results:

On the other hand, the request “Stress Tensor (RI)” matches only “Stress Tensor (RI)”, and not “Stress Tensor” or “Stress Tensor (MP)”.

The other arguments are optional and correspond to the specification of target entities for which Results are read. In fact, the reading operation from an XDB combines the reading and some of the extraction operations described in section I.4.3. For example:

If only four parameters are provided in the call to “getAttachmentResults” method, all the pairs of key-values found in the XDB file are inserted in the list of returned Results.

Listed below are valid calls to “getAttachmentResults”:

    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
            method,grpTarget[,layers[,subLayers]])
    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
            resTarget)
    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
            rklTarget)
    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scNames,resNames
            [,layers[,subLayers]])

When Results are extracted from an XDB attachment on a Group, the “Method” argument may influence the efficiency of Results extraction. When possible, a real random access is performed, otherwise, entire tables must be read to ensure that all eligible Result values are loaded. For example:

It is the responsibility of the post-processing programmer to try to provide the arguments in order to select the most efficient algorithm for Results extraction.

Note that “Grid Point Forces” are always sorted by nodes. This is true for the applied loads, the MPC/SPC forces and moments, as well as for the internal forces and moments. (Even though these last contain forces by elements and nodes.) This mean that for the selection of extraction algorithm, “Grid Point Forces” should always be considered as nodal Results.

As several Result types, and sub-case names can be given as argument to “getAttachmentResults” method, this method can return several Results. This is why Results are returned in a Hash:

For example, the list of extracted Result sizes can be printed with the following statements:

    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,resNames,"Nodes",grp)
    h.each do |id,res|
        lcName=id[0]
        scName=id[1]
        resName=id[2]
        size=res.Size
        STDOUT.printf("%s - %s - %s : %d\n",lcName,scName,resName,size)
        #~ Util::printRes(STDOUT,"brol",res)
    end

The method “getAttachmentResultsCombili” is used to extract linear combinations of elementary Results found in one or several XDB files. As for method “getAttachmentResults” the Results are directly returned by the method to the caller. They are not inserted in the DataBase from which the method is called. This method is more or less a combination of the methods “getAttachmentResults” and “buildLoadCasesCombili” of the generic DataBase class.

In practice, the main difference between “getAttachmentResults” and “getAttachmentResultsCombili” is that the first argument is no longer an Xdb file name. This argument is removed. Instead, one provides a “Combili” argument that describes the linear combination corresponding to extracted Results. This “Combili” argument is the second argument. The first argument is the “LcName” argument corresponding to the load case name assigned to the generated Results. This load case name is not supposed to correspond to any load case name found in the attached XDB file(s).

The method has minimum four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Results are read.

2.

A “Combili” Array containing the description of the linear combination of elementary load case Results. The Array is an Array of Arrays. Each secondary Array contains three elements:

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of sub-cases for which Results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of Results for which Results are read.

The other arguments are optional and correspond to the specification of target entities for which Results are read. In fact, the reading operation from an XDB combines the reading and some of the extraction operations described in section I.4.3. For example:

If only four parameters are provided in the call to “getAttachmentResultsCombili” method, all the pairs of key-values found in the XDB file are inserted in the returned Results.

Listed below are valid calls to “getAttachmentResultsCombili”:

    h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(xdbFileName,lcName,combili,
            scNames,resNames,
            method,grpTarget[,layers[,subLayers]])
    h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(xdbFileName,lcName,combili,
            scNames,resNames,
            resTarget)
    h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(xdbFileName,lcName,combili,
            scNames,resNames,
            rklTarget)
    h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(xdbFileName,lcName,combili,
            scNames,resNames
                [,layers[,subLayers]])

The Hash object returned by the method has a structure identical to the one returned by “getAttachmentResults” and can be manipulated the same way.

III.1.1.11.4 Importing Results From XDB file attachments

The method “importAttachmentResults” is used to read Results from the XDB file. Instead of being returned to the caller in a Hash object, the results are imported into the list of results stored into the Nastran DataBase. The method has four arguments:

    db.importAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scNames,resNames)

III.1.1.11.5 Getting optimization data from XDB

It is possible to obtain some of the Nastran optimization (SOL200) results from an XDB attachment. Four methods have been defined in NastranDb class:

1.

“getAttachmentDesVarHistory” returns the history of design variables and has three parameters:

Parameters 2 and 3 are optional and can be omitted or replaced by a “nil” argument or a void Array. If they are not defined, all the steps or design variables are returned in the results. The method returns a N*3 array. For each line, the three columns correspond to:

2.

“getAttachmentConstrDefinitions” returns the definition of constraints and has two arguments:

Parameters 2 is optional and can be omitted or replaced by a “nil” argument. The method returns a N*6 array. For each line, the three columns correspond to:

3.

“getAttachmentConstrHistory” returns the history of constrains and has three parameters:

Parameters 2 and 3 are optional and can be omitted or replaced by a “nil” argument. If they are not defined, all the steps or design responses are returned in the results. The method returns a N*3 array. For each line, the three columns correspond to:

4.

“getAttachmentObjectiveHistory” returns the history of constraints and has two parameters:

Parameter 2 is optional and can be omitted or replaced by a “nil” argument. If it is not defined, all the steps are returned in the results. The method returns a N*3 array. For each line, the three columns correspond to:

5.

“getAttachmentDesRespHistory” returns the history of design responses and has three parameters:

Parameters 2 and 3 are optional and can be omitted or replaced by a “nil” argument. If they are not defined, all the steps or design variables are returned in the results. The method returns a N*3 array. For each line, the three columns correspond to:

So far, the reading of optimization results is experimental and might be changed in future version.

III.1.1.11.6 Storage buffers for XDB result files random access

In order to reduce the number of accesses to disk, it may be useful to store some of the blocks read from binary result files into memory. FeResPost provides an algorithm that allows to store the blocks most recently read for later usage. Two singleton methods of the “NastranDb” class allow tuning of the capacity of the buffer area:

Note that all buffers are now common to all the methods that provide random access to XDB result files. In particular, the method is used in management of the binary file access for XDB attachment or reading. This means that if one Result file attached to one DataBase is more used, the storage will contain a majority of buffers for this Result file and progressively delete the other buffers.

The default capacity for storage buffer is 0Mb. Note that the two methods described above can be called from any class derived from the generic “DataBase” class.

III.1.1.11.7 “Raw” access to XDB file content

So far, the XDB access methods that have been described allow the extraction of Results only when the corresponding programming has been done in FeResPost source code. Sometimes, this limitation can be frustrating. For that reason, several methods allowing a “low level” or “raw access” to XDB content have been added.

Before listing these methods, some information about the XDB content is given:

1.

The XDB file is a binary file divided in pages. Each page has a fixed size specified by a given number of words. (This number of words per page is given in the file by the first word of the file.) A word may correspond to 4 or 8 bytes depending whether the XDB file is output in single or double precision.

2.

The XDB file contains different tables corresponding to finite element model, results,... A “dictionary” allows to identify and retrieve the different tables stored in an XDB file. In FeResPost, each XDB table is identified with a “ String-Integer key”:

Each table contains fields that can be distributed into several pages. A field corresponds for example to the forces and moments on one CBAR element, and for a given load case and sub-case. The naming conventions for the table types are given in MSC.Access Manual [Nas05]. The dictionary keys allow retrieval of information from the dictionary that can be used to retrieve the table content. This information is given in an Array of 22 integers that correspond for example to

(For the reading operations, the field size is generally needed.) More information on the meaning of these 22 integers in MSC.Access Manual [Nas05]. The access to the dictionary is done by calling “getAttachmentDictKeys” and “getAttachmentDictionary” methods.

3.

When results associated with elements are read from an XDB file, the values are associated with a key that corresponds to the element ID. However, this integer does not correspond to the Nastran integer ID of the element. Instead, there is in the XDB file, an “EQEXINE” table that contains the correspondence between the XDB IDs and the Nastran element IDs:

Method “getAttachmentElementExtId” allows retrieval of the Nastran element ID when the type of the element, and its internal ID. The type of the element is the “MSC.Access Element Type” associated to XDB file format. The numbering of element types can be found in [Nas05].

4.

Similarly, the XDB file also contains an “EQEXING” table that allows to retrieve node information. The Access internal node ID numbering starts at 1 and is also sequential. Each node internal ID is associated with three “external” integers:

(a)

The Nastran “external” ID of the node that appears in the GRID card definition.

(b)

The node type is always “1” in the tests we have done. (We presume it corresponds to usual Nastran GRIDs.)

(c)

The Analysis Coordinate System of the GRID. This information is useful as it allows association of the vectorial result components with a coordinate system.

Method “getAttachmentNodeInfo” is used to retrieve this information when reading nodal results.

The ‘NastranDb” class methods that give a “raw” access to XDB attachment content are:


Table III.1.3: Interpretation of the XDB binary data translation String.
Char Conversion Action
“i” or “l” One word is converted to a single precision integer
“u” One word is converted to a single precision unsigned integer
“I” or “L” 8 bytes (one or two words) are converted to a long long (8 bytes integer)
“U” 8 bytes (one or two words) are converted to an unsigned long long (8 bytes unsigned integer)
“f” or “d” One word is converted to a float (single precision real value)
“F” or “D” 8 bytes (one or two words) are converted to a double (double precision real value)
“s” One word is converted to a String
“S” 8 bytes (one or two words) are converted to a String
“x” One word is skipped and a nil value is generated
“X” 8 bytes (one or two words) are skipped and a nil value is generated
“y” One word is skipped and no value is generated
“Y” 8 bytes (one or two words) are skipped and no value is generated

III.1.1.12 Attaching “HDF” files to a Nastran DataBase

Since version 4.5.0 of FeResPost, it is possible to read results from Nastran HDF5 files. The operation is done in several steps:

The different methods called to perform these operations are described in the following sub-sections.

III.1.1.12.1 Reading the FEM from an HDF file

The “readFemFromHdf” method is used to read finite element model from HDF5 output file and build a DataBase object. The method has up to three arguments:

1.

A String argument that corresponds to the name of the HDF5 file from which model is read.

2.

“ReadResidual”, a Boolean that specifies whether residual FEM must be read. Its default value is true.

3.

“ReadSE”, a Boolean that specifies whether partitioned superelements must be read. Its default value is false.

All parameters, except the first one, can be omitted.

III.1.1.12.2 Reading Results from an HDF file

The “readHdf” method is used to read Results into the DataBase from an “hdf” file generated by Nastran. (Only Results can be read from a Nastran “hdf” file.) The method has up to four arguments:

1.

A String argument that corresponds to the name of the file from which Results are read.

2.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of load cases for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all load cases in hdf result files are considered when results are read.

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of subcases for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all sub-cases in hdf result files are considered when results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the identifiers of Results for which Results are imported into the DataBase. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all Results of hdf result files are considered when results are read.

All parameters, except the first one, can be omitted. Then the method assumes that a void Array has been passed as argument.

This method is a kind of wrapper to several methods described above. If necessary, FeResPost attaches the HDF file, imports the results into the database, and closes the attachment. If the HDF is already attached, no attachment/detachment is done.

The “readHdf2H” method is used to read Results from an “hdf” file generated by Nastran and return them in a Hash object. Arguments are the same as those of “readHdf” method.

III.1.1.12.3 Managing HDF file attachments

The method “attachHdf” is used to attach an HDF file to the Nastran DataBase. This method has one argument: a String containing the name of the HDF file. (Full path name must be provided.)

Several other methods are used to manage the Hdf attachments to a DataBase:

III.1.1.12.4 Extracting information from HDF file attachments

The following methods extract information related to the Results stored in an HDF file attached to the DataBase:

All these methods have a single String argument containing the name of the HDF file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. On the other hand, the following methods have one or two arguments:

The first argument is the name of the HDF file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. The second argument is optional and corresponds to the name of a load case found in the attached HDF file. If the argument is not provided, all the load cases are investigated to build the list of sub-cases or Result names or IDs. If the argument is provided, only the sub-cases or Results of the corresponding load case are considered. If the provided load case does not exist in the HDF attachment, an error message is issued.

III.1.1.12.5 Extracting Results From HDF file attachments

Two methods are used to extract results from Nastran HDF files:

The two methods have up to four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of HDF file attachment from which Results are read. (This file must have been previously attached to the DataBase.)

2.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of load cases for which Results are read.

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of sub-cases for which Results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of Results for which Results are read.

Valid calls to “getHdfAttachmentResults” are for example:

    h=db.getHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames,scNames,resNames)
    h=db.getHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames,scNames)
    h=db.getHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames)
    h=db.getHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName)

Similar calls work for “readHdfAttachmentResults” method:

    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames,scNames,resNames)
    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames,scNames)
    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcNames)
    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName)

When one of the “lcNames”, “scNames” or “resNames” is missing, nil or an empty Array, all the load cases, sub-cases or result types are read. “getHdfAttachmentResults” method is very similar to the “getAttachmentResults” method used to extract Results from Nastran XDB result files.

III.1.1.12.6 Raw access to HDF Datasets

Several methods can be used to obtain a “raw” access to Nastran HDF Datasets:

Remarks:

III.1.1.13 GMSH outputs

The method “writeGmshMesh” defined in the DataBase class exports nodes, elements and RBEs into the mesh file. RBEs are exported with a negative integer ID. The three tags assigned to the elements are the property ID (twice) and the laminate ID. This means that the three tags sometimes have the same value.

III.1.1.14 Iterators

III.1.1.14.1 Iterating on FEM entities

A first group of iterators iterates on finite element entities of the finite element model stored in the DataBase.

The elements produced by the iterator are single integers. Each of these iterators has 0, 1 or 2 arguments. The two optional arguments are the integer bounds considered for the iteration: “IdMin” and “IdMax”.

Two iterators loop on the nodes defining an element:

These two iterators have one integer argument corresponding to the index of the element. They iterate on the integer indices of nodes.

III.1.1.14.2 Iterating on Tables in Result files

Several iterators allow a direct “raw” access to the tables defined in Nastran XDB or HDF Result files:

III.1.1.14.3 Iterating on BDF content

Iterator “each_bdfCard” allows reading the content of one (or several) BDF file(s), without trying to import the corresponding FEM entities in a NastranDb database. This is a singleton method, which means that the method is to be called directly from NastranDb class. The arguments of the method are the same as those of “readBdf” method described in section III.1.1.1:

1.

A String containing the name of the main Nastran Bulk Data File.

2.

An Array of Strings containing the list of directories in which files specified by “include” statements shall be searched. Its default value is a void Array.

3.

The name of an extension that may be added to the file names specified in include statements. Its default value is a void String. (This argument corresponds to the jidtype in Nastran.)

4.

A Hash with String keys and values corresponding to the list of “symbols” that can be used in “include” statements in the Bulk Data Files. The default value is a void Hash.

5.

A Logical that specifies verbosity for the scanning of the Nastran Bulk Data File. Its default value is “false”. This parameter is redundant with “setVerbosityLevel” of “Post” Module: setting the parameter to “true” is equivalent to setting the “Post” verbosity level to 1.

6.

A Logical that specifies whether the file contains only Bulk Data Section lines. Its default value is “false”. If the parameter is “true”, the “BEGIN BULK” and “ENDDATA” lines are ignored, and all the input lines, except comments, are interpreted. (See also the remarks below.)

7.

A Hash with String keys and values corresponding to a list of “parameters” that influence the reading of the BDF file. The default value is a void Hash. See point III.1.1.1 in the list of limitations of “readBdf” method.

For example, the iterator can be used as follows:

    NastranDb.each_bdfCard("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf") do |crd|
        puts crd
    end

Iterator “each_bdfCard2” is close to the previous iterator:

III.1.1.15 Other methods

Several other methods allow retrieval of model information.

III.1.1.16 Attributes

Two attribute “getters” allow access to information in the model:

III.1.2 Nastran Result characteristics

When a Result object is read from an “op2” or an “xdb” file, integer and/or real identifiers are associated with the object. These identifiers depend on the solution sequence to which the Results correspond:

The “load case name” identifier associated with read or accessed results corresponds to the “SUBTITLE” associated with the SUBCASE defined in the Nastran data file. If this SUBTITLE is not defined, the SUBCASE ID is used to generate a default load case identifier as follows:

 lcName="Load Case "+ID

The subcase names are automatically generated by FeResPost when the Results are read from output files. Table III.1.5 lists possible subcase names generated by FeResPost when Nastran Results are read from OP2, XDB or HDF files. The integer and real values associated with the Results for each Nastran solution type are listed in Table III.1.4.

Table III.1.4: Integer and Real IDs associated with the different solution types
Analysis Type Int ID 1 Int ID 2 Real ID 1 Real ID 2
Linear Static LCID -1 -1.0 -1.0
Modal (Real) LCID Mode ID Frequency -1.0
Random LCID Freq. output ID Frequency -1.0
Transient LCID Time Step ID Time -1.0
Buckling LCID Mode ID Critical Load -1.0
Nonlinear LCID Output Step ID “Time” -1.0
Frequency Response LCID Freq. output ID Frequency -1.0
Modal (Complex) LCID Mode ID Freq. (real) Freq. (imaginary)

Table III.1.5: Subcase names generated by FeResPost when Nastran Results are read from OP2, XDB or HDF files.
SOL 101 (Linear Statics)
C++ ret=“Statics”
Example “Statics”
SOL 103 (Modal Analysis)
C++ sprintf(buf,“Mode %d (f = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Mode 3 (f = 15.3684)”
SOL 105 (Buckling Analysis)
C++ sprintf(buf,“Mode %d (eig = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Mode 1 (eig = 2.5463)”
SOL 106 or SOL 400 (Non-linear Statics)
C++ sprintf(buf,“Step %d (s = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Step 1 (s = 1.2563)”
SOL 107 (Complex eigen-values)
C++ if (realId2>=0.0)
sprintf(buf,“Mode %d (eig = %.4f+%.4f*i)”,intId1,realId1,realId2);
else
sprintf(buf,“Mode %d (eig = %.4f%.4f*i)”,intId1,realId1,realId2);
Example “Mode 7 (eig = 2.5463-3.5897*i)”
SOL 108 or SOL 111 (Frequency response)
C++ sprintf(buf,“Output %d (f = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Output 58 (f = 43.2568)”
Random Results
C++ sprintf(buf,“Random PSD Output %d (f = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Random PSD Output 58 (f = 43.2568)”
C++ sprintf(buf,“Random ATOC Output %d (f = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Random ATOC Output 58 (f = 43.2568)”
C++ sprintf(buf,“Random CRMS Output %d (f = %.4f)”,intId1,realId1);
Example “Random CRMS Output 58 (f = 43.2568)”
C++ ret=“Random RMS”
Example “Random RMS”
C++ ret=“Random NOC”
Example “Random NOC”

Finally, the results found in the op2 file are presented by blocks corresponding to the different “result element types”. Unfortunately, those element types do not correspond exactly to the element bdf cards presented in section III.1.1.1. The supported result element types are: “ROD”, “BEAM”, “TUBE”, “SHEAR”, “CONROD”, “ELAS1”, “ELAS2”, “ELAS3”, “ELAS4”, “DAMP1”, “DAMP2”, “DAMP3”, “DAMP4”, “VISC”, “MASS1”, “MASS2”, “MASS3”, “MASS4”, “CONM1”, “CONM2”, “PLOTEL”, “QUAD4”, “BAR”, “GAP”, “TETRA”, “BUSH1D”, “QUAD8”, “HEXA”, “PENTA”, “BEND”, “TRIAR”, “TRIA3”, “TRIA6”, “QUADR”, “TETRANL”, “GAPNL”, “TUBENL”, “TRIA3NL”, “RODNL”, “QUAD4NL”, “PENTANL”, “CONRODNL”, “HEXANL”, “BEAMNL”, “QUAD4LC”, “QUAD8LC”, “TRIA3LC”, “TRIA6LC”, “BUSH”, “FAST”, “QUAD144”, “QUADRNL”, “TRIARNL”, “ELAS1NL”, “ELAS3NL”, “BUSHNL”, “QUADRLC” and “TRIARLC”. (More information on the result element types can be found in [Rey04].)

Here again, some of the element result types can be disabled or enabled (section III.1.1.1). The arguments given to the enabling or disabling methods correspond to a String object, or an Array of Strings, the values of Strings corresponding to some of the Result element types given just above.

The negative node values corresponding to Results on specific Nastran elements are summarized in Table III.1.6. (This Table is a complement to Table I.4.2.) These keys can be used when Results are read from “OP2” or “XDB” files. Note that the “CbarGrdA” and “CbarGrdB” are used only to associate values to CBAR end nodes when the definition of CBAR element has not been found in the DataBase.


Table III.1.6: Correspondence between special nodes for element Results and their integer ids (specific to the Nastran solver).
For Nastran CSHEAR element
"F4to1" -201
"F2to1" -202
"F1to2" -203
"F3to2" -204
"F2to3" -205
"F4to3" -206
"F3to4" -207
"F1to4" -208
"kickOn1" -211
"kickOn2" -212
"kickOn3" -213
"kickOn4" -214
"shear12" -221
"shear23" -222
"shear34" -223
"shear41" -224
For Nastran CBEAM element (or CBAR element with intermediate stations)
"CbeamSt01" to "CbeamSt40" -101 to -140
For Nastran CBAR element
"CbarGrdA" -151
"CbarGrdB" -152

III.1.2.1 General Results

The correspondence between the Nastran output requests and the DMAP data blocks written in the “op2” file is given in Tables III.1.7 to III.1.16. Note that in all the examples presented in Part IV, the results are printed in the “op2” file with “SORT1” option. This means that no test has been done with “SORT2” option.


Table III.1.7: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Displacements read from OUG data blocks.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
DISPL OUG “Displacements, Translational” “Displacements, Rotational” “Displacements, Scalar”
VELO OUG “Velocities, Translational” “Velocities, Rotational” “Velocities, Scalar”
ACCEL OUG “Accelerations, Translational” “Accelerations, Rotational” “Accelerations, Scalar”


Table III.1.8: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Applied loads read from OPG data blocks.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
OLOAD OPG “Applied Loads, Forces” (2, 8) “Applied Loads, Moments” (2, 8)


Table III.1.9: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (MPC and SPC forces read from OQG data blocks.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
Statement Data Block Result
MPCFORCES OPG “MPC Forces, Forces” (2, 8) “MPC Forces, Moments” (2, 8) “MPC Forces, Scalar” (2, 8)
SPCFORCES OPG “SPC Forces, Forces” (2, 8) “SPC Forces, Moments” (2, 8) “SPC Forces, Scalar” (2, 8)


Table III.1.10: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Grid point forces read from OGF data blocks.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
Statement Data Block Result
GPFORCES OGF “Grid Point Forces, Internal Forces” “Grid Point Forces, Internal Moments” “Grid Point Forces, MPC Forces” (2) “Grid Point Forces, MPC Moments” (2) “Grid Point Forces, MPC Internal Forces” (9) “Grid Point Forces, MPC Internal Moments” (9) “Grid Point Forces, SPC Forces” (2) “Grid Point Forces, SPC Moments” (2) “Grid Point Forces, Applied Forces” (2) “Grid Point Forces, Applied Moments” (2) “Grid Point Forces, Contact Forces” (2, 3) “Grid Point Forces, Contact Moments” (2, 3) “Grid Point Forces, Friction Forces” (2, 3) “Grid Point Forces, Friction Moments” (2, 3) “Grid Point Forces, Global Damping Forces” (4, 5, 6) “Grid Point Forces, Global Damping Moments” (4, 5, 6) “Grid Point Forces, Viscous Damping Forces” (4, 5, 6) “Grid Point Forces, Viscous Damping Moments” (4, 5, 6)


Table III.1.11: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Strains read from OES data blocks and corresponding to “STRAIN” output requests.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
STRAIN OES “Strain Tensor” (10, 2) “Beam Axial Strain for Axial Loads” “Beam Axial Strain for Bending Loads” “Beam Axial Strain for Total Loads” (14) “Beam Shear Strain for Torsion Loads” “Beam Deformations” (20) “Beam Velocities” (20) “Beam Stations” (23) “Gap Forces” (21) “Gap Deformations” (21) “Gap Slips” (21) “Spring Scalar Strain” “Bush Forces Strain Tensor” (18 and 19) “Bush Moments Strain Tensor” (18 and 19) “Bush Plastic Strain” (18 and 19) “Curvature Tensor” (10, 13) “Shear Panel Strain, Max” “Shear Panel Strain, Average”


Table III.1.12: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Stresses read from OES data blocks and corresponding to “STRESS” output requests.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
STRESS OES “Stress Tensor” (1 in section III.1.2.2) “Beam Axial Stress for Axial Loads” “Beam Axial Stress for Bending Loads” “Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads” (14) “Beam Shear Stress for Torsion Loads” “Beam Forces” (18 and 19) “Beam Moments” (18 and 19) “Beam Deformations” (20) “Beam Velocities” (20) “Beam Stations” (23) “Gap Forces” (21) “Gap Deformations” (21) “Gap Slips” (21) “Spring Scalar Stress” “Bush Forces Stress Tensor” (18 and 19) “Bush Moments Stress Tensor” (18 and 19) “Bush Stress, Axial” (20) “Bush Strain, Axial” (20) “Bush Plastic Strain” (20) “Shear Panel Stress, Max” “Shear Panel Stress, Average”


Table III.1.13: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Nonlinear stresses read from OES data blocks and corresponding to “NLSTRESS” or other output requests (24).)
Nastran “op2” Generated
Statement Data Block Result
NLSTRESS OES “Nonlinear Stress Tensor” (11) “Nonlinear Strain Tensor” (11) “Nonlinear Effective Plastic Strain” (11) “Nonlinear Effective Creep Strain” (11) “Nonlinear Spring Scalar Strain” “Nonlinear Spring Scalar Stress” “Nonlinear Beam Axial Strain for Axial Loads” “Nonlinear Beam Axial Stress for Axial Loads” “Nonlinear Beam Axial Strain for Total Loads” “Nonlinear Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads” “Nonlinear Beam Forces” “Nonlinear Beam Moments” “Beam Stations” (23) “Nonlinear Bush Forces Stress Tensor” (18 and 19) “Nonlinear Bush Moments Stress Tensor” (18 and 19) “Nonlinear Bush Forces Strain Tensor” (18 and 19) “Nonlinear Bush Moments Strain Tensor” (18 and 19) “Nonlinear Gap Forces” (21) “Nonlinear Gap Deformations” (21) “Nonlinear Gap Slips” (21)


Table III.1.14: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Element forces read from OEF data blocks or other “FORCE” output.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
Statement Data Block Result
FORCE (1, 20) OEF “Shell Forces” “Shell Moments” (12) _______________________________________________ “Beam Forces” (15, 16,17) “Beam Moments” (15, 16,17) “Beam Warping Torque” “Beam Deformations” “Beam Velocities” “Beam Stations” (23) “Gap Forces” (21) “Gap Deformations” (21) “Gap Slips” (21) “Spring Scalar Forces” “Bush Plastic Strain”


Table III.1.15: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Element forces read from OEE data blocks or “ESE”, “EKE” and “EDE” output.)
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
ESE OEE “Element Strain Energy” “Element Strain Energy (Density)” “Element Strain Energy (Percent of Total)”
EKE OEE “Element Kinetic Energy” “Element Kinetic Energy (Density)” “Element Kinetic Energy (Percent of Total)”
EDE OEE “Element Energy Loss” “Element Energy Loss (Density)” “Element Energy Loss (Percent of Total)”


Table III.1.16: Nastran Results for thermal calculations.
Nastran “op2” Generated
Statement Data Block Result
TEMPERATURE OUG “Temperature”
FLUX OEF “Temperature Gradient”
FLUX OEF “Conductive Heat Flux”

One can make a few remarks about the information given in Tables III.1.7 to III.1.16:

1.

The Nastran “CELASi” and “CDAMPi” elements produce scalar forces or moments that are stored in “Beam Scalar Forces” Results.

2.

“Applied Loads” are available both with the “OLOAD” and “GPFORCE” Nastran statements. A similar remark applies to “MPC Forces” and “SPC Forces”.

3.

“Contact” and “Friction” grid point loads can be read from Nastran OP2 and HDF5 files, but not from XDB files because Nastran does not output these loads in XDB. (XDB output is deprecated.)

4.

“Damping” and “Inertia” grid point loads can be read from Nastran OP2 and HDF5 files, but not from XDB files because Nastran does not output these loads in XDB. (XDB output is deprecated.)

5.

“Damping” and “Inertia” grid point loads correspond to outputs for Nastran SOL108 or SOL111 and are normally produced in complex format only.

6.

The manipulation of complex Grid Point Forces Results is illustrated in example “RUBY/EX34/checkInertiaLoads.rb” in section IV.2.16.

7.

The “Grid Points Forces” on DMIG elements may correspond to several Results, as different Result names are attributed to the different DMIG elements. For example, the request to “Grid Point Forces, DIMG * Forces” may correspond to “Grid Point Forces, DIMG K11X Forces”, “Grid Point Forces, DIMG K22X Forces”,... Also, in requests the “*” can be replaced by the name of one DMIG element, then results associated to specified DMIG element are returned. The small examples in directory “RUBY/EX33” illustrate the capabilities. (See section IV.2.15.)

8.

When forces or moments corresponding to “Applied Loads”, “MPC Forces” or “SPC Forces” are read by FeResPost, key-value pairs are inserted only when at least one of the components is not zero. This has been done to avoid the creation of Result objects filled with a lot of zero values.

9.

When the option “RIGID=LAGR” is activated, the contributions of rigid body elements and MPCs are included in “Grid Point Forces, MPC Forces” and “Grid Point Forces, MPC Moments” and not in “Grid Point Forces, Internal Forces” and “Grid Point Forces, Internal Moments”:

10.

The shear components of strain tensor output by Nastran are the angular deformations: γij = 2ϵij. When these results are imported in a NastranDb, the corresponding components are divided by two in such a way that a “physical” tensor is stored into the NastranDb. The same remark applies for the non-diagonal components of the curvature tensor (shell elements).

The “STRAIN” Nastran output statement with “FIBER” option outputs the strain tensor at Z1 and Z2, but does not produce the curvature tensor.

11.

The Nonlinear stresses and strains are available for CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements. Plastic deformation results are produced for non-linear results only.

12.

When shell bending moments are imported from Nastran finite element results, the sign of each component is changed. This has been done to ensure that a positive component of the bending moment results in a positive value of the corresponding stress tensor component on the upper face of the shell. In other words, a positive bending corresponds to tension stress in shell upper face. (See equation II.1.31 for the definition of bending moments tensor components.)

13.

When Nastran shell curvature Results are imported, two modifications are brought to the components:

This is done because FeResPost considers that positive curvature components corresponds to positive strain components in upper face of the shell, and negative components in lower face of the shell. (See equation II.1.32 for the definition of curvature tensor components.)

14.

“Axial Strain” or “Axial Stress” for “Total Loads” and CBAR elements are produced by combined axial loads to bending loads. This has been done to harmonize CBAR Results with CBEAM Results. For CBEAM Results, Stresses or Strains are recovered on the extremities only.

15.

Nastran “BEAM” type elements (CBAR, CBEAM, CBEND,...) do not output vectorial or tensorial forces or moments. Instead, the different components are expressed in different coordinate systems (axial, plane 1 and plane 2). When importing these Results, a conversion into tensorial format is done as follows:

F = ( FxxFxyFxz Fxy 0 0 Fxz 0 0 ) = ( FaxialV 1V 2 V 1 0 0 V 2 0 0 ) ,

M = ( MxxMxyMxz Mxy 0 0 Mxz 0 0 ) = ( Mtorsion - M2M1 - M2 0 0 M1 0 0 ) .
16.

Nastran CBUSH elements produce forces and moments corresponding to the loads applied by Grid B of the element to Grid A. By analogy with the what is done for “BEAM” type of elements, “Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments” are produced, filled as follows:

F = ( FxxFxyFxz Fxy 0 0 Fxz 0 0 ) = ( FxFyFz Fy 0 0 Fz 0 0 ) ,

M = ( MxxMxyMxz Mxy 0 0 Mxz 0 0 ) = ( MxMyMz My 0 0 Mz 0 0 ) .

The choice of considering bush forces and moments as beams is questionable; it is justified as follows:

CBUSH elements are often used in the modeling of connections. Whatever the type of coordinate system definition, it is always possible to obtain vectorial forces and moments by a contracted multiplication of the vectorial result with a unit vector:

f = ( FxxFxyFxz Fxy 0 0 Fxz 0 0 )⋅ (1 0 0 ) = ( Fxx Fxy Fxz ) ,

m = ( MxxMxyMxz Mxy 0 0 Mxz 0 0 )⋅ (1 0 0 ) = ( Mxx Mxy Mxz ) .

This is generally the first operation performed when CBUSH loads are used for the sizing of connections. This also works when connection forces are extracted from CBEAM or CBAR elements.


PICT
(a)
PICT
(b)

Figure III.1.1: CBUSH element axes definition. (Pictures extracted from [Sof04b].)

17.

For CBAR elements, “Beam Forces” are always produced at the center of elements, and “Beam Moments” at the two end nodes. For CBEAM elements, “Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments” can be requested at different stations long the element. A minimum is then the production of outputs at the two ends of the element; Therefore, “Beam Forces” are output at element end nodes, as a minimum. But generally, no “Beam Forces” are output at element centers.

18.

Bush result types for OEF and OES outputs depend on the kind of BUSH elements to which they correspond:

The element forces and moments are stored in “Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments” tensorial Results.

19.

The result types generated for CFAST elements are the same as for CBUSH elements.

Note that FeResPost cannot determine the CFAST element coordinate system when grids A and B are coincident. This may cause problems when transformation of reference coordinate systems are required. (This is the case when gmsh outputs of results are requested.) Note also that Patran also seems to experience some difficulties to calculate CFAST element axes.

20.

Nastran “CBUSH1D” elements produce scalar results in OEF and OES blocks. By this we mean that each type of result has only one single component. However, the scalar force is stored in “Beam Forces” tensorial result. Most components of the tensor are zero:

F = ( Fxx00 0 00 0 0 0 ) .

No bending moments are produced by “CBUSH1D” elements.

21.

Nastran “CGAP” elements produces various results. These Results are read from OES or OEF data blocks. These Results are tensorial and:

22.

Various Nastran elements refer scalar points instead of grids. Nevertheless, Nastran considers the scalar point as a kind of element rather than as a kind of grid. This is, in the authors’ opinion, an unfortunate choice. FeResPost considers SPOINT and EPOINT objects as a peculiar type of GRID. This has implications for the definition of keys when importing Results with from Nastran op2 files. It is hoped that this will not lead to problems.

23.

The “Beam Stations” scalar result is produced when stresses, strains or forces are read for CBEAM or CBAR elements:

24.

“Nonlinear” outputs may result from various output requests as “NLSTRESS”, “STRESS”, “STRAIN”, “FORCE”... The “Nonlinear” character of Results is more related to the type of Nastran solution than to the output request. For example, Nastran SOL 106 or SOL 400 analyses are likely to produce “Nonlinear” outputs.

III.1.2.2 Composite Results

This section is more specifically devoted to the composite Results (failure indices). Failure indices can be imported from “op2” files only. The different Results that can be imported from Nastran are summarized in Table III.1.17. One can make a few remarks about the information given in those Tables:

1.

Since version 3.4.2, the stress tensor in plies is produced in “Mid” sub-layer only. This means that the out-of-plane shear stress that Nastran calculates at bottom skin of each ply is displaced at mid-thickness of the ply. This is an approximation. (This out-of-plane shear stress can be used to calculate inter-laminar shear stress in composite.)

A rotation of the out-of-plane shear components is done in such a way that all components are given with respect to the ply axes. (Nastran outputs these components in laminate axes.)

2.

When Nastran composite strains are read, values are produced for Mid thickness of each ply only. Nothing is produced on ply upper or lower faces.

3.

The remarks done about the conversion of angular shear strain components to tensorial shear strain components are of course also valid for layered strain Results.

4.

Failure indices can be read from “op2” files only. Corresponding Results do not seem to be stored in “xdb” files.

The indices given in Table III.1.17 refer to the remarks above.

Four methods devoted to the enabling or disabling of composite layered Results are defined in the generic “DataBase” class. These methods are presented in section I.1.3.2.


Table III.1.17: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and composite stresses and strains
Nastran “op2” Generated
StatementData Block Result
STRAIN OES “Strain Tensor” (2, 3)
STRESS OES “Stress Tensor” (1)

The correspondence between the failure indices read from Nastran “op2” files and Results produced by CLA classes is as in Table III.1.18.


Table III.1.18: Correspondence between the Nastran failure indices imported from “op2” files and the failure criteria defined in CLA module.
Nastran Result CLA criterion ID section
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill” “TsaiHill_c” II.1.10.11
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Wu” “TsaiWu” II.1.10.14
“Composite Failure Index, Hoffman” “Hoffman” II.1.10.16
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Strain, CompMax” “MaxStrain” II.1.10.6
“Composite Failure Index, Interlaminar Shear Stress” “Ilss” II.1.10.27

III.1.2.3 Contact Results

The correspondence between the Nastran output requests and the DMAP data blocks written in the “op2” file is given in Tables III.1.19. Remarks:

1.

MSC Nastran deprecates XDB Result files and it seems that no Contact Results are stored in XDB.

2.

So far, contact results are read in Real format only. No Complex Results are read.

3.

Contact and gluing Results are also available in nodal “Grid Point Forces” Results (Table III.1.10).

4.

Contact Adjustment Results are read from the HDF5 only.

5.

Most Results are nodal Results. (Result keys only define the node ID.)

6.

The “Contact Stresses” Results are presented as a vector Result. The components are the Normal stress component, and the two friction components F1 and F2. These components are associated with the coordinate system “NONE” because no corresponding orientation is read.

7.

Scalar Results corresponding to “OFCON3D” are not really scalar Results as they correspond to integers. The component means nothing and is set to -999999. Information read from the Result file is transferred via the integer coordinate system ID:

8.

The “Contact Pair” vectorial Results corresponding to OP2 table “OFCRFM” have keys defined as follows:

9.

“Contact Body” Results are given with respect to the basic coordinate system.

10.

For “Contact Body” Results the element ID of the key corresponds to the body ID.


Table III.1.19: Correspondence between the Nastran output cards and the “op2” result data blocks. (Displacements read from “contact” data blocks.)
“op2” Generated Tensor
Data Block Result Type
— (4) “Contact Adjustment, Translational” Vector
“Contact Adjustment, Rotational” Vector
OFCON3D “Contact Forces, Normal” Vector
“Contact Forces, Friction” Vector
“Contact Stresses” Vector (6)
“Contact Status” Scalar (7)
“Contact Touched Body, 1st” Scalar (7)
“Contact Touched Body, 2nd” Scalar (7)
“Contact Touched Body, 3rd” Scalar (7)
OFCRFM (8) “Contact Pair Total Force of Normal Forces” Vector
“Contact Pair Total Moment of Normal Forces” Vector
“Contact Pair Total Force of Tangential Forces” Vector
“Contact Pair Total Moment of Tangential Forces” Vector
OFGCON (9, 10)“Contact Body Total Force” Vector
“Contact Body Total Moment” Vector
“Contact Body Rotation Center” Vector
“Contact Body Rotation Axis” Vector
“Contact Body Velocity” Vector
“Contact Body Angular Velocity” Scalar
“Contact Body Total Rotation Angle” Scalar

III.1.3 Interaction with CLA classes

When a PCOMP or a PCOMPG property card is translated into a ClaLam object by a call to “getClaDb” method, the value of LAM parameter is not taken into account. This means that the values of this parameter set to “MEM”, “BEND”, “SMEAR” or “SMCORE” is without effect. There is one exception to this rule: the value “SYM” is taken into account in PCOMP property cards. (But not in PCOMPG cards for which this parameter value is illegal.)

Chapter III.2
Samcef Preferences

Most methods specific to the post-processing of Samcef finite element Results and models are defined in the class “SamcefDb” that inherits the “DataBase” class. This class is described in section III.2.1.

Table III.2.1: The different methods that have been defined in “SamcefDb” class. See also the methods defined in the generic DataBase class (Table I.1.1). Methods marked with “(s)” are singleton methods.
(FeResPost list of classes is given in Table 1 page 11.)
(See also methods in generic DataBase class.)
Method Name DescriptionExample
Creation and initialization methods
new (s) III.2.1 III.2.1
initialize III.2.1
Reading model or Results
readSamcefDat III.2.1.1
readDesFac III.2.1.4
readDesFac2H III.2.1.4
desFacResetFlags (s) III.2.1.4
desFacSetFlag (s) III.2.1.4
desFacUnsetFlag (s) III.2.1.4
desFacGetFlag (s) III.2.1.4
enableSamcefResCodes (s) III.2.1.4
disableSamcefResCodes (s) III.2.1.4
attachDesFac III.2.1.5
detachDesFac III.2.1.5
getNbrAttachments III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNames III.2.1.5
checkAttachmentExists III.2.1.5
removeAllAttachments III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLcInfos III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNbrLoadCases III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLcNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLcScNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLcScResNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNbrLayers III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLayerIds III.2.1.5
getAttachmentLayerNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNbrSubLayers III.2.1.5
getAttachmentSubLayerIds III.2.1.5
getAttachmentSubLayerNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNbrSubCases III.2.1.5
getAttachmentScNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentNbrResults III.2.1.5
getAttachmentResIds III.2.1.5
getAttachmentResNames III.2.1.5
getAttachmentResults III.2.1.5
getAttachmentResultsCombili III.2.1.5
setStorageBufferMaxCapacity (s) III.2.1.5
getStorageBufferMaxCapacity (s) III.2.1.5
Coordinate system methods
getCoordSysCopy III.2.1.2
addCoordSys III.2.1.2
makeAllCoordSysWrt0 III.2.1.2
Group manipulation methods
getNodesAssociatedToElements III.2.1.3
getNodesAssociatedToRbes III.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToNodes III.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToMaterials III.2.1.3
getRbesAssociatedToNodes III.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToPlies III.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToLaminatesIII.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToAttr1s III.2.1.3
getElementsAssociatedToAttr2s III.2.1.3
Generation of additional Results
generateShellOffsetsResult III.2.1.7
Iterators
each_coordSysId III.2.1.8
each_elemId III.2.1.8
each_nodeId III.2.1.8
each_materialId III.2.1.8
each_samcefPlyId III.2.1.8
each_samcefLaminateId III.2.1.8
each_samcefMatIdName III.2.1.8
each_samcefMatNameId III.2.1.8
each_nodeOfElement III.2.1.8
each_cornerNodeOfElement III.2.1.8
Methods added to “Post” module
readGroupsFromSamcefDat III.2.3
Other methods
getNodeRcId III.2.1.9
getNodeAcId III.2.1.9
getNodeCoords III.2.1.9
Attributes
NbrRbes III.2.1.10

III.2.1 “SamcefDb” class

A “SamcefDb” object can be created by a statement using “new” method like:

    db=SamcefDb.new()

Method “initialize” initializes or clears a SamcefDb object. This class is a specialization of the FeResPost “DataBase” class.

III.2.1.1 Reading Samcef models

Method “readSamcefDat” of the SamcefDb class is used to import the model in a SamcefDb. This function has up to three arguments:

The model can be split into several files loaded in a main file by input statements. However, the user should try to be conservative when splitting their model. For example:

Here are a few examples of valid input statements:

    input "../SPLIT_1/grids.dat"
    input "../SPLIT_1/elements.dat"
    input.beginC "../SPLIT_1/props.dat"
    input.beginB "../SPLIT_1/geom.dat"
    input "/home/ferespost/SAM_SPLIT/SPLIT_1/mecano.dat"

Note that for a reason unknown, the “.sauve banque” bacon command outputs the list of abbreviations defined in a database at the end of the banque after a “return” statement. This “return” statement must be removed or commented out if the abbreviations are to be imported in the database by the “readSamcefDat” command.

Finally, since version 4.5.7 of FeResPost, we have been trying to better support the Samcef input files produced directly by Siemens NX software. This has been done by working with a limited number of example files, and modifying the C++ sources until correct FeResPost reading is obtained. There is no guarantee that all features exported by NX are supported by FeResPost. This means that the reading of a file obtained via the “.sauve banque” Bacon command remains the safest way to read successfully a Samcef model. For NX users, the following is recommended:

Any NX files that FeResPost fails to read can be provided to help improve FeResPost.

Note also that the use of non-ASCII characters in Samcef file names, or in the names of directories via which input files are included should be avoided. (See more details regarding this rule in section III.1.1.1 in Nastran solver reference for more details.)

III.2.1.2 “CoordSys” methods

The “CoordSys” class allows the manipulation of coordinate systems for post-processing purposes. This class is presented in Chapter I.2. The methods of the SamcefDb class devoted to the manipulation of coordinate systems are presented below.

III.2.1.2.1 “getCoordSysCopy”

The “getCoordSysCopy” method returns a CoordSys object which is a copy of a coordinate system stored in the DataBase. The method has one integer argument which is the index of the coordinate system.

Note that the CoordSys returned by the method may be a “generic” CoordSys as presented in Chapter I.2, or a Samcef frame.

III.2.1.2.2 “addCoordSys”

The “addCoordSys” method is used to add a coordinate system to the DataBase. The argument of the method is the CoordSys object. In the DataBase, the object is referenced by its index.

If a coordinate system with the same index already exists in the SamcefDb, it is replaced by the new coordinate system. In that case, the user is responsible for all the modifications involved in the finite element model by the possible modification of the SamcefDb coordinate system. Therefore, it is considered good practice not to modify a coordinate system involved in the finite element model definition.

Note that the coordinate system index must be a strictly positive integer. Also, the CoordSys inserted by the method may be a “generic” CoordSys as presented in Chapter I.2, or a Samcef frame.

III.2.1.2.3 “makeAllCoordSysWrt0”

“makeAllCoordSysWrt0” method updates the definition with respect to coordinate system 0 (the most basic coordinate system) of all the coordinate systems stored in a SamcefDb. This operation is necessary when a coordinate system of the NastranDB has been modified, because the definitions of other coordinate systems with respect to 0 may be affected.

III.2.1.3 Construction of Groups by association operations

The list of “SamcefDb” methods returning Groups defined by association is given below:

III.2.1.4 Methods related to Results importation

Warning: due to compiler limitations, the reading of large FAC files (size > 2 GB) with the FeResPost 32-bit library is likely to end with an exception. If this happens, the user should switch to a 64-bit version of the library.

III.2.1.4.1 “readDesFac” method

“readDesFac” method is used to import Samcef Results. The files that are read are the “des” and the “fac” files. The method may have 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 arguments:

1.

The first argument is a String containing the name of the “des” file. This argument is mandatory.

2.

The second argument is a String containing the name of the “fac” file. This argument is also mandatory. Of course the two “des” and “fac” files must correspond.

3.

The third argument is optional. It is an Array of integers corresponding to the identifiers of the Load Cases for which Results are to be imported. If the argument is omitted, the Results for all load cases are imported.

4.

The fourth argument is optional and may be present only if the third argument is defined. It corresponds to the names that will be attributed to the load case attribute of Results imported. These names are provided in an Array of Strings. If this argument is not used, the default load case names will be attributed to the Results created in the SamcefDb.

For example, without the fourth argument, the importation of Asef Results with several load cases leads to LoadCase attributes named “LoadCase 1”, “LoadCase 2”,... This may be impractical for many problems.

5.

The fifth argument is optional and corresponds to the names of the sub-cases for which values shall be imported. These names are provided in a String or an Array of Strings. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all the sub-cases are read.

6.

The sixth argument is optional and corresponds to the names of the Results for which values shall be imported. These names are provided in a String or an Array of Strings. Possible values are "Stress Tensor", "Strain Tensor",... If the Array is void, all Result types are considered. If the Array is void or the parameter is omitted, all the Results are read.

7.

The seventh argument is an Array of integers corresponding to the Samcef Result Codes to be considered when Results are imported.

Note that when the third and fourth arguments are used, the number of elements of the two Arrays must be the same. For more information about arguments 4, 5 and 6, see the description of “readOp2” method in “NastranDb” class.

Note that the reading of “fac” files also checks the endianness of the file and, if needed, does corrections to the binary data.

At the end of reading the method “readDesFac” prints a list of the Samcef Result Codes that have been skipped.

Presently, the method allows the reading of Results for the following Samcef modules:

III.2.1.4.2 “readDesFac2H” method

“readDesFac2H” method is used to read Samcef Results from “des” and the “fac” files. The method does not read the Results into the dataBase, but returns them into a Hash. For example:

    ...
    h=db.readDesFac("~/FERESPOST/TEST_SAMCEF/mySatellite_as.des",\
                      "~/FERESPOST/TEST_SAMCEF/mySatellite_as.fac",\
                      [1],["accel_XYZ"])
    ...

III.2.1.4.3 Flags for reading of Results

Flags influencing the behavior of “readDesFac” method can be defined. The following singleton methods have been defined to manipulate the flags:

1.

“desFacResetFlags” resets all the flags to false (default values). This method has no arguments.

2.

“desFacSetFlag” sets one flag to true. This method has one String argument. An example of use of this method follows:

          ...
          DataBase.desFacSetFlag("ANGULAR_STRAIN_BUG")
          db.readDesFac("~/FERESPOST/TEST_SAMCEF/mySatellite_as.des",\
                            "~/FERESPOST/TEST_SAMCEF/mySatellite_as.fac",\
                            [1],["accel_XYZ"])
          ...

3.

“desFacUnsetFlag” sets one flag to false. This method has one String argument.

4.

“desFacGetFlag” returns a Logical value corresponding to the value of the flag. This method has one String argument.

When one of these methods has one String argument, this argument is the name of the considered flag. Among the above methods, only the last one returns a value.

Two such flags have been defined:

Similarly, two singleton methods allow to enable or disable Samcef Result codes:

The argument of these two methods are an integer or an Array of integer corresponding to Samcef Result Codes.

Four methods devoted to the enabling or disabling of composite layered Results are defined in the generic “DataBase” class. These methods are presented in section I.1.3.2.

III.2.1.5 Attaching “DES/FAC” files to a Samcef DataBase

Since version 3.5.0, FeResPost allows a random access to DES/FAC result files. This method is more efficient than the methods that import Results into the DataBase, and extracting copies of these Results. A particular case in which the random access methods will be more efficient is when only some small parts of the Result file are of interest to the programmer.

The principle of random access is as follows:

The different methods called to perform these operations are described in the following sub-sections.

Note that the content of DES file is read only when the DES/FAC files are attached to the DataBase. After that, the DES file is closed. This is why when information is extracted from a particular attachment, the attachment is identified by the name of the FAC file.

III.2.1.5.1 Managing DES/FAC file attachments

The method “attachDesFac” is used to attach a DES/FAC file to the Samcef DataBase. This method has between two and four arguments:

1.

A String containing the name of the DES file. (Full path name must be provided.)

2.

A String containing the name of the FAC file. (Full path name must be provided.)

3.

An integer or an Array of integers identifying load cases.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names that are attributed to the load cases and which shall be used to retrieve corresponding Results.

The arguments 3 and 4 are optional. They correspond to arguments 3 and 4 of the “readDesFac” method discussed in section III.2.1.4.

Several other methods are used to manage the DES/FAC attachments to a DataBase:

III.2.1.5.2 Extracting information from DES/FAC attachments

The following methods extract information related to the Results stored in DES/FAC files attached to the DataBase:

All these methods have a single String argument containing the name of the FAC file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. On the other hand, the following methods have one or two arguments:

The first argument is the name of the FAC file that must have been previously attached to the DataBase. The second argument is optional and corresponds to the name of a load case found in the attached FAC file. If the argument is not provided, all the load cases are investigated to build the list of sub-cases or Result names or IDs. If the argument is provided, only the sub-cases or Results of the corresponding load case are considered. If the provided load case does not exist in FAC attachment an error message is issued.

III.2.1.5.3 Extracting Results from attachments

The method “getAttachmentResults” is used to read Results from the FAC file. The Results are directly returned by the method to the caller. They are not inserted in the DataBase from which the method is called.

The method has minimum four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of FAC file attachment from which Results are read. (This file must have been previously attached to the DataBase.)

2.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Results are read.

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of sub-cases for which Results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of Results for which Results are read.

The other arguments are optional and correspond to the specification of target entities for which Results are read. Actually, the reading operation from a FAC file combines the reading and some of the extraction operations described in section I.4.3. For example:

One can extract Results without specifying the ResKeyList, Result or Group argument. However, it is still possible to specify a list of layers, a list of sub-layers, and a location to filter the values that are inserted in Results. The “Location” argument corresponds to the “Method” argument when Results are extracted on Groups. Possible values of this parameter are “Elements”, “ElemCenters", “ElemCorners”...

Only lists below the list of valid calls to “getAttachmentResults”:

        h=db.getAttachmentResults(facName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
                method,grpTarget[,layers[,subLayers]])
        h=db.getAttachmentResults(facName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
                resTarget)
        h=db.getAttachmentResults(facName,lcName,scNames,resNames,
                rklTarget)
        h=db.getAttachmentResults(facName,lcName,scNames,resNames
                [,layers[,sub-Layers[,location]]])

As several Result types, and sub-case names can be given as argument to “getAttachmentResults” method, this method can return several Results. This is why Results are returned in a Hash:

For example, the list of extracted Result sizes can be printed with the following statements:

    h=db.getAttachmentResults(facName,lcName,scNames,resNames,"Nodes",grp)
    h.each do |id,res|
        lcName=id[0]
        scName=id[1]
        resName=id[2]
        size=res.Size
        STDOUT.printf("%s - %s - %s : %d\n",lcName,scName,resName,size)
        #~ Util::printRes(STDOUT,"brol",res)
    end

The method “getAttachmentResultsCombili” is used to extract linear combinations of elementary Results found in one or several attached FAC files. As for method “getAttachmentResults” the Results are directly returned by the method to the caller. They are not inserted in the DataBase from which the method is called. This method is more or less a combination of the methods “getAttachmentResults” and “buildLoadCasesCombili” of the generic DataBase class.

Practically, the main difference between “getAttachmentResults” and “getAttachmentResultsCombili” is that the first argument is no longer a FAC file name. This argument is removed. Instead, one provides a “Combili” argument that describes the linear combination corresponding to extracted Results. This “Combili” argument is the second argument. The first argument is the “LcName” argument corresponding to the load case name attributed to the generated Results. This load case name is not supposed to correspond to any load case name found in the attached FAC file(s).

The method has minimum four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Results are read.

2.

A “Combili” Array containing the description of the linear combination of elementary load case Results. The Array is an Array of Arrays. Each secondary Array contains three elements:

3.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of sub-cases for which Results are read.

4.

A String or an Array of Strings corresponding to the names of Results for which Results are read.

The other arguments are optional and correspond to the specification of target entities for which Results are read. Actually, the reading operation from a FAC file combines the reading and some of the extraction operations described in section I.4.3. For example:

One can extract Results without specifying the ResKeyList, Result or Group argument. However, it is still possible to specify a list of layers, a list of sub-layers, and a location to filter the values that are inserted in Results. The “Location” argument corresponds to the “Method” argument when Results are extracted on Groups. Possible values of this parameter are “Elements”, “ElemCenters", “ElemCorners”...

Only lists below the list of valid calls to “getAttachmentResultsCombili”:

        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames,
                method,grpTarget,layers)
        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames,
                method,grpTarget)
        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames,
                resTarget)
        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames,
                rklTarget)
        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames,
                layers)
        h=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scNames,resNames)

The Hash object returned by the method has a structure identical to the one returned by “getAttachmentResults” and can be manipulated the same way.

III.2.1.5.4 Storage buffers for result files random access

In order to reduce the number of accesses to disk, it may be useful to store some of the blocks read from binary result files into memory. FeResPost provides an algorithm that allows to store the blocks most recently read for later usage. Two singleton methods of the “SamcefDb” class allow the to tune the capacity of the buffer area:

Note that all buffers are now common to all the methods that provide random access to XDB and FAC result files. In particular, the method is used in management of the binary file access for XDB and FAC attachment or reading. This means that if one Result file attached to one DataBase is more used, the storage will contain a majority of buffers for this Result file and progressively delete the other buffers.

The default capacity for storage buffer is 0Mb. Note that the two methods described above can be called from any class derived from the generic “DataBase” class.

III.2.1.6 GMSH outputs

The method “writeGmshMesh” defined in DataBase Class exports nodes and elements into the mesh file. The three tags attributed to the elements are the first and second element attributes and the laminate ID.

III.2.1.7 Production of additional Results

The method “generateShellOffsetsResult” defined in SamcefDb Class generates a Result corresponding to shell offsets for 2D elements. The method has no argument or three arguments. The arguments correspond to the key to which the Result object is associated in the SamcefDb object. (load case name, subcase name, and result name respectively.) If the String arguments are omitted, one assumes “”, “” and “Coordinates” for the Result key.

III.2.1.8 Iterators

A first group of iterators iterate on finite element entities of the finite element model stored in the DataBase.

The elements produced by the iterator are single integers. Each of these iterators has 0, 1 or 2 arguments. The two optional arguments are the integer bounds considered for the iteration: “IdMin” and “IdMax”.

Two methods allow the iteration on the elements of associative containers used to record the correspondence between integer and String identifiers of the samcef Groups stored in the DataBase:

Two iterators loop on the nodes defining an element:

These two iterators have one integer argument corresponding to the index of the element. The return the integer indices of nodes.

III.2.1.9 Other methods

Several other methods allow to obtain model information.

III.2.1.10 Attributes

One attribute “getter” allows to access information in the model:

III.2.2 Samcef Results characteristics

One makes here the distinction between general Results and composite Results.

III.2.2.1 General Results

General Results (by opposition to Composite Results) are presented in Tables III.2.2 to III.2.4. (One makes the distinction between Scalar, Vectorial and Tensorial Results.) About the Results described, one can make the following comments:

1.

The shear components of strain tensor output by Samcef should be (and generally are) components of a tensor (ϵij = γij∕2). The same convention is used for all the tensors manipulated in FeResPost. So, no manipulation of the shear components is made when importing strain tensors from Samcef Results.

Note however that because of a bug in Samcef, strain results given at center of elements may be wrong and use the “angular deformation” convention. So the use should be careful when manipulating strain tensor Results imported from Samcef.

A flag influencing the importation of Results with “readDesFac” method allows the modification of shear components of 2D elements strain tensor: the ‘ANGULAR_STRAIN_BUG” flag. When set to “true”, the shear components of Strain tensor are divided by two. This division by two is done for the result codes 3421, 3445 and 3446. It is the responsibility of the user to check whether the setting of the flag is necessary or not.

See more information about the methods used to manipulate the flags in section III.2.1.4.

2.

The ”Mechanical Strain Tensor” Result corresponds to the Strain Tensor estimated from Stress Tensor without considering thermo-elastic or hygro-elastic effects into account.

3.

All result codes corresponding to Von Mises stress are skipped. However, Von Mises stress can always be generated by derivation from stress tensor Results.

4.

The Result “Shell Forces” contains the contributions of several Samcef Result codes: the shell element normal forces (code x437) and the shell element shear forces (code x251).

5.

Samcef “beam” type elements do not output vectorial or tensorial forces or moments. Instead, the different components are expressed in different coordinate systems. When importing these Results, a conversion into tensorial format is done as follows:

F = ( FxxFxyFxz Fxy 0 0 Fxz 0 0 ) = ( N T1T2 T1 0 0 T2 0 0 ) ,

M = ( MxxMxyMxz Mxy 0 0 Mxz 0 0 ) = ( M - F2F1 - F2 0 0 F1 0 0 ) .

(One uses here the notation of the Samcef manual for the components stored in “fac” file: N corresponds to the axial component of force, T to the shear forces, M to the torsion moment and F to the bending moment.)

Beam forces and moments are also saved in “fac” file for bushing elements. Then, the longitudinal axis may be z if axisymmetric properties are attributed to the element. Then, the components are inserted in 2D tensors as follows:

F = ( 0 0 Fxz 0 0 Fyz FxzFyzFzz ) = ( 0 0 F1 0 0 F2 F1F2F3 ) ,

M = ( 0 0 Mxz 0 0 Myz MxzMyzMzz ) = ( 0 0 M1 0 0 M2 M1M2M3 ) .


Table III.2.2: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes and Scalar Results generated in FeResPost.
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
334 “Element Strain Energy (Density)”
335 “Element Kinetic Energy (Density)”
3234 “Element Strain Energy (Percent of Total)”
3235 “Element Kinetic Energy (Percent of Total)”
1305 “Contact, Contact Pressure”
1306 “Contact, Friction Stress”
1307 “Contact, Normal Distance”
2051 “Contact, Nodal Distance”
1440, 3440 “Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads”
1450, 3450 “Beam Shear Stress for Total Loads”


Table III.2.3: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes and Vectorial Results generated in FeResPost.
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
153 “Coordinates”
163 “Displacements, Translational”
191 “Displacements, Rotational”
221 “Reaction Forces, Forces”, “Reaction Forces, Moments”
1439, 3439, 1524, 3524 “Beam Forces” (5)
1439, 3439, 1525, 3525 “Beam Moments” (5)
1532 “Grid Point Forces, Reaction Forces”
1533 “Grid Point Forces, Reaction Moments”
1534 “Grid Point Forces, Internal Forces”
1535 “Grid Point Forces, Internal Moments”


Table III.2.4: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes and Tensorial Results generated in FeResPost. (Stars “*” can be replaced by 1, 2 or nothing and are related to the sub-layer IDs.)
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
*1411, *1413, 1431, 1435, 1436, *3411, *3413, 3431, 3435, 3436, “Stress Tensor”
*1421, 1445, 1446, *3421, 3445, 3446 “Strain Tensor” (1)
*1423, *3423 “Mechanical Strain Tensor” (2)
1251, 1437, 3251, 3437 “Shell Forces” (4)
1438, 3438 “Shell Moments”


Table III.2.5: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes for Mecano Thermal Results.
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
120 “Temperature”
121 “Temperature Variation Rate”
1379, 3379 “Specific Heat Energy”
1511, 3511 “Conductive Heat Flux”
1801, 3801 “Applied Heat Flux”

III.2.2.2 Composite Results

A few comments about the composite Results are given below presented in Tables III.2.6 to III.2.8:

1.

Composite Results have non-linear dependence on the primary unknowns (displacements and rotations). Therefore, composite Results obtained by linear combination of elementary Results are false.

2.

With Samcef, it is also possible to output ply Results in the upper and lower layers of each ply (codes 1xxxx and 2xxxx). FeResPost reads results at mid layer of each ply only. The other Results are skipped. (Note that most composite calculation methods usually use the forces in plies recovered at mid-thickness.)

3.

Even though the maximum stress and strain failure indices are presented in Samcef and FeResPost as tensorial Results, the six components for each location are not the components of a tensor. Therefore, the user must be very careful when using those Results. In particular transformations of coordinate systems for those Results are meaningless.

4.

Composite critical ply failure indices give for each element the maximum failure index in one of the plies. Also, the evaluation is done at the Gauss points of each ply and each elements and the maximum is collected.

Four methods devoted to the enabling or disabling of composite layered Results are defined in the generic “DataBase” class. These methods are presented in section I.1.3.2.


Table III.2.6: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes for Scalar failure indices generated in FeResPost (4). (Stars “*” can be replaced by 1, 2 or nothing and are related to the sub-layer IDs.)
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
*1621, *3621 “Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1”
*1622, *3622 “Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2”
*1623, *3623 “Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 3”
*1624, *3624 “Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Wu”
*1625, *3625 “Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 1”
*1626, *3626 “Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 2”
*1627, *3627 “Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 3”
*1630, *3630 “Composite Failure Index, Stress Ratio”
*1631, *3631 “Composite Failure Index, Strain Ratio”
*1632, *3632 “Composite Failure Index, Rice and Tracey”
*7621 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1”
*7622 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2”
*7623 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 3”
*7624 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Wu”
*7625 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 1”
*7626 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 2”
*7627 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 3”
*7628 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Maximum Strain, CompMax”
*7629 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Maximum Stress, CompMax”
*7630 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Stress Ratio”
*7631 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Strain Ratio”
*7632 “Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Rice and Tracey”


Table III.2.7: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes for Scalar critical plies generated in FeResPost (4).
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
8621 “Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 1”
8622 “Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 2”
8623 “Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 3”
8624 “Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Wu”
8625 “Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 1”
8626 “Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 2”
8627 “Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 3”
8628 “Composite Critical Ply, Maximum Strain, CompMax”
8629 “Composite Critical Ply, Maximum Stress, CompMax”
8630 “Composite Critical Ply, Stress Ratio”
8631 “Composite Critical Ply, Strain Ratio”
8632 “Composite Critical Ply, Rice and Tracey”


Table III.2.8: Correspondence between Samcef Result Codes for Tensorial failure indices generated in FeResPost (3).
Samcef Result Code Generated Result
1628, 3628 “Composite Failure Index, Maximum Strain”
1629, 3629 “Composite Failure Index, Maximum Stress”

The correspondence between the failure indices read from Samcef result files and Results produced by CLA classes is as in Table III.2.9. Sometimes a single Samcef Result corresponds to two different CLA failure criteria. Then, the type of element (2D or 3D) allows the identification of the appropriate CLA criterion.


Table III.2.9: Correspondence between the Samcef failure indices imported from “des/fac” files and the failure criteria defined in CLA module.
Samcef Result CLA criterion ID section
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1” (2D elements) “TsaiHill_b” II.1.10.10
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1” (3D elements) “TsaiHill3D_b” II.1.10.13
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2” (2D elements) “TsaiHill” II.1.10.9
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2” (3D elements) “TsaiHill3D” II.1.10.12
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 3” “TsaiHill” II.1.10.9
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Wu” “TsaiWu3D” II.1.10.15
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 1” “Hashin3D” II.1.10.21
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 2” “Hashin3D_b” II.1.10.21
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 3” “Hashin3D_c” II.1.10.21
“Composite Failure Index, Hoffman” “Hoffman” II.1.10.16
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Strain, CompMax” “MaxStrain3D” II.1.10.7
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Stress, CompMax” “MaxStress3D” II.1.10.5
“Composite Failure Index, Interlaminar Shear Stress” “Ilss” II.1.10.27

Important notes about the coordinate system associated with each value in the Result objects:

III.2.3 Methods defined in “Post” module

The method “readGroupsFromSamcefDat” reads Groups from a Samcef Bacon data file and returns a Hash containing the list of Groups. (This method is similar to “readGroupsFromPatranSession” also defined in “Post” module.) The keys are Group names, and the values are the Groups. The method has two arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the session file.

2.

A DataBase. This argument is optional. If it is provided, the reading method removes from the created Groups all the entities undefined in the DataBase argument.

The definition of Groups must be done according to the “.SEL” command of the Bacon files. Only the lines in the “.SEL” commands are considered. More model definition commands may be present in the file but they are ignored. Examples of use of the method follow:

      ...
      h=Post::readGroupsFromSamcefDat("groups.dat")
      ...
      h=Post::readGroupsFromSamcefDat("groups.dat",DB)
      ...

Part IV
FeResPost Examples with RUBY Extension

Chapter IV.0
Introduction

This Part of the document is devoted to the presentation of examples illustrating various aspects of FeResPost. All the FeResPost examples are done with a model and Nastran results corresponding to a very simplified and imaginary satellite represented in Figure IV.1.1. This Part is organized as follows:

All the examples are delivered in “TESTSAT” directory. This directory contains four subdirectories:

1.

“MODEL” contains the definition “testSat” finite element model. The splitting of this model into several files and its organization in sub-directories is described in section IV.1.6.

2.

“OTHER_EXECS” contains Nastran example BDF files not related to the “testSat” small satellite finite element model. In general, these examples illustrate technicalities of Nastran and FeResPost.

3.

“RUBY” contains the small examples described in Chapter IV.2. The sub-directories in “RUBY” are:

4.

Finally, a “EXEC_OP2” directory has been defined in “MODEL” directory. The main bulk data files have been copied in this directory and the calculations with Nastran must be performed in that directory.

5.

Similarly a “EXEC_XDB” directory has been defined in “MODEL” directory. There, the main bulk data files have been modified to produce “xdb” result outputs.

Of course, before running the examples, you must compile ruby or its shared library, and produce the Nastran finite elements results.

IV.0.1 Accessing the ruby extension

Typically, one imports the FeResPost Classes and Modules with the two following statements:

     require "FeResPost"
     include FeResPost

Note however that it works only if the different environment variables have been initialized correctly. Typically, this is done through the batch files (on Windows computers) or bash files (on UNIX and LINUX computers) that are used to launch the example scripts, and the following variables are generally initialized:

    set LIB=
    set INCLUDE=
    set RUBYPATH=C:/NEWPROGS/RUBY/ruby-3.0.0-1-x64/bin
    set REDISTRPATH=C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/REDISTR
    set RUBYLIB=C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/RUBY/RUBY_30
    set PATH=%RUBYPATH%;%REDISTRPATH%;C:/Windows/System32

On Windows machines, the examples are defined in such a way that the environment is defined in file “RUBY/ENV/env.bat” included in the script used to launch ruby program. In the example above, note that the “PATH” environment variable refers to three directories:

For example, the example “EX03/makeGravForces.rb” is launched in “RUBY/EX06” directory with command:

    makeGravForces.bat

in which “exec” refers to the “exec.bat” file with the following content:

    setlocal
    call "../ENV/env.bat"
    ruby -I. makeGravForces.rb
    endlocal

Of course the different paths you will initialize in “ENV/env.bat” will have to be adapted to your particular installation, and to the version of Ruby you are using.

On unix, the BASH file looks as follows:

    #!/bin/bash
    source ../ENV/env.bash
    ruby --version
    ruby -I. -I$RUBYLIB makeGravForces.rb

in which “../ENV/env.bash” has the following content:

    RUBYLIB=/home/progs/Documents/FERESPOST/SRC/OUTPUTS/RUBY/RUBY_25
    PATH=/home/PGR/RUBY/I64//RUBY_251/bin

Chapter IV.1
A small satellite

This Chapter describes the finite element model used in all the examples. The Chapter is organized as follows:

IV.1.1 Presentation of the structure and its modeling

An overall view of the satellite’s FE model is presented in Figure IV.1.1. Basically, the structure is composed of a hexahedral lower box and of an upper panel supported by six struts. The hexahedral lower box is made of six sandwich panels connected on 12 metallic bars along their edges. The metallic bars are connected to eight corner nodes. A view of the lower box metallic frame, without the sandwich panels is given in Figure IV.1.2. The corner nodes, and the connections of sandwich panels are modeled with RBE2 elements. However, for thermo-elastic calculations these RBE2 elements are replaced by very stiff CBAR elements.


PICT

Figure IV.1.1: Overall view of the satellite’s finite element model.


PICT

Figure IV.1.2: Metallic frame of the satellite lower box.

The sandwich panels are generally modeled with solid elements for the honeycomb and shell elements for the skins (Figure IV.1.3). A shell element modeling of a sandwich panel with layered (PCOMPG) element properties has been chosen for only one of the panels: the bottom panel.

To ensure a good transfer of loads to the panels, in particular of the bending moments at connections, small traversing elements have been introduced in the panels modeled with 3D elements. Those elements represent the inserts and connect the two skins. A global view of all the traversing elements is given in Figure IV.1.4.


PICT

Figure IV.1.3: Solid element modeling of sandwich panels.


PICT

Figure IV.1.4: Traversing elements for inserts’ modeling.

The struts are modeled with CBAR elements. The struts are connected to the upper panel and to the box +Z panel through metallic fittings modeled with CONM2 and RBE2 elements. (The RBE2 elements are replaced by very stiff CBAR elements for thermo-elastic calculations). The connections of struts to the fittings are ball-bearing connections (only translational degrees of freedom are transmitted, except on the lower side, where the rotation of each strut around its axis is blocked).

The equipments connected to the sandwich panels are modeled with CONM2 and RBE2 elements. (The RBE2 elements are replaced by very stiff CBAR elements for thermo-elastic calculations). A view of some equipments is presented in Figure IV.1.5. On some panels small equipments are modeled by adding a NSM (non-structural mass) to PSHELL properties.


PICT

Figure IV.1.5: Open view of the satellite with modeling of equipments.

IV.1.2 Satellite FEM materials and properties

In the satellite FE model, only seven material cards are defined. The most relevant parameters of material cards are given in Tables IV.1.1, IV.1.2 and IV.1.3.


Table IV.1.1: Isotropic materials used in the finite element model (MAT1 property cards).
Material name MIDE (GPa)να (K-1)ρ (kg/m3)
Al-7075-T7351 2 72.1 0.33 23.6 10-6 2796.0
Al-7010-T7451 1 71.7 0.33 23.6 10-6 2820.0
Al-2024-T3 clad 3 69.0 0.33 23.6 10-6 2768.0
(thermo-elastic) 5001 72.1 0.33 23.6 10-6 0.0


Table IV.1.2: 3D anisotropic materials used in the finite element model (MAT9 property cards).
Material type Honeycomb 50 Honeycomb 72
MID 5 6
G 11 (MPa) 0.670 0.760
G 22 (MPa) 0.670 0.760
G 33 (MPa) 669.0 1276.0
G 44 (MPa) 0.207 0.310
G 55 (MPa) 138.0 193.0
G 66 (MPa) 310.0 483.0
ρ (kg/m 3 ) 50 72
α (K -1 )23.6 10-623.6 10-6


Table IV.1.3: 2D anisotropic materials used in the finite element model (MAT8 property card).
Material type Honeycomb 50 2D CFRP 2D
MID 4 10000
E 1 (MPa) 0.500 290000
E 2 (MPa) 0.500 5600
ν 12 0.3 0.33
G 12 (MPa) 0.500 3000
G 1Z (MPa) 310.0 1100
G 2Z (MPa) 138.0 1100
ρ (kg/m3) 50 1670
α1 (K -1 )23.6 10-6- 1 10-6
α2 (K -1 )23.6 10-631 10-6
S 1t (MPa) 0.050 1600
S 1c (MPa) 0.050 500
S 2t (MPa) 0.050 25
S 2c (MPa) 0.050 140
S s (MPa) 0.050 55

All CBAR elements receive PBARL properties:

All skins, except those of bottom panel, are made of Aluminum 2024 T3 and have a thickness of 0.5 mm. The honeycomb used in sandwich panels has a density of 50 kg/m3. Only in the +Z panel of the box a 72 kg/m3 honeycomb has been used. The bottom panel is modeled with surface elements, and has correspondingly a PCOMPG property card (PID=6). Each skin of the bottom sandwich panel is made of CFRP laminated material with plies 0.1 mm thick. The properties are defined as follows:

PCOMPG    6                  50.779    30.+6    HILL    20.        0.
            2008     10000  1.-4      0.        YES
            2007     10000  1.-4      45.      YES
            2006     10000  1.-4     -45.      YES
            2005     10000  1.-4      90.      YES
            2004     10000  1.-4      90.      YES
            2003     10000  1.-4     -45.      YES
            2002     10000  1.-4      45.      YES
            2001     10000  1.-4      0.        YES
            100      4        .0284     0.        YES
            3001     10000  1.-4      0.        YES
            3002     10000  1.-4      45.      YES
            3003     10000  1.-4     -45.      YES
            3004     10000  1.-4      90.      YES
            3005     10000  1.-4      90.      YES
            3006     10000  1.-4     -45.      YES
            3007     10000  1.-4      45.      YES
            3008     10000  1.-4      0.        YES

For sandwich panels modeled with solid elements, the honeycomb is oriented in such a way that the direction Z is perpendicular to the panel. Direction X is vertical for vertical panels and oriented towards +X of coordinate system 1001 for horizontal panels.

IV.1.3 Conventions for numbering and groups

In order to ease the writing of post-processing scripts and the management of FE model, numbering ranges are defined for various parts of the model. The main numbering ranges are given in Table IV.1.4 with the associated groups, when a corresponding group exists. These groups are defined in the Patran session file “groups.ses”.


Table IV.1.4: Numbering ranges and corresponding group names.
Part group name numbering range
panel -X “pan_MX” 20000:24999
panel -Y “pan_MY” 40000:44999
panel -Z “pan_MZ” 60000:64999
panel +X “pan_PX” 30000:34999
panel +Y “pan_PY” 50000:54999
panel +Z “pan_PZ” 70000:74999
upper panel “pan_SUP” 90000:94999
metallic frame — 80000:84999
struts “struts_ALL” 85000:89999

Other groups are defined in the session file:

IV.1.4 Loads and Boundary conditions

One give here information on the various loads and boundary conditions used in the examples presented in Chapter IV.2.

IV.1.4.1 Loads

One makes the distinction between load cases corresponding to quasi-static accelerations or forces applied on the structure and thermo-elastic loads cases.

First, three load cases corresponding to quasi-static accelerations applied to the entire satellite structure are defined in file “unit_accel.bdf”. These accelerations are defined by Nastran “GRAV” cards and are oriented in directions X, Y and Z. Their Load identifiers are 601001, 601002 and 601003 respectively.

Then loads corresponding to quasi-static acceleration on parts of the structure are created by defining the appropriate force fields. The method used to defined those force fields is explained in the example presented in section IV.2.5.1. Six files contain these force fields:

One also defines temperature fields for thermo-elastic load cases calculations:

The method used to defined these temperature fields is explained in the example presented in section IV.2.5.2.

IV.1.4.2 Boundary conditions

Only two different fixations of the satellite are used in the examples of Chapter IV.2:

IV.1.5 Main data files

In the definition of main data files, the definition of too many load cases on the structure. Therefore, elementary load cases are defined on the structure. The Results of these load cases can be recombined at post-processing level to produce the recombined Results.

The elementary load cases are defined in the following sections. The additional calculations are also summarized that have been performed with Nastran to allow the testing of Result importation for other Nastran Solution Sequences.

IV.1.5.1 Acceleration unit loads on entire structure

Two data files corresponding to unit accelerations applied to the entire structure. These data files correspond to the static and thermo-elastic versions of the model respectively. On the static model, the corresponding load case names are:

These load cases are defined in file “unit_xyz.bdf”. Correspondingly, unit load cases on the thermo-elastic version of the model in file “orbit_unit_xyz.bdf”:

IV.1.5.2 Acceleration unit loads on parts of the structure

Two data files corresponding to the local unit acceleration fields defined in section IV.1.4.1 are provided. These files are named “unit_xyz_pan_pz.bdf” and “unit_xyz_upper.bdf” respectively. They define the following load cases:

IV.1.5.3 Thermo-elastic load cases

Two data files corresponding to thermo-elastic load cases on the structure are also defined. The file “temp_disc.bdf” defines four load cases in which discontinuous temperature fields are applied to the structure. The four load cases are defined as follows:

The file “temp_grad.bdf” defines three load cases corresponding to gradients of 100 ∘C/m applied on the entire satellite:

IV.1.5.4 Other solution sequences

Several main Bulk Data Files defined in “MAINS” directory are provided to allow the testing of result importations for different Nastran solution sequences:

IV.1.6 Organization of FEM in files and directories

Information on the way the model has been split into several files, and on the organization of the files into different directories.

The files are located in six different directories:

Note also that each file included in a “.bdf” main data file can itself include other files.

The directory “PATRAN” contains a Patran session file that can be used to import the definition of groups in a Patran or FeResPost DataBase.

Chapter IV.2
A few small examples

This Chapter presents very small examples of data files performing simple operations with the FE model and Results. This helps familiarize the reader to the use of FeResPost, and possibly to ruby also.

The examples are divided into four categories:

IV.2.1 Utilities Module

In file“"RUBY/UTIL/util.rb”, one defines the “Util” Module that contains several useful methods:

IV.2.2 Examples without Results

This section presents different examples involving the access to Nastran BDF files.

IV.2.2.1 Reading Bulk Data

IV.2.2.1.1 Reading Nastran model into DataBase

The first example illustrates different versions of the call to “readBdf” method:

    require "FeResPost"
    include FeResPost

    # Creates  and initializes the DataBase :

    db=NastranDb.new()
    db.Name="tmpDB1"
    db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf")

The first call to “readBdf” is the default instruction used to read the Bulk file in most examples.

A second bdf read operation is performed as follows:

    db=NastranDb.new()
    db.Name="tmpDB2"
    begin
        db.readBdf("unit_xyz_V1.bdf",[],"bdf",{},true)
    rescue Exception => x then
        printf ("\n\nMaybe you should modify the two first include statements in main file!\n")
        printf ("**********************************************************************\n\n")
        raise x
    end

The revised version reads main file “unit_xyz_V1.bdf” that illustrates several possible interpretation of the “include” statements in Nastran Bulk Data Files. The user must uncomment the corresponding statement, and modify the absolute paths in the include statements of “unit_xyz_V1.bdf” file. (The “begin” and “rescue” statements have been added to remind the user of this necessary modification. An error message is issued if the reading fails.)

Include statement in the data file look as follows:

include ’/home/ferespost/Documents/FERESPOST/TESTSAT/
    MODEL/MESH/coordSys.bdf’
include /home/ferespost/Documents/FERESPOST/    ,
          TESTSAT/MODEL/MATS/mats.bdf
include ’../../MODEL/PROPS/props.bdf’
$
include ../../MODEL/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MX.bdf
    include ../../MODEL/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MY.bdf
include     ../../MODEL/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MZ.bdf
include ../../    MODEL/MES    H/elemNod    es_pan_PX.bdf
include ../../MODEL/MESH/    elemNodes_pan_PY.bdf

The example is given in file “RUBY/EX01/readBdf.rb”.

Another version of the example is given in file “RUBY/EX01/readBdf_V2.rb”. It illustrates the reading of Bulk Data Files containing include statements in which symbols are used. In that example, the call to “readBdf” looks as follows:

    symbols=Hash.new
    symbols["INCDIR"]="../../MODEL"

    db=NastranDb.new()
    db.Name="tmpDB2"
    db.readBdf("unit_xyz_V2.bdf",[],"bdf",symbols,true)

The variable “symbols” is a Hash containing the list of symbols that must be substituted in the include statements. (Only one symbol is defined in this case.) The include statements of the BDF file look as follows:

include INCDIR:/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MX.bdf
    include INCDIR:/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MY.bdf
include     INCDIR:/MESH/elemNodes_pan_MZ.bdf
include ../../    MODEL/MES    H/elemNod    es_pan_PX.bdf
include INCDIR:/MESH/    elemNodes_pan_PY.bdf

The example “readBdf_V3” proposes a slightly more complicated case of file inclusions in a main BDF.

Example “readBdf_V7” illustrates several functions allowing the manipulation of the database FEM entities. A list of Nastran cards corresponding to the FEM definition is build as follows:

    cards=[]
    db.each_coordSysId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("CoordSys",id)
    end
    db.each_nodeId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("Node",id)
    end
    db.each_elemId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("Element",id)
    end
    db.each_rbeId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("RBE",id)
    end
    db.each_materialId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("Material",id)
    end
    db.each_propertyId do |id|
        cards << db.fillCard("Property",id)
    end

Then, one builds a new database using these cards:

    db3=NastranDb.new()
    db3.Name="tmpDB3"
    db3.insertCards(cards);

Finally, one checks the content of the new database:

    db3.writeBdfLines("out.bdf","w","left","short","All");

    vectStr=NastranDb.writeNastranCardsToVectStr("left","short",cards);
    vectStr.each do |line|
        puts line
    end

Example “readBdf_V8” illustrates the reading of a model by several calls to “readBdf” methods:

    db.readBdf("D:/SHARED/FERESPOST/TESTSAT/MODEL/MESH/coordSys.bdf",nil,nil,nil,true,true)
    db.readBdf("D:/SHARED/FERESPOST/TESTSAT/MODEL/MATS/mats.bdf",nil,nil,nil,true,true)
    db.readBdf("../../MODEL/PROPS/props.bdf",nil,nil,nil,true,true)

    ...

    db.readBdf("../../MODEL/FIXAS/launch.bdf",nil,nil,nil,true,true)
    db.readBdf("../../MODEL/LOADS/unit_accel.bdf",nil,nil,nil,true,true)

This approach can be used to modify finite element model stored in a database during script execution.

Example “readBdf_V9” illustrates additional capabilities for the reading of BDF files. In particular, cards in free format are added to file “unit_xyz_V9.bdf” to test FeResPost capabilities. You can verify the effect of parameters like params["STRICTUAI"]="1" on the reading of following card:

  CHEXA,200, 200, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
  17, 18, 19, 20

IV.2.2.1.2 Reading Nastran cards

Two examples present the possibility of iterating on items read from BDF files. The first example uses method “each_bdfCard” and can be used to recover the BDF cards read from one or several BDF files (includes are managed by the method). The part of interest is as follows:

   NastranDb.each_bdfCard("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf") do |crd|
       counter=0
       crd.each do |x|
           if counter==0 then
               printf("%8s : ",x)
           else
               if x.class==String then
                   printf("%12s",x)
               elsif x.class==Fixnum then
                   printf("%12d",x)
               elsif x.class==Float then
                   printf("%12g",x)
               end
           end
           counter+=1
       end
       puts
   end

The second example is a little more complex. The iterator “each_bdfCard2” returns more than the BDF card. The printing of information returned by this iterator should help the reader understanding the format of items:

    NastranDb.each_bdfCard2(bdfPath,nil,nil,nil,false) do |typeName,card,lines|
        counter=0
        printf("\"%s\"\n",typeName)
        case typeName
        when "CARD" then
            card.each do |x|
                if counter==0 then
                    printf("%8s : ",x)
                else
                    if x.class==String then
                        printf("%12s",x)
                    elsif x.class==Fixnum then
                        printf("%12d",x)
                    elsif x.class==Float then
                        printf("%12g",x)
                    end
                end
                counter+=1
            end
            printf("\n")
        when "INCLUDE" then
            printf("   %s --> %s\n",card[1],card[2])
        when "EQUALS" then
            printf("   \"%s\" = \"%s\"\n",card[1],card[3])
        else
            # Nothing ...
        end # case typeName ...
        printf("LINES:\n")
        lines.each do |fileName,lineNumber,lineStr|
            printf("    %s --- %d --- \"%s\"\n",fileName,lineNumber,lineStr)
        end
        puts
    end

You can verify the effect of parameters like params["STRICTUAI"]="1" on the reading of following card:

  CHEXA,200, 200, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
  17, 18, 19, 20

The two examples are provided in files “RUBY/EX01/scanBdfCards.rb” and “RUBY/EX01/scanBdfCards2.rb”. The examples can be run on different BDF files. The BDF file “RUBY/EX01/testSat_scanBdfCards2.bdf” contains different examples of BDF cards in free format.

IV.2.2.2 Reading FEM from HDF file

Finite element model can also be read from Nastran HDF output file using method “readFemFromHdf”. Example “RUBY/EX37/femFromHdf5.rb” illustrates this possibility. In that example, the reading of model is done as follows:

      h5Path="../../MODEL/EXEC_HDF5/unit_xyz.h5"
      db.readFemFromHdf(h5Path)

In this example, only one parameter is given to the method. This means that the residual FEM is read, but not the superelements if the model contains superelements. An example with reading of superelements is discussed in section IV.2.11.5.

IV.2.2.3 Group examples

One presents here several examples illustrating the manipulation of Groups in FeResPost. They show how the Groups defined in the DataBase can be inspected, and how new Groups can be constructed and added to the DataBase.

IV.2.2.3.1 Printing the list of a DataBase’s Groups

It shows how it is possible to obtain the list of Groups contained in a DataBase. This may be useful if one wants to check whether all Groups read from a session file have been correctly integrated in the DataBase. The ruby program looks like:

# Creates  and initializes the DataBase :

   db=NastranDb.new()
   db.Name="tmpDB"
   db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf")
   db.readGroupsFromPatranSession("../../MODEL/PATRAN/groups.ses")

# Prints all the group names :

   puts db.getAllGroupNames()

The last line performs the printing of the names of all Groups contained in the DataBase. The other lines are for DataBase creation and initialization.

The example is given in file "RUBY/EX02/printGroupNames.rb".

IV.2.2.3.2 Content of DataBase’s Groups

In the previous example one simply printed the list of the names of Groups contained in a DataBase. In this new examples, information is also printed on the content of each Group. Practically, this is done as follows:

The program looks like this:

# Creates  and initializes the DataBase :

   db=NastranDb.new()
   db.Name="tmpDB"
   db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf")
   db.readGroupsFromPatranSession("../../MODEL/PATRAN/groups.ses")

# Prints Groups’ data :

   printf("%20s%10s%10s%10s%10s\n","groupName","Nodes",\
      "Elements","RBEss","CoordSys")
   db.each_groupName do |groupName|
      grp = db.getGroupCopy(groupName)
      nodesNbr = grp.NbrElements
      elementsNbr = grp.NbrNodes
      rbesNbr = grp.NbrRbes
      coordNbr = grp.NbrCoordsys
      printf("%20s%10d%10d%10d%10d\n",groupName,nodesNbr,\
         elementsNbr,rbessNbr,coordNbr)
   end

The example is given in file "RUBY/EX02/printGroups.rb".

IV.2.2.3.3 Printing a Patran session file

The third example prints Groups defined in a Patran session file without importing them into a DataBase. Groups are directly read into a Hash object with the following statement:

   h=Post.readGroupsFromPatranSession("../../MODEL/PATRAN/groups.ses")

Then, for each Group, the entities are printed as lists of integer. One shows below how it is done for the nodes:

   nbrEntitiesPerLine=8

   h.each do |id,grp|
      os.printf("Group \"%s\":\n\n",id)

      ...

      nbr=grp.getNbrEntitiesByType("Node")
      os.printf("   Nbr Nodes: %d",nbr)
      counter=0
      grp.each_node do |id|
         if (counter%nbrEntitiesPerLine==0) then
            os.printf("\n      ")
         end
         os.printf("%8d",id)
         counter+=1
      end
      os.printf("\n\n")

      ...

   end

The example is given in file "RUBY/EX02/writeGroupEntities.rb".

IV.2.2.4 Manipulating Group entities

The entities stored in a Group can be manipulated. For example, the following statements:

   grpList=[]

   grp=Group.new
   grp.addEntities("Element 20000:24999 Node 20000:24999")
   grp.Name="pan_MX"
   grp.matchWithDbEntities(db)
   grpList << grp

create a Group, add elements and nodes into it, remove the elements and nodes undefined in the db DataBase and insert the created Group into an Array.

It is also possible to add or remove entities with range defined with steps:

   grp=Group.new
   grp.addEntities("Element 20000:24999:7 Node 20000:24999:7")
   grp.removeEntities("Element 20000:24999:28 Node 20000:24999:28")
   grp.Name="pan_MX_7_28"
   grp.matchWithDbEntities(db)
   grpList << grp

At the end of the example, the Groups are saved into a Patran session file:

   Post::writeGroupsToPatranSession("groups.ses",grpList)

The example is given in file "RUBY/EX03/manipGroups.rb".

IV.2.2.5 Adding Groups to a DataBase

In the examples of section IV.2.2.3, one initialized a DataBase and examined its Groups and the content of the Groups. In this example, this section shows how Groups can be manipulated, and the DataBase modified during the execution of the program.

The groups contained in session file “groups.ses” are not sufficient to suit our post-processing requirements. Indeed, it would be very practical if for each panel, a distinction between the skins and honeycomb could be made. We decide that it shall be done by adding new Groups to the DataBase. This problem can be solved in four steps:

1.

Initialization of a DataBase.

2.

Creation of Groups by association to materials.

3.

Creation of Groups by intersections and insertion in the DataBase.

4.

Printing of the Groups contained in the DataBase (for checking the result of the operation).

Steps 1 and 4 above correspond to the operation of the example presented in section IV.2.2.3. Therefore, one does not present those parts of the program here. One only gives explanation on steps 2 and 3.

The creation of “material Groups” is done by calling the DataBase “getElementsAssociatedToMaterialId” method. Three Groups are created, corresponding to honeycomb 50 kg/m3, honeycomb 72 kg/m3 and Aluminum 2024 T3 respectively. Practically this is programmed as follows:

# Groups created by Materials :

   tmpGroup_Honey_50  = db.getElementsAssociatedToMaterialId(5)
   tmpGroup_Honey_50 += db.getElementsAssociatedToMaterialId(4)
   tmpGroup_Honey_50.Name="Honey_50"

   tmpGroup_Honey_72 = db.getElementsAssociatedToMaterialId(6)
   tmpGroup_Honey_72.Name="Honey_72"

   tmpGroup_Al_2024 = db.getElementsAssociatedToMaterialId(3)
   tmpGroup_Al_2024.Name="Al_2024"

   tmpGroup_CFRP = db.getElementsAssociatedToMaterials(10000)
   tmpGroup_CFRP.Name="CFRP"

   matGroups = Array.new()
   matGroups << tmpGroup_Honey_50
   matGroups << tmpGroup_Honey_72
   matGroups << tmpGroup_Al_2024
   matGroups << tmpGroup_CFRP

   db.addGroupCopy(tmpGroup_Honey_50)
   db.addGroupCopy(tmpGroup_Honey_72)
   db.addGroupCopy(tmpGroup_Al_2024)
   db.addGroupCopy(tmpGroup_CFRP)

One can make a few remarks about the previous ruby lines:

After the creation of material Groups, one creates the other Groups by intersection (step 3). This is done as follows:

# Groups created by intersection :

   panelGroupNames = Array.new()
   panelGroupNames << "pan_MX"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_MY"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_MZ"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_PX"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_PY"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_PZ"
   panelGroupNames << "pan_SUP"

   for panelGroupName in panelGroupNames
      panelGroup = db.getGroupCopy(panelGroupName)
      for matGrp in matGroups
         newGrp = panelGroup * matGrp
         newGrp.Name=panelGroupName+"_"+matGrp.Name
         if newGrp.getEntitiesByType("Element").size > 0
            db.addGroupCopy(newGrp)
         end
      end
   end

Here again, a few commentaries can be done:

The example is given in file “RUBY/EX03/makeMatGroups.rb”.

IV.2.3 Examples with iterators

One example illustrating the use of some of the iterators defined in DataBase class. The following lines print the elements connectivity:

   db.each_elemId do |elemId|
      STDOUT.printf(" %d =>",elemId)
      db.each_nodeOfElement(elemId) do |nodeId|
         STDOUT.printf(" %d",nodeId)
      end
      STDOUT.printf("\n")
   end

Two iterators have been used in the calculation: “each_elemId” and “each_nodeOfElement”. A second version of the loop restricts the printing of connectivity to corner nodes only.

The example is given in file “RUBY/EX16/elemConnectivity.rb”.

An iterator is also used in example “RUBY/EX03/properties.rb”. In that example, the “fillCard” method is used of NastranDb class to obtain the definition of the properties in the model:

    db.each_propertyId do |id|
        puts "Property",id
        card=db.fillCard("Property",id)
        puts card
    end

(See section III.1.1.6 for the definition of “fillCard” method.)

IV.2.4 Examples with Results

IV.2.4.1 Inspecting Results contained in a DataBase

The following example prints the information on Results available in the DataBase. It starts with the following lines:

   require "FeResPost"
   include FeResPost

   #DataBase::disableLayeredResultsReading
   #DataBase::disableSubLayersReading("Bottom")
   #DataBase::disableSubLayersReading("Mid")
   #DataBase::disableSubLayersReading("Top")

The commented lines are methods that disable partially or entirely the reading of composite element layered Results. After reading the corresponding manual in section I.1.3.2, you may un-comment some of these instructions to check the effect on the reading of composite Results.

The main part of the example program looks like this:

# Reading or generating Results :

   db.readOp2("../../MODEL/EXEC_OP2/unit_xyz.op2","Results")

   db.generateCoordResults
   db.generateCoordResults("Fake Coords Case","No SubCase","coords")

# Inspecting and reading Results :

   db.each_resultKeyCaseId do |lcName|
      printf("LOADCASE: \"%s\"\n",lcName)
   end
   db.each_resultKeySubCaseId do |scName|
      printf("SUBCASE: \"%s\"\n",scName)
   end
   db.each_resultKeyLcScId do |lcName,scName|
      printf("LOADCASE and SUBCASE: \"%s\" - \"%s\"\n",lcName,scName)
   end
   db.each_resultKeyResId do |resName|
      printf("RESULT: \"%s\"\n",resName)
   end

   db.each_resultKey do |lcName,scName,tpName|
      tmpRes=db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpName)
      printf("%-20s%-15s%-50s%-10d\n",lcName,scName,tpName,\
             tmpRes.Size)
   end

It works as follows:

The example is provided in file “RUBY/EX04/printResLists.rb”.

Another example illustrating the reading of Results from a Nastran OP2 file is provided in file “RUBY/EX04/printResLists_filter.rb”. This example illustrates the use of “readOp2FilteredResults” method.

IV.2.4.2 Calculations with Results

One shows here how calculations can be performed with Result objects. One first initializes the DataBase and imports Results with function “readOp2”. In this example, one works with the thermo-elastic version of the model, but its initialization is vey similar to the initialization in other examples. One also add addition Groups corresponding to skins and honeycomb of the sandwich panels, like in the example of section IV.2.2.5. Those parts are not described here.

One first describes the manipulation of results that lead to the calculation of maximum equivalent Von Mises stress in the skins of upper panel. The corresponding ruby lines look like this:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Al_2024")
   stress =  db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCorners",targetGrp,[])
   scalar = stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("VonMises")

   maxScalar = scalar.extractResultMax
   maxRkl = maxScalar.extractRkl
   maxStress = stress.extractResultOnRkl(maxRkl)
   maxScalarData = maxScalar.getData()[0]
   maxStressData = maxStress.getData()[0]

   puts
   puts "Maximum Von Mises stress in panel +Z skins :"
   puts
   printf("   %.2f Pa on element %d (layer=\"%s\").\n",
      maxScalarData[5],maxScalarData[0],maxScalarData[2])
   printf("      Sxx = %.2f, Syy = %.2f, Szz = %.2f,\n",maxStressData[5],\
             maxStressData[6],maxStressData[7])
   printf("      Sxy = %.2f, Syz = %.2f, Szx = %.2f\n",maxStressData[8],\
             maxStressData[9],maxStressData[10])

Basically, the process can be divided into three parts:

1.

Actual calculation of Von Mises stress. One recovers the Cauchy stress tensor corresponding to the selected load case and selected Group. Then one derives a scalar equivalent Von Mises stress.

2.

Selection of the data corresponding to the maximum Von Mises stress. This is done as follows:

3.

Printing of the Results. The reader will understand by himself how it works.

In the same file, a maximum out-of-plane value is also calculated shear stress in the honeycomb of the +Z panel. The calculation of this stress is done as follows:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Honey_72")
   stress = db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCorners",targetGrp,[])
   sXZ = stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component XZ")
   sYZ = stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component YZ")
   scalar = Post.sqrt(sXZ*sXZ+sYZ*sYZ)

Similarly, one calculates the “MaxShear” stress (obtained from the eigen values of the Cauchy stress tensor):

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Honey_72")
   stress =  db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCorners",targetGrp,[])
   scalar = stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("MaxShear")

In the same data file, this section shows how the bar stresses are recovered:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("strut_A")
   stress =  db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_X","Statics",\
      "Beam Axial Stress for Bending Loads","ElemCorners",targetGrp,[])
   scalar = Post.abs(stress)

   maxScalar = scalar.extractResultMax
   maxRkl = maxScalar.extractRkl
   maxStress = stress.extractResultOnRkl(maxRkl)
   maxScalarData = maxScalar.getData()[0]
   maxStressData = maxStress.getData()[0]

   puts
   puts "Maximum bar stress in strut A :"
   puts
   printf("   %.2f Pa on element %d (layer=\"%s\").\n",
      maxScalarData[5],maxScalarData[0],maxScalarData[2])
   printf("      Sxx = %.2f\n",maxStressData[5])
   puts
   puts

Note that the way maximum stress is recovered from FE Results is different because Nastran calculates only the longitudinal component of the stress tensor at four locations in the cross-section. The shear stress is not taken into account in this calculation. More complicated calculations have to be performed to take into account all the components of the stress tensor for bar and beam elements.

These examples are provided in file “RUBY/EX05/printStressMax.rb”. Another example illustrating the calculation of tensorial results eigen-values and eigen-vectors is presented in file “RUBY/EX05/eigenQR.rb”.

IV.2.4.3 Using predefined criteria

The example given in file “RUBY/EX05/calcHoneyAccel.rb” explains how a predfined criterion can be calculated. This is done for the “HoneycombAirbusSR” predefined criterion presented in detail in section X.D.1.2. The operations can be sorted in three steps:

Note that the seventh element of the “output” Array above is the only Result object created and returned by the predefined criterion. The same object could be obtained by a few ruby statements like:

        shearL=@@stressTensor.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component XZ")
        shearW=@@stressTensor.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component YZ")
        tmp=sq(shearL/allL)+sq(shearW/allW)
        sr=fos*sqrt(tmp)

The computational cost of these few statement can be very important however. Indeed, several FeResPost Result objects are created by these few lines. One creates consecutively the following result objects:

1.

One “shearL” scalar Result by extraction of XZ component.

2.

One “shearW” scalar Result by extraction of YZ component.

3.

One “shearL/allL” scalar Result (division by real value).

4.

One “shearW/allW” scalar Result (division by real value).

5.

One “sq(shearL/allL)” scalar Result (scalar Result to the square).

6.

One “sq(shearW/allW)” scalar Result (scalar Result to the square).

7.

One “tmp” Result obtained by summation of two scalar Results.

8.

One “sqrt(tmp)” Result obtaiend by extracting the square root of a scalar Result.

9.

And finally, the “SR” Result, which is the only one that shall be kept.

This means that 8 intermediate Result objects have been created and are discared at the end. Each of the 8 intermediate Result creation involves a loop on all the key-value pairs of the operations argument(s), and insertion in the new Result. If the initial Cauchy Stress Tensor Result contains a large number of key-value pairs, the computation cost of this criterion can be very important.

In the same ruby file, a second computation is provided of the Airbus criterion using the “interaction” approach:

      lStress=stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component XZ")
      wStress=stress.deriveTensorToOneScal("Component YZ")
      criterionData=[]
      criterionData << Post.abs(lStress)*(1.5625/2.41e6)
      criterionData << 2.0
      criterionData << Post.abs(wStress)*(1.5625/1.41e6)
      criterionData << 2.0
      #~ output=Post.calcPredefinedCriterion("Interaction_2_SR",criterionData)
      output=Post.calcPredefinedCriterion("Interaction_N_SR",criterionData)
      srMax=output[1].extractResultMax()
      maxData=srMax.getData("int","int","int","int","int")[0];

Of couse, this calculation method is less efficient than the previous one. It illustrates however the calculation of Strength Ratios via interaction of failure criteria.

IV.2.4.4 Printing Results’ content

One presents here an example in which Results corresponding to the STRAIN Nastran output statement are printed. Note that the non-diagonal components of the Nastran tensors corresponding to STRAIN statement are multiplied by two by Nastran. So, when imported into a DataBase, one divides the corresponding components by two (see remark 10 page 663 in Chapter III.1).

The preliminary part of the program is similar to the previous one: one initializes a DataBase, imports a Nastran model, produces the Groups and read Results. Then, the strain tensor in the honeycomb of +Z panel is output. This is done as follows:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Honey_72")
   strain =  db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Strain Tensor","ElemCenters",targetGrp,[])

   puts
   puts "Strain tensor in panel +Z honeycomb :"
   puts
   strain.each("int","int","int") do |key,values|
      for j in 0..3
         printf("%10s",key[j].to_s)
      end
      if (values[0]) then
         printf("%10s",values[0].to_s)
      else
         printf("%10s","nil")
      end
      for j in 1..6
         printf("%14f",values[j])
      end
      printf("\n")
   end

The "each" iterator is used with three "int" parameters. This leads to a printed output in which the layers are output with integer values.

In surface elements, two Results correspond to the STRAIN Nastran output statement: the strain tensor and the curvature tensor. The way components of the strain tensor are printed is similar as for the honeycomb. For the curvature tensor, the print is done as follows:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Al_2024")
   strain =  db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Strain Tensor","ElemCenters",targetGrp,[])

   puts
   puts "Strain tensor in panel +Z skins :"
   puts
   strain.each do |key,values|
      for j in 0..3
         printf("%10s",key[j].to_s)
      end
      if (values[0]) then
         printf("%10s",values[0].to_s)
      else
         printf("%10s","nil")
      end
      for j in 1..6
         printf("%14f",values[j])
      end
      printf("\n")
   end

This example is provided in file "RUBY/EX08/printStrain.rb".

Similarly, one print Results corresponding to Forces and Moments in CBAR elements. The interesting part is given below:

   targetGrp = db.getGroupAllFEM

   forces = db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X","Statics",\
      "Beam Forces","Elements",targetGrp,[])

   moments = db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X","Statics",\
      "Beam Moments","Elements",targetGrp,[])

   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Forces",forces)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Moments",moments)

The reader will observe in Results that “Beam Forces” in CBAR elements are given at the center of elements only, while “Beam Moments” are printed at the two end nodes of each element.

This example is provided in file "RUBY/EX08/printBeamForces.rb".

IV.2.4.5 Coordinate system transformations

One first presents an example, in which one modifies the coordinates of a point, and the components of a vector and of a tensor attached to this point. One first extracts the coordinate systems that are used in this example are defined, and entities that shall be transformed:

    cs5=db.getCoordSysCopy(5)
    cs6=db.getCoordSysCopy(6)

    x=[5.0,0.0,0.0]
    v=[1.5,3.2,-4.0]
    m=[[2.0,3.0,-7.0],[1.0,0.0,0.0],[0.0,0.0,1.0]]

One assumes that the coordinates and components of the vector and tensor defined above are given in coordinate system 5. Coordinates and components can be expressed in basic coordinate system as follows:

    x0=cs5.changeCoordsA20(x)
    v0=cs5.changeCompsA20(x,v)
    m0=cs5.changeCompsA20(x,m)

Then, the coordinates and components can be re-expressed with respect to the coordinate system 5 using the following transformations:

    x5=cs5.changeCoords02B(x0)
    v5=cs5.changeComps02B(x0,v0)
    m5=cs5.changeComps02B(x0,m0)

Coordinates and components can also be transformed directly from coordinate system 5 to 6:

    x6=cs5.changeCoordsA2B(x5,cs6)
    v6=cs5.changeCompsA2B(x5,v5,cs6)
    m6=cs5.changeCompsA2B(x5,m5,cs6)

and then back to coordinate system 5:

    x5=cs6.changeCoordsA2B(x6,cs5)
    v5=cs6.changeCompsA2B(x6,v6,cs5)
    m5=cs6.changeCompsA2B(x6,m6,cs5)

The entire example is given in file "RUBY/EX09/modifCS.rb".

One presents below an example that illustrates the transformations of coordinate system in which Result components are expressed. One loads results on elements with PCOMP properties. Then the components are printed after several transformations:

The transformations are performed with the following instructions:

   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0)
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"elemIJK")
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,7)
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"matCS")
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0,[1.0, 0.0, 0.0])
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0,[0.0, 1.0, 0.0])
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"elemCS")
   ...

Two versions of the sequence of transformations are proposed:

1.

In the first version, the transformations are done from the native Results. This means that the Result object to be transformed is reloaded from the DataBase prior to each transformation. One also presents an example of use of the “each” iterator of Result class.

2.

In the second version, the transformation is done successively on the same Result object which has been loaded only once. One also presents examples of the use of “each”, “each_key” and “each_values” of the Result class. For example, two versions of the use of “each_key” iterator are presented:

            ...
            stress.each_key do |stressKey|
               for j in 0..3
                  printf("%10s",stressKey[j].to_s)
               end
               printf("\n")
            end
      
            stress.each_key("int","int","int","int") do |elemId,nodeId,layerId,subLayerId|
               printf("%10s",elemId.to_s)
               printf("%10s",nodeId.to_s)
               printf("%10s",layerId.to_s)
               printf("%10s",subLayerId.to_s)
               printf("\n")
            end
            ...

The example ends with an error message for the second version because it is not possible to transform a Result object if stored values are already expressed in a projected coordinate system.

This example is provided in file "RUBY/EX09/modifCS2D.rb". A second version of the example with transformation of results on 3D elements is given in file "RUBY/EX09/modifCS3D.rb".

A third version involving the use of user defined coordinate systems is provided in file "RUBY/EX09/modifCS2Db.rb". This version illustrate the manipulation of CoordSys objects.

Finally, a fourth version of the 2D example is obtained by addition new arguments to the “modifyRefCoordSys” method in such a way that Results expressed in user or projected coordinate systems can further be modified without resulting in error messages. The successive transformation of coordinate systems become:

   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0)
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"elemIJK")
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,7)
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"matCS")
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0,[1.0, 0.0, 0.0])
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,0,[0.0, 1.0, 0.0],0,[1.0, 0.0, 0.0])
   ...
   stress.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"elemCS",nil,0,[0.0, 1.0, 0.0])
   ...

This last version is given in file "RUBY/EX09/modifCS2Dc.rb".

IV.2.4.6 Manipulation of Complex Results

In this example, Complex Results will be read from a Nastran xdb file. One first examines the information stored in the result file, in order to extract only the Results on needs to illustrate the manipulation of Complex Results.

IV.2.4.6.1 Extracting xdb lists of load cases and Results

The part of interest looks as follows:

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_ri_xyz.xdb"
   tab=NastranDb.getXdbLcScResNames(xdbFileName)
   lcNames=tab[0]
   scNames=tab[1]
   resNames=tab[2]

The lists of load cases, sub-cases and result types stored in the xdb file are saved into three Arrays of Strings that can be printed or used for other purposes.

IV.2.4.6.2 Extracting xdb Results information

The part of interest looks as follows:

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_ri_xyz.xdb"
   infos=NastranDb.getXdbLcInfos(xdbFileName)

   infos.each do |tab|
      STDOUT.printf("%-20s %-25s %-6d %-6d %-15g %-15g\n",
                    tab[0],tab[1],tab[3],tab[4],tab[5],tab[6])
   end

One extracts the information about the load cases and sub-cases to which Results are associated in the xdb file. Then, the name of load cases, sub-cases and associated integer and real data are printed. (Note, that the third String ID, which is always void, is not printed.) The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX17/printXdbLcInfos.rb".

IV.2.4.6.3 Manipulation of Complex Results

The results of "printXdbLcInfos.rb" are used to select load cases and sub-cases for which Results are imported into the DataBase. One also selects some of the Results:

   lcNames=[]
   lcNames << "SINUS_X"

   scNames=[]
   scNames << "Output 70 (f = 119.0000)"
   scNames << "Output 30 (f = 79.0000)"
   scNames << "Output 1 (f = 50.0000)"

   resNames=[]
   resNames << "Accelerations, translational (MP)"
   resNames << "MPC Forces, Forces (MP)"
   resNames << "MPC Forces, Moments (MP)"
   resNames << "Accelerations, translational (RI)"
   resNames << "MPC Forces, Forces (RI)"
   resNames << "MPC Forces, Moments (RI)"

Note that the selection of sub-cases to be imported into the DataBase is useful even when all the load cases are to be post-processed. Indeed the post-processing of a limited number of load cases at the same time reduces the amount of memory required to store all the Results. However, this means that several Result importations might be necessary, and this increases the time needed for disk IO operations.

Then the results are imported from xdb files corresponding to SOL111 Nastran calculations. One reads two files: one in which the Results are saved in rectangular format, and one in which they are saved in polar format:

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_ri_xyz.xdb"
   db.readXdb(xdbFileName,lcNames,scNames,resNames)

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_mp_xyz.xdb"
   db.readXdb(xdbFileName,lcNames,scNames,resNames)

To illustrate the manipulation of Results, the extraction is done for one particular load case, one particular sub-case, and on a small Group of 11 nodes only:

   tmpGroup=Group.new
   tmpGroup.setEntities("Node 60100:60110")

   lcName="SINUS_X"
   scName="Output 30 (f = 79.0000)"

Only the “Accelerations” Result is studied:

   resRI=db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,"Accelerations, translational (RI)",
                          "Nodes",tmpGroup,[])
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resRI",resRI)

   resMP=db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,"Accelerations, translational (MP)",
                          "Nodes",tmpGroup,[])
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resMP",resMP)

The following statements illustrate the polar-rectangular formats conversions:

   calcMP=Result.new
   calcMP.set2MP(resRI)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations calcMP",calcMP)

   calcRI=Result.new
   calcRI.set2RI(resMP)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations calcRI",calcRI)

And here, this section shows how Real Results can be extracted from complex ones:

   resR=calcMP.getR
   resM=calcMP.getM
   resI=calcMP.getI
   resP=calcMP.getP
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resR",resR)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resM",resM)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resI",resI)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations resP",resP)

Of course, the reverse operation can be done too. Here is how Complex Results can be assembled from one pair of Real Results:

   assyRI=Result.new
   assyMP=Result.new
   assyRI.assembleComplex(2,resR,resI);
   assyMP.assembleComplex(3,resM,resP);

   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations assyRI",assyRI)
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations assyMP",assyMP)

Finally, FeResPost allows performing operations on Results that have Complex number arguments. For example, a Result object may be multiplied by a Complex number:

   require "complex"

   Z=Complex.new(3.0,2.0)

   multRI=resRI.clone
   multRI*=Z
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations multRI",multRI)

   multMP=resMP.clone
   multMP*=Z
   Util::printRes(STDOUT,"Accelerations multMP",multMP)

IV.2.4.6.4 Working with XDB attachments

The example “printXdbLcScResSizes.rb” illustrates the extraction of Results from an XDB attachment. The advantage of this method for accessing Results, is that they must no be a priori loaded into a NastranDb object. The attachment is done as follows:

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_ri_xyz.xdb"
   db.attachXdb(xdbFileName)

One then selects the load case, the list of sub-cases, and the Result types for the extraction:

   lcName="SINUS_X"

    scNames=[]
    scNames << "Output 13 (f = 62.0000)"
    scNames << "Output 14 (f = 63.0000)"
    scNames << "Output 15 (f = 64.0000)"
    scNames << "Output 16 (f = 65.0000)"
    scNames << "Output 17 (f = 66.0000)"
    scNames << "Output 18 (f = 67.0000)"

    resNames=[]
    resNames << "Accelerations, Rotational (RI)"
    resNames << "Accelerations, Translational (RI)"
    resNames << "Displacements, Rotational (RI)"
    resNames << "Displacements, Translational (RI)"

The extraction is then done with a call like this one:

    h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,resNames,"Nodes",grp)

Finally, the Results that have been returned in h (a Hash object) can be retrieved as follows:

   h.each do |id,res|
        lcName=id[0]
        scName=id[1]
        resName=id[2]
        size=res.Size
        STDOUT.printf("%s - %s - %s : %d\n",lcName,scName,resName,size)
    end

IV.2.4.7 Manipulation of XDB attachments

This section illustrates the manipulation of XDB attachments. All the examples are to be found in directory “RUBY/EX19”. The different examples are in increasing order of difficulty.

In order to reduce the size of extracted Results, the extractions are done on the nodes of a small Group in all the examples below. Note however that other extractions could have been done. Also, if the two last parameters of the extraction functions are omitted, all the Result values are returned by the extraction methods.

IV.2.4.7.1 Extracting information from XDB attached file

In the example “attachedXdbLcInfos.rb”, this example shows how content information can be extracted from an attached XDB file. The XDB file must first be attached to the DataBase:

   xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol111_ri_xyz.xdb"
   db.attachXdb(xdbFileName)

Then, the information is extracted and printed exactly as in one of the examples of section IV.2.4.6:

   infos=db.getAttachmentLcInfos(xdbFileName)
   infos.each do |tab|
      STDOUT.printf("%-20s %-25s %-6d %-6d %-15g %-15g\n",
                    tab[0],tab[1],tab[3],tab[4],tab[5],tab[6])
   end

It is also possible to extract other information like the list of Result names, sub-case names or load cases names. One shows below how the list of result names can be printed:

   resNames=db.getAttachmentResNames(xdbFileName)
   resNames.each do |resName|
      STDOUT.printf("%-20s\n",resName)
   end

IV.2.4.7.2 Extracting Results from XDB attached file

The example “attachedXdbResults.rb” shows how Results can be extracted from an XDB attachment. As in the previous example, the file is first attached. Then, one decides which result types and for which load case Results are extracted:

   lcName="SINUS_Z"
   resName="Accelerations, Translational (RI)"

Remember than only one load case name can be specified. However, an Array of result names can be provided. In this case, one decides to extract only one result type: “Accelerations, Translational (RI)”. On the other hand, an Array of sub-cases can be specified for the extraction of Results. In this case, the Array is first obtained by calling the “getAttachmentScNames” method:

   scNames=db.getAttachmentScNames(xdbFileName)

Then, the Results are extracted as follows:

   results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,resName,
        "Nodes",grp)

The results are returned in a Hash object that contains pairs of Result keys, and the corresponding Results. The Results can be printed as follows:

   results.each do |key,res|
       Util::printRes(STDOUT,key[1]+" ==> "+key[2],res)
   end

Note that at the beginning of the script, the buffer total maximum capacity is set to 1Mb as follows:

  NastranDb::setStorageBufferMaxCapacity(1.0)

Another example of Results extraction from an XDB attachment is presented in file “attachedXdbExtract.rb”. There several Result types are extracted for a single load case and a single sub-case:

   lcName="LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Y"
   scName="Statics"
   resNames=[]
   resNames << "Shell Forces"
   resNames << "Shell Moments"
   resNames << "Strain Tensor"
   resNames << "Curvature Tensor"

   location="ElemCenters"
   grp=db.getGroupCopy("pan\_MZ")
   layers="NONE"

   results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scName,resNames,
        location,grp,layers)

Four Result types have been selected. The list of layers is set to “NONE” to avoid the extraction of Strains on each ply of each element. (One is interested only in the laminate average Strain.)

Results can then be accessed, individually by extracting the elements of the Hash object returned by the “getAttachmentResults” method. For example:

   key=[lcName,scName,"Shell Moments"]
   shMoments=results[key]
   key=[lcName,scName,"Shell Forces"]
   shForces=results[key]
   key=[lcName,scName,"Strain Tensor"]
   shAvrgStrains=results[key]
   key=[lcName,scName,"Curvature Tensor"]
   shCurvatures=results[key]

IV.2.4.7.3 Extracting linear combination of Results from XDB

In order to save time and simplify the programming of post-processing, it is also possible to extract linear combinations of Results. This is presented in example “attachedXdbCombili.rb”.

The linear combination is defined as an Array defining the factors and elementary load cases to consider:

   scName="Statics"
   resName="Displacements, Translational"
   lcNames=["LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X","LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Y","LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Z"]
   factors=[100.0, 50.0, 20.0]

   ...

   combili=[]
   (0..2).each do |i|
      combili << [factors[i], xdbFileName, lcNames[i]]
   end

Then, the linearly combine Results are extracted as follows:

   lcName="CombiLC"
   results=db.getAttachmentResultsCombili(lcName,combili,scName,resName,
        "Nodes",grp)

Note that in this case, one single Result object is returned in the “results” Hash object. For example, in this case, one could have provided an Array of Result names instead of the “resName” String argument.

In example “attachedXdbDynamCombili.rb” the same operation is performed for dynamic Results, and an Array of String is provided as list of sub-cases argument. This illustrates the use of “getAttachmentResultsCombili” method returning several Results.

IV.2.4.7.4 Random analysis or integration of PSD functions

Example “EX19/attachedXdbRandom.rb” illustrates the use of method “calcRandomResponse” in “Post” Module. One calculates the RMS equivalent for a random response.

The calculation is done using the XDB file corresponding to a SOL111 Nastran analysis. The RMS values for accelerations are calculated. The example defines two functions:

The first part of “computeRms” function identifies the subcase names in XDB file, for the selected load case, recovers the corresponding frequencies, and sorts the sub-case names by order of increasing frequency:

    infos=db.getAttachmentLcInfos(xdbFileName)
    h={}
    infos.each do |tab|
        if tab[0]==lcName then
            f=tab[5]
            scName=tab[1]
            h[f]=scName
        end
    end
    allFreqs=h.keys.sort
    totalNbrFreqs=allFreqs.size

Then, the integration is calculated by slices. The “addRes” output of a call to “calcRandomResponse” is used as argument for the next call to the same method. This “addRes” corresponds to the last PSD integration Result object:

   idMin=idMax=0
    addRes=nil
    res=nil
    while idMax<totalNbrFreqs
        idMin=idMax
        idMax=[idMin+maxNbrFreqsPerSlice-1,totalNbrFreqs].min
        freqs=allFreqs[idMin..idMax]
        scNames=[]
        psdInput=[]
        freqs.each do |f|
            scName=h[f]
            scNames << scName
            psdInput << psdFunction(f)
        end
        results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,
            resName,method,grp)
        sortedResults=[]
        scNames.each do |scName|
            sortedResults << results[[lcName,scName,resName]]
        end
        ret=Post.calcRandomResponse(false,false,sortedResults,freqs,
            psdInput,integType,addRes)
        addRes=ret[1]
        res=ret[2]
    end

IV.2.5 A few useful tools

This section presents a few examples that provide at the same time, tools that can be useful in many projects.

IV.2.5.1 Definition of acceleration fields

When sizing a satellite’s structure, one is often asked to define load cases corresponding to quasi-static accelerations on sub-parts of the structure. For example, at system level, dynamic analyses have shown that the upper part of the structure may be submitted to more severe accelerations than the rest of the satellite.

Unfortunately, Nastran does not allow the definition of quasi-static accelerations on sub-parts of the structure. The “GRAV” card, only allows the definition of accelerations globally on the whole structure.

It is possible to solve the problem in two steps:

1.

One calculates with Nastran three elementary load cases corresponding to unit accelerations of 1 m∕s2 applied on the entire structure oriented on the three structural axes respectively. The definition of these loads is done with Nastran “GRAV” cards.

2.

The finite element Results are then retrieved of the Nastran “op2” file, and after performing some operations on the Results, an appropriate printing is then performed of the Results to produce “FORCE” Nastran Bulk cards. Two different results can be used to perform this operation: the applied loads provided by “OLOAD” output, or the applied loads obtained from “GPFORCE” output.

This method is equivalent to the production of a force field.

In this example, several functions are defined. Therefore, a module “Grav” has also be created, and all functions are placed in the module. A first utility function is used to add to a DataBase a new Group created by performing a union of elementary Groups:

   def Grav.AddNewGroupsByUnions(db,totalGroupName,elemGroupNames)
      totalGroup=Group.new()
      for i in 0...elemGroupNames.size
         elemGroup=db.getGroupCopy(elemGroupNames[i])
         totalGroup+=elemGroup
      end
      totalGroup.Name=totalGroupName
      db.addGroupCopy(totalGroup)
   end

The first argument is the DataBase from which the elementary Groups are Retrieved and to which the new Group is created. The second argument is a String object the value of which is the new Group name. The last argument is an Array of Strings containing the names of the elementary Groups.

Another function is devoted to the printing of the “FORCE” Nastran Bulk Data Cards in a file. The function is defined as follows:

def Grav.writeForce(fileName,lcId,coordSysId,forces)
    print "creating file "
    puts fileName

    table=forces.getData()
    cards=[]
    for oneRes in table
        values=[]
        values << lcId;
        values << oneRes[1]
        values << coordSysId
        x=oneRes[5]
        y=oneRes[6]
        z=oneRes[7]
        norm=Math.sqrt(x*x+y*y+z*z)
        if (norm>1.0e-10) then
            values << norm
            values << x/norm
            values << y/norm
            values << z/norm
        end
        cards << values
    end
    NastranDb.writeNastranCards(fileName,"w","left","short","FORCE",cards);
end

This function has four arguments:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the file in which the cards are printed.

2.

An integer corresponding to the load case identifier.

3.

An integer corresponding to the coordinate system in which the components of the “FORCE” vectors are given.

4.

A Result object containing the nodal forces. The Result must be vectorial and defined at nodes. Also the forces should be expressed in the coordinate system identified by the third argument.

The function works as follows:

This version of the method is proposed in “RUBY/EX06/makeGravForces.rb”file.

Another version of the function, provided in “RUBY/EX06/makeGravForcesB.rb” reads as follows:

def Grav.writeForce(fileName,lcId,coordSysId,forces)
    print "creating file "
    puts fileName

    table=forces.getData()
    cards=[]
    for oneRes in table
        values=[]
        values << "FORCE"
        values << lcId;
        values << oneRes[1]
        values << coordSysId
        x=oneRes[5]
        y=oneRes[6]
        z=oneRes[7]
        norm=Math.sqrt(x*x+y*y+z*z)
        if (norm>1.0e-10) then
            values << norm
            values << x/norm
            values << y/norm
            values << z/norm
        end
        cards << values
    end
    NastranDb.writeNastranCards(fileName,"w","left","short",cards);
end

Note that the the “5 arguments” version of “writeNastranCards” method. (The “cardName” argument is omitted.) On the other hand, each “values” Array has one additional element. The first element of the Array is the “FORCE” card name.

The function “Grav.genAllGravFields” is the function that performs the extraction of force fields from the Results stored in the DataBase:

   def Grav.genAllGravFields(db,data)
      nbr=data.size
      for i in 0...data.size
         groupName=data[i][0]
         extName=data[i][1]
         baseLID=data[i][2]
         csId=1001

         target=db.getGroupCopy(groupName)

         forces1=db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X","Statics",\
            "Applied Loads, Forces","Nodes",target,[])
         forces1.modifyRefCoordSys(db,csId)
         forces2=db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Y","Statics",\
            "Applied Loads, Forces","Nodes",target,[])
         forces2.modifyRefCoordSys(db,csId)
         forces3=db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics",\
            "Applied Loads, Forces","Nodes",target,[])
         forces3.modifyRefCoordSys(db,csId)

         Grav.writeForce("force1_"+extName+".bdf",baseLID+1,csId,forces1)
         Grav.writeForce("force2_"+extName+".bdf",baseLID+2,csId,forces2)
         Grav.writeForce("force3_"+extName+".bdf",baseLID+3,csId,forces3)

         GC.start()
      end
   end

This function receives two arguments:

1.

The DataBase from which the Results are extracted.

2.

An Array of Arrays containing the information necessary for the production of the different force fields. Each element Array contains three elements:

(a)

A String object containing the name of the Group on which the Result forces are retrieved.

(b)

A String containing the name of the extension to be added to the output file name.

(c)

An integer corresponding to the base of the load identifier by which the force field shall be referred in the bulk data file. (In fact, three force fields are produced for each Group in the directions X, Y and Z respectively. The corresponding identifiers are produced by adding 1, 2 or 3 respectively to the base identifier of the load.

The function performs a loop on all the elements of the “data” Array argument. For each element

Finally The “main” function looks like this:

   def Grav.main()

   # Creation of the dataBase :

      db=NastranDb.new()
      db.Name="tmpDB"
      db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf")
      db.readGroupsFromPatranSession("../../MODEL/PATRAN/groups.ses")

      Grav.AddNewGroupsByUnions(db,"upper_set",\
         ["pan_SUP", "struts_ALL", "fittings_ALL"])

   # Reading of results :

      db.readOp2("../../MODEL/EXEC_OP2/unit_xyz.op2","Results")

   # Production of force fields :

      data=Array.new()
      data.push(["pan_MX",    "PAN_MX", 611000])
      data.push(["pan_MY",    "PAN_MY", 612000])
      data.push(["pan_MZ",    "PAN_MZ", 613000])
      data.push(["pan_PX",    "PAN_PX", 614000])
      data.push(["pan_PY",    "PAN_PY", 615000])
      data.push(["pan_PZ",    "PAN_PZ", 616000])
      data.push(["upper_set", "UPPER",  617000])

      Grav.genAllGravFields(db,data)

   end

It works as follows:

The program is executed by a call to main function:

   Grav.main()

Note that some of the output files produced by this example are used in the definition of loads for Nastran calculations in Chapter IV.1.

These examples are provided in files "RUBY/EX06/makeGravForces.rb" and "RUBY/EX06/makeGravForcesB.rb".

IV.2.5.2 Definition of temperature fields

This example is similar to the previous one, but instead of generating “FORCE” fields, one generates temperature fields with “TEMP” Nastran cards. Also, the example differs by the fact that no Results are read from an “op2” file.

One writes two functions devoted to the printing of “TEMP” cards in a Bulk Data File. The first function writes a constant temperature field on a Group:

   def Therm.writeConstTempCards(fileName,lcId,target,constT)
      print "creating file "
      puts fileName

      nodes = target.getEntitiesByType("Node")
      index = 0
      cards=[]
      while index < nodes.size
         if (nodes.size-index>=3) then
            values = []
            values << lcId
            for i in 0..2
               values << nodes[index]
               values << constT
               index+=1
            end
         else
            values = []
            values << lcId
            for i in 0...(nodes.size-index)
               values << nodes[index]
               values << constT
               index+=1
            end
         end
         cards << values
      end
      NastranDb.writeNastranCards(fileName,"w+","left","short",
         "TEMP",cards);
   end

The principle of the function is that the list of nodes contained in the Group. Then for each node, one writes a “TEMP” entry. The second printing function prints a temperature field corresponding to a scalar Result object:

   def Therm.writeFieldTempCards(fileName,lcId,tempField)
      print "creating file "
      puts fileName

      tempData = tempField.getData
      index = 0
      size = tempData.size
      cards=[]
      while index < size
         if (size-index>=3) then
            values = []
            values << lcId
            for i in 0..2
               values << tempData[index][1]
               values << tempData[index][5]
               index+=1
            end
         else
            values = []
            values << lcId
            for i in 0...(size-index)
               values << tempData[index][1]
               values << tempData[index][5]
               index+=1
            end
         end
         cards << values
      end
      NastranDb.writeNastranCards(fileName,"w+","left","short",
         "TEMP",cards);
   end

The principle of the function is very similar to the principle of function “FORCE” field printing function described in section IV.2.5.1.

The main function begins with an initialization of the DataBase:

      db=NastranDb.new()
      db.Name="tmpDB"
      db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/orbit_unit_xyz.bdf")
      db.readGroupsFromPatranSession("../../MODEL/PATRAN/groups.ses")

Constant temperature fields are then defined on parts of the structure. One defines four cases obtained by a combination of cold or hot temperatures, and application to two Groups. The second Group is build by assembling the lateral panels. This part of the main functions looks like:

      # Generation of temperature fields on panel +Z :

      tmpGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ")
      Therm.writeConstTempCards("temp_P120_PAN_PZ.bdf",621001,tmpGrp, 120.0)
      Therm.writeConstTempCards("temp_M100_PAN_PZ.bdf",621001,tmpGrp,-100.0)

      # Generation of temperature fields on lateral panels :

      tmpGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PX")
      tmpGrp += db.getGroupCopy("pan_PY")
      tmpGrp += db.getGroupCopy("pan_MX")
      tmpGrp += db.getGroupCopy("pan_MY")
      Therm.writeConstTempCards("temp_P120_PAN_LAT.bdf",622001,tmpGrp, 120.0)
      Therm.writeConstTempCards("temp_M100_PAN_LAT.bdf",622002,tmpGrp,-100.0)

One also defines temperature fields by production of a corresponding Result object. In this case, the Result is build from the coordinates:

      # Generation of a temperature gradient field :

      tmpGrp = Group.new
      tmpGrp.setEntities("Node 1:99999")
      tmpGrp.matchWithDbEntities(db)
      db.generateCoordResults

      coords=db.getResultCopy("","","Coordinates","NodesOnly",tmpGrp,[])
      coords.modifyPositionRefCoordSys(db,1001)
      tGradX=coords*[100.0,   0.0,   0.0]
      Therm.writeFieldTempCards("temp_GRAD_X.bdf",623001,tGradX)
      tGradY=coords*[  0.0, 100.0,   0.0]
      Therm.writeFieldTempCards("temp_GRAD_Y.bdf",623002,tGradY)
      tGradZ=coords*[  0.0,   0.0, 100.0]
      Therm.writeFieldTempCards("temp_GRAD_Z.bdf",623003,tGradZ)

Note that the previous ruby lines illustrate the use of several capabilities of FeResPost:

Note that the temperature fields printed in BDF files are used in the definition of loads for Nastran calculations in Chapter IV.1.

The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX07/makeTempFields.rb".

IV.2.5.3 Calculation of a total force and moment

One explains here how the resulting global force and moment can be calculated from distributed force and moments. This example illustrates the use of method “calcResultingFM” in class “Result”.

The ruby function that performs the calculation of the total force and moments looks like follows:

def calcOneGlobFM(db,lcName,scName,elemGrp,nodeGrp,locCS,coords)

   # Target Group :

      targetGrp = Group.new()
      tmpNodeGrp=db.getNodesAssociatedToElements(elemGrp)
      targetGrp = tmpNodeGrp * nodeGrp
      tmpElemGrp=db.getElementsAssociatedToNodes(targetGrp)
      targetGrp += tmpElemGrp * elemGrp

   # Inspecting and reading Results :

      tpNameF = "Grid Point Forces, Internal Forces"
      tpNameM = "Grid Point Forces, Internal Moments"

      tmpF =  db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpNameF,"ElemNodes",targetGrp,[])
      tmpM =  db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpNameM,"ElemNodes",targetGrp,[])

      resFM = Result.calcResultingFM(db,tmpF,tmpM,locCS,coords)
      return resFM

end

The arguments of the function are:

1.

“db”, the DataBase given as argument to “calcResultingFM”.

2.

“lcName”, a String containing the name of the load case for which the results are retrieved.

3.

“scName”, a String containing the name of the sub-case for which the results are retrieved.

4.

“elemGrp”, a Group containing the elements from which the local forces and moments.

5.

“nodeGrp”, a Group containing the nodes on which the forces will be recovered.

6.

“locCS”, the coordinate system in which results are recovered. Its value can be of integer or CoordSys type.

7.

“coords”, an Array of three Real values containing the coordinates of the recovery point expressed in the coordinate system.

The function builds a Group called “targetGrp” containing the list of elements and nodes on which Grid Point Forces and Moments are recovered. To reduce the computation cost, the targetGrp object contains only the elements and nodes on which the results are recovered. One this Group is defined, one recovers the corresponding Force and Moment fields, and an appropriate call to “Result.calcResultingFM” calculates the resulting total force and moment which are returned by the function.

The main part of the example consists in building the DataBase, loading the Results and performing the calculations for any combination of three load cases and six interfaces. The definition of load cases and interfaces are done as follows:

   lcNames = ["LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X", "LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Y", "LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_Z"]
   scName = "Statics"

   interfaces=Array.new()
   interfaces << ["pan_PZ", "fitting_PXMYMZ",1001,[ 0.440000,-0.440, 0.6445]]
   interfaces << ["pan_PZ", "fitting_MXMZ",  1001,[-0.426667, 0.000, 0.6445]]
   interfaces << ["pan_SUP","fitting_MXMYPZ",1002,[ 0.310835,-120.0, 1.4000]]
   interfaces << ["pan_SUP","fitting_PXPZ",  1002,[ 0.310835,   0.0, 1.4000]]
   interfaces << ["pan_SUP","fitting_MXPYPZ",1002,[ 0.310835, 120.0, 1.4000]]
   interfaces << ["pan_PZ", "fitting_PXPYMZ",1001,[ 0.440000, 0.440, 0.6445]]

Then the loops on data are performed, with the calls to “calcOneGlobFM”, and the results are printed:

   for lcName in lcNames
      printf "\n   %s :\n\n",lcName
      for interf in interfaces
         elemGrp = db.getGroupCopy(interf[0])
         nodeGrp = db.getGroupCopy(interf[1])
         cs=interf[2]
         coords=interf[3]

         fm = calcOneGlobFM(db,lcName,scName,elemGrp,nodeGrp,cs,coords)
         f=fm[0]
         m=fm[1]

         printf "%20s%20s%10d%10.3f%10.3f%10.3f%10.3f%10.3f%10.3f\n",\
                   elemGrp.Name,nodeGrp.Name,cs,\
                   f[0],f[1],f[2],m[0],m[1],m[2]
      end
   end
   printf "\n"

Typically, the calculation of global force and moment for a given interface can be used to estimate loads to be used to calculate a detailed model (of a metallic fitting, for example). It can also be used for post-processing (for example to calculate margins of safety for a global sliding of an interface).

The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX10/makeTempFields.rb".

IV.2.5.4 Outputting a Gmsh file

This example illustrates the creation of a Gmsh file for later visualization with Gmsh. The part of the data file specific to the “writeGmsh” function call is as follows:

   # Group creation :

   meshGrp=db.getGroupAllFEM

   targetGrp = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ_Al_2024")
   targetGrp2 = db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ")

   # Stress data in skins :

   stress = db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCenters",targetGrp,[])
   stress2 = db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCorners",targetGrp,[])

   displ = db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Displacements, Translational","Nodes",targetGrp2,[])
   norm = displ.deriveVectorToOneScal("abs")

   # Stress data in honeycomb :

   targetGrp =tmpGroup_Honey_72
   honeyStress=db.getResultCopy("TEMP_GRAD_X","Statics",\
      "Stress Tensor","ElemCenters",targetGrp,[])

   # Gmsh output :

   db.writeGmshMesh("brol.msh",0,meshGrp,false)
   db.writeGmsh("brol.gmsh",0,[[stress,"stress","ElemCenters"],\
                               [stress2,"stress2","ElemCorners"],\
                               [honeyStress,"honeyStress","ElemCenterPoints"],\
                               [displ,"displ","Nodes"],\
                               [norm,"norm","Nodes"]],\
                              [[db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ"),"mesh pan_PZ"],\
                               [db.getGroupCopy("pan_MZ"),"mesh pan_MZ"],\
                               [db.getGroupCopy("pan_PX"),"mesh pan_PX"]],\
                              [[meshGrp,"skel sat"]])

In fact, only the last function call is new. The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX11/writeGmsh.rb".

IV.2.6 Saving and retrieving Results from an SQL database

“Result” and “Group” objects can be saved into SQL BLOBs for storing or manipulation in SQL databases. This feature has been introduced to allow the management of persistence of intermediate results calculated with FeResPost.

A small example is proposed here illustrating this feature. The example deals with Nastran dynamic analysis Results that are stored in an SQLite database. This type of operation may be useful, as the access to dynamic analysis results from an XDB file may sometimes be very impractical. In particular, the insertion table is organized in such a way that Results can be accessed separately by subcases.

This example is based on SQLite database system but the adaptation to other SQL database systems should not be a problem. To run the example you must first install the “sqlite3” ruby gem on your computer.

IV.2.6.1 Saving objects in an SQLite database

To use SQLite, the corresponding ruby gem must first be required:

    require "rubygems"
    require "sqlite3"

Then, the database can be created:

    fName="brol.fdb"
    if (File::exists?(fName))
        sqldb = SQLite3::Database.open( fName )
    else
        sqldb = SQLite3::Database.new( fName )
sqldb.execute <<SQL
    PRAGMA auto_vacuum = FULL
SQL
    end

In this case only one SQL table is created in the database. The columns correspond to several data associated with each individual Results, and the BLOB corresponding to the Result itself:

sqldb.execute <<SQL
    CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS dynam_results_1 (
        lcName TEXT,
        scName TEXT,
        resName TEXT,
        tensorOrder INTEGER,
        intId1 INTEGER,
        intId2 INTEGER,
        realId1 REAL,
        realId2 REAL,
        size INTEGER,
        result BLOB,
        PRIMARY KEY(lcName,scName,resName)
    );
SQL

Finally, a loop iterates on xdb attachment Results. For each load case and Result name, the Results corresponding to each subcase, and inserts it into the database:

    db.attachXdb(xdbFileName)

    lcNames=db.getAttachmentLcNames(xdbFileName)
    scNames=db.getAttachmentScNames(xdbFileName)
    resNames=db.getAttachmentResNames(xdbFileName)

    lcNames.each do |lcName|
        resNames.each do |resName|
            results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,resName)
            if (results) then
                results.each do |key,res|
                    puts key
                    sqldb.execute( "insert or replace into
                        dynam_results_1 values (?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?)",
                        lcName,key[1],resName,res.TensorOrder,
                        res.getIntId(0),res.getIntId(1),
                        res.getRealId(0),res.getRealId(1),res.Size,
                        SQLite3::Blob.new(res.toBlob()))
                end
            else
                puts "NO FOR" + lcName + resName
            end
        end

The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX20/rehashDynamicResults.rb"

IV.2.6.2 Retrieving objects from an SQLite database

This example, uses the database created in the example of section IV.2.6.1 and retrieves Results or deletes some of the data. An example of statements that allow retrieval of Results is given below:

    sqldb.query("select * from dynam_results_1 where lcName = ? and realId1 = ?",
            ["SINUS_X",97.0] ).each do |tab|
        puts tab[0],tab[1],tab[2],tab[8]
        res=Post.convertBlob(tab[9])
        puts res.Size()
    end

Items can be deleted from database by statements of this type:

    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Strain Tensor (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Applied Loads, Forces (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Applied Loads, Moments (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Accelerations, Rotational (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Velocities, Rotational (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where resName = ?",
            "Displacements, Rotational (RI)" )
    sqldb.execute("delete from dynam_results_1 where realId1 < ?",
            90.0 )

The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX20/deleteSomeResults.rb"

IV.2.7 Reading optimization results

One provides here an example for the reading of optimization results. The first steps of the example consists in the creation of a NastranDb object, and the attachment of an XDB file:

    db=NastranDb.new()
    db.Name="tmpDB"
    #~ db.readBdf("../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol200_a.bdf")

    xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol200_a.xdb"
    #~ xdbFileName="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol200_b.xdb"
    db.attachXdb(xdbFileName)

Note that the reading of the Nastran finite element model from a BDF file is not necessary to access optimization results.

Two optimization runs are provided in the Nastran examples:

The two runs lead to similar kinds of outputs, including the history of design variables. However, the topometric optimization generates automatically design variables (for example, one variable per element). Then, the numbering of design variables can be awkward.

The printing of design variables history is done with the following ruby instructions:

    x=db.getAttachmentDesVarHistory(xdbFileName,nil,nil)
    STDOUT.printf("%14s%14s%14s\n","STEP","DVID","VALUE")
    x.each do |tab|
        STDOUT.printf("%14d%14d%14f\n",tab[0],tab[1],tab[2])
    end

In this case, the history of all design variables, and for all steps. (“nil” values are passed for corresponding arguments of the “getAttachmentDesVarHistory” method.) Doing the same with the “sol200_b.xdb” file will yield a very long output as the number of design variables can be very large for topometric optimization.

The definition of constraints is printed as follows:

    x=db.getAttachmentConstrDefinitions(xdbFileName)
    STDOUT.printf("%8s%8s%8s%8s%8s%14s\n","IDCID","DCID","IRID","TYPE","LUFLAG","BOUND")
    x.each do |tab|
        str=""
        if tab[4]==1 then
            str=">"
        elsif tab[4]==2 then
            str="<"
        end
        STDOUT.printf("%8d%8d%8d%8d%8s%14f\n",tab[0],tab[1],tab[2],tab[3],str,tab[5])
    end

And the corresponding histories are obtained as follows:

    x=db.getAttachmentConstrHistory(xdbFileName)
    STDOUT.printf("%8s%8s%14s\n","STEP","IDCID","VALUE")
    x.each do |tab|
        STDOUT.printf("%8d%8d%14f\n",tab[0],tab[1],tab[2])
    end

Here, the history is printed for all optimization steps, as the corresponding parameter is not provided.

And similarly, the objective history is printed as follows:

    x=db.getAttachmentObjectiveHistory(xdbFileName)
    STDOUT.printf("%8s%14s%8s%14s\n","STEP","OBJ.","IRID","Cst. VALUE")
    x.each do |tab|
        STDOUT.printf("%8d%14f%8d%14f\n",tab[0],tab[1],tab[2],tab[3])
    end

Note that when a topometric optimization is calculated by Nastran as a design variable optimization. (Nastran defines automatically one design variable per element.)

The example is provided in file "RUBY/EX21/printSol200Infos.rb".

IV.2.8 “Raw” access to XDB file content

In directory “RUBY/EX22”, several examples with Ruby are presented extension that illustrates the raw access to XDB files. (The corresponding examples for COM component and .NET assembly are provided in directories “COM/EX13” and “NET/EX22”.)

IV.2.8.1 Utilities

File “dictPrint.rb” defines two methods that print the list of dictionary keys, and/or the entire dictionary. These methods are:

(These two methods are called in the different examples.)

IV.2.8.2 Printing Coordinate System Table Matrix

The example is provided in “RUBY/EX22/recoverCSTM.rb”. The interesting part of the example is the use of the iterator:

db.iter_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["CSTM",0],"iiffffffffffffifffffffff").each do |tab|
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system ID: %d\n",tab[0])
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system type: %d\n",tab[1])
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system origin (with respect to 0): %14g %14g %14g\n",
            tab[2],tab[3],tab[4])
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system V1 (with respect to 0)    : %14g %14g %14g\n",
            tab[5],tab[6],tab[7])
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system V2 (with respect to 0)    : %14g %14g %14g\n",
            tab[8],tab[9],tab[10])
    STDOUT.printf("Coordinate system V3 (with respect to 0)    : %14g %14g %14g\n",
            tab[11],tab[12],tab[13])
end

Note that the CSTM table correspond to a FEM modeling table and not to a result table. This shows that the raw access to XDB file can be used to access modeling information.

Generally, maximum one table per type is defined in XDB file, if the table corresponds to modeling information. However, this is sometimes different. For example FEM modeling table may correspond to an output of optimization run.

One also presents an example in which the ‘each_xdbBinRaw” iterator is used with “binDataToValues” singleton method to interpret the content of XDB file. The example is provided in “RUBY/EX22/recoverBINRAW.rb” script and its main part looks as follows:

    wdSize=db.getAttachmentWordsSize(xdbFileName)
    bSwap=db.getAttachmentSwapEndianness(xdbFileName)
    policy=0
    if (bSwap) then
        policy=1
    end

    bAutoSwap=true
    cards=[]
    db.each_xdbBinRaw(xdbFileName,["CQD4",0],bAutoSwap) do |str|
        arri=NastranDb.binDataToValues(str,wdSize,"iiiiiiii iiiii".delete(’ ’),policy)
        arrf=NastranDb.binDataToValues(str,wdSize,"iiiiiiff fiiii".delete(’ ’),policy)
    puts arri.size()

        card=["CQUAD4"]+arri
        #~ puts arri,arrf
        cards << card
    end

    NastranDb.writeNastranCards("output.bdf","w","right","wide",cards)

Note that we output the read values into a kind of BDF file, but you will notice that the cards do not really match the corresponding CQUAD4 card definition. you may notice that we also use the getAttachmentWordsSize and getAttachmentSwapEndianness methods to determine the endianness policy for binary data translation.

IV.2.8.3 Accessing results

We give here an example, in which CBAR element forces are read from the XDB file. This is done to illustrate the extraction of element results. Otherwise, there is no practical use to this example, as the corresponding extractions can be done by the “usual” XDB result extraction methods. The example is provided in file “RUBY/EX22/recoverFBAR.rb”.

One first attempts to access the definition of load cases:

db.each_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["SUBCASES",0],"iiiiiiii") do |tab|
    puts tab
end

str="i"
(0..95).each do |i|
    str+="s"
end
db.each_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["SUBCTITL",0],str) do |tab|
    STDOUT.printf("%d\n",tab[0])
    (0..2).each do |j|
        str=""
        (1..32).each do |i|
            str+=tab[32*j+i]
        end
        str.strip!
        STDOUT.printf("%s\n",str)
    end
end

The integers extracted from “SUBCASES” table correspond to sub-case integer ID, the corresponding load ID, the SPC ID... The access to “SUBCTITL” shows how strings must be concatenated when they correspond to several words.

The reading of CBAR forces is done as follows:

modulo=-1;
db.each_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["FBARR",2],"iiiiiiiii") do |tab|
    if (tab[0]==0) then
        modulo=tab[1]
    end
    break;
end
db.each_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["FBARR",2],"iffffffff") do |tab|
    accessType=12
    if (tab[0]>0) then
        elemIntId=tab[0]/modulo
        elemExtId=db.getAttachmentElementExtId(xdbFileName,accessType,elemIntId)
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %d\n","Element ID",elemExtId)
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","M bending A 1",tab[1])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","M bending A 2",tab[2])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","M bending B 1",tab[3])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","M bending B 2",tab[4])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","F shear 1",tab[5])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","F shear 2",tab[6])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n","F axial",tab[7])
        STDOUT.printf("%30s : %g\n\n","M torque",tab[8])
    end
end

One must add a few explanations:

IV.2.8.4 Producing a “clean” model from topometric optimization

We provide here an example where modeling information is read from the XDB file. The modeling information corresponds to the last output of a topometric optimization. The purpose of the script is to produce a “clean” FEM corresponding to the topometric optimization. The example is given in “RUBY/EX22/recoverTopometricModel.rb”.

The reading of PSHELL cards is done as follows:

pshellCards={}
db.each_xdbRaw(xdbFileName,["PSHELL",49],"iifififfffi") do |tab|
    card=[]
    card << "PSHELL"
    (0...10).each do |i|
        if (tab[i].class==Float&&tab[i].nan?) then
            card << ""
        else
            card << tab[i]
        end
    end
    if (tab[10]==0) then
        card << ""
    else
        card << tab[10]
    end
    pshellCards[tab[0]]=card
end

Remark that:

In the rest of the script, one generates renumbered PSHELL cards. Each PSHELL PID will be the same as the element ID of the CQUAD4 that refers to the property. The CQUAD4 elements are modified accordingly. The new Nastran cards are output in “newModel.bdf” file, and a GMSH file corresponding to the modified thicknesses is output:

outputCards=[]
propRemap={}
elemIds=cquad4Cards.keys.sort
elemIds.each do |elemId|
    elemCard=cquad4Cards[elemId].clone
    propId=elemCard[2]
    if propId>1000000 then
        elemCard[2]=elemId
        propRemap[propId]=elemId
    end
    outputCards << elemCard[0..7]
end

propIds=pshellCards.keys.sort
res=Result.new
res.TensorOrder=0
res.Format=1
propIds.each do |propId|
    propCard=pshellCards[propId].clone
    if propRemap.has_key?(propId) then
        propCard[1]=propRemap[propId]
        res.insert([propCard[1]],["NONE",propCard[3]])
    end
    outputCards << propCard[0..8]
end
NastranDb::writeNastranCards("newModel.bdf","w","right","short",outputCards)
#~ Util::printRes($stdout,"brol",res)
db.writeGmsh("thicknesses.gmsh",0,[[res,"thickness","ElemCenters"]])

Note that the example could be improved. For example, you could also consider the CTRIA3 elements in the model generation.

IV.2.8.5 Reading and saving the temperature distributions

In order to calculate laminate load response from the distribution of shell forces and moments, it is sometimes also necessary to know the temperature distribution for each load case.

Example “RUBY/EX22/recoverTEMP.rb” reads the “TEMP” cards from the XDB files and stores them in an SQLite database. More precisely, function “getXdbTemperature”:

Method “saveResultsInSqlite” is used to save the temperature fields into a SQLite database. The table is called “element_temperatures” and associates integer keys (the Nastran temperature load ID) to BLOB objects corresponding to the temperature fields (FeResPost Result object).

These temperature fields can be used in other post-processing scripts to estimate laminate load response analysis from finite element model results. The SQLite database is here called “sqliteResults.db3”.

An example showing how the temperature fields stored in the SQLite database can be used is presented in section X.E.4

IV.2.9 Reading Results From Nastran HDF file

Example “RUBY/EX23/testHDF.rb” illustrates the reading of Nastran HDF file results. First, the library must be loaded:

    Post.loadHdf5Library("C:/NewProgs/HDF5/HDF5-1.14.6-win64/bin/hdf5.dll")

(More information on loading the library is given in section I.6.11.)

Then, the different methods described in section III.1.1.12 are used to access results stored in the HDF file. In the example below, HDF file is attached to the database, the available load case names, subcase name and result names are retrieved, and some of the Results are read into the database.

    db.attachHdf(hdfName)
    lcNames=db.getHdfAttachmentLcNames(hdfName)
    lcName=lcNames[0]
    scNames=db.getHdfAttachmentScNames(hdfName,lcName)
    scName=scNames[0]
    resNames=db.getHdfAttachmentResNames(hdfName,lcName)
    hdfResNames=resNames.clone

    db.getHdfAttachmentLcInfos(hdfName).each do |info|
        os.printf("%s%30s%8d%8d%14f%14f\n",
            info[0],info[1],info[3],info[4],info[5],info[6])
    end

    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcName,scName,resNames)

IV.2.10 Raw reading of Nastran HDF file’s content

Example “RUBY/EX26/hdf_dataset_iteration.rb” illustrates the raw reading of Nastran HDF file content. First, the library must be loaded:

    Post.loadHdf5Library("C:/NewProgs/HDF5/HDF5-1.8.20-win32/bin/hdf5.dll")

Then, HDF5 file is attached and different methods are called to obtain information on the content of the file. In particular, the different Datasets contained in the file are identified, and their characteristics (Compound members, and number of items).

   db.attachHdf(h5Path)
   dsets=db.getHdfAttachmentDataSets(h5Path)
   dsets.each do |dsPath|
       members=db.getHdfAttachmentCompoundMemberNames(h5Path,dsPath)
       nbrLines=db.getHdfAttachmentDataSetNbrItems(h5Path,dsPath)
       printf("%s (%d*%d)\n",dsPath,nbrLines,members.size)
       members.each do |str|
           printf("%20s\n",str)
       end
   end

In the end, iteration on content uses instructions as

   db.each_hdfAttachmentNasSetItem(h5Path,dsets[2],iMin,iMax) do |x|
       puts x
       $stdout.printf("\n\n")
   end

The raw reading of Dataset content in an Array is shown in example “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX26/hdf_dataset_array.rb”.

IV.2.11 Superelements

This section discusses the example provided in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX27” and that illustrate the management of Results when model contains superelements. (See section III.1.1.4 for the presentation of the theory.)

All the examples presented here are based on the reading of models in directory “TESTSAT/OTHER_EXECS/msc_seug_chapter2_Jet" and of associated results in OP2, XDB or HDF files. The Nastran BDF files have been obtained modifying MSC Nastran example
“doc/seug/chapter2/jet101.dat” in Nastran installation directory. This example is discussed in [Hex22]. Modifications have been done to obtain the OP2, XDB or HDF output files with results associated with the different superelements of the model. The following subsections IV.2.11.1 to IV.2.11.5 explain how the model and corresponding results can be manipulated. The examples presented here have been tested with Python, COM and .NET assembly.

IV.2.11.1 Reading BDF file and accessing superelements

Example “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX27/readBdf.rb” illustrates the reading of superelements from a BDF file, and the identification of the superelements that have been read.

A NastranDb object is first examined, before reading the model from a BDF file:

   db=NastranDb.new()
   printf("db = %s\n",db.to_s)
   printf("   db.SEID = %d\n",db.SEID)
   printf("   db.refCounter = %d\n",db.RefCounter)
   printf("   db.NbrSuperElements = %d\n",db.NbrSuperElements)

These instructions produce the following output:

db = DataBase: 0309CDD8
   db.SEID = -1
   db.refCounter = 1
   db.NbrSuperElements = 0

As no model has been read, the number of superelements in the database is necessarily zero. SEID=-1, because the model is not yet “initialized” (read from a BDF or an OP2 file).

The output is different when our example model is read:

db=NastranDb.new()
db.readBdf(bdfPath)
printf("db = %s\n",db.to_s)
printf("   db.SEID = %d\n",db.SEID)
printf("   db.refCounter = %d\n",db.RefCounter)
printf("   db.NbrSuperElements = %d\n",db.NbrSuperElements)

These instructions produce the following output:

db = DataBase: 030BF618
   db.SEID = 0
   db.refCounter = 1
   db.NbrSuperElements = 8

After reading the model, the SEID is set to 0, which means that “db” points to a master DB (corresponding to residual model). The master database contains 8 superelements.

The following instructions:

   db2=db.getMaster()
   printf("db2 = %s\n",db2.to_s)
   printf("db2.class = %s\n",db2.class.to_s)

lead to the following output:

   db2 =
   db2.class = NilClass

As “db” is a master database, the function “getMaster” returns a “nil” object.

On the other hand, the following instructions:

nbr=db.NbrSuperElements
(0...nbr).each do |pos|
    printf("   pos = %d\n",pos)
    id=db.getSuperElementIdFromPos(pos)
    printf("   id = %d\n",id)
    sdb=db.getSuperElementFromPos(pos)
    if pos==3 then
        sdb3=sdb
        db2=sdb3.getMaster()
    end
    GC.start
    printf("   sdb = %s\n",sdb.to_s)
    printf("   db2 = %s\n",db2.to_s)
    printf("   db.SEID = %d\n",db.SEID)
    printf("   sdb.SEID = %d\n",sdb.SEID)
    if db2 then
        printf("   db2.SEID = %d\n",db2.SEID)
    end
    printf("   refCounter = %d\n",db.RefCounter)
end

produce information for the different superelement databases contained in the master database. For example, for pos=5, the output lines are:

   pos = 5
   id = 12
   sdb = DataBase: 0312C6E0
   db2 = DataBase: 030BF618
   db.SEID = 0
   sdb.SEID = 12
   db2.SEID = 0
   refCounter = 4

“sdb” points to the superelement at position 5 in the list of superelements. Superelement ID is 12. “db2” is the master database of superelement at position 3 in the list of superelements (fourth superelement as first superelement is at position 0). This means that “db2” points to the master database that has been read from the BDF file.

The database references counter is printed at several places in the script. This has been done to check and debug reference counting. It works as expected with ruby extension. Note however that reference counting management is a little more tricky with Python, .NET assembly and COM component. We made some tests to check these and believe there is no program leak related to reference counting.

IV.2.11.2 Superelements and OP2 files

The first test with OP2 files involves the reading of Results only. Test is provided in file “RUBY/EX27/readOp2.rb”.

The NastranDb object is initialized by reading model from BDF file as explained in section IV.2.11.1. One builds a list of superelement IDs as follows:

   nbr=db.NbrSuperElements
   seIds=[0]
   (0...nbr).each do |pos|
       seIds << db.getSuperElementIdFromPos(pos)
   end

Note that the master database with SEID=0 is considered in the seIds Array.

Results are read from an OP2 file:

   printf("\n\n   0) Reading all the results in the DataBase : \n\n")
   db.readOp2(op2FileName,"Results")

The following instructions produce only the title line. No Results are associated to the master database. (This is normal as all GRIDs and elements are defined in superelements and not in the residual model):

   printf("\n\n   A) Getting results from the main database : \n\n")
   db.each_resultKey do |lcName,scName,tpName|
      tmpRes=db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpName)
      printf("%-20s%-25s%-60s%-10d\n",lcName,scName,tpName,tmpRes.Size)
   end

With the following instructions we print the characteristics of Results stored in the master database and all its superelements:

   printf("\n\n   B) Getting all the results from all databases : \n\n")
   seIds.each do |seId|
       currentDb=nil
       if seId>0 then
           currentDb=db.getSuperElementFromId(seId)
       else
           currentDb=db
       end
       printf("currentDb.SEID = %d\n",currentDb.SEID)
       currentDb.each_resultKey do |lcName,scName,tpName|
           res=currentDb.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpName)
           $stdout.printf("A) %s - %s - %s : %d\n",lcName,scName,tpName,res.Size)
       end
   end

This produces an output that looks as follows:

   B) Getting all the results from all databases :

   currentDb.SEID = 0
   currentDb.SEID = 1
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Applied Loads, Forces : 8
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Displacements, Rotational : 88
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Displacements, Translational : 88
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Reaction Forces, Forces : 5
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Reaction Forces, Moments : 5
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - SPC Forces, Forces : 5
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - SPC Forces, Moments : 5
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Stress Tensor : 256
   currentDb.SEID = 2
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Applied Loads, Forces : 20
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Displacements, Rotational : 24
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Displacements, Translational : 24
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Stress Tensor : 32
   currentDb.SEID = 3
   B) Load Case 1 - Statics - Applied Loads, Forces : 18
   ...

Again, no Result is produced for master DB. On the other hand, superelements contain Results that are retrieved from database using “getResultCopy” method.

We end the example by cleaning the results and erasing the NastranDb object:

   db.removeAllResultsAllSE()
   db=nil
   GC.start()

A model can also be read from an OP2 file, even though it is not recommended practice. The “readOp2” can also be used to read both the model and Results:

   db=NastranDb.new()
   db.readOp2(op2FileName,"Model/Results")

We verify in the ruby script that the same Results are associated with the master database and its superelements, and that the superelements are correctly read from the OP2 file.

IV.2.11.3 Getting superelement Results from XDB files

We illustrate how the Results can be retrieved from XDB files when model contains superelements in file “RUBY/EX27/readXdb.rb”. As the model cannot be read from XDB file, database is initialized by reading a BDF file. Results are read into master database and its superelement databases using readXdb method:

   printf("\n\n   0) Reading all the results in the DataBase : \n\n")
   db.readXdb(xdbFileName)

As master database contains no nodes or elements, no Results are associated to master database, and the following lines produce no output, except the title line:

   printf("\n\n   A) Getting results from the main database : \n\n")
   db.each_resultKey do |lcName,scName,tpName|
      tmpRes=db.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpName)
      printf("A) %-20s%-25s%-60s%-10d\n",lcName,scName,tpName,tmpRes.Size)
   end

On the other hand, the following lines produce the same output as the corresponding ruby lines in the “OP2” example in section IV.2.11.2:

   printf("\n\n   B) Getting all the results from all databases : \n\n")
   seIds.each do |seId|
       currentDb=nil
       if seId>0 then
           currentDb=db.getSuperElementFromId(seId)
       else
           currentDb=db
       end
       printf("currentDb.SEID = %d\n",currentDb.SEID)
       currentDb.each_resultKey do |lcName,scName,tpName|
           res=currentDb.getResultCopy(lcName,scName,tpName)
           $stdout.printf("B) %s - %s - %s : %d\n",lcName,scName,tpName,res.Size)
           if (res.Name=="Displacements, Translational"||res.Name=="Stress Tensor") then
               if (bDebug) then
                   str=format("%s on SEID %d",res.Name,seId)
                   Util::printRes($stdout,str,res)
               end
           end
       end
   end

XDB files can be attached to a NastranDb object:

   printf("\n\n   1) Attaching XDB file to the database : \n\n")
   db.attachXdb(xdbFileName)

Then, information can be retrieved from XDB file, as is done when no superelement is present in the model. This information can be dependent on the superelement too, so that corresponding superelement database must be used to obtain the information. For example:

   sdb3=db.getSuperElementFromId(3)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentNodeInfo(xdbFileName,1)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentNodeInfo(xdbFileName,2)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentNodeInfo(xdbFileName,3)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentElementExtId(xdbFileName,7,1)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentElementExtId(xdbFileName,7,5)
   puts sdb3.getAttachmentElementExtId(xdbFileName,7,8)

Remark that the XDB file is attached to master database, but accessed from one of the superelement database.

One obtains information from XDB attachment calling different methods from “db” object:

   printf("\n\n   C) Attachment information : \n\n")
   db.getAttachmentLcInfos(xdbFileName).each do |info|
       $stdout.printf("%s%30s%8d%8d%14f%14f\n",
           info[0],info[1],info[3],info[4],info[5],info[6])
   end
   $stdout.printf("nbr load cases = %d\n",db.getAttachmentNbrLoadCases(xdbFileName))
   lcNames=db.getAttachmentLcNames(xdbFileName)
   scNames=db.getAttachmentScNames(xdbFileName)
   resNames=db.getAttachmentResNames(xdbFileName)
   puts lcNames,scNames,resNames

Previous lines produce the following output:

      C) Attachment information :

   Load Case 1                       Statics       1     101     -1.000000     -1.000000
   nbr load cases = 1
   Load Case 1
   Statics
   Applied Loads, Forces
   Applied Loads, Moments
   Displacements, Rotational
   Displacements, Translational
   Reaction Forces, Forces
   Reaction Forces, Moments
   SPC Forces, Forces
   SPC Forces, Moments
   Stress Tensor

Note that tree “lcNames”, “scNames” and “resNames” Arrays are filled by these instrutions. These arrays are used later in the rest of the script.

Again, no Results can be obtained from the master database, so that the following lines produce no output except the title line:

   printf("\n\n   D) Getting Attachment results from the main database : \n\n")
   lcNames.each do |lcName|
       scNames.each do |scName|
           resNames.each do |resName|
               h=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scName,resName)
               if (h) then
                   h.each do |key,res|
                       str1,str2,str3=key
                       $stdout.printf("D) SEID %d - %s - %s - %s : %d\n",db.SEID,str1,str2,str3,res.Size)
                   end
               end
           end
       end
   end

On the other hand, the following lines output Results obtained using “getAttachmentResults” for the superelement databases:

   printf("\n\n   E) Getting Attachment results from all databases : \n\n")
   seIds.each do |seId|
       currentDb=nil
       if seId>0 then
           currentDb=db.getSuperElementFromId(seId)
       else
           currentDb=db
       end
       printf("currentDb.SEID = %d\n",currentDb.SEID)
       lcNames.each do |lcName|
           scNames.each do |scName|
               resNames.each do |resName|
                   h=currentDb.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scName,resName)
                   if (h) then
                       h.each do |key,res|
                           str1,str2,str3=key
                           $stdout.printf("E) SEID %d - %s - %s - %s : %d\n",currentDb.SEID,str1,str2,str3,res.Size)
                       end
                   end
               end
           end
       end
   end

In the same script, the characteristics are also output of Results obtained by calling the method “readXdb2H” on master and superelement databases.

IV.2.11.4 Reading superelement nodes from Result files

Example “RUBY/EX36/readBdfAndSE.rb” illustrate the use of methods “readSuperElementsFromHdf”, “readSuperElementsFromOp2” and “readSuperElementsFromXdb” to rad the nodes of partitioned superelements from Nastran output files. In the example, the reading is done as follows:

   db.readBdf(bdfPath)
   if bdfPath.include?("EXEC_HDF5") then
       h5Path=File.dirname(bdfPath)+"/"+File.basename(bdfPath,".*")+".h5"
       db.readSuperElementsFromHdf(h5Path)
   elsif bdfPath.include?("EXEC_XDB") then
       xdbPath=File.dirname(bdfPath)+"/"+File.basename(bdfPath,".*")+".xdb"
       db.readSuperElementsFromXdb(xdbPath)
   else
       op2Path=File.dirname(bdfPath)+"/"+File.basename(bdfPath,".*")+".op2"
       db.readSuperElementsFromOp2(op2Path)
   end

Depending on the path to BDF file, one “calculates” the name of Nastran output file and reads superelement nodes.

Example ‘RUBY/EX36/readResultSE.rb” illustrates the reading of SOL111 Results from HDF file with superelements.

IV.2.11.5 Getting superelement Results from HDF files

As far as Results extraction is concerned, the behaviour of HDF read or attachment functions is very similar to the behaviour of corresponding XDB functions. For example in “RUBY/EX27/readHdf5.rb” script, one prints characteristics of Results obtained from an HDF attachment and from different superelements with the following instructions:

   printf("\n\n   E) Getting Attachment results from all databases : \n\n")
   seIds.each do |seId|
       currentDb=nil
       if seId>0 then
           currentDb=db.getSuperElementFromId(seId)
       else
           currentDb=db
       end
       printf("currentDb.SEID = %d\n",currentDb.SEID)
       lcNames.each do |lcName|
           scNames.each do |scName|
               resNames.each do |resName|
                   h=currentDb.getHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcName,scName,resName)
                   if (h) then
                       h.each do |key,res|
                           str1,str2,str3=key
                           $stdout.printf("E) SEID %d - %s - %s - %s : %d\n",currentDb.SEID,str1,str2,str3,res.Size)
                       end
                   end
               end
           end
       end
   end

Superelements can also be read from the HDF file using method “readFemFromHdf” in NastranDb class. (Description of the method is given in section III.1.1.3.) An illustration of this is given in “RUBY/EX37/readHdfWithSE.rb” script. In that example, the residual FEM and the superelements are read with the following instructions:

   hdfPath="../../MODEL/OTHER_EXECS/msc_seug_chapter2_Jet/jet101_op2_b.h5"
   db.readFemFromHdf(hdfPath,true,true)

IV.2.12 Other tests

Most of the “Other tests” have been written to check new developments at some time. They are kept in the list of examples distributed with FeResPost as they illustrate FeResPost capabilities and allow checking of new versions of FeResPost.

IV.2.12.1 Reading RBE Results with Lagrange option

In the two examples in directory “RUBY/EX24”, we test the correct reading of MPC Forces and MPC Moments when Nastran “Lagrange” option is used for the analysis.

IV.2.12.2 Reading nonlinear analysis Results from HDF5 files

In example “RUBY/EX25/readNonLinear.rb”, we test the reading of nonlinear Results from HDF5 files.

IV.2.12.3 Testing MPC Results

In Examples of directory “RUBY/EX28”, the correct reading of Results at “MPCs” and “MPCNodes” is verified. This was necessary since a distinction is made between MPCs and RBEs in version 5.0.0.

IV.2.13 CBEAM and CBAR intermediate stations

In example “RUBY/EX29/writeGmsh.rb”, the reading of beam stations is tested from BDF files, the correct association of Result key to station node Ids when Results are read from an OP2 file, and the production of GSM Result files at an appropriate output location. To do this, a modified FEM has been created in “../../MODEL/EXEC_OP2/unit_xyz_stations.bdf”. This FEM includes a modified definition of struts that define different version of intermediate stations for CBAR elements (with CBARAO cards), or CBEAM elements (with appropriate definitions of PBEAML or PBEAM properties).

The GMSH output allows verification of that GMSH markers are generated at the appropriate locations. This is done by plotting Beam Moments in the struts:

    strutsGrp=db.getGroupCopy("struts_ALL")
    strutsMoments=db.getResultCopy("LAUNCH_ONE_MS2_X","Statics",\
        "Beam Moments","Elements",strutsGrp,[])
    strutsMoments=strutsMoments*[1.0,0.0,0.0]
    Util::printGrp($stdout,"struts",strutsGrp)
    Util::printRes($stdout,"Beam Moments",strutsMoments)

    ...

    db.writeGmsh("brol.gmsh",0,[[stress,"stress","ElemCenters"],\
                                [stress2,"stress2","ElemCorners"],\
                                [honeyStress,"honeyStress","ElemCenterPoints"],\
                                [strutsMoments,"beamMoments","ElemNodePoints"],\
                                [displ,"displ","Nodes"],\
                                [norm,"norm","Nodes"]],\
                                [[db.getGroupCopy("pan_PZ"),"mesh pan_PZ"],\
                                [db.getGroupCopy("pan_MZ"),"mesh pan_MZ"],\
                                [db.getGroupCopy("pan_PX"),"mesh pan_PX"]],\
                                [[meshGrp,"skel sat"]],false)

In example “RUBY/EX29/readOp2.rb”, this example verifies that reading the model from an OP2 file supports correctly the intermediate stations in CBEAM and CBAR elements. Remember however that reading FEM from an OP2 file is not recommended. Reading BDF files is safer.

Note that another test for the correct interpretation of the intermediate stations is also done in the post-processing project discussed in Chapter IV.4. Then, the purpose is to check whether the post-processing is correct when connections are modelled with CBAR, CBEAM or CBUSH elements and one extracts the corresponding Beam Forces and Beam Moments. Corresponding load cases, envelopes and Results are suffixed with “MOD” to distinguish this test from more normal calculations.

IV.2.14 Orthogonal tensor and rotations

Example “RUBY/EX32/orthogonalTensor.rb” shows how a non-symmetric orthogonal tensor can be used to rotate and diagonalize the components of a stress tensor, and how the reverse operation also can be done.

The orthogonal rotation tensor is produced by calculating the eigenvectors of stress tensor:

   s1,v1,s2,v2,s3,v3=stress.eigenQR()
   q=Result.assembleTensorFrom3Vectors(v1,v2,v3)

This tensor can be used to diagonalize the stress tensor:

   diag_stress=Result.directRotation(q,stress)

And this is the reverse operation:

   restored_stress=Result.inverseRotation(q,diag_stress)

Example “RUBY/EX32/orthogonalTensor.rb” also prints the Results in text files that allow checking the effectivity of rotation. We see that the rotation that has been generated using the stress tensor eigen vectors are not perfect because rotated tensor is not purely diagonal, but very close to. On the other hand, the restoration of initial tensor by the reverse rotation is nearly perfect.

IV.2.15 Reading Grid Point Forces on DMIG elements

The different examples in directory “RUBY/EX33” illustrate the access to Grid Point Forces on DMIG elements, read from OP2, XDB or HDF5 Result files. Different types of extractions are tested. In the example:

IV.2.16 Manipulation of complex Grid Point Forces

In example “RUBY/EX34/checkInertiaLoads.rb”, complex Grid Point Forces are manipulated. Several functions are defined in the example:

The method listed “calcOneGlobFM” is used to check the global forces and moments on upper sandwich panel. Grid Point Forces are extracted on the Group of nodes and elements corresponding to Group “pan_SUP”. Another extraction is done on the 9 nodes at interface to the three fittings supporting this sandwich panel.

The extraction has been done for different versions of the SOL111 analysis. The three versions differ by the modal basis that has been considered in the calculation. Results indicate that the number of modes considered matters. There is a significantly better match of Global MPC and Inertia loads when a large basis of eigenmodes is considered in the analysis.

Chapter IV.3
Using the composite classes

Small examples illustrating the use of FeResPost composite classes are presented here. As the classes are still under construction, the examples might be modified in future versions of the program. Also, additional examples will be presented when new feature of the composite classes are available.

IV.3.1 Importing and exporting data

The first examples are presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX12” and illustrate the importation of data, and the saving of data.

One example is contained in file “testNeutral.rb”. The three first instructions, create a “ClaDb” object and initialize it by reading the ESAComp file “test.edf”. Then the content of the ClaDb object is saved into a neutral file.

   dbA=ClaDb.new
   dbA.readEdf("test.edf")
   dbA.writeNeutral("NeutralA.ndf")

Then, a new “ClaDb” object is created and initialized by reading the previously created neutral file.

   dbB=ClaDb.new
   dbB.readNeutral("NeutralA.ndf")
   dbB.writeNeutral("NeutralB.ndf")

It is recommended to read and compare the two neutral files. A comparison with ESAComp file might be useful too.

Another example illustrates the possibility of defining a composite database corresponding to the materials and laminates defined in a finite element model. The example is programmed in file “testNastran.rb”. The model DataBase is produced “as usual”. Then the corresponding ClaDb object is returned:

   compDb=db.getClaDb

Finally, the composite database is saved in “nast.ndf” neutral file:

   compDb.writeNeutral("nast.ndf")

(In this case, the database is not a very interesting one because only one laminate is defined, and it is not a very interesting one.)

IV.3.2 Manipulating composite entities

The example illustrates the manipulation of objects of the classes defined in FeResPost. The example is presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX12”, in file “testCla.rb”.

First, a ClaDb is created and initialized by reading an ESAComp data file:

   db=ClaDb.new
   db.Id="testDB"
   db.readEdf("test.edf")

Then, a new ClaMat “mat1” is created. Its data are initialized by calls to the appropriate methods, and the material is inserted into the ClaDb:

   mat1=ClaMat.new
   mat1.Id="mat1"
   mat1.Type="isotropic"
   mat1.fillModuli({"E"=>72e9,"nu"=>0.33})
   mat1.fillCTEs({"alfa"=>2.3e-5})
   db.insertMaterial(mat1)

The ClaMat object previously stored into the ClaDb is retrieved into “mat2” variable. The material stiffness matrix is requested and its components are printed:

   mat2=db.getMaterialCopy("mat1")
   stiffMat = mat2.getStiffness
   printf("\n\n   stiffMat:\n\n")
   stiffMat.each do |line|
      line.each do |cell|
         printf("%14g",cell)
      end
      printf("\n")
   end

(Similarly, the compliance matrix is printed for the same material.) The following instructions illustrate the creation of a ClaLam object that is stored in the ClaDb:

   lam=ClaLam.new
   lam.Id="testLam"
   lam.addPly( 1,"mat1",0.00037,  0.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 2,"mat1",0.00037, 45.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 3,"mat1",0.00037,-45.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 4,"mat1",0.00037, 90.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly(15,"mat1",0.00037, 90.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 6,"mat1",0.00037,-45.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 7,"mat1",0.00037, 45.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly( 8,"mat1",0.00037,  0.0,30e6)
   lam.addPly(16,"mat1",0.00037,  0.0,30e6)
   db.insertLaminate(lam)

Then, characteristics of the laminate like the stiffness and compliance matrices are printed. the following lines illustrate the printing of the laminate ABBD (stiffness) matrix:

   ABBD = lam.get_ABBD
   printf("\n\n   ABBD:\n\n")
   ABBD.each do |line|
      line.each do |cell|
         printf("%14g",cell)
      end
      printf("\n")
   end

Note that the quantities can be printed in any direction with respect to the laminate axes. For example, the following lines illustrate the printing of laminate thermal expansion coefficient in direction 45∘ with respect to the laminate axes:

   alfaEh1 = lam.get_alfaEh1(45.0)
   printf("\n\n   alfaEh1 (45o):\n\n")
   alfaEh1.each do |cell|
      printf("%14g\n",cell)
   end

Similarly, the vector {α0ϵ} is printed. Finally, the ClaDb is saved into a neutral file. (This neutral file “test.ndf” is used in the other composite examples.)

IV.3.3 Composite thermal properties

The example illustrates the calculation of laminate thermal properties. The example is presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX12”, in file “testClaTherm.rb”.

The following statements correspond to the introduction of isotropic thermal properties in a material:

   mat1=ClaMat.new
   mat1.Id="mat1"
   mat1.Type="isotropic"
   mat1.fillThermalData({"lambdaT"=>170.0,"rho"=>2700.0,"Cp"=>17.0})
   db.insertMaterial(mat1)

Similarly, an anisotropic material is defined as follows:

   mat1=ClaMat.new
   mat1.Id="mat_aniso"
   mat1.Type="anisotropic"
   mat1.fillThermalData({"lambdaT1"=>170.0,"lambdaT2"=>17.0,
      "lambdaT3"=>17.0,"lambdaT12"=>0.0,"lambdaT23"=>0.0,
      "lambdaT31"=>0.0,"rho"=>50.0,"Cp"=>17.0})
   db.insertMaterial(mat1)

The thermal properties stored in a ClaMat object can be printed with the following statements:

   lambdaMat = mat2.getInPlaneLambdaT
   printf("\n\n   lambdaMat:\n\n")
   lambdaMat.each do |line|
      line.each do |cell|
         printf("%14g",cell)
      end
      printf("\n")
   end
   printf("\n")
   printf("   rho = %g\n",mat2.getRho)
   printf("   Cp = %g\n",mat2.getCp)
   printf("   rho * Cp = %g\n",mat2.getRhoCp)

A method that calculates and prints laminate thermal properties is also defined:

   def writeLamThermalProperties(os,lam,db)
      lam.calcLaminateProperties(db)
      mat = lam.get_LambdaT
      os.printf("\n\n   LambdaT:\n\n")
      mat.each do |line|
         line.each do |cell|
            os.printf("%14g",cell)
         end
         os.printf("\n")
      end
      os.printf("\n   R33T = %g\n",lam.get_R33T)
      os.printf("   RhoCpH = %g\n",lam.get_RhoCpH)
   end

This method is called with the following statement:

   writeLamThermalProperties(STDOUT,lam,db)

IV.3.4 Extending composite classes

In the example of section IV.3.2, one illustrated basically how the composite classes and their methods can be used to calculate composite properties. The example involved the printing of matrices and vectors corresponding to material or laminate properties.

To write the ruby lines devoted to the printing or manipulation of composite entities can be tedious because it is a repetitive task. As for many users, the same composite results are often requested, this may justify the development of Modules or Classes devoted to the most common operations.

This section illustrates the extension of the composite classes and of its classes. All these examples are to be found in “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX13” directory.

IV.3.4.1 Extension “extendedCLA.rb”

Presently, only “ClaMat” and “ClaLam” classes have been modified in “extendedCLA.rb”.

IV.3.4.1.1 Modification of “ClaLam” class

Methods devoted to the printing of stiffness and compliance matrices, laminate engineering constants, etc., are added. The list of these functions include:

Each of these diagnostic functions has two arguments: an ostream object corresponding to the File in which Results are printed, and a Real value corresponding to the angle with respect to the laminate axes for which the diagnostic is to be written. The following lines show the programming of “write_engineering” method:

   class ClaLam

      ...

      def write_engineering(os,theta=0.0)
         constants=get_engineering(theta)
         tab=["E_xx", "E_k0_xx", "E_f_xx",\
              "E_yy", "E_k0_yy","E_f_yy",\
              "G_xy", "G_k0_xy", "G_f_xy",\
              "nu_xy", "nu_k0_xy", "nu_f_xy",\
              "nu_yx", "nu_k0_yx", "nu_f_yx",\
              "G_xz", "G_yz"]
         counter=0
         tab.each do |elem|
            if (counter.modulo(3)==0) then
               os.printf("   ")
            end
            str=format("%s = %11g",elem,constants[elem])
            os.printf("%25s",str)
            counter+=1
            if (counter.modulo(3)==0||counter==tab.size) then
               os.printf("\n")
            end
         end
      end

      ...

   end # class ClaLam

The programming of the other diagnostic methods is very similar to this one.

The following method writes the laminate load response at laminate level (i.e. no ply results):

    def write_loadResponse(os,theta=0.0)
        if (!isMechanicalLoadingDefined()) then
            raise "No load response has been calculated."
        end

        if (isThermalLoadingDefined()) then
            deltaT=getDeltaT
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n","deltaT",deltaT)
            t0=getT0()
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n","T0",t0)
            gradT=getGradT
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n\n","gradT",gradT)
        end

        if (isMoistureLoadingDefined()) then
            deltaH=getDeltaH
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n","deltaH",deltaH)
            h0=getH0
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n","H0",h0)
            gradH=getGradH
            os.printf("   %14s%14g\n\n","gradH",gradH)
        end

        os.printf("   %30s%14s%14s%14s\n","type","XX","YY","XY")
        f=getNormalForces(theta)
        m=getMoments(theta)
        s=getNormalStrains(theta)
        c=getCurvatures(theta)
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Normal Forces",f[0],f[1],f[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Moments",m[0],m[1],m[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Normal Strains",s[0],s[1],s[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Curvatures",c[0],c[1],c[2])
        f=getAverageInPlaneStresses(theta)
        m=getFlexuralStresses(theta)
        s=getAverageInPlaneStrains(theta)
        c=getFlexuralStrains(theta)
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Average in-plane stresses",f[0],f[1],f[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Flexural stresses",m[0],m[1],m[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Average strains",s[0],s[1],s[2])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g%14g\n","Flexural in-plane strains",c[0],c[1],c[2])

        os.printf("\n   %30s%14s%14s\n","type","XZ","YZ")
        q=getShearForces(theta)
        g=getShearStrains(theta)
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g\n","Shear Forces",q[0],q[1])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g\n","Shear Strains",q[0],q[1])
        q=getAverageShearStresses(theta)
        g=getAverageShearStrains(theta)
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g\n","Average shear stresses",q[0],q[1])
        os.printf("   %30s%14g%14g\n","Average shear strains",g[0],g[1])
   end

Again, in this case, the method has two arguments. Indeed, the components of Laminate load response can be obtained in any direction. Note that this method gives sensible results, only if the “calcResponse” method has been called on the ClaLam object. This remark is valid for all the methods that return information related to a particular loading.

The method “write_PliesInPlaneStrainsAndStresses” has only one argument and writes plies in-plane stresses and strains:

    def write_PliesInPlaneStrainsAndStresses(os)
        if (!isMechanicalLoadingDefined()) then
            raise "No load response has been calculated."
        end

        epsTab=getPliesStrains
        sigTab=getPliesStresses
        epsMechTab=getPliesMechanicalStrains
        os.printf("   %8s%5s","layer","loc")
        os.printf("%14s%14s%14s","eps_11","eps_22","gamma_12")
        os.printf("%14s%14s%14s","sig_11","sig_22","sig_12")
        os.printf("%14s%14s%14s","eps_mech_11","eps_mech_22","gamma_mech_12")
        os.printf("\n")
        (0...epsTab.size).each do |i|
            os.printf("   %8d%5s",epsTab[i][0],epsTab[i][1])
            os.printf("%14g%14g%14g",epsTab[i][2],epsTab[i][3],epsTab[i][7])
            os.printf("%14g%14g%14g",sigTab[i][2],sigTab[i][3],sigTab[i][7])
            os.printf("%14g%14g%14g",epsMechTab[i][2],epsMechTab[i][3],epsMechTab[i][7])
            os.printf("\n")
        end
    end

Methods “write_PliesTemperatures” and “write_PliesMoistures” are also defined to write thermal and hygrometric laminate states at ply level. These methods are very similar to “write_PliesInPlaneStrainsAndStresses”.

Correspondingly, the ply failure indices and reserve factors can be calculated and written:

   def write_crit(os,db,criteria,fos=1.0)
        if (!isMechanicalLoadingDefined()) then
            raise "No load response has been calculated."
        end

        if (db==nil) then
            sdRes=getDerived(criteria)
            fiRes=getFailureIndices(criteria)
            rfRes=getReserveFactors(criteria,fos)
        else
            sdRes=getDerived(db,criteria)
            fiRes=getFailureIndices(db,criteria)
            rfRes=getReserveFactors(db,criteria,fos)
        end

        ...
   end

This last method has several arguments:

1.

“os” specifies where the results are written.

2.

“db” is the ClaDb that is used to calculate failure indices and reserve factors. This argument may be necessary to retrieve plies material allowables and calculate the failure indices. If the argument is nil, then the laminate allowables are used to estimate failure indices.

3.

“criteria” is an Array of strings corresponding to the criteria for which reserve factors and failure indices are requested.

4.

“fos” is an optional argument corresponding to the factor of safety used in the calculation of reserve factors. Its default value is 1.

Note that all the methods added to the ClaLam class perform write operations only. Obviously, methods returning values can also be defined and will ultimately be more useful. But the examples above show that FeResPost is highly customizable and can be adapted to the needs of nearly any user. For example, it should be possible to interface it with graphical packages like ImageMagick or Gnuplot, or with spreadsheets like excel through the win32ole package. Using the Tcl/Tk, it should even be possible to create an interactive program with graphical interfaces.

IV.3.4.1.2 Modification of “ClaMat” class

Similarly, in “ClaMat” class, several printing methods have been defined. A list of these methods follows:

Each of these methods has two arguments: an output stream object, and an optional angle θ. (Its default value is 0.)

IV.3.4.2 A very simple example of use

The following example illustrates the use of the new methods in ClaLam class:

require "FeResPost"
require "extendedCLA"
include FeResPost

   db=ClaDb.new
   db.Id="testDB"
   db.readEdf("test.edf")

   lam=db.getLaminateCopy("testLam2")
   ld=db.getLoadCopy("testFM")
   theta=10.0

   lam.calcResponse(db,theta,ld,true,false,true)
   lam.write_loadResponse(STDOUT,theta)
   lam.write_loadResponse(STDOUT,0.0)

   STDOUT.printf("\n")
   lam.write_PliesInPlaneStrainsAndStresses(STDOUT)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")

The main steps of the example are the following:

1.

The “FeResPost” module and the “extendedCLA” extension of the ClaLam class are first required.

2.

A ClaDb object is created and initialized as usual.

3.

Then, the laminate “testLam2” and the load “testFM” are retrieved from the ClaDb.

4.

The laminate load response is calculated and some results are printed. (Note that the calculation of laminate load response is done first by the call to “calcResponse”.)

The example is contained in the ruby program file “testCla.rb”.

IV.3.4.3 Properties of the laminates defined in an ESAComp file

The second example, defined in file “testCla2.rb” illustrates the use of iterators. For each laminate defined in a ClaDb, several properties are printed. These properties are printed in several directions by rotations of 30o. Part of the program is reproduced below:

def diagnostic(edfName,os)

   db=ClaDb.new
   db.Id="testDB"
   db.readEdf("test.edf")

   db.each_laminate do |lamId,lam|
      (0..360).step(30) do |i|
         theta=1.0*i

         os.printf("\nlaminate = \"%s\" -- theta = %g\n\n",lamId.to_s,theta)

         os.printf("\n   Stiffness matrix : \n\n");
         lam.write_ABBD(os,theta)
         os.printf("\n");

         ...
      end
   end
end

os=File.open("test.txt","w")
diagnostic("test.edf",os)
os.close

IV.3.4.4 Properties of the laminates defined in an ESAComp file

The third example, defined in file “testCla3.rb” illustrates the creation of a ClaLoad object and the calculation of corresponding ply stresses and strains. It is reproduced extensively below:

require "FeResPost"
require "extendedCLA"
include FeResPost

   db=ClaDb.new
   db.Id="testDB"
   db.readEdf("test.edf")

   tmpLoad=ClaLoad.new
   tmpLoad.Id="testF0T"
   tmpLoad.setT(20.0)
   tmpLoad.setMembrane([0.03,0.0,0.1],"SC","SC","SC")
   tmpLoad.setFlexural([0.000000e+00,0.000000e+00,0.000000e+00],"SC","SC","SC")
   tmpLoad.setOutOfPlane([100.0,200.0],"FM","FM")

   lam=db.getLaminateCopy("testLam2")
   lam.setAllPliesIlss(3.0e+7)
   lam.setLaminateIlss(3.0e+7)

   theta=45.0
   lam.calcResponse(db,theta,tmpLoad,true,false,true)
   lam.write_loadResponse(STDOUT,theta)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")
   lam.write_loadResponse(STDOUT,0.0)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")

   lam.write_PliesInPlaneStrainsAndStresses(STDOUT)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")
   lam.write_PliesTemperatures(STDOUT)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")

   criteria=["Tresca2D","VonMises2D","MaxStress","MaxStrain",\
      "TsaiHill","TsaiWu","Hoffman","Puck","Puck_b","Puck_c",\
      "Hashin","YamadaSun","CombStrain2D","Ilss"]
   lam.write_crit(STDOUT,db,criteria)
   STDOUT.printf("\n")

This example has been used for mainly debugging composite classes. It illustrates the calculation of failure indices, reserve factors and equivalent stresses in a laminate for a given loading. The reader should examine carefully the result for interlaminar shear.

Note that some criterion may give infinite or NaN values because all the material allowables have not been initialized. (See for example the failure indices of Tresca and Von Mises criteria.)

IV.3.4.5 Properties of the materials defined in an ESAComp file

Another example defined in file “testCla4.rb” illustrates the printing of material matrices and vectors as a function of the orientation. The most important lines look as follows:

   mat=db.getMaterialCopy("testPly2")

   (0..360).step(15) do |iAngle|
      theta=1.0*iAngle
      STDOUT.printf("Angle = %g\n\n",theta)

      STDOUT.printf("   In-plane compliance matrix :\n\n")
      mat.write_InPlaneCompliance(STDOUT,theta)
      STDOUT.printf("\n")

      STDOUT.printf("   In-plane alfa*E :\n\n")
      mat.write_InPlaneAlfaE(STDOUT,theta)
      STDOUT.printf("\n")

      STDOUT.printf("   In-plane alfa :\n\n")
      mat.write_InPlaneAlfa(STDOUT,theta)
      STDOUT.printf("\n")

      STDOUT.printf("   Out-of-plane compliance matrix :\n\n")
      mat.write_OOPSCompliance(STDOUT,theta)
      STDOUT.printf("\n")

      STDOUT.printf("\n")
   end

IV.3.5 Out-of-plane laminate shear response

The first example is presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX14” and illustrates the out-of-plane shear calculations. The example is contained in file “testShear.rb”. This example has been developed for debugging purposes and is meant to compare the results of FeResPost with those of ESAComp. After some research, what ESAComp does was identified and its behavior reproduced with FeResPost.

First, a function is defined that calculates the ESAComp components of out-of-plane shear stiffness matrix kA_44, kA_55, kA_45:

   def getESACompG(db,lam,theta)
      tmpLam=ClaLam.new
      tmpLam.Id="tmpLam"
      lam.each_ply do |plyIndex,plyData|
         tmpLam.addPly(plyIndex,plyData[1],plyData[2],\
                       plyData[3]+theta,plyData[4])
      end
      tmpLam.calcLaminateProperties(db)
      shearMat=tmpLam.get_G
      ret={"kA_44"=>shearMat[1][1], "kA_55"=>shearMat[0][0],\
           "kA_45"=>shearMat[0][1]}
   end

The arguments of the function are:

The function returns a Hash containing the components of shear stiffness matrix associated with their names. The function works as follows: a new ClaLam identical to the argument ClaLam is defined, except that all the plies are rotated by the θ argument angle. Then the laminate properties are calculated and the stiffness matrix components are extracted at 0o (default direction in laminate axes for extraction function get_G).

Similarly, a function is defined to return similar values in a more “classical” way (according to FeResPost philosophy):

   def getNormalG(db,lam,theta)
      lam.calcLaminateProperties(db)
      shearMat=lam.get_G(theta)
      ret={"kA_44"=>shearMat[1][1], "kA_55"=>shearMat[0][0],\
           "kA_45"=>shearMat[0][1]}
   end

The methods “getESACompG” and “getNormalG” are used to print the components of shear stiffness matrix according to the two calculation methods and as a function of the orientation θ. For example, the ESAComp results are printed with the following ruby lines:

   os.printf("\n")
   os.printf("Laminate stiffness as a function of theta :\n\n")
   os.printf("%14s%14s%14s%14s\n","Theta","kA_44","kA_55","kA_45")
   (-90..90).step(5) do |i|
      theta=1.0*i
      ret=getESACompG(db,lam,theta)
      os.printf("%14d%14g%14g%14g\n",i,ret["kA_44"],ret["kA_55"],\
                   ret["kA_45"])
   end
   os.printf("\n\n")

Differences are observed between the results obtained with “getESACompG” and “getNormalG”:

1.

Note that in the “ESAComp” version the angle θ is the angle by which the laminate is rotated. In the “Normal” version, it is the angle at which the shear stiffness components are recovered (angle with respect to the laminate axes). So the ESAComp results for an angle θ should be compared to the “Normal” results for an angle - θ. However in this case the dependence on θ is even and no difference can be observed.

2.

For angles θ other than - 90o, 0o or 90o, the results obtained with “getESACompG” and “getNormalG” are different. This difference is explained by the approximation:

Qxz = Mxx,x,
(IV.3.1)

Qyz = Myy,y,
(IV.3.2)

that has been done in section II.1.6.3. The example illustrates one of the consequences of the approximation: the loss of objectivity in out-of-plane shear equations.

The calculation of out-of-plane shear stresses in the laminate is also performed for a simple loading in three different directions: - 45o, 0o or 45o. Here again the loading is applied in two ways: with the “ESAComp” method or the “Normal” one. For example, the printing of ply stresses with “ESAComp” method is done as follows:

    def writeESACompShearStresses(os,db,lam,theta,ld)
        tmpLam=ClaLam.new
        tmpLam.Id="tmpLam"
        lam.each_ply do |plyIndex,plyData|
        tmpLam.addPly(plyIndex,plyData[1],plyData[2],\
            plyData[3]+theta,plyData[4])
        end

        tmpLam.calcLaminateProperties(db)
        tmpLam.calcResponse(db,0.0,ld,true,false,true)
        sigTab=tmpLam.getPliesStresses
        os.printf("   %8s%5s%14s%14s\n","Ply","Pos.","tau_13","tau_23")
        (0...sigTab.size).each do |i|
            os.printf("   %8d%5s",sigTab[i][0],sigTab[i][1])
            os.printf("%14g%14g",sigTab[i][6],sigTab[i][5])
            os.printf("\n")
        end
    end

The loading applied to laminate is defined by a pure out-of-plane shear force components Qxz = 1000000 and Qyz = 0. A corresponding loading rotated by 45o is also defined and defined by its components Qxz = Qyz = 707107. This new loading is tested for direction θ = 0o only. The ply stress results obtained with the different versions of loading and calculations methods can be compared and the following comments are made:

1.

Here again, the “ESAComp” results are obtained by rotating the laminate by an angle θ. For “Normal” results, the loading is rotated by an angle θ. Therefore “ESAComp” results at θ = -45o are to be compared to “Normal” results at θ = 45o (and vice versa).

2.

When θ = 0o, “ESAComp” results and “Normal” results for a same loading are identical. Otherwise, one observes difference between “ESAComp” results at θ = -45o and “Normal” results at θ = 45o (and vice versa).

3.

For “Normal” calculation method the loading ld45 at θ = 0o gives the same results as ld at θ = 45o. For “ESAComp” calculation method the loading ld45 at θ = 0o does not give the same results as ld at θ = -45o. “Normal” calculation method is more in line with usual expectations.

In fact, neither of the two calculation methods can be considered better than the other. (At least, as far as the precision of results is concerned.) However, the “Normal” calculation method is preferred because it is more consistent with usual expectations, as shown in the example. Moreover, the associated computation cost is lower. (This will be important when finite element results are post-processed.) Note however, that the “Normal” calculation method also suffers from a lack of objectivity with respect to ply orientations in the laminate.

IV.3.6 Producing composite finite element Results

The examples presented in this section are presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX15”.

An example in which composite classes interact with finite element Result classes is presented here. First, a “bottom” Group containing four elements of the bottom panel, which has a PCOMPG property. A load object, some components of which correspond to finite element Results is defined:

   ld=ClaLoad.new
   ld.Id="testLoad"
   ld.setMembrane([0.03,0.0,0.1],"femFM","femSC","femFM")
   ld.setFlexural([0.0,0.0,0.0],"femFM","femSC","femSC")
   ld.setOutOfPlane([100.0,200.0],"femFM","femFM")

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Shell Forces",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   ld.setShellForces(res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Shell Moments",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   ld.setShellMoments(res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Strain Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,["NONE"])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   ld.setShellStrains(res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Curvature Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,["NONE"])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   ld.setShellCurvatures(res)

In the example, no thermal or moisture contribution has been taken into account in the loading. Only mechanical components have been defined. The example, is defined in such a way that all possible mechanical contributions are used: in-plane forces, out-of-plane forces, bending moments, average in-plane strain and curvature. All these components are defined as finite element Results. (This allows us later to compare the Results produced by FeResPost with those directly output by Nastran.) The modification of coordinate system is necessary because the loading components are required to be expressed in laminate axes. (The Nastran shell forces, moments, curvatures... are given in element axes.)

For later comparison of Results, several Results directly extracted from Nastran “op2” file are directly output in file “Reference.txt”.

   os=File.open("Reference.txt","w")

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Shell Forces",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   Util::printRes(os,"Shell Forces",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Shell Moments",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   Util::printRes(os,"Shell Moments",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Strain Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,["NONE"])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   Util::printRes(os,"Strain Tensor",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Curvature Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   res.modifyRefCoordSys(db,"lamCS")
   Util::printRes(os,"Curvature Tensor",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Stress Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   Util::printRes(os,"Stress Tensor",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics","Strain Tensor",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   Util::printRes(os,"Strain Tensor",res)

   res=db.getResultCopy("ORBIT_ONE_MS2_Z","Statics",
                        "Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill",
                        "ElemCenters",bottom,[])
   Util::printRes(os,"Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill",res)

   os.close()

As laminate allowables are not defined in Nastran, one modifies the laminate corresponding to the unique PCOMPG property by adding laminate allowables to it. Then the modified ClaLam is reinserted in the database, where it replaces the original one:

   lam=compDb.getLaminateCopy(6)
   allowables={}
   allowables["sc"]=200.0e6
   allowables["s1c"]=200.0e6
   allowables["s2c"]=200.0e6
   allowables["st"]=300.0e6
   allowables["s1t"]=300.0e6
   allowables["s2t"]=300.0e6
   allowables["ss"]=100.0e6
   allowables["s12"]=100.0e6
   allowables["ilss"]=30.0e6
   lam.insertAllowables(allowables)
   compDb.insertLaminate(lam)

The failure indices to be calculated are also selected. The first one is calculated using ply material allowables, the others with the laminate allowables defined above. For the two last criteria, the most critical layer only is recovered for each element. The definition looks as follows:

   criteria = []
   criteria << ["TS FI","TsaiHill_c","FI",false,true]
   criteria << ["TW FI","TsaiWu","FI",true,true]
   criteria << ["TW FI Critical","TsaiWu","FI",true,false]
   criteria << ["ILSS FI Critical","Ilss","FI",true,false]

The following call to method “calcFiniteElementResponse” produces Results corresponding to the ClaLam object for which the method is called and writes Results in file “OneLaminate.txt”

   theta=0.0
   outputs=lam.calcFiniteElementResponse(ClaDb,theta,ld,[true,true,true],
      ["Shell Forces","Shell Moments", "Shell Curvatures",
       "Average Strain Tensor"],
      ["Stress Tensor","Strain Tensor","Mechanical Strain Tensor"],
      1.0,criteria)

   os=File.open("OneLaminate.txt","w")
   outputs.each do |id,res|
      Util::printRes(os,id,res)
   end
   os.close

The following sequence does the same operation, but the method “calcFiniteElementResponse” is called for the DataBase object “db”.

   theta=0.0
   outputs=db.calcFiniteElementResponse(compDb,theta,ld,[true,true,true],
      ["Shell Forces","Shell Moments", "Shell Curvatures",
       "Average Strain Tensor"],
      ["Stress Tensor","Strain Tensor","Mechanical Strain Tensor"],
      1.0,criteria)

   os=File.open("SeveralLaminates.txt","w")
   outputs.each do |id,res|
      Util::printRes(os,id,res)
   end
   os.close

For each element, “db” retrieves the property ID and selects in “compDb” the appropriate laminate with which the calculations are done. Of course, in this case, a single laminate is used and the Results should be the same as when the method is called for the “lam” laminate.

A few remarks on the example:

A simplified variant of the example is presented in “testCriteria.rb” file. There the failure indices are calculated using directly layered stresses read from Nastran op2 file. For example, the failure indices are calculated using the ClaLam method as follows:

   outputs=lam.calcFiniteElementCriteria(compDb,stressRes,1.0,criteria)

IV.3.7 Modifying units

The example illustrates the manipulation of CLA objects units. The example is presented in directory “TESTSAT/RUBY/EX18”, in file “testMatUnits.rb”.

The sequence of operations is simple:

The two files “oldUnits.txt” and “newUnits.txt” may be compared. They should contain equivalent results.

The part of interest of the example is the modification units for all the materials in the database:

    oldUnits=db.getUnits

    newUnits=oldUnits.clone
    newUnits["F"]="lbf"
    newUnits["L"]="mm"
    newUnits["T"]="oF"

    puts oldUnits
    puts newUnits

    db.each_material do |id,mat|
        mat.changeUnits(newUnits)
        db.insertMaterial(mat)
    end

(Note that in the example, it was deliberately decided not to use the “changeUnitsAllMaterials” method of the ClaDb class.)

The user may test the outputs with or without units systems modifications to verify if the results are affected by the modification of units. (They should not be modified.)

Chapter IV.4
Object-oriented post-processing

An example of object-oriented post-processing programmed in ruby language is presented in this chapter. The structure of the post-processing presented here is very similar to the structure of post-processings currently used on actual “real” projects, and results from a long evolution driven by years of practice. (An earlier excel version of the post-processing project is presented and discussed in Appendix X.D.2.)

The history of post-processings described in the FeResPost User Manual is summarized below:

The rest of this Chapter is organized as follows:

Note that the purpose of current chapter is to describe the main structure of the post-processing in a way that allows the reader to better understand source code. However, the understanding of the project will be achieved only by diving into the source code, which is described in section IV.4.1.

“DbAndLoadCases” module also acts as a server of Results for the post-processing objects discussed in section IV.4.1. Method “DbAndLoadCases.getResult” is programmed in such a way that the post-processing classes remain “unaware” of the solver or solution sequence that have produced the Results being post-processed:

We made reference above to the excel post-processing described in Chapter X.D.2. Current project also uses Microsoft Office tools:

More information about the final part of the post-processing is provided in section IV.4.4. Note that the use of Microsoft Office tools, excel in particular has been reduced as much as possible in order to allow the running of most post-processing on Linux instead of Windows. This is why excel is used only for the preparation of CSV files, and for the extraction of results to be inserted into Word reports.

IV.4.1 Post-processing classes and modules

The post-processing project described here does not use Excel. It can be run on Windows computers as well as Linux computers. It requires only the following programs:

All the classes and modules defined here are defined in “PROJECT/PGR” sub-directory.

IV.4.1.1 Management of databases and load cases

Module “DbAndLoadCases” is devoted to the management of FEM databases and load cases. Three classes are defined in the module:

All the static load cases that have been defined in “DbAndLoadCases” module are not necessarily post-processed. The list of static load cases to be post-processed is specified via following instructions:

    DbAndLoadCases.addOneSelection(lcName,params)

The definition of databases, elementary and combined load cases, and of the selection of static load cases are a preliminary step in the post-processing project. This means that corresponding entities must be defined before the loop on static load cases which looks as follows:

    DbAndLoadCases.loopOnStaticCases() do |lcName|
        puts lcName
        postList.each do |p|
            begin
                p.initCalcSteps()
                p.calculate("Static")
            rescue Exception => x then
                printf("Failed Post object %s with ID %s\n",p.to_s,p.postID())
                PrjExcept.debug(x)
            end
        end
        DbAndLoadCases.saveMosResults(postList)
        DbAndLoadCases.saveSrResults(postList)
    end

For dynamic load cases (post-processing of Nastran SOL 111 analysis), no elementary or combined load cases are defined. Instead, the loop on the different sub-cases is done via instructions that look as follows:

    db=DbAndLoadCases::DB.new(dbName,"NASTRAN",bdfFileName,
        sesFileNames,claDbs,gmshFileName)
    DbAndLoadCases.databases[dbName]=db

    DbAndLoadCases.prepareDataBase(dbName)

    DbAndLoadCases.loopOnDynamSubCases(resFileType,resFileName,
            lcName,fMin,fMax,scNbrMax) do |lcNameA,lcNameB|
        puts lcNameB
        postList.each do |p|
            begin
                p.initCalcSteps()
                p.calculate("Dynamic Complex")
            rescue Exception => x then
                printf("Failed Post object %s with ID %s\n",p.to_s,p.postID())
                PrjExcept.debug(x)
            end
        end
        DbAndLoadCases.saveMosResults(postList)
        DbAndLoadCases.saveSrResults(postList)
    end

(The loop on sub-cases is obtained via an iterator directly defined in “DbAndLoadCases” without defining “ElemLc” or “CombiLc” objects.) Note that, another iterator is associated to dynamic (complex) results:

    DbAndLoadCases.iterateOnTheta(currentLcName,bakResults) do |srLcName,mosLcName,results|
        # One performs the calculations with the Real results :
        @step_1_results=results
        calc_2(srLcName,mosLcName)
    end

This iterator produces real Results from the complex Results , corresponding to different phases. (In the post-processing, 12 phases are considered for each output frequency.) This iterator is called by the “calculate” method defined in “GenPost” class described in section IV.4.1.2.

“DbAndLoadCases” module also defines the methods that can be used to store results in an SQL database:

Note that “DbAndLoadCases” module is unaware of SQLite. All interactions with SQL database are done via “SqlWrap” module discussed in section IV.4.1.3. This has been done to ease the swap from SQLite to another SQL database system.

“DbAndLoadCases” module also defines three methods that do nothing, but are meant to be used to customize the definition of load cases or the loop on load cases:

IV.4.1.2 “Post-processing” classes

All the post-processing classes derive from the generic “GenPost” class defined in file “PGR/post.rb”. A post-processing object performs the calculation of a one or several criteria on a specific structural part or interface. It then manages the following operations:

The different member data of “GenPost” class deserve some explanation as well:

Note that the “Post” classes have been programmed in such a way that they remain, as much as possible “unaware” of the particular solver that is used to produce the results that are post-processed. In particular:

The classes inheriting “GenPost” class are listed below.

IV.4.1.2.1 “PostCauchyStress” class

This class is devoted to the post-processing of “Stress Tensor” Results. It proposes several failure criteria corresponding to Von Mises or core justification. For a single “Stress Tensor” Result extraction, several failure criteria can be calculated, and parameters specific to each failure criterion are defined in the data for this failure criterion. A “PostCauchyStress” object is created as follows:

        p=PostCauchyStress.new()
        p.setData(partName,loc,grpName,layers,criteria,params)

The parameters of “setData” method are explained in Table IV.4.1. It is the user’s responsibility to write the code that builds the post-processing objects with appropriate parameters. (See examples of definitions of data in section IV.4.2 for more details.)

Table IV.4.1: Parameters for the “PostCauchyStress” class.
Parameters for the extraction of Stress Tensor (“setData” parameters)
partName String The name of the part to which Excel results will be associated
loc String Location of extraction (“Elements”, “ElemCorners”, “ElemCenters”,...)
grpName String The name of Group on which stress tensor is extracted
layer(s) String, Integer or Array Layer(s) on which stress tensor is extracted
criteria Array Description of the derived criteria that must be calculated. (See below.)
Criteria and their parameters
Each criterion is defined in an Array of 5 elements
critName String Name of the criterion
gmshFileName String GMSH file name
gmshResName String GMSH result name
xlTableName String Name of the Excel worksheet in which results will be saved
critParams Hash Parameters for the derivation of criterion. (See below.)
Parameters if critName =“VonMises”
FoS Real Safety factor
All_VM Real Allowable
Parameters if critName =“MaxStress”
FoS Real Safety factor
All_MaxStress Real Allowable
Parameters if critName =“HoneyAirbus”
FoS Real Safety factor
All_L Real Core Shear Allowable (longitudinal direction)
All_W Real Core Shear Allowable (transverse direction)
Parameters if critName =“HoneyMaxShear”
FoS Real Safety factor
All_Shear Real Core Shear Allowable
Parameters if critName =“HoneyAxialComp”
FoS Real Safety factor
Comp_S String Axial Component (“XX”, “YY” or “ZZ”)
All_T Real Core Tensile Allowable
All_C Real Core Compression Allowable

IV.4.1.2.2 “PostLaminate” class

This class is devoted to the calculation of composite failure criteria via the classical laminate analysis. Here also, several criteria can be calculated by each “PostLaminate” object, but always for a single calculation of Stress or Strain Tensor Result.A “PostLaminate” object is created as follows:

        p=PostLaminate.new()
        p.setData(partName,loc,grpName,layers,criteria,params)

The parameters of “setData” method are explained in Table IV.4.2. It is the user’s responsibility to write the code that builds the post-processing objects with appropriate parameters. (See examples of definitions of data in section IV.4.2 for more details.)

Table IV.4.2: Parameters for the “PostLaminate” class.
Parameters for the extraction of Stress or Strain Tensor (“setData” parameters)
partName String The name of the part to which Excel results will be associated
loc String Location of extraction (“Elements”, “ElemCorners”, “ElemCenters”,...)
grpName String The name of Group on which stress tensor is extracted
layer(s) String, Integer or Array Layers on which stress tensor is extracted
bCurvature Boolean This parameter is set to True if laminate Curvature Tensor is used in Classical Laminate Analysis. Otherwise, the Shell Moments are used. For laminate in plane and out-of-plane shear loading, Shell Forces Tensor is always used. (It is not possible in “PostLaminate” class to use the laminate average Strain Tensor.)
FoS Real Safety factor for all the failure criteria
criteria Array Description of the derived criteria that must be calculated. (See below.)
Criteria and their parameters
Each criterion is defined in an Array of 5 elements
critName String Name of the criterion
gmshFileName String GMSH file name
gmshResName String GMSH result name
xlTableName String Name of the Excel worksheet in which results will be saved
critParams Hash Parameters for the derivation of criterion.
None of the laminate failure criteria needs additional parameters. The same safety factor is considered for all failure modes, and allowables are found in the composite database associated with current load case.

IV.4.1.2.3 “PostConnect” class

This class is devoted to the justification of connections. It presents several failure criteria corresponding to sliding of interfaces, gapping,failure of inserts, failure of bolts (according to method proposed in [otNCE21]), failure by bearing... A “PostConnect” object is created as follows:

        p=PostConnect.new()
        p.setData(ifName,params)

The parameters of constructor method are explained in Table IV.4.3. It is the user’s responsibility to write the code that builds the post-processing objects with appropriate parameters. (See examples of definitions of data in section IV.4.2 for more details.)

Note that:

Table IV.4.3: Parameters for the “PostConnect” class.
Parameters for the extraction of connection loads (“setData” parameters)
ifName String The name of the interface to which Excel results will be associated
type String Description of the type of connection saved in Excel table of results. This parameter does not influence the calculation.
interfaceDef Hash This Hash contains information regarding the interface definition and how connection loads are retrieved from FEM results. Additional information is given below in the Table.
criteria Array The different extraction or failure criteria that will be processed at step 2 (or step 1 for “GlobFM” extraction).
How the “interfaceDef” Hash parameter defines the interface... Defines the extraction source and method, possible modification of coordinate system, direction vector for connection axis, optional parameters for bolt group redistribution of connection loads, ... Optional parameters are in parentheses.
ifName String The name of the interface for which connection loads are extracted. This should match the “ifName” argument of “setData” method discussed above.
grpNameA String The name of Group “A” defining the interface.
grpNameB String The name of Group “B” defining the interface. This second Group is not necessarily used but parameter is requested. It can be set to nil if the extraction method does not require Group “B”.
method String Identifies the loads extraction method. Possible values are “BMFRC”, “BSHFRC”, “GPFINT”, “GPFMPC”, “GPFSPC”, “MPCFRC”, “SPCFRC” and “APPFRC”. This corresponds to the specification of entities on which forces and moments are extracted. (See the sources of “PostConnect” class if you have doublts regarding the meaning of these parameters.)
csId String or Integer Specification of the coordinate system in which interface load components must be expressed before deriving axial forces, shear forces, bending moments...
direction Array Array of three Real values specifying connections’ axis. Components of this vector are given wrt the coordinate system identified by “csId” above.
bRedistr Boolean Specifies whether a bolt group redistribution is requested. The parameters that follow are optional and must be provided only if a bolt group redistribution is requested. (Theory is given in Appendix X.E.4.3.)
(bgCsId) Integer Identification of the coordinate system for bolt group redistribution
(kT) Real Translational stiffness of connections for bolt group redistribution
(kR) Real Rotational stiffness of connections for bolt group redistribution
(grpName3) String Name of a group of nodes defining the locations of connections onto which global loads are redistributed. If this argument is nil, the redistribution is done on locations corresponding to the FEM entities from which loads are extracted.
Criteria and their parameters
Each criterion is defined in an Array of 5 elements
critName String Name of the criterion
gmshFileName String GMSH file name
gmshResName String GMSH result name
xlTableName String Name of the Excel worksheet in which results will be saved
critParams Hash Parameters for the derivation of criterion. (See below.)
The different extraction or failure criteria are generally calculated in “calc_2” method of the post-processing object. “GlobFM” extraction criterion is the exception as this one is calculated at in “calc_1” method.
Parameters if critName =“GlobFM”
csId Integer Specifies the coordinate system considered for the calculation of interface global force and global moment. Note that this coordinate system may differ from the coordinate system specified in interface definition above, even though we use the same “csId” Hash key.
refPoint Array Array of three Real values specifying the coordinates of the point wrt which global force and moment are calculated. Coordinates are given wrt to coordinate system specified by “csId” above.
format String Specifies the format in which results are saved in Excel table. Possible values are “R”, “RI” or “MP”. This parameter matters when complex Results are post-processed (SOL 111 analysis).
This extraction is done in “calc_1” method. This is because for the post-processing of SOL 111 interface results the results are complex and one performs an extraction of complex components instead of one extraction for each phase that is post-processed.
Parameters if critName =“Sliding”
FoS Real Safety Factor
Pmin Real Minimum value of bolts’ pretension
Cf Real Friction coefficient between assembled parts
Parameters if critName =“Gapping”
FoS Real Safety Factor
Pmin Real Minimum value of bolts’ pretension
Lg Real Prying length for bending moment contribution
Parameters if critName =“Insert”
FoS Real Safety Factor
PSS Real Insert tensile allowable
QSS Real Insert shear allowable
Parameters if critName =“PullThru”
FoS Real Safety Factor
PSS Real Insert tensile allowable
Parameters if critName =“ShearBearing”
FoS Real Safety Factor
QSS Real Insert shear allowable
Parameters if critName =“IfLoads”
No parameter are provided for this criterion. (“critParams” is an empty Hash.) The failure criterion saves load components as they have been extract from FEM Results, according to “interfaceDef” Hash parameters. (See above in the table.)
Parameters if critName =“NasaStd5020”
FoS Real Safety factor
D Real Connection diameter. (Does not seem to be used in calculation of failure criterion.)
Lg Real Prying length considered to account for the bending moment
hsp Real ...
etaPhi Real ...
Pmax Real Maximum bolt pretension
Pt Real Bolt tensile allowable
Ps Real Bolt shear allowable
Pb Real Bolt bending allowable
bSpInThreads Boolean True if the shear plane is in threaded part of fastener
bPrldCombined Boolean True if the preload is considered in fastener shear or combined failure analysis. (According to section A.7 of [otNCE21], this preload can be neglected for some failure modes.)
Parameters if critName =“NasaStd5020_DBG”
This criterion is used for debugging purpose only and very close to “NasaStd5020’´. Corresponding parameters may be modified without notification and are therefore not described here.

IV.4.1.2.4 “PostExtract” class

This method performs simple extractions of results, to be archived in excel-like SQL tables, but without actual calculation of failure criteria. This is an example of post-processing class in which no “calc_2” method is defined. Also, this class does not fill the “@srResults” member data.

Table IV.4.4: Parameters for the “postExtract” class.
Parameters for the extraction (“setData” parameters)
extractName String The name of the extraction
params Hash Other parameters. (See below.)
Extraction parameters (“params” Hash object)
extractType String type of extraction
resName String Name of the Result being extracted
loc String FEM location for the extraction (“EC”, “EN” or “N”)
format String Format of the extraction (“RI”, “MP” or “R”)
elemId Integer or String Element on which results are extracted
nodeId Integer or String Node on which results are extracted
layerId Integer or String Layer on which results are extracted
csId Integer or StringCoordinate system in which components are given. (Use “None” or “AsIs” is no modification of coordinate system is requested.)
deriv String Derivation criterion. Identification of a Result derivation from tensorial, vectorial or scalar Result to scalar result.
xlTableName String Name of the Excel table in which extractions are saved

IV.4.1.2.5 “PostBuckling” class

This class is used to post-process the buckling results. Post-processing of buckling results requires an additional preliminary step before launching the Static loop analysis. Method “identifyCriticalBucklingElemLoadCases” is used to build a separate SQLite database containing a summary of buckling load case results. File “DATA/postBucklingDatag.rb" in post-processing main directory illustrates the use of this method. For example:

    sqlDbName="buckling.db3"

    datFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_unit_xyz.bdf"
    resFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_unit_xyz.xdb"
    PostBuckling.identifyCriticalBucklingElemLoadCases(datFile,resFile,sqlDbName)

    datFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_temp_grad.bdf"
    resFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_temp_grad.xdb"
    PostBuckling.identifyCriticalBucklingElemLoadCases(datFile,resFile,sqlDbName)

    datFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_temp_disc.bdf"
    resFile="../../MODEL/EXEC_XDB/sol105_temp_disc.xdb"
    PostBuckling.identifyCriticalBucklingElemLoadCases(datFile,resFile,sqlDbName)

In this example, SQLite database containing the buckling results is stored in file “buckling.db3” in post-processing main directory.

The function builds for each load case in a Nastran SOL 105 analysis output file (HDF5 or XDB), a map of the critical load factors associated to the different parts of the structure. More precisely:

In the end, for each load case, one builds two scalar Results corresponding to the positive and negative envelopes respectively (Figure IV.4.1). The load case names to which envelope Results are associated are the Nastran static load case names. This means that the buckling load case names must be transformed into static ones. In our class, the default transformation is done in method “filterBucklingLcName” as follows:

    shortLcName=tmpName.strip.gsub("BUCK_","").gsub("BUCKLING_","")

This default transformation can be modified via a redefinition of method “filterBucklingLcName” in a class deriving from “PostBuckling”


PICT

Figure IV.4.1: Storage of buckling positive and negative critical load factor envelopes in SQLite database.

The rest of buckling post-processing is done as for the other criteria. The only difference is that the positive and negative envelopes of critical load fators are extracted from SQLite database "buckling.db3" and not from Nastran HDF5 or XDB files. One distinguishes the elementary and combined load cases:

As for the other post-processing classes, “PostBuckling” outputs “xl_” outputs and SR mapping on the structure. The calculation of buckling can be done for separate parts. Parameters of the “PostBuckling” class are summarized in Table IV.4.5. An example of buckling distribution of strnegth ratios is shown in Figure IV.4.2.

Table IV.4.5: Parameters for the “postBuckling” class.
Parameters for the buckling post-processing (“setData” parameters)
params Hash Other parameters. (See below.)
Extraction parameters (“params” Hash object)
FoS Real Factor of Safety
partName String post-processing name of the area
grpName String Group of nodes on which CLFs are extracted
xlTableName String Name of the “excel” output table
Buckling.gmsh String GMSH file name for buckling SR Result storage
Buckling.gmsh String Result name for buckling SR Result storage
sqlFileName StringPath to SQLite database from which CLF envelopes are read

PICT

Figure IV.4.2: Example of envelope of buckling strength ratios distribution.

IV.4.1.3 Other modules and classes

Two classes provide various utilities. See below.

IV.4.1.3.1 “Util” module

“Util” module provides following methods. We list below the main methods:

IV.4.1.3.2 “SqlWrap” class

This class is very short. It is wrapping around SQLite::database class, and has been introduced in such a way that all SQL code specific to SQLite is contained in this class. The purpose of this class is to ease the transfer of post-processing project to another SQL database system, if necessary. The class proposes only three methods: “initialize”, “execute” and “timeStamp”.

IV.4.2 Definition of data

Most of the definition of data is done by functions defined in “PROJECT/DATA” sub-directory. The main data files are directly located in “PROJECT’ main directory however. The main data files are:

Data are interpreted by calling different ruby methods and build different kinds of objects:

The idea of using CSV files to store the definition of parameters is a legacy from the excel post-processing described in Chapter X.D.2. It is also a very effective way to define the data. It improves the readability of data definition, and data definition in a combination of ruby code and CSV files ensures the flexibility needed to deal with specific cases.

Note that one of the post-processing data definition function does not involve the reading of a CSV file: “getSandwichData” method defines all the data in ruby code. This has been done because only one corresponding instance is created in the project. However, in more normal circumstances, it would be advantageous to define the data in a CSV file as well.

In general, the meaning of a parameter in a CSV file depends on the index of the column in which it is defined. Then, it is the responsibility of user to verify that the in each CSV data line, each value is inserted in the appropriate column, so that ruby code that interprets CSV lines fills the appropriate parameters for the construction of each “postConnect” object.

For the post-processing of connections, the CSV file “Interfaces.csv” that defines the data is formatted following conventions that differ from those adopted for the other types of post-processing criteria. Correspondingly the ruby method that reads the CSV lines and interprets them works differently. The CSV file is characterized by the insertion of directive lines that start with a keyword and specify how the following CSV lines must be interpreted:

An example of CSV lines with interpretation directives is presented in Figure IV.4.3. (Directive keywords are coloured in red in the excel worksheet.) We observe that the factor 0.001 is always associated to data specified in millimeters. This corresponds to the conversion of these values to meters.


PICT

Figure IV.4.3: Example of definition of data in excel CSV file for the postprocessing of interface data. The example corresponds to the definition of data for the calculation of bolts.

The approach for connection “post” objects construction is more flexible. It allows to consider several formats for the different lines of a CSV file. This is particularly appropriate for the definition of connection “post” objects, because the post-processing failure criteria may differ significantly depending on the interface considered.

IV.4.3 Sorting tools

In the post-processing example, all the outputs are saved in a single SQLite database. Some of the results can be accessed interactively via “SQLiteAdmin” program. This is for example the case for the excel-like tables in the database. SQLiteAdmin program allows to create views, export tables or views in excel. This means that part of the results saved in the database can directly be used to assess structure performance.

On the other hand, the “StrengthRatios” SQLite table, stores results in BLOB objects, and these cannot be visualized without specific conversion. One provides in the example, a ruby “‘final.rb” script that manipulates StrengthRatios content and performs the following operations:

Several of the methods called by “final.rb” script are programmed in “Manips” module stored in “PGR/manips.rb” file. (This file has been recently displaced from “DATA" to “PGR” directory.)


PICT

Figure IV.4.4: Example of definition of data for the calculation of different types of strength ratio envelopes.


PICT

Figure IV.4.5: Definition of the envelopes of load cases considered for the splitting of SR results and production of corresponding GMSH outputs.


PICT

Figure IV.4.6: Definition of the different criteria, parts and interfaces considered for the splitting of SR results and production of corresponding GMSH outputs.


Table IV.4.6: Correspondence of “location” specifications, SQLite DB keys in SR Results, Results extraction methods and GMSH output locations.
location SQLite DB key Result Extraction methodGmsh output location
ElemCenterPointsElemCenterPoints ElemCenters ElemCenterPoints
Elements Elements ElemCorners Elements
ElemStations ElemCenterPoints Elements ElemNodePoints
NodesOnly NodesOnly NodesOnly Nodes
Nodes Nodes Nodes Nodes

IV.4.4 Recovery of results in excel and reporting word

A “reportToExcelAndWord.xlsm” excel Workbook performs the final extractions to produce the final excel outputs, and the word report. This workbook contains several macros that automate the different worksheet buttons. The following operations are possible:

IV.4.5 A few tricks...

IV.4.5.1 Exceptions

Errors occuring during the execution of post-processing ruby scripts are often difficult to track. Generally, the exceptions raised by the different methods in the script do not convey useful information to identify the location of the error and its meaning. A majority of the errors are related to the definition of data, but one sometimes needs to go deep into the code, adding “print” statements to identify the mistake (wrong file name, reference to a non-existing group, missing parameter for an extraction of a failure criterion...).

To ease debugging, a “PrjExcept” class, deriving from ruby standard “Exception” class is defined in “PGR/prjExcept.rb” file. This class stored information related to the location of the exception, and optionnally additional information that may help to identify the source of the problem. The “dump” method of “PrjExcept” class writes to standard output stream the call stack and additional information related to an exception. For example, in “static.rb” script, one has the following code:

        postList.each do |p|
            begin
                p.initCalcSteps()
                p.calculate("Static")
            rescue Exception => x
                printf("Failed Post object %s with ID %s\n",p.to_s,p.postID())
                PrjExcept.debug(x)
            end
        end

The “PrjExcept.debug(x)” inscrution calls a class method in “PrjExcept” class that write to standard output detailed information about the exception. The information corresponds to the type of exception, the location in program where exception has been raised (call stack), and additional contextual messages.

An example of output provided by the “PrjExcept.debug(x)” statement is as follows:

Exception of class PrjExcept
DUMPING exception:
   PrjExcept CALL STACK (most recent call first):
         1: from static.rb:53:in ‘<main>’
         2: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/DATA/staticLoadCasesData.rb:251:in ‘loop’
         3: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/dbAndLoadCases.rb:453:in ‘loopOnStaticCases’
         4: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/dbAndLoadCases.rb:453:in ‘each’
         5: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/dbAndLoadCases.rb:488:in ‘block in loopOnStaticCases’
         6: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/DATA/staticLoadCasesData.rb:252:in ‘block in loop’
         7: from static.rb:64:in ‘block in <main>’
         8: from static.rb:64:in ‘each’
         9: from static.rb:67:in ‘block (2 levels) in <main>’
        10: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/post.rb:52:in ‘calculate’
        11: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/postConnect.rb:269:in ‘calc_0’
        12: from C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/TESTSAT/RUBY/PROJECT/PGR/postConnect.rb:249:in ‘extractConnectLoads’
   PrjExcept MESSAGES:
      Obtains nil resF Result for "MPCFRC"
      Failed to calculate calc_0
         param :  interfaceDef => {"ifName"=>"pan_MX/bar_MXPY (MPCFRC)", "grpNameA"=>"pan_MX", "grpNameB"=>"bar_MXPY", "method"=>"MPCFRC"}
         param :  bRedistr => false
         param :  csId => 5
         param :  direction => [0.0, 0.0, 1.0]
         param :  type => M6
         param :  criteria => [["Gapping", "Gapping.gmsh", "Gapping", "xl_Gapping", {"FoS"=>1.56, "Pmin"=>7200.0, "Lg"=>0.003}], ["Sliding", "Sliding.gmsh", "Sliding", "xl_Sliding", {"FoS"=>1.25, "Pmin"=>7200.0, "Cf"=>0.25}], ["Insert", "Insert.gmsh", "Insert", "xl_Insert", {"FoS"=>1.56, "PSS"=>3300.0, "QSS"=>4500.0}]]

Sometimes an exception is not related to an error in scripts or data definition. For example, when the justification involves structure configurations in which part of the structure is missing (panel removed) the corresponding post-processing may fail and raise an exception. Then, it is advisable to comment out the call to “PrjExcept.debug(x)” in order to keep standard output as clean as possible:

        postList.each do |p|
            begin
                p.initCalcSteps()
                p.calculate("Static")
            rescue Exception => x
                printf("Failed Post object %s with ID %s\n",p.to_s,p.postID())
                # PrjExcept.debug(x)
            end
        end

Alternatively, debugging information can be output only for a small selection of load cases and post-processing objects. To do this, appropriate tests must be inserted in the code above.

The call stack and several messages that may help to understand the error can be read. These messages are created in the different ruby methods where the exception is created. For example, the previous exception is created in “extractConnectLoads” of “PostConnect” class as follows:

        if resF==nil then
            raise PrjExcept.new(format("Obtains nil resF Result for \"%s\"",extractionMethod))
        end
        if resM==nil then
            raise PrjExcept.new(format("Obtains nil resM Result for \"%s\"",extractionMethod))
        end

The messages are added in “calc_0” method by the following instructions:

        ...
        rescue Exception => x
            x2=PrjExcept.new(x)
            x2.addLine(format("Failed to redistribute connection loads"))
            Util::addParamsToPrjExcept(x2,"   param : ",interfaceDef)
            raise x2
        ...

IV.4.5.2 Filtering the reading of Results

A post-processing shall be run several times. In many cases, the different runs differ by the data of part of the post-processing. For example, one may fix errors in the connections post-processing, or test design modifications (bigger fasteners). For this example, it is recommended to re-run only the post-processing of connections. This can be done by commenting out the construction of other post-processing objects. For example, in “static.rb”:

    postList=[]
    #~ postList+=getAllStressData()
    #~ postList+=getSandwichData()
    postList+=getInterfacePostData()
    #~ postList+=getStaticExtractData()

this reduces somewhat the post-processing time.

One can further reduce the post-processing time by telling the “ResultsStorage” module that some of the Results must not be read from solver output files. For example:

    resFilter=[]
    resFilter << "Grid Point Forces, MPC Forces"
    resFilter << "Grid Point Forces, MPC Moments"
    resFilter << "Displacements, Translational"
    resFilter << "Displacements, Rotational"
    ResultsStorage.setResNamesFilter(resFilter)

The last statement specifies the list of Results that are read and/or generate by linear combinations of elementary Results. In above example, the reduction of time spent on reading is generally very significant.

IV.4.6 Conclusions

The post-processing object presented in this chapter is just an example of what can be done with FeResPost to manage calculations for a global project. It is improvable in many ways:

Part V
FeResPost Python bindings

Chapter V.0
Introduction

FeResPost is also distributed as a Python compiled library.

In general, the class names, their methods and attributes (properties), the parameters of these methods and attributes are the same as those available in the FeResPost ruby extension. The user is referred to Parts I, II, III and IV to find information on the use of the different classes and methods. In most cases, the information given there is sufficient to use the Python extension.

V.0.1 Accessing the Python extension

Typically, the FeResPost Classes and Modules are imported with a statement such as:

    from FeResPost import *

Note however that it works only if the different environment variables have been initialized correctly. Typically, this is done through the batch files that are used to launch the example scripts, and the following variables are generally initialized:

    set LIB=
    set INCLUDE=
    set PYTHONPATH=C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/PYTHON/PYTHON_35
    set PYTHONINSTALLDIR=C:/NewProgs/PYTHON/PYTHON_35
    set REDISTRPATH=C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/REDISTR
    set PATH=%PYTHONINSTALLDIR%;%REDISTRPATH%;C:/Windows/System32

Of course, the different paths will have to be adapted to the particular installation and to the version of Python being used. See the description of ruby examples in Chapter IV.0 for more explanations on the “PATH” variable definition.

V.0.2 Python versus ruby

Most of the differences of FeResPost Python and ruby libraries are directly related to the differences of the two languages, which are very similar as far as the different language concepts are concerned. Therefore, the adaptation of ruby examples to Python language should not be very difficult.

Some differences between the Python and ruby extensions are highlighted below that are related to specific programmatic aspects of the two different systems.

V.0.2.1 Creating class instances

New instances of the FeResPost classes are obtained by calling the corresponding class constructor:

   ...
   from FeResPost import *
   ...
   db=NastranDb()
   ...

V.0.2.2 Associative containers and Arrays

The Python “list” object corresponds to ruby “Array”, and the Python “Dictionary” corresponds to ruby “Hash” objects. Note, however, that Python dictionary keys cannot be “list” objects. When this problem occurs, the ruby Array should be converted into a Python tuple instead of a Python list. (See for example the example “PYTHON/EX23/testHDF.py” in section V.1.2.)

V.0.2.3 Iterators

It is not possible to define several iterators in a given class in Python. Therefore, several special “Iterator” classes have been created in Python library. They are returned by the different FeResPost classes as is done for the COM component.

Let us illustrate it by an example... Consider the “each_ply” iterator defined in ClaLam class of FeResPost ruby extension. With the ruby extension, the iteration on the plies of a laminate may be performed as follows:

    ...
    lam.each_ply do |plyDescr|
        ...
    end
    ...

With Python, the code becomes:

    ...
    for ply in lam.iter_ply():
        ...
    ...

Alternatively:

    ...
    x=lam.iter_ply()
    for ply in x:
        ...
    ...

As in the FeResPost ruby extension, each iterator method name starts with “each_”, correspondingly, the Python methods returning an Iterator object have a name that starts with “iter_”. The correspondence between ruby extension methods and COM component methods is obvious: “each_ply” becomes “iter_ply”, “each_material” becomes “iter_material”,...

V.0.2.4 “nil” arguments

With FeResPost ruby extension, an optional argument can be set to “nil” when not provided. The “nil” argument is to be replaced by “None” value in Python.

V.0.2.5 Exceptions

Python exceptions are managed in the same way as ruby exceptions. Only the message associated with standard exceptions is printed differently:

    try:
        db.readBdf("unit_xyz_V1.bdf",["../../MODEL/MESH/"],"bdf",{},True)
    except BaseException as x :
        print("\n\nMaybe you should modify the two first include statements in main file!")
        print("**********************************************************************\n")

        print("Got exception with following message:\n")
        print(str(x))

Chapter V.1
Python examples

All Ruby examples have been translated to Python and can be found in the “PYTHON” directory. As the adaptation from Ruby to Python is straightforward, this chapter is also very short. We only highlight some of the differences related to the Ruby and Python languages.

V.1.1 Iterators

An example of an iterator with the Python library can be found in “PYTHON/EX02/printGroups.py” and reads as follows:

for groupName in db.iter_groupName():
    grp = db.getGroupCopy(groupName)
    nodesNbr = grp.NbrElements
    elementsNbr = grp.NbrNodes
    rbesNbr = grp.NbrRbes
    coordNbr = grp.NbrCoordSys
    print("%20s%10d%10d%10d%10d"%(groupName,nodesNbr,elementsNbr,
        rbesNbr,coordNbr))

Note:

V.1.2 Accessing HDF and XDB results

An example of reading HDF results with the Python library is given in “PYTHON/EX23/testHDF.py” and corresponds to the Ruby example described in section IV.2.9. The part related to HDF access looks as follows:

    Post.loadHdf5Library("C:/NewProgs/HDF5/HDF5-1.8.20-win32/bin/hdf5.dll")
...
    db.attachHdf(hdfName)

    lcNames=db.getHdfAttachmentLcNames(hdfName)
    lcName=lcNames[lcIndex]
    scNames=db.getHdfAttachmentScNames(hdfName,lcName)
    scName=scNames[scIndex]
    resNames=db.getHdfAttachmentResNames(hdfName,lcName)
    hdfResNames=list(resNames)

    db.readHdfAttachmentResults(hdfName,lcName,scName,resNames)
...

Note that the example also outputs results read from an XDB file:

...
    results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbName,lcName,scName,hdfResNames)
...
    for tpName in hdfResNames:
        print lcName,scName,tpName
        resKey=tuple((lcName,scName,tpName))
        tmpRes=None
        if resKey in results.keys():
            tmpRes=results[resKey]
        if (tmpRes):
            os.write("%-20s%-25s%-60s%-10d\n"%(lcName,scName,tpName,tmpRes.Size))
            os.write("%10d%10d%14g%14g : %s\n"%(tmpRes.getIntId(0),tmpRes.getIntId(1),tmpRes.getRealId(0),tmpRes.getRealId(1),tmpRes.Name))
            Util.printRes(os,tmpRes.Name,tmpRes)
        else:
            print lcName,scName,tpName
...

(Note that access to elements of the “results” dictionary is done via the “resKey” tuple.)

V.1.3 SQLite examples

The use of the SQLite library is explained in the Python documentation. With FeResPost, the BLOB object returned by the “toBlob” method must be converted into a buffer using the “sqlite3.Binary” function:

for lcName in lcNames:
    for resName in resNames:
        results=db.getAttachmentResults(xdbFileName,lcName,scNames,resName)
        if (results):
            for key,res in results.iteritems():
                print key
                sqldb.execute(
                    "insert or replace into dynam_results_1 values(?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?)",
                    [lcName,key[1],resName,res.TensorOrder,
                    res.getIntId(0),res.getIntId(1),
                    res.getRealId(0),res.getRealId(1),
                    res.Size,sqlite3.Binary(res.toBlob())])
            sqldb.commit()
        else:
            print "NO FOR" + lcName + resName

V.1.4 Superelements

The Python examples in directory “TESTSAT/PYTHON/EX27” are a simple translation of the Ruby example discussed in section IV.2.11.

Part VI
FeResPost as COM component

Chapter VI.0
Introduction

On Windows OS, FeResPost is distributed at the same time as a ruby extension, and as a COM component. Several characteristics of FeResPost as a COM component are described in this Part.

In general, the class names, their methods and attributes (properties), the parameters of these methods and attributes are the same as those available in the FeResPost ruby extension. When necessary, modifications have been done in the ruby extension in order to maintain as much as possible the compatibility between the ruby extension and the COM component. Therefore, the user is referred to Parts I, II, III and IV to find information on the use of the different classes and methods. In most cases, the information given there is sufficient to use the COM component.

However, an exact match between the ruby extension and COM component is not possible. The conventions that have been adopted are detailed below when incompatibility problems were not solved. More generally, the specific aspects are explained here of the use of FeResPost as a COM component.

This Part of the document is organized as follows:

The present Chapter discusses the following points:

The installation (registration) of the COM component is described in section X.A.4.5.

VI.0.1 Accessing the COM component

A distinction is made between the different programming languages and programming environments. The access to the component is always done by a request of the kind

   ‘‘create object’’ FeResPost_3_4_4.Application

in which the three integers correspond to the version of FeResPost. (Several versions of FeResPost can be installed simultaneously on a computer.) The same conventions for the naming of the FeResPost COM component are intended to be maintained.

When the application is started, the corresponding window appears. This window can be made visible or invisible by setting the “Visible” property of the application object to True or False respectively. The window presents for each class a count of the number of objects available in the memory, and of the number of references to these objects. Note that when the property is set to True, the execution of the program might slow down significantly. Therefore, the property should be set to True for debugging only.

VI.0.1.1 Accessing the COM component in ruby

Even though FeResPost is first programmed as a ruby extension, the COM component can also be accessed from ruby language. For this, the “win32ole” ruby extension must first be required; it allows the access to all the COM components installed on the computer. Then the FeResPost component can be accessed by requiring the corresponding application:

   require ’win32ole’

   ...

   frpApp = WIN32OLE.new("FeResPost_3_4_4.Application")

In the example above, the 3.4.4 version of the FeResPost COM component was requested, and a reference is stored to this application in “frpApp” variable.

VI.0.1.2 Accessing the COM component in python

The access to the FeResPost COM component from python is similar to the access from ruby. A win32com extension must first be imported, then the component can be accessed:

   import win32com.client
   ...
   frpApp = win32com.client.Dispatch("FeResPost_5_2_0.Application")
   frpApp.Visible = False  # much faster than the default (visible) mode
   ...

VI.0.1.3 Accessing the COM component in VBscript

We do not recommend using VBscript with FeResPost as the language suffers severe limitations or seems a little “fussy” compared to other languages.

VI.0.1.4 Accessing the COM component in VBA

When programming in VBA, for example in excel, the component must first be referenced in the excel workbook. For this:

1.

Open the VBA editor from an excel workbook.

2.

Go to the “Tools” menu and select the “References” menu.

3.

There, you select the (or one of the) available FeResPost library. For example, for version 3.1.7, the library is referred to as “FeResPost 3.1.7 COM server”.

4.

Quit the “Tools/References” menu.

5.

Then, the server can be accessed from excel VBA code with a statement like:

              set frpApp= CreateObject("FeResPost_3_1_7.Application")

Once the FeResPost component library is activated, the different classes and the corresponding methods can be viewed in the object explorer. During the VBA program execution, the behavior of the different classes and methods can also be watched.

If you want to change the version of VBA used in an existing excel VBA project, proceed as follows:

1.

It may be practical to un-activate the execution of excel VBA macros before doing the following operations.

2.

Make sure that the new version of FeResPost is properly registered.

3.

Open the VBA editor from an excel workbook.

4.

Go to the “Tools” menu and select the “References” menu.

5.

Un-select the old version of FeResPost COM server. (The one you no longer want to use.)

6.

Quit the “Tools/References” menu.

7.

Re-enter into the “Tools” menu and select the “References” menu.

8.

Select the new version of FeResPost COM server you want to use in the workbook.

9.

Quit the “Tools/References” menu.

10.

Do not forget to modify the version of the server requested by “CreateObject” method in excel VBA code.

If you no longer need the old version of FeResPost COM server, you can un-register it and delete the corresponding files from your computer.

VI.0.1.5 Accessing the COM component in compiled languages

Section VII.1.1.3 shows an example of C++ program in which the component is accessed. This object shows that the use of COM component from compiled languages is significantly more difficult than from interpreted languages. This is related to the fact that the management of many operations has to be done by the programmer and is no longer dealt with by the interpreted language.

This example also shows that additional information should be added to the documentation to allow an easy access to the different methods and classes of the component by the compiled languages programmers. This documentation is still under development.

In fact, the example shows even more clearly that the component being developed is suited for use with languages that support the Microsoft IDispatch interface. However, a library adapted to the use with C++ language should also be developed. Consequently we do not advise to use the component from C++ or C language.

VI.0.2 COM component versus ruby extension

One highlights below some differences between COM component and ruby extension that are related to specific programmatic aspects of the two different systems.

VI.0.2.1 Creating class instances

New instances of the FeResPost classes are obtained by calling the “newObject” method of FeResPost application. The argument of this method is a String containing the name of the class of which a new object is requested. For example, in ruby, the creation of new instances is done with statements like:

   ...
   frpApp = WIN32OLE.new("FeResPost_3_4_4.Application")
   ...
   db=frpApp.newObject("ClaDb")
   ...
   mat=frpApp.newObject("ClaMat")
   ...

VI.0.2.2 Associative containers and Arrays

By default, COM does not define associative containers (i.e. containers that associate keys and values, like the “Hash” class of ruby language.) As in FeResPost ruby extension, Hash objects are often used as method arguments, or values returned by these methods, A convention must be agreed upon to determine the type of arguments that are to be used to replace these Hashes.

The convention that has been adopted is that each Hash is replaced by a 2D Array:

One notes that the indices used to access the elements of an Array start with 0 corresponding to the first element. This is a convention that has systematically been used for all the Array produced by FeResPost COM component. This convention is that same as the one of FeResPost ruby extension, and is consistent with C, C++, ruby and many other programming languages.

VI.0.2.3 Iterators

COM provides a standard interface that allows the writing of iterators on collections of different types. In FeResPost, the iteration is based on the IEnumVARIANT interface. One notes however, that it does not seem possible to implement a class that defines several enumerators. This is why, an additional class corresponding to the iteration has been created in FeResPost: the “Iterator” class.

The “Iterator” class is common to all the iterators of all the FeResPost classes. But an Iterator object behaves differently depending on the class that produces it and/or the method of the class that is used to produce it.

Let us illustrate it by an example... Consider the “each_ply” iterator defined in ClaLam class of FeResPost ruby extension. With the ruby extension, the iteration on the plies of a laminate may be performed as follows:

   ...
   lam.each_ply do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

With FeResPost COM component, an Iterator must first be produced before iterating on the elements of the corresponding collection. This can be done as follows:

   ...
   plyIt = lam.iter_ply
   plyIt.each do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

This example illustrates the conventions that have been used when programming the FeResPost COM component to transpose the iterators proposed in the ruby extension:

1.

As in the FeResPost ruby extension, each iterator method name starts with “each_”, correspondingly, the COM component methods returning an Iterator object have a name that starts with “iter_”. The correspondence between ruby extension methods and COM component methods is obvious: “each_ply” becomes “iter_ply”, “each_material” becomes “iter_material”,...

2.

When the COM iteration method has no argument, it is a property “getter” that is used instead of a method. Otherwise, a method with argument is defined.

3.

In ruby using the COM component, the iteration on the Iterator object is done using “each” iteration method.

Note that the shorter notation is preferred to the ruby lines given as an example above:

   ...
   lam.iter_ply.each do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

The corresponding code in python may be:

   ...
   for plyDescr in lam.iter_ply:
      ...
   ...

And in VBscript, the equivalent is:

   ...
   for each plyDescr in lam.iter_ply
      ...
   Next
   ...

VI.0.2.4 Operators

Operators are unsupported in COM. Therefore, the operators that are defined by ruby classes are replaced by methods in COM component:

For example, the following ruby statement:

   z=x+y

becomes, with COM component:

   z=x.opAdd(y)

Note that the different “operator” methods defined in ruby “Post” module are also defined in the “Application” class of COM component (section VI.2.1).

VI.0.2.5 Singleton methods

In ruby language, classes may define singleton methods that can be called directly from the class, and not from an instance of the class. Apparently, this capability is unsupported by COM classes.

Therefore, all the singleton methods defined in ruby extension are defined as instance methods in COM component. This means that before using such a method, an instance of the corresponding class must be defined first.

VI.0.2.6 “Clone” methods

When a class of the ruby extension defines a “clone” method, the corresponding method of the COM component is named “makeCopy”. This has been done to avoid method name conflicts when the COM component is used with ruby language.

VI.0.2.7 “Post” Module

In ruby extension, several methods are defined in “Post” Module. In COM component, these methods are defined in “Application” class.

VI.0.2.8 Complex arguments

In ruby extension, several methods have complex arguments. No standard “Complex” class exists in COM, even though the “Complex” class is available in most programming languages. In the FeResPost COM component, it was decided that the convention is to represent Complex numbers by Arrays of two real numbers corresponding to the real and imaginary parts of the number.

VI.0.2.9 “nil” arguments

With FeResPost ruby extension, an optional argument can be set to “nil” when not provided. The “nil” argument also works when the COM component is used with ruby language. In VBA, the “nil” argument can be replaced by an uninitialized Variant object (VT_EMPTY variant type).

VI.0.2.10 Exceptions

It is not possible to associate an error message to errors returned by COM component. But method “getLastErrorMessage” defined in the FeResPost Application class allows retrieval of the message associated with the last exception raised by FeResPost. This method can be used to retrieve and print the message. Here is a ruby example of exception management with COM component:

   begin
       db.readBdf("unit_xyz_V1.bdf",["../../MODEL/MESH/"],"bdf",nil,true)
   rescue Exception => x then
       printf("\n\nMaybe you should modify the two first include statements in main file!\n")
       printf("**********************************************************************\n\n")
       puts frpApp.getLastErrorMessage()
   end

VI.0.2.11 Selection of standard output for information messages

In general, the selection of output stream for the writing of FeResPost information messages follows the same rules as for ruby extension, as explained in section I.6.1. However, it is not possible to set FeResPost information output stream to COM client’s output streams. This is related to the fact that the type of output stream depends on the client language (ruby, python, VBA, C++...). This has two consequences:

1.

The equivalent to method “setInfoStreamToClientStream” does not exist in COM component.

2.

COM component default information stream is set to C++ std::cout output stream, and not to the client’s language standard output stream.

Chapter VI.1
CLA classes

The different classes described in this Chapter correspond to the classes described in Part II. The methods defined in FeResPost COM component CLA classes are the same as those defined in the FeResPost ruby extension CLA classes, except the particular issue of the iterators discussed in section VI.0.2.3, and of the “clone” methods that have been replaced by “makeCopy” methods.

Similarly, the arguments defined for the different methods of CLA classes are the same as those for the classes of FeResPost ruby extension, except for the remark made in section VI.0.2.2 for the “Hash” arguments or returned values.

In the rest of this Chapter, a few remarks about the different classes are made. But otherwise, the reader is referred to the different chapters of Part II to find information on the use of COM component CLA classes.

VI.1.1 “ClaDb” class

This class corresponds to “IClaDb” interface. No particular remark is needed except regarding the iterators:

The “makeCopy” method returns a copy of the object.

VI.1.2 “ClaMat” class

This class corresponds to “IClaMat” interface.

Methods returning a 2D matrix return an Array with 2 dimensions. These methods are “getCompliance”, “getStiffness”, “getInPlaneCompliance”, “getInPlaneStiffness”, “getOOPSCompliance”, “getOOPSStiffness”, “getInPlaneLambdaT”, “getInPlaneLambdaH”. (In ruby extension, these methods return an array of arrays.)

The “makeCopy” method returns a copy of the object.

VI.1.3 “ClaLam” class

This class corresponds to “IClaLam” interface.

Methods returning a 2D matrix return an Array with 2 dimensions. These methods are “get_ABBD”, “get_G”, “get_abbd_complMat”, “get_g_complMat”, “get_LambdaT”, “get_LambdaH”. (In ruby extension, these methods return an array of arrays.)

Methods that return Ply stresses, strains, temperature or moisture return 2D Arrays of size N*8 or N*3.

The “getDerived”, “getFailureIndices” and “getReserveFactors” methods return Arrays of 2 objects. The second object is a 2D Array in COM component.

Methods “getMaxDerived”, “getMinDerived”, “getMaxFailureIndices”, “getMinFailureIndices”, “getMaxReserveFactors” and “getMinReserveFactors” return 2-dimensional Arrays of sizes N*3.

Iterator “each_ply” in ruby extension becomes “iter_ply”.

The “makeCopy” method returns a copy of the object.

VI.1.4 “ClaLoad” class

This class corresponds to “IClaLoad” interface. No particular remark is needed. The “makeCopy” method returns a copy of the object.

Chapter VI.2
Generic FeResPost classes

Most classes defined in this chapter correspond to the same classes in ruby extension.

One class corresponds to modules in ruby extension: the “Application” class described in section VI.2.1 corresponds more or less to the “FeResPost” module in ruby extension, even though its purpose is not exactly the same. This class also inherits the methods defined in “Post” module of ruby extension.

The two classes “Iterator” and “IterX” correspond to the iterators defined in the different classes of the COM component. These classes are not described in this chapter. Indeed, the explanations given in section VI.0.2.3 about the use of iterators are considered sufficient. Of course no corresponding class exists in the ruby extension.

VI.2.1 FeResPost Application class

This class corresponds to the “IApplication” interface. Only one object of the class Application can be created, even though several references to this object can be used in a program.

VI.2.1.1 Management of the Application

The “Visible” property can either be set or got. The value of this property specifies whether the Application main window is visible or not. The Application main window shows the number of FeResPost COM objects that have been created and the number of references to these object. This information is provided by class, and a summary for all classes is also given in the last “TOTAL” line.

Note that it is not because an Application is not “Visible” that it is not running.

VI.2.1.2 Creation of other objects

The method “newObject” is used to create objects for the different classes of the COM component. Its argument is a String corresponding to the name of the class for which an object is requested. The created object is the return value. For example, when the following statement is used:

   db=frpApp.newObject("NastranDb")

creates a new Nastran DataBase object and a reference is stored in “db” variable.

VI.2.1.3 Methods corresponding to “Post” module in ruby extension

All the methods which in ruby extension are defined in “Post” module, are defined in “Application” class for the COM component. Presently, these methods are

VI.2.1.4 Changing working directory

When working with “FeResPost.exe” out-of-proc solver, also called “local server” it may be interesting to change the working directory of the server, to match the one of the client, for example. Two methods have been added to the COM component:

These two methods are specific to the COM component. They are not defined in the .NET assembly, or the ruby extension.

For “in-proc” server (or dll server), these two methods have no effect.

VI.2.2 Generic DataBase class

This class corresponds to the generic DataBase class of ruby described in Chapter I.1. The class cannot be instantiated; only the interface “IDataBase” has been defined. The DataBase classes corresponding to the different solvers derive from the “IDataBase” interface.

The iterators of the DataBase class in ruby extension have also been defined in COM component: “iter_abbreviation”, “iter_groupName”, “iter_resultKey”, “iter_resultKeyCaseId”, “iter_resultKeySubCaseId”, “iter_resultKeyLcScId” and “iter_resultKeyResId” properties in COM component correspond to the “each_abbreviation”, “each_groupName”, “each_resultKey”,
“each_resultKeyCaseId”, “each_resultKeySubCaseId”, “each_resultKeyLcScId” and
“each_resultKeyResId” iterators in ruby extension.

The four singleton methods “enableLayeredResultsReading”, “disableLayeredResultsReading”, “enableSubLayersReading” and “disableSubLayersReading” in the ruby extension generic DataBase class are defined as instance methods. This means that an instance of the derived class must be created to use these singleton methods.

The same is true for methods “setStorageBufferMaxCapacity” and “getStorageBufferMaxCapacity”.

VI.2.3 Group class

Most methods of the “Group” class are exactly the same as the ones defined in the Group class of ruby extension (Chapter I.3). Several methods or properties are different however:

VI.2.4 CoordSys class

Methods of the “CoordSys” class are the same as the ones defined in the CoordSys class in ruby extension. The “makeCopy” method returns a copy of the object.

VI.2.5 Result class

Most methods of the “Result” class are exactly the same as the ones defined in the Result class in ruby extension (Chapter I.4). Several methods or properties are different however:

VI.2.6 ResKeyList class

Methods of the “ResKeyList” class are the same as the ones defined in the ResKeyList class in ruby extension. However, a few differences exist:

Chapter VI.3
Supported Solvers

The two classes that correspond to the two supported solvers (Nastran and Samcef) are complete.

VI.3.1 The “NastranDb” class

The “NastranDb” class stores a model and results corresponding to the Nastran finite element solver. It corresponds to “INastranDb” interface that derives from the “IDataBase” interface described in section VI.2.2. Methods specific to the COM component are:

The reader is referred to Chapter III.1 for the description of the other methods.

VI.3.2 The “SamcefDb” class

The “SamcefDb” class stores a model and results corresponding to the Samcef finite element solver. It corresponds to “ISamcefDb” interface that derives from the “IDataBase” interface described in section VI.2.2. The other methods that are available are:

The reader is referred to Chapter III.2 for the description of the other methods.

Part VII
FeResPost Examples with COM Component

Chapter VII.0
Introduction

COM examples can be run on Windows only. These examples should be launched via batch scripts that define the environment variables needed for the execution. Most of the COM examples are written in Python and can be launched with the corresponding batch script. For examples in directory “COM/EX01", the command “readBdf_V4.bat” launches the Python script “readBdf_V4.py”. The “readBdf_V4.bat” script contains, for example, the following lines:

        setlocal
        call "../ENV/env.bat"
        python readBdf_V4.py
        endlocal
        sleep 3
    

in which the environment defines the variables specifying the version of python to be used, and the PATH to the directories containing executables and libraries used for the execution. For example:

        set WINLIBS=C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/REDISTR;C:/Windows/SysWow64
        set PATH=C:/NewProgs/RUBY/RUBY_230_mingw32_x64/bin;C:/NewProgs/PYTHON/PYTHON_312_64;
            C:/NewProgs/PYTHON/PYTHON_312_64/Scripts;%WINLIBS%
        set HDF5_PLUGIN_PATH=C:/NEWPROGS/HDF5/MSC/nastran_2024/plugins_hdf5
    

Most of the COM examples are obtained via an automated translation of ruby examples. Their presentation in “COM” directory follows closely the structure in RUBY directory. Additional COM examples are presented in “COM/EX99*” directories.

The launch of excel examples is slightly different. For example, the script launching the classical laminate analysis with excel in directory “EX99_XL_CLA” contains:

        setlocal
        call "../ENV/env.bat"
        set PATH=C:\Users\ferespost\Documents\TESTSAT\COM\SQLITE_4_EXCEL\32;
            D:\FERESPOST\SQLITE_4_EXCEL\64
        LaminateAnalysis.xls
        endlocal
    

Chapter VII.1
COM examples with various languages

This chapter presents examples illustrating the use of the COM component with interpreted and compiled languages. All the examples will only work if the COM component has been properly installed, as explained in section X.A.4.5. Note also that the examples below assume that version 3.4.0 of the FeResPost COM component is installed. If a different version is installed, some lines of the program will need to be adapted.

VII.1.1 Using COM component with several languages

This section presents an example in which the FeResPost COM component is used to automate CLA calculations using several different programming languages. The same calculations are performed in each language, allowing the user to identify the similarities and differences between FeResPost COM automation in different languages:

Section VII.1.1.4 was added to eventually present an automation program written in C; however, this has not been done yet.

VII.1.1.1 Using component with python

The file “COM/EX99_LANGS/testClaCom.py” contains the Python code for automating CLA calculations. Some explanation of how the program works is given below.

First, some standard Python packages must be imported to enable OLE automation in the program. The following statements are therefore added at the beginning of the program:

         import sys
         import gc

         from win32com.client import Dispatch, constants
      

The program then defines several methods that are used in the main program:

No “main” function is defined in the program; instead, the last lines of the file contain the instructions that perform the main analysis.

First, the component must be accessed and a ClaDb object created and initialized, as follows:

         frpApp = Dispatch("FeResPost_3_4_0.Application")
         db=frpApp.newObject("ClaDb")
         db.readNeutral("test.ndf")
      

Note that accessing the application requires its full name, which includes the version identifier. This means that the name must be changed if a different version of the component is used. Initializing the ClaDb object involves reading the “test.ndf” neutral data file.

The results are written to a disk file:

         os=file("testClaCom_py.txt","w")
      

Note that iterators are easy to use in Python. Readers familiar with Python should have no trouble understanding the following lines:

         for lamId in db.iter_laminateId:
            printLamProperties(db,os,lamId)
            for loadId in db.iter_loadId:
               printLoadResponse(db,os,lamId,loadId,0.0,criteria)
      

The outer loop iterates over the laminates and prints their properties. Inside this loop, an inner loop iterates over the loads stored in the database, calculating and printing the laminate load response for each one. The criteria calculated are: “TsaiHill”, “Ilss” and “YamadaSun”.

When the program is run, the FeResPost component application window displays the number of referenced component objects and the number of references to each. You can stop the program at various points to check this information, for example by adding Windows message boxes.

VII.1.1.2 Using component with ruby

The file “COM/EX99_LANGS/testClaCom.rb” contains the Ruby code for automating CLA calculations. This program is very similar to the Python program:

Note that the window created at the end of the program may indicate that some references to COM objects have not been released. This is a known issue in Ruby’s “win32ole” extension, not in the FeResPost COM component.

VII.1.1.3 Using component with C++

The example is provided in the following files:

The batch file “COM/EX99_LANGS/build.bat” is used to compile the example. The compilation output should look as follows:

         g++ -c testClaCom.cpp -I"H:\OUTPUTS\COM\include"
         g++ -c util.cpp
         g++ -o testClaCom.exe testClaCom.o util.o \
            "H:\OUTPUTS\COM\lib\FeresPost.dll"  -lole32 -loleaut32 \
            -luuid -lstdc++
      

(You may need to change the compilation commands, options, and file paths to compile the program on your computer.)

In a C++ program, several headers must first be included to gain access to the class, method, and GUID declarations and/or definitions:

         #include <Application.hxx>
         #include <Application_i.c>

         #include <ClaDb.hxx>
         #include <ClaLam.hxx>
         #include <ClaMat.hxx>
         #include <ClaLoad.hxx>
         #include <IterX.hxx>
         #include <Iterator.hxx>
      

(These header files are distributed with the FeResPost COM library, in the “include” directory.) The component is accessed and initialized as follows:

      if (!CoInitialize(0)){
         if ((hr = CoGetClassObject(CLSID_Application, CLSCTX_INPROC_SERVER,
                  0, IID_IClassFactory, (LPVOID *)&classFactory))) {
            MessageBox(0, "Can’t get IClassFactory", "CoGetClassObject error",
                  MB_OK|MB_ICONEXCLAMATION);
            cerr << hr << endl ;
            exit(-1);
         }
         else {
            if ((hr = classFactory->CreateInstance(0, IID_IApplication,
                     (LPVOID *)&frpApp))) {
               classFactory->Release();
               MessageBox(0, "Can’t create IApplication object",
                     "CreateInstance error",MB_OK|MB_ICONEXCLAMATION);
               return -1;
            }
            else {
               classFactory->Release();
               MessageBox(0, "SUCCESS", "SUCCESS", MB_OK|MB_ICONEXCLAMATION);
            }
         }
      }

      frpApp->newObject(BSTR_ClaDb,(IDispatch**)&db);
      string2variant("test.ndf",fileName);
      db->readNeutral(fileName);
      

As you can see, this is somewhat more complicated than in Ruby or Python.

The complete C++ example shows that using the COM component is significantly more complicated with compiled languages than with interpreted languages that support COM automation. This is due to several factors:

To illustrate these points, here is an example of the code required to iterate over laminate and load IDs and call the calculation functions:

         VARIANT lamId,loadId;
         IIterator *lamIt,*loadIt;
         IIterX *lamIterX,*loadIterX;
         ULONG pCeltFetched;

         ...

         db->get_iter_laminateId((IDispatch**)&lamIt);
         lamIt->get_newEnum((IUnknown**)&lamIterX);
         db->get_iter_loadId((IDispatch**)&loadIt);
         loadIt->get_newEnum((IUnknown**)&loadIterX);
         lamIterX->Reset();
         for (lamIterX->Next(1,&lamId,&pCeltFetched);pCeltFetched>0;
               lamIterX->Next(1,&lamId,&pCeltFetched)) {
            printLamProperties(db,os,lamId);
            loadIterX->Reset();
            for (loadIterX->Next(1,&loadId,&pCeltFetched);pCeltFetched>0;
                  loadIterX->Next(1,&loadId,&pCeltFetched)) {
                     printLoadResponse(db,os,lamId,loadId,0.0,criteria);
            }
         }
         lamIterX->Release();
         lamIt->Release();
         loadIterX->Release();
         loadIt->Release();
      

In fact, this example shows that the component is best suited for use with languages that support the Microsoft IDispatch interface. A library adapted for use with C++ should also be developed; in the meantime, it is not recommended to use the component from C++ or C.

VII.1.1.4 Using component with C

No C example is provided, but it is possible to write a C program using the FeResPost COM component, just as with C++. This requires the same header files as those used in the C++ example, and the program would not differ significantly from its C++ counterpart (it would, in fact, be just a bit more complicated).

VII.1.2 Using COM component with excel

One advantage of implementing FeResPost as a COM component is that it can be used from other applications. For example, FeResPost can be used from Excel, provided one is willing to write some functions and subroutines in VBA. Several examples illustrate the benefits of using FeResPost from Excel:

(The second and third Excel examples above are complex enough to warrant their own chapters.)

VII.1.2.1 An excel workbook illustrating the use of SQL databases

This example is presented in the Excel workbook “blob_test.xlsm” in directory
“TESTSAT/COM/EX99_XL_BLOB” and corresponds approximately to the Ruby examples of section IV.2.6. In this case, the extension available at “http://sqliteforexcel.codeplex.com/” is used. The corresponding libraries and VBA module are distributed with the example, in sub-directories. A few small modifications were made to the “SQLite for Excel” VBA code to handle the blobs produced by FeResPost. (See the “SQLite3” module in the sources, which corresponds to the module found at “http://sqliteforexcel.codeplex.com/”, with a few modifications.)

Worksheet “MANIP” in the workbook contains two VBA macros that perform operations very similar to those of the Ruby example in section IV.2.6. These macros, along with a few others, are defined in module “FeResPost_Results”, which contains the code for the example.

More information on using FeResPost with VBA is given in Chapters VII.3, VII.4 and X.D.2. Note also that installing the “SQLite for Excel" extension in a sub-directory of the example directory is not necessarily a good idea. If you want to use the extension for other applications, it should be installed in a proper directory, and some directory names in the VBA source code will then need to be adjusted.

Note also that COM wrappers for SQLite are available and can be used with VBA. (See the following address “http://www.sqlite.org/cvstrac/wiki?p=SqliteWrappers” if you are interested.) Of course, databases other than SQLite can also be used (MySQL, PostgreSQL, etc.).

Chapter VII.2
COM examples translated from ruby

We briefly discuss here the COM examples written in Python that have been translated from the Ruby examples presented in chapters IV.2 and IV.4. As these examples are already discussed in detail in Part IV and chapter V.1, no detailed explanation is needed here.

The Ruby examples in directories “EX01” to “EX37” have all been translated to Python and use the COM component instead of a Python extension. All the translated examples are very similar to the Python examples in chapter V.1. The differences are related to the COM specificities discussed in chapter VI.0: access to the COM component, creation of class instances, iterators, operators, etc. One small module defining Python-COM specific methods has been added. This module is presented in the file “COM/UTIL/comUtil.py” and defines two methods:

Examining the translated examples should help the user understand how these methods are used.

The “PROJECT” example has also been translated to Python with COM and is presented in directory “COM/PROJECT”.

Chapter VII.3
CLA analyses in excel

The examples of section VII.1.1 show how the FeResPost COM component can be used to automate CLA calculations with different programming languages. However, the small programs used in these examples are not significantly different from the programs presented in Chapter IV.3.

An example is presented here in which the COM component is used in Excel, combining the capabilities of Excel and FeResPost to produce a small application devoted to CLA calculations. The example is presented in the Excel spreadsheet “COM/EX99_XL_CLA/LaminateAnalysis.xlsm”.

The presentation of the example is organized as follows:

The example is meant as a presentation of a small application devoted to classical laminate analysis. This application is highly customizable, provided the user is willing to adapt it to their needs by modifying the spreadsheets and the associated VBA programming.

VII.3.1 Preparing the application

Before using the Excel workbook, the FeResPost COM component must be referenced. This is done as follows:

Once this has been done, you may save the Excel workbook so that the reference to the FeResPost library is “remembered” the next time you open the workbook.

If a FeResPost COM server is already referenced in the workbook the first time you open it (as will probably be the case with the workbook downloaded from the FeResPost website), you must first un-select the old reference to the FeResPost server before selecting the new one. You will have to perform this operation each time you install a new version of the FeResPost COM server on your computer.

When you change the version of FeResPost, you must also modify the variable “appName” in the VBA code associated with the “ClaDbIds” spreadsheet of the workbook. The corresponding line looks like:

   Const appName As String = "FeResPost_4_5_4.Application"

VII.3.2 Workbook events

Two events are defined in the workbook:

VII.3.3 Spreadsheets

The different spreadsheets defined in the workbook are presented below. Most of these spreadsheets also contain associated VBA functions and variables, generally used to automate the spreadsheet buttons.

VII.3.3.1 Spreadsheet “HiddenData”

This spreadsheet is hidden, but you can make it “Visible” with the VBA editor. It contains the definitions of several lists that are used by the automation buttons of the other spreadsheets in the workbook. No VBA functions or variables are associated with the “HiddenData” spreadsheet.

VII.3.3.2 Spreadsheet “NeutralLines”

This spreadsheet is hidden, but you can make it “Visible” with the VBA editor. It contains the neutral lines corresponding to a ClaDb object in NDF format. (See the presentation of the “ClaDbIds” spreadsheet for more information.) No VBA functions or variables are associated with the “NeutralLines” spreadsheet.

VII.3.3.3 Spreadsheet “ClaDbIds”

This is the spreadsheet that manages access to the COM server and to the ClaDb composite database used for calculations. This is the first spreadsheet you should go to in order to start the application.

The spreadsheet contains several buttons, and information on the entities available in the current database appears in the cells: lists of materials, laminates and loads. Each entity in the current database is characterized by:

The integer and String IDs correspond to the CLA identifier of the entity. The Excel ID is a String representation of this identifier that allows the entities to be referenced from the other spreadsheets. The spreadsheet defines several buttons:

Several macros are defined in the spreadsheet. Most of these macros perform the operations triggered by the buttons. You can access the macros through the VBA editor. At the beginning of the VBA program lines, several variables are defined:

                Dim frpApp As Variant
                Dim db As Variant
                Dim maxEntitiesNbr As Long
                Const maxPliesNbr As Long = 100
                Const appName As String = "FeResPost_3_4_0.Application"
                Const logFileName As String = "FeResPost_LaminateAnalysis.log"

frpApp is the variable that holds a reference to the FeResPost COM server. db holds the ClaDb composite database in which all composite entities are stored. Only one ClaDb database can be opened in the workbook. The variable “appName” is a constant that corresponds to the name of the server. You will have to change this variable when you change the version of FeResPost.

The logFileName variable is used to redirect FeResPost output messages. This is necessary because, within Excel, FeResPost is not run in console mode. In practice, this redirection is implemented as follows in the “getApplication” method:

          fullLogName = ActiveWorkbook.Path + "\" + logFileName
          frpApp.openMsgOutputFile fullLogName, "w+"
          frpApp.writeAboutInformation

VII.3.3.4 Spreadsheet “DbUnitsEdit”

This spreadsheet is used to manage the units in which the CLA database and its entities are expressed:

Remember that the difference between the “SetUnits*” and “ChangeUnits*” methods is that the second group of methods performs unit conversions between old and new units, whereas the “SetUnits*” methods modify the units associated with entities without modifying the values of the different quantities.

At present, the workbook does not allow the unit system of CLA entities to be modified individually. This could be achieved by adding a few buttons to the corresponding “MatEdit”, “LamEdit” and “LoadEdit” worksheets. We believe, however, that it is a bad idea to try to define CLA entities with different units within the same database. In fact, the number of buttons already defined in the “DbUnitsEdit” spreadsheet is probably already too large.

VII.3.3.5 Spreadsheet “MatEdit”

This spreadsheet is used to edit materials defined in the current database. New materials can also be added. The spreadsheet contains two buttons:

The material IDs and properties are defined by filling in the appropriate cells.

VII.3.3.6 Spreadsheet “LamEdit”

This spreadsheet is used to edit laminates defined in the current database. New laminates can also be added. The spreadsheet contains three buttons:

The laminate IDs and properties are defined by filling in the appropriate cells.

VII.3.3.7 Spreadsheet “LoadEdit”

This spreadsheet is used to edit loads defined in the current database. New loads can also be added. The spreadsheet contains two buttons:

The load IDs and properties are defined by filling in the appropriate cells.

VII.3.3.8 Spreadsheet “MatProperties”

This spreadsheet calculates material properties for a material defined in the current composite database. The two buttons are used to select an existing material and the orientation with respect to which material properties are calculated.

The spreadsheet makes use of several functions defined in the “calcMatProperties” VBA module.

VII.3.3.9 Spreadsheet “LamProperties”

This spreadsheet calculates laminate properties for a laminate defined in the current composite database. The two buttons are used to select an existing laminate and the orientation with respect to which laminate properties are calculated.

The spreadsheet makes use of several functions defined in the “calcLamProperties” VBA module.

VII.3.3.10 Spreadsheet “LamText”

This spreadsheet is used to visualize the definition of laminates in a format suitable for inclusion in text documents. The spreadsheet makes use of the “getLamDescr” function defined in the “calcLamProperties” VBA module. This function has two arguments: the name of the laminate, and a list of acronyms that can be used to replace material names in the laminate description with a shorter name (typically a single letter).

VII.3.3.11 Spreadsheet “LamLoadResponse_A”

This spreadsheet calculates the laminate load response for a laminate defined in the current composite database, and a loading also defined in the current database. The buttons are used to select:

The spreadsheet makes use of several functions defined in the “calcLamLoadResponse” VBA module. These functions calculate the laminate global stress/strain state, ply stresses and strains, and failure indices, reserve factors, or equivalent stresses.

VII.3.3.12 Spreadsheet “LamLoadResponse_B”

This spreadsheet performs the same calculations as “LamLoadResponse_A”, except that the loading is not extracted from the current composite database. Instead, the loading is defined in the spreadsheet by filling in the appropriate cells. (No ClaLoad object defined in the composite database is used.) For all the quantities that appear in the spreadsheet, the units are those of the laminate object.

VII.3.3.13 Spreadsheet “LamMinMaxCalcArray”

This spreadsheet is used to calculate laminate minimum or maximum reserve factors, failure indices, or equivalent stresses for a selection of load cases and criteria. This is the “matrix” version of the calculation, where a whole set of load responses is calculated by a single call to one function. This version is generally very efficient when a large number of load cases must be processed. The unit system for the loading components and results is the same as for the laminate.

VII.3.3.14 Spreadsheet “LamMinRfCalcScal”

This is the scalar version of the spreadsheet above. It is generally less efficient. On the other hand, when cells defining the applied loads are modified, the amount of recalculation is reduced. This reduces the calculation time between each cell modification.

VII.3.4 VBA modules

Three VBA modules are defined. These modules define functions that can be used to obtain material properties, laminate properties, or laminate load response. They define functions that return results, generally presented as 1D or 2D arrays, which can be used directly in Excel spreadsheets with the appropriate arguments passed as cell selections. The user should look at the VBA code to understand the different functions.

TIP: to enter a formula that returns an array function into an Excel spreadsheet, select the target cell, enter the name of the function with the appropriate arguments, and press “SHIFT+ENTER” simultaneously.

VII.3.4.1 “calcMatProperties” module

These functions return various types of material properties, such as CMEs, CTEs, and stiffness and compliance matrices. Examples of use of these functions are given in the “MatProperties” spreadsheet.

VII.3.4.2 “calcLamProperties” module

These functions return various types of laminate properties, such as CMEs, CTEs, and stiffness and compliance matrices. Examples of use of these functions are given in the “LamProperties” and “LamText” spreadsheets.

VII.3.4.3 “calcLamLoadResponse” module

These functions calculate laminate load responses. Examples of use of the functions are given in the “LamLoadResponse_A”, “LamLoadResponse_B”, “LamMinMaxCalcArray”, and “LamMiMaxfCalcScal” spreadsheets.

Note that for several of the functions, the load can be specified in different ways depending on the size of the range that defines the loading:

Chapter VII.4
Extraction and manipulation of Results with excel

The directory “COM/EX99_XL_EXTRACT” contains an Excel workbook, “PostXdbRandom.xlsm”, devoted to the post-processing of finite element results. More precisely, the Excel workbook allows random access to Nastran XDB results attached to a NastranDb database.

This spreadsheet is not very different from the one presented in Chapter X.D.2. Indeed, the overall organization of the workbook is more or less the same, with spreadsheets and modules devoted to specific tasks:

The Excel workbook makes use of the FeResPost COM component. This means that the component must be registered and referenced in the workbook. More information on this subject is given in section VII.4.1.

A Samcef version of the workbook is also provided in directory “COM/EX09” (file “PostDesFacRandom.xlsm”). Its functionalities and principles are very similar to those of the Nastran version.

VII.4.1 Preparing the application

Before using the Excel workbook, the FeResPost COM component must be referenced. This is done as follows:

Once this has been done, you may save the Excel workbook so that the reference to the FeResPost library is “remembered” the next time you open the workbook.

If a FeResPost COM server is already referenced in the workbook the first time you open it (as will probably be the case with the workbook downloaded from the FeResPost website), you must first un-select the old reference to the FeResPost server before selecting the new one. You will have to perform this operation each time you install a new version of the FeResPost COM server on your computer.

When you change the version of FeResPost, you will also have to modify the variable “appName” in the VBA code associated with the “FemDbIds” spreadsheet of the workbook.

VII.4.2 Accessing the FEM and Results

This spreadsheet is devoted to managing the finite element model and finite element results. Several buttons are available:

Note that the model and results must be read before the other spreadsheets can be used.

VII.4.3 Editing Groups

This spreadsheet allows the groups stored in the current database to be manipulated. Columns “A” to “G” contain several automation buttons that allow the entities stored in a group to be manipulated directly:

Four buttons allow new groups to be built using topological operations on existing groups. These operations correspond to the four topological operators defined in the “Group” class. The “Group1” and “Group2” operands must be existing groups in the current database. The resulting “Group3” can either already exist in the current database or be a new group set manually.

VII.4.4 Simple extraction of Results

This spreadsheet is used to perform simple extraction of results, and nothing more (except that modification of coordinate systems is also possible). Several ComboBoxes are used to define the parameters for the extraction:

When all the parameters have been defined, the “Extract” button performs the extraction and fills cells in the spreadsheet starting at line 15. More precisely, the following operations are performed in the corresponding VBA subroutine:

1.

The current NastranDb database is retrieved using the “getDb” method of the FemDbIds spreadsheet.

2.

The names of the selected load case, sub-case and result type are used to import results into the current database. (The XDB file name was selected in the “FemDbIds” spreadsheet.)

3.

The group corresponding to the selected group name is retrieved from the current database (using the “getGroupCopy” method of the “NastranDb” class).

4.

This group, the selected location, and the names of the load case, sub-case and result type are used to retrieve a result from the database using the “getResultCopy” method.

5.

The results stored in the database are removed by calling the “removeAllResults” method.

6.

If necessary, the components of the result are expressed in a new coordinate system by calling “modifyRefCoordSys” of the “Result” class.

7.

The previous results are erased.

8.

The data are extracted from the result and pasted into the spreadsheet, starting at line 16.

9.

A title line is added at line 15.

At various steps, an error message is defined. This message is printed at line 15 of the spreadsheet if an error occurs during execution. In most cases, this error is related to inconsistencies in the data definition, and the message should help the user correct their data.

Note that this spreadsheet works for both real and complex results.

VII.4.5 Extraction of linear combinations of Results

The “ResExtractCombili” worksheet allows the extraction of linear combinations of results instead of elementary results. In the VBA programming of the extraction, this is simply done by calling the “getXdbAttachmentResultsCombili” method. In this example, the linear combinations of results extracted from the XDB files are limited to:

VII.4.6 Calculation of criteria

The “WorstResExtract” spreadsheet is very similar to “ResExtract”. It is used to illustrate the possibility of writing small post-processing spreadsheets.

In this case, no coordinate system can be specified. Instead, the user can select a criterion from a small predefined list, and an integer between 1 and 100 corresponding to the number of values to be extracted.

When the “Extract” button is clicked, the following operations are performed:

1.

First, the same steps 1 to 5 as in section VII.4.4 are performed. The extracted result is stored in the “res” variable.

2.

The selected criterion is calculated by calling whichever of the “Result” class methods “deriveScalToScal”, “deriveVectorToScal” and “deriveTensorToScal” is appropriate. A “tmpRes” result is created.

3.

The nbrVals largest values of this “tmpRes” result are extracted by calling the “extractResultForNbrVals” method.

4.

Correspondingly, the critical values of the “res” result are also extracted using the “extractResultOnResultKeys” method.

5.

Finally, the data are printed in spreadsheet cells with appropriate title lines.

Instead of simply extracting FeResPost’s predefined scalar derived criteria, it should not be very difficult to calculate more specific criteria by modifying the spreadsheet and the associated VBA code. For example, you can try modifying the spreadsheet to calculate minimum reserve factors instead of maximum Von Mises stress.

This spreadsheet works with real results only.

VII.4.7 Extraction of dynamic response Results

This example shows how the COM component can be used to investigate the results of Nastran dynamic response analyses.

The main difference between this example and the simple result extraction of section VII.4.4 is that a sub-case is no longer selected for result extraction. Instead, the extraction is performed for all the sub-cases corresponding to the specified load case. When results are printed in the cells, each line corresponds to one sub-case (i.e., one frequency).

The different entities are arranged in the columns of the spreadsheet. This somewhat limits the number of FE entities for which results can be retrieved. This is why, in this case, the group is specified directly by defining the integer IDs of its elements and nodes. The group is also defined by specifying the type of the entities being inserted (“EntityTypeSelector” ComboBox).

It was also decided to extract only one component per value.

When all the parameters have been defined, the “Extract” button performs the following operations in the corresponding VBA subroutine:

1.

The current NastranDb database is retrieved using the “getDb” method of the FemDbIds spreadsheet.

2.

The names of the different sub-cases found in the XDB file are retrieved by the “getXdbScNames” method of the “NastranDb” class and stored in an Array of Strings. This list of sub-cases is used to read results from the XDB file.

3.

The names of the selected load case, sub-case and result type are used to import results into the current database. (Results are imported for one load case, one result type, and all sub-cases.)

4.

The group corresponding to the entity type and the list of integers defined in the left part of the spreadsheet is created. This group is used to extract results from the database.

5.

The “getXdbLcInfos” method of the “NastranDb” class is used to obtain information on the load cases and sub-cases defined in the XDB file. The advantage of this method is that it returns the results in increasing order of frequency and makes it easy to retrieve the sub-case names and their associated frequencies.

6.

A loop is then performed over the different sub-cases. For each sub-case:

(a)

The result is extracted on the selected group.

(b)

The reference coordinate system is modified if necessary.

(c)

The selected component is extracted.

(d)

The magnitude and phase are retrieved for the different entities.

An Array containing the data is built. The rows of the Array correspond to the sub-cases. The columns correspond to the different entities and to the magnitude and phase. This Array is stored in the “ret” variable.

7.

The previous spreadsheet results are erased.

8.

The contents of the “ret” Array are pasted into the spreadsheet starting at line 51.

9.

The results stored in the database are removed by calling the “removeAllResults” method.

10.

The two charts are updated to plot the magnitude and phase for the different entities.

This spreadsheet works with complex results only.

VII.4.8 Current limitations

It is possible to modify the different spreadsheets described above in order to perform more complicated operations. For example:

(See also the Samcef version of the workbook, given in directory “COM/EX09”, file “PostDesFacRandom.xlsm”.)

Part VIII
FeResPost as .NET assembly

Chapter VIII.0
Introduction

On Windows OS, FeResPost is also distributed as a .NET assembly. Several characteristics of FeResPost as a .NET assembly are described in this Part.

In general, the class names, their methods and attributes (properties), the parameters of these methods and attributes are the same as those available in the FeResPost ruby extension. When necessary, modifications have been done in the ruby extension in order to maintain as much as possible the compatibility between the ruby extension and the .NET assembly. Therefore, the user is referred to Parts I, II, III and IV to find information on the use of the different classes and methods. In most cases, the information given there is sufficient to use the .NET assembly.

However, an exact match between the ruby extension and .NET assembly is not possible. The conventions that have been adopted are detailed below when incompatibility problems were not solved. More generally, the specific aspects are explained here of the use of FeResPost as a .NET assembly.

This Part of the document is organized as follows:

The installation of the .NET assembly is described in section X.A.4.6.

In the different sections of this chapter, the conventions that have been adopted when translating the ruby extension into a .NET assembly are explained. Information is given each time the ruby methods are modified to be implemented into the .NET assembly. For example, this is done for iterators, operators, “clone” method... Also, how objects are created with the assembly is explained.

Some differences between the .NET assembly and the ruby extension are highlighted below that are related to specific programmatic aspects of the two different systems.

VIII.0.1 Accessing the .NET assembly

If FeResPost assembly is installed into global assembly cache, no special operation is necessary to access it from IronRuby. If FeResPost is not installed in global assembly cache, a path must be provided to IronRuby to retrieve the library. This is done, for example, with the “-I” option.

When compiling a C# program, the library must be referenced at compile-time with the “-r” option. For example:

        csc.exe -r:../../../SRC/OUTPUTS/NET/FeResPost.dll ...

This referencing must be done, even if the library is installed in global assembly cache. Note however, that after compiling the C# client program, this program can be moved elsewhere independently of the FeResPost assembly, if this assembly has been installed in Global Assembly Cache.

It is assumed that what is true for IronRuby is also true for other .NET interpreted languages as well. Similarly, what is true for C# compiled programs is applicable for other CLI compiled languages (C++/CLI or VB/CLI).

VIII.0.2 Accessing FeResPost namespace

All classes of the FeResPost .NET assembly are defined in “FeResPost” namespace. To simplify the access to FeResPost classes and methods, it is recommended to give access to the content of the namespace.

In ruby, this is done by including FeResPost Module into the current workspace:

   ...
   include FeResPost
   ...

In C#, using directives are used:

    ...
    using FeResPost ;
    ...

The same is true for C++.NET language, but with a different syntax:

    ...
    using namespace FeResPost ;
    ...

VIII.0.3 Creating class instances

The creation of FeResPost objects depends on the language with which .NET assembly is used. In all cases, the “new” operator is used. For example, to create a ClaDb object in ruby, the following is written:

    ...
    db=ClaDb.new
    ...

The same operation is done as follows in C#:

    ...
    ClaDb db;
    db=new ClaDb();
    ...

(Note that the variable db has been declared before being initialized.)

VIII.0.4 Basic types as arguments and returned values

In FeResPost .NET assembly, the following default types are used for parameters:

The different classes defined in FeResPost assembly are reference managed classes. The examples given in Part IX should clarify the use of arguments.

VIII.0.5 Associative containers and Arrays

When methods of ruby extension receive or return Array objects, .NET assembly also returns Arrays of different types of objects. The difference is that .NET Arrays may have several dimensions. For example, the C++/CLI definition of several methods of the ClaLam class reads as follows:

    ...
    array<float,2>^ get_ABBD(...array<float>^ varargs) ;
    array<float,2>^ get_G(...array<float>^ varargs) ;
    array<float>^ get_alfaEh1(...array<float>^ varargs) ;
    ...

The two first methods above return 2D arrays, instead of 1D arrays of 1D arrays, for ruby extension.

Similarly, when a FeResPost method of ruby extension receives or returns a Hash object, the corresponding method of .NET assembly deal with a Dictionary. For example, the methods of CLA classes devoted to management of units are declared as follows:

    ...
    System::Collections::Generic::Dictionary<System::String^,
            System::String^>^ getUnits(void) ;
    void setUnits(System::Collections::Generic::Dictionary<
            System::String^,System::String^>^ Units) ;
    void changeUnits(System::Collections::Generic::Dictionary<
             System::String^,System::String^>^ Units) ;
    ...

VIII.0.6 Iterators

.NET provides a standard interface that allows the writing of iterators on collections of different types. In FeResPost, all the iterators are based on two classes:

As for the COM component, two classes devoted to iterations have been added because it does not seem possible to create a class that proposes several enumerators.

The “Iterator” class is common to all the iterators of all the FeResPost classes. But an Iterator object behaves differently depending on the class that produces it and/or the method of the class that is used to produce it.

Let us illustrate it by an example... Consider the “each_ply” iterator defined in ClaLam class of FeResPost ruby extension. With the ruby extension, the iteration on the plies of a laminate may be performed as follows:

   ...
   lam.each_ply do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

With FeResPost .NET assembly and IronRuby, an Iterator must first be produced before iterating on the elements of the corresponding collection. This can be done as follows:

   ...
   plyIt = lam.iter_ply
   plyIt.each do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

This example illustrates the conventions that have been used when programming the FeResPost .NET assembly to transpose the iterators proposed in the ruby extension:

1.

As in the FeResPost ruby extension, each iterator method name starts with “each_”, correspondingly, the .NET assembly methods returning an Iterator object have a name that starts with “iter_”. The correspondence between ruby extension methods and .NET assembly methods is obvious: “each_ply” becomes “iter_ply”, “each_material” becomes “iter_material”,...

2.

When the .NET iteration method has no argument, it is a property “getter” that is used instead of a method. Otherwise, a method with argument is defined.

3.

In IronRuby using the .NET assembly, the iteration on the Iterator object is done using “each” iteration method.

Note that the shorter notation is preferred to the IronRuby lines given as an example above:

   ...
   lam.iter_ply.each do |plyDescr|
      ...
   end
   ...

VIII.0.7 Operators

Operators are defined in the different classes to which they apply (Group, Result, ResKeyList...). Note that C++/CLI allows the definition in managed classes of static operators the first operand of which is an object that is not an instantiation of the class. This allows, for example, to define dyadic operators the first operand of which is a float, and the second operand of which a Result object.

VIII.0.8 Singleton methods

Ruby “singleton” methods of FeResPost classes are defined as static functions of FeResPost managed classes.

VIII.0.9 “Clone” and “ToString” methods

Most FeResPost managed classes implement the “ICloneable” interface and define a “Clone” method that corresponds to ruby “clone” method in FeResPost ruby extension. “Post” static class does not derive from ICloneable, as this class can not be instantiated. Also, the classes deriving from “DataBase” (“NastranDb” and “SamcefDb” classes) do not implement the “Clone” method.

The “to_s” method of ruby extension are replaced by “ToString” method in .NET assembly.

VIII.0.10 “Post” static class

FeResPost does not define Modules. The ruby extension “Post” Module is replaced a static “Post” class in .NET assembly. More precisely, “Post” class defines only static methods and no constructor/destructor.

All the methods defined in “Post” module of ruby extension are defined in “Post” static class.

VIII.0.11 Complex arguments

Complex arguments are input as 1D Arrays of two float or double values.

VIII.0.12 FeResPost exceptions

.NET assembly defines a “FrpExcept” class corresponding to all the exceptions raised by FeResPost. Exception management is similar to ruby, but also depends on the programming language. For example, with C#, the management of an exception may look like:

    try {
        NastranDb db=new NastranDb();
        db.Name="tmpDB1";
        //~ db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf");
        db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/brol.bdf");
    }
    catch (FrpExcept ex) {
        Console.WriteLine("\n\nGot an exception of type \"{0}\"\n",ex.GetType());
        Console.WriteLine("FeResPost error message is :\n\n{0}\n",ex.Message);
    }

VIII.0.13 Output for information messages

In general, the selection of output stream for the writing of FeResPost information messages follows the same rules as for ruby extension, as explained in section I.6.1. The default output stream for information messages is “System.IO.Console.Out”. Method “setInfoStreamToClientStream” accepts as argument any class that derives from “System.IO.Console.TextWriter” class. Valid arguments are for example a TextWriter object, a StreamWriter object, System.IO.Console.Out, System.IO.Console.Error...

Chapter VIII.1
CLA classes

The different classes described in this Chapter correspond to the classes described in Part II. The methods defined in FeResPost .NET assembly CLA classes are the same as those defined in the FeResPost ruby extension CLA classes, except the particular issue of the iterators discussed in section VIII.0.6, and of the “clone” methods that have been replaced by “makeCopy” methods.

Similarly, the arguments defined for the different methods of CLA classes are the same as those for the classes of FeResPost ruby extension, except for the remark made in section VIII.0.5 for the “Hash” arguments or returned values.

In the rest of this Chapter, a few remarks about the different classes are made. But otherwise, the reader is referred to the different chapters of Part II to find information on the use of .NET assembly CLA classes.

VIII.1.1 “ClaDb” class

No particular remark is needed except regarding the iterators:

The “Clone” method returns a copy of the object.

VIII.1.2 “ClaMat” class

Methods returning a 2D matrix return an Array with 2 dimensions. These methods are “getCompliance”, “getStiffness”, “getInPlaneCompliance”, “getInPlaneStiffness”, “getOOPSCompliance”, “getOOPSStiffness”, “getInPlaneLambdaT”, “getInPlaneLambdaH”. (In ruby extension, these methods return an array of arrays.)

The “Clone” method returns a copy of the object.

VIII.1.3 “ClaLam” class

Iterator “each_ply” in ruby extension becomes “iter_ply”.

Methods returning a 2D matrix return an Array with 2 dimensions. These methods are “get_ABBD”, “get_G”, “get_abbd_complMat”, “get_g_complMat”, “get_LambdaT”, “get_LambdaH”. (In ruby extension, these methods return an array of arrays.)

Methods that return Ply stresses, strains, temperature or moisture return 2D Arrays of size N*8 or N*3.

The “getDerived”, “getFailureIndices” and “getReserveFactors” methods return Arrays of 2 objects. The second object is a 2D Array in .NET assembly.

Methods “getMaxDerived”, “getMinDerived”, “getMaxFailureIndices”, “getMinFailureIndices”, “getMaxReserveFactors” and “getMinReserveFactors” return 2-dimensional Arrays of sizes N*3.

The “Clone” method returns a copy of the object.

VIII.1.4 “ClaLoad” class

No particular remark is needed. The “Clone” method returns a copy of the object.

Chapter VIII.2
Generic FeResPost classes

Most classes defined in this chapter correspond to the same classes in ruby extension.

The two classes “Iterator” and “IterX” correspond to the iterators defined in the different classes of the NET assembly. These classes are not described in this chapter. Indeed, the explanations given in section VI.0.2.3 for COM component iterators about the use of iterators are considered sufficient. No corresponding class exists in the ruby extension.

VIII.2.1 “Post” static class

The “Post” static class corresponds to the “Post” module of the ruby extension. Presently, its methods are

Note that no dyadic “operator” “op*” is defined in “Post” class, as was done in COM component or ruby extension. Instead, these operators are defined as static operators in the “Result”, “Group” and “ResKeyList” classes.

VIII.2.2 Generic DataBase class

This class corresponds to the generic DataBase class of ruby described in Chapter I.1. The class cannot be instantiated; instead, the corresponding specialized classes “NastranDb” and “SamcefDb” that derive from DataBase can be instantiated.

The iterators of the DataBase class in ruby extension have also been defined in .NET assembly: “iter_abbreviation”, “iter_groupName”, “iter_resultKey”, “iter_resultKeyCaseId”, “iter_resultKeySubCaseId”, “iter_resultKeyLcScId” and “iter_resultKeyResId” properties in the .NET assembly correspond to the “each_abbreviation”, “each_groupName”, “each_resultKey”,
“each_resultKeyCaseId”, “each_resultKeySubCaseId”, “each_resultKeyLcScId” and
“each_resultKeyResId” iterators in ruby extension.

The four singleton methods “enableLayeredResultsReading”, “disableLayeredResultsReading”, “enableSubLayersReading” and “disableSubLayersReading” in the ruby extension generic DataBase class are defined as static methods in NET assembly. No instance of the derived class must be created to use these singleton methods.

Similarly, methods “setStorageBufferMaxCapacity” and “getStorageBufferMaxCapacity” are defined as static methods in DataBase class.

VIII.2.3 Group class

Most methods of the “Group” class are exactly the same as the ones defined in the Group class of ruby extension (Chapter I.3). Several methods or properties are different however:

VIII.2.4 CoordSys class

Methods of the “CoordSys” class are the same as the ones defined in the CoordSys class in ruby extension. The “Clone” method returns a copy of the object.

VIII.2.5 Result class

Most methods of the “Result” class are exactly the same as the ones defined in the Result class in ruby extension (Chapter I.4). Several methods or properties are different however:

VIII.2.6 ResKeyList class

Methods of the “ResKeyList” class are the same as the ones defined in the ResKeyList class in ruby extension. However:

Chapter VIII.3
Supported Solvers

The two classes that correspond to the two supported solvers (Nastran and Samcef) are complete.

VIII.3.1 The “NastranDb” class

The “NastranDb” class stores a model and results corresponding to the Nastran finite element solver. Methods specific to the .NET assembly are:

The reader is referred to Chapter III.1 for the description of the other methods.

VIII.3.2 The “SamcefDb” class

The “SamcefDb” class stores a model and results corresponding to the Samcef finite element solver. The other methods that are available are:

The reader is referred to Chapter III.2 for the description of the other methods.

Part IX
FeResPost Examples with .NET Assembly

Chapter IX.1
Examples of use for .NET assembly

The Ruby examples have all been translated into C#. These examples are provided in sub-directories of “TESTSAT/NET” and correspond to the small examples in “TESTSAT/RUBY” of the FeResPost Ruby extension discussed in chapter IV.2.

In this chapter, the differences between the Ruby extension and the .NET assembly are highlighted. For that reason, only a few examples are discussed. For the other examples, the discussion of the corresponding Ruby examples in chapter IV.2 and IV.3 should be sufficient.

IX.1.1 Reading a Nastran model

IX.1.1.1 Reading a Nastran model with C-sharp

The first C# example is very simple and illustrates the use of the .NET assembly with the C# programming language. The example is provided in the “TESTSAT/NET/EX01/readBdf.cs” source file. The compilation is done with the script “readBdf.bat”, which contains the following lines:

@SET FRP=../../../SRC/OUTPUTS/NET
C:/Windows/Microsoft.NET/Framework/v3.5/csc.exe -platform:x86 \
        -r:%FRP%/FeResPost.dll ..\UTIL\util.cs readBdf.cs
readBdf.exe

(You may have to change the “%FRP%” path to the FeResPost .NET assembly before compiling the example.) Note also that version 3.5 of the .NET Framework is used here. This is not strictly necessary for this example, but it may be useful for some examples in which classes are extended with extension methods. Once the compilation is done, the compiled program is run with the line “readBdf.exe”.

The file “readBdf.cs” begins with several “using” directives:

using System;
using System.Globalization;
using System.Threading;
using System.Collections.Generic;
using FeResPost;

These directives shorten the type names used in the program. For example, the “using FeResPost” directive allows the “NastranDb” keyword to be used instead of “FeResPost.NastranDb”.

The first example is very simple and contains only one static “Main” function:

namespace ConsoleApplication1 {

    class readBdf {

        static void Main(string[] args) {

            ...

        } // static void Main(string[] args)

    } // class readBdf

} // namespace ConsoleApplication1

Note, however, that the static function is contained in a class. (C# does not allow a function to be defined outside of a class.) The “readBdf” class is also contained in a “ConsoleApplication1” namespace.

The other lines defining the program are very simple and can be considered “classical” C# programming:

            NastranDb db = new NastranDb();
            db.Name="tmpDB2";
            db.readBdf("../../MODEL/MAINS/unit_xyz.bdf");

(The reader is referred to chapter III.1 for a description of the “readBdf” arguments.) Note that in the second call to “readBdf”, an empty “Dictionary” is used instead of a Ruby “Hash” object as the parameter.

IX.1.2 “printStressMax” example

The example is provided in the “TESTSAT/NET/EX05/printStressMax.cs” source file. This example is worth discussing because it illustrates the difference between the value returned by the “Result.getData” method in the Ruby extension and in C#.

In the example, the data for a Result associating only one key-value pair is extracted, but the same principles apply to more general Results. The following Ruby lines make use of the Ruby extension to extract and print the stress components:

    ...
    maxScalarData = maxScalar.getData()[0]
    maxStressData = maxStress.getData()[0]
    ...
    printf("   %.2f Pa on element %d (layer=\"%s\").\n",
            maxScalarData[5],maxScalarData[0],maxScalarData[2])
    printf("      Sxx = %.2f, Syy = %.2f, Szz = %.2f,\n",maxStressData[5],\
            maxStressData[6],maxStressData[7])
    printf("      Sxy = %.2f, Syz = %.2f, Szx = %.2f\n",maxStressData[8],\
            maxStressData[9],maxStressData[10])
    ...

The same operation is performed with the .NET assembly by the following C# code:

    ...
    object[] maxScalarData = Util.getDataRow(maxScalar.getData(), 0);
    object[] maxStressData = Util.getDataRow(maxStress.getData(), 0);
    ...
    Console.Write("    {0:F2} Pa on element {1} (layer=\"{2}\").\n",
        maxScalarData[5], maxScalarData[0], maxScalarData[2]);
    Console.Write("        Sxx = {0:F2}, Syy = {1:F2}, Szz = {2:F2},\n",
        maxStressData[5], maxStressData[6], maxStressData[7]);
    Console.Write("        Sxy = {0:F2}, Syz = {1:F2}, Szx = {2:F2}\n",
        maxStressData[8], maxStressData[9], maxStressData[10]);
    ...

IX.1.3 Accessing FEM data

The “NET/EX01/properties.cs” example shows how information in the finite element model can be accessed. The C# code looks as follows:

        ...
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_coordSysId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("CoordSys", id));
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_nodeId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("Node", id));
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_elemId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("Element", id));
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_rbeId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("RBE", id));
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_materialId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("Material", id));
        foreach (Int32 id in db2.iter_propertyId())
            cards.Add(db2.fillCard("Property", id));
        ...
        string[] vectStr = NastranDb.writeNastranCardsToVectStr(new object[] { "left", "short", cards.ToArray() });
        foreach (string line in vectStr)
            Console.WriteLine(line);
        ...
    }

This example illustrates the use of the “fillCard” method, already presented in sections III.1.1.6 and IV.2.3.

IX.1.4 Extending CLA classes

The examples provided in “NET/EX13” illustrate the possibility of extending FeResPost classes in C# by defining “extension” methods. Note, however, that this capability exists only if version 3 or above of the C# compiler is used.

In the following example, extracted from “NET/EX13/extendedCla.cs”, the ClaMat class is extended with the method “write_Compliance”:

namespace extension {
    static class ext {
        ...
        public static void write_Compliance(this ClaMat mat, TextWriter os, float theta) {
            writeMat(os, mat.getCompliance(theta));
        }
        ...

Note that the first argument is “this ClaMat mat”, which indicates the class that is being extended. In the file “NET/EX13/extendedCla.cs”, the extension methods are defined in the “extension” namespace. A “using extension” statement must be present in the client program to access the extensions.

Note also that many of the methods defined in C# differ from the corresponding methods in the Ruby extension. For example, the following C# source lines take into account that the “getPliesStresses” method of the .NET assembly returns a 2D Array:

    ...
    object[,] sigTab = lam.getPliesStresses();
    os.Write("   {0,8}{1,5}", "layer", "loc");
    os.Write("{0,14}{1,14}{2,14}", "sig_11", "sig_22", "sig_12");
    os.Write("\n");
    int nbrRows = epsTab.GetLength(0);
    for (int i = 0; i < nbrRows; i++)
    {
        object[] sigRow = Util.getDataRow(sigTab, i);
        os.Write("{0,14:G6}{1,14:G6}{2,14:G6}", sigRow[2], sigRow[3], sigRow[7]);
        os.Write("\n");
    }
    ...

The Ruby extension returns an Array of Arrays, and the corresponding lines would be:

    ...
    sigTab=getPliesStresses
    os.printf("   %8s%5s","layer","loc")
    os.printf("%14s%14s%14s","sig_11","sig_22","sig_12")
    os.printf("\n")
    (0...sigTab.size).each do |i|
        os.printf("   %8d%5s",sigTab[i][0],sigTab[i][1])
        os.printf("%14g%14g%14g",sigTab[i][2],sigTab[i][3],
                  sigTab[i][7])
        os.printf("\n")
    end
    ...

IX.1.5 Saving and retrieving Results from an SQL database

This example is presented in the files “rehashDynamicResults.cs” and “deleteSomeResults.cs” of directory “TESTSAT/NET/EX20”, and corresponds exactly to the Ruby examples of section IV.2.6.

Access to the SQLite .NET assembly, which must be installed on the computer, is granted by the following statement:

    using System.Data.SQLite ;

Note also the binding of parameters to the SQLite command:

        cmd.CommandText = sql;
        cmd.Parameters.Clear();
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@lcName", id[0]);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@scName", id[1]);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@resName", id[2]);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@tensorOrder", tensorOrder);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@intId1", intId1);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@intId2", intId2);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@realId1", realId1);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@realId2", realId2);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@size", size);
        cmd.Parameters.AddWithValue("@result", resBlob);
        cmd.ExecuteNonQuery();

Part X
Appendices

Appendix X.A
Installing FeResPost library

FeResPost is open source. Both the C/C++ sources and binaries are distributed.

X.A.1 Binaries

The binaries are distributed in archive containing the “OUTPUTS” directory and its sub-directories. These binaries can also be re-generated from the sources as described in section X.A.1.

Depending on the OS and on the type of the binaries you are using, part of the distribution is to be used.

File “OUTPUTS/COMPILER.TXT” contains information about the compiler that has been used to produce the binaries. File “build.log” contains additional information on the build environment.

Note that the C++ shared libraries are still distributed in “OUTPUTS/lib” directory to maintain compatibility with what was done with previous versions. The use of these binaries is however not recommended because:

If you intend to develop your own wrappers or use FeResPost classes in your own programs we recommend that you recompile FeResPost C++ library with you own compiler, and statically link your executables/libraries to FeResPost objects.

Table X.A.1 gives an idea of successful build, in particular of the different versions of ruby and Python for which FeResPost library has been compiled. Note however, that the success or failure of a compilation may depend on compiler version and that the list can change. The best way to check the availability of compiled library for a given version is to explore the corresponding archives.

X.A.1.1 Linux binaries (32-bit)

In archive “FeResPost_5.2.0_LINUX_32.7z” the binaries contain ruby wrappers and C++ library:

The ruby and python libraries must be used with the appropriate 32-bit distribution of ruby or python. (Note that 32-bit programs and libraries can be used on 32-bit or 64-bit LINUX installations.)

X.A.1.2 Linux binaries (64-bit)

In archive “FeResPost_5.2.0_LINUX_64.7z” the binaries contain ruby wrappers and C++ library:

The ruby and python libraries must be used with the appropriate 64-bit distribution of ruby or python.

X.A.1.3 Windows binaries (32-bit)

In archives “FeResPost_win32_5.2.0_*.7z” and “FeResPost_win32_5.2.0_gcc345_*.7z” the binaries contain ruby wrappers, COM component and C++ library:

The ruby and python libraries must be used with the appropriate 32-bit distribution of ruby or python. (Note that 32-bit programs and libraries can be used on 32-bit or 64-bit LINUX installations.) The “*” in archive name can be “w10” or “w11”, depending on the computer on which the libraries have been compiled (Windows 10 or Windows 11).

“FeResPost_win32_5.2.0_gcc345_*.7z” archive contains libraries that have been compiled with an older version of GNU compiler (GCC 3.4.5). This older version of the library does not allow to compile FeResPost extension for ruby versions more recent than ruby 2.3.*. On the other hand, the C++ standard library to which FeResPost is linked allows a random access to XDB of FAC files of size larger than 2Gb. It seems that more recent versions of GNU compiler no longer allows this, and this is a regression.

It has been decided not to distribute the 32-bit Windows binaries as nowadays, most computers run 64-bit operating systems. However, at least for the COM component, the availability of 32-bit binaries may be useful to many. Indeed, many Microsoft Office installations are still 32-bit, and FeResPost 32-bit COM component is then necessary.

X.A.1.4 Windows binaries (64-bit)

In archive “FeResPost_win64_5.2.0_*.7z” the binaries contain ruby wrappers, COM component and C++ library:

The ruby and python libraries must be used with the appropriate 64-bit distribution of ruby or python. There is no issue related to random access to large XDB or FAC files with 64-bit versions of FeResPost binaries. The “*” in archive name can be “w10” or “w11”, depending on the computer on which the libraries have been compiled (Windows 10 or Windows 11).

X.A.1.5 Windows .NET assemblies

In archive “FeResPost_NET_5.2.0.7z” the assemblies are distributed in directory “OUTPUTS/NET”. Three versions of FeResPost .NET assembly are built:

X.A.1.6 HDF shared libraries

As explained in section III.1.1.12, to access HDF files, the first step is to load the HDF5 shared library. The libraries that have been used for the compilation of FeResPost are re-distributed in directory “HDF5_REDISTR”. (See the “Downloads” page on FeResPost web site.)

X.A.2 Building from sources

All the sources are delivered in an archive containing an SRC directory and several levels of sub-directories. The sources of the program are delivered with different Makefiles and BASH or BAT scripts that can be used for the compilation of the different targets:

Examples of builds follow:

        build_linux32.bash ruby
        build_linux32.bash ruby_23
        build_linux32.bash outputs
        build_mingw64.bat com
        build_mingw64.bat ruby
        build_mingw64.bat outputs
        build_python_27.bat
        buildbuild_python_win32
        buildbuild_python_win64
        ...

Note: for 32-bit version 2.4.* of ruby, the “include/ruby/ruby.h” has been slightly modified: “DEPRECATE_BY” lines 1381 and 1390 have been commented. Otherwise, the compilation resulted in error messages. This has been done on Windows and on Linux.


Table X.A.1: Available compilation scripts, and associated “main” Makefiles and targets.

SCRIPT main Makefile targets
build_linux32.bash Makefile.LINUX_586ruby_31, ruby_30, ruby_27, ruby_26, ruby_25, ruby_24, ruby_23, ruby_22, ruby_21, ruby_20, ruby_19, ruby_18, python_26, python_27, python_30, python_31, python_32, python_33, python_34, python_35, python_36, python_37, python_38, python_39, python_310, python_311, python_312, python_313, develop
build_linux64.bash Makefile.LINUX_I64ruby_34, ruby_33, ruby_32, ruby_31, ruby_30, ruby_27, ruby_26, ruby_25, ruby_24, ruby_23, ruby_22, ruby_21, ruby_20, ruby_19, ruby_18, python_26, python_27, python_30, python_31, python_32, python_33, python_34, python_36, python_37, python_38, python_39, python_310, python_311, python_312, python_313, develop
build_mingw32.bat Makefile.WIN.32 com, ruby_27, ruby_26, ruby_25, ruby_24, ruby_22, ruby_21, ruby_20, ruby_19, ruby_18, develop, python_26, python_27, python_30, python_31, python_32, python_33, python_34, python_35, python_36, python_37, python_38, python_39
build_mingw32_345.bat Makefile.WIN.32 (345 targets)
HDF5 unsupported
com, ruby_23, ruby_22, ruby_21, ruby_20, ruby_19, ruby_18, develop, python_26, python_27, python_30, python_31, python_32, python_33, python_34, python_35, python_36, python_37, python_38, python_39
build_mingw64.bat Makefile.WIN.64 com, ruby_34, ruby_33, ruby_32, ruby_31, ruby_30, ruby_27, ruby_26, ruby_25, ruby_24, ruby_23, ruby_22, ruby_21, ruby_20, develop, python_30, python_31, python_32, python_33, python_34, python_35, python_36, python_37, python_38, python_39, python_310, python_311, python_312, python_313
build_net.bat Makefile.NET net
build_msvc_x86.bat Makefile.MSVC_X86com, ruby, python, develop (for debugging the sources)
build_msvc_x64.bat Makefile.MSVC_X64com, ruby, python, develop (for debugging the sources)
build_intel.bat Makefile.INTEL.X64com, python, develop (for debugging the sources)

X.A.3 Compilation options

In general, the binaries are compiled without the “-static” option. This means that when using the different shared libraries, the redistributable libraries in "OUTPUTS/REDISTR" directory must be in the PATH environment variable. Compilation is done this way because the “-static” option tends to break the C++ management of exception and associated error messages.

There is one exception: the Python Windows libraries are compiled with “-static” option. This seems not to lead to issues with the management of exceptions.

Of course, users that compile libraries from the sources are free to experiment other options.

X.A.4 Installation and configuration of binaries

A distinction is made below between the installation of the ruby extension, the COM server and the .NET assembly. In practice, depending on what you want to do, only some parts of the binaries must be installed/configured. Table X.A.2 summarizes what you need to do. Before configuring FeResPost, always make sure that you are selecting the right version of the binaries. In particular:


Table X.A.2: Summary of the configuration operations you need to perform to use FeResPost.
If you want to...

You must...

Use FeResPost in ruby scripts

Install the corresponding FeResPost C++ ruby extension (section X.A.4.3)

Use FeResPost as COM component (Windows only)

Install and register the COM component (section X.A.4.5)

Use the .NET assembly

Install the assembly in GAC (global assembly cache) as explained in section X.A.4.6. An installation of the redistributable Microsoft Visual C++ libraries may also be necessary.

Develop you own wrapper around FeResPost C++ library, or write a program that directly uses the C++ library

Install the C++ library and corresponding header files (section X.A.4.2)

Modify and/or recompile the sources

Copy the sources and try to find inspiration in the information provided in section X.A.2


X.A.4.1 Redistributable libraries

In principle redistributable libraries are no longer needed as the Windows ruby and python extensions, and the COM component are now statically linked to GNU compiler libraries (“libm.a”, “libstdc++.a”,...). However, you might need the redistributable libraries if you used the C++ shared libraries to compile your own executables with FeResPost.

GNU C++ compiler the C++ developer’s library, the ruby extensions or the COM component. (See below.) With recent versions of the compiler, some of the C++ built-in libraries are not included in FeResPost “dll” or “so” library file. Then these libraries are provided in “REDISTR” directory. Then, the user must give access to these libraries to each script or application that uses FeResPost library. For example:

On Windows OS, your PATH environment variable can be modified in “Control Panel” –> “System and Security” –> “System” –> “Advanced system settings” –> “Environment variables”.

On your computer, you may run FeResPost from different environments (excel with VBA, ruby, python...) that can require sometimes a 32-bit version, or a 64-bit version of the library and associated redistributables. Or you may compare results obtained with different versions of FeResPost. Then, it may be useful to define the environment associated with each separate script. This can be done by providing the execution environment in a script (BAT file on windows, and bash or csh file on UNIX for example).

For example, on Windows, assuming you are using a 64-bit version of excel, and that the 64-bit version of the COM component has been properly registered, excel could be run by the following batch file:

    setlocal
    set PATH=D:/SHARED/FERESPOST/SRC/OUTPUTS/REDISTR;C:/NewProgs/RUBY/Ruby200_x64/bin;
        C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Office\Office12
    excel LaminateAnalysis.xlsm
    endlocal

(This is just an example, you have to adapt the PATH variable to your installation.)

X.A.4.2 FeResPost C++ developer’s library and headers

A distinction is made between UNIX/LINUX OS and Windows OS:

(Note that the use of these shared libraries is no longer recommended. Instead, it is a better idea to statically link your libraries/executables to FeResPost objects.)

For the headers, just copy the “include” directory in a location that suits you, and adapt your compiler options to access the headers (for example, by editing your makefiles).

X.A.4.3 Ruby extensions

The shared library (FeResPost.so or FeResPost.dll) is delivered with “FeResPost.rb” ruby file. This file is the “main” file that loads the shared library and defines the elements that allow “coercing” the arguments of “Result” class operators. (See section I.7.)

The files should be copied into the ruby installation library directory. The files can also be installed in another directory, but then the access path must be specified to ruby. (For example, with “-I” option.) You can also install them in any directory that suits you and ensure that “RUBYLIB” environment variable points to that directory.

X.A.4.4 Python extensions

The shared library (FeResPost.so or FeResPost.pyd) contain everything you need to run the examples. The files should be copied into the Python installation library directory. You can also copy the Python library to your user site-packages directory. This can be obtained via the command:

        python -m site --user-site
    

The files can also be installed in another directory, but then the access path must be specified to Python.

You can also install them in any directory that suits you and ensure that “PYTHONPATH” environment variable points to that directory.

Note that the Python examples are provided with “env*” batch files that help you to define the appropriate environment on Windows.

X.A.4.5 COM component

Two solutions are proposed for the registration or un-registration of the COM component. One can use “modifyRegistry.exe”. Registration or un-registration is also possible using “reg” files.

X.A.4.5.1 Registration of COM component with “modifyRegistry.exe” program

COM server must be registered before use. For that purpose, a program called “modifyRegistry.exe” is distributed with FeResPost library. This program is used to add keys to the Windows registry. Some information follows:

The examples presented in Part VII require only the registration of in-proc library and type library (recommended configuration).

Figure X.A.1 shows the window created by the "modifyRegistry.exe" program. After clicking one of the registration buttons, the program shows an information message allowing to check the correct installation of COM component (Figure X.A.2 or X.A.3). In many cases, failure is related to the impossibility of loading FeResPost library.


PICT

Figure X.A.1: Registration of FeResPost COM component.


PICT

Figure X.A.2: Successful registration of FeResPost COM component.


PICT

Figure X.A.3: Failed registration of FeResPost COM component.

You may register either 32-bit version of the component, or 64-bit version of the component, or both 32-bit and 64-bit versions of the component:

X.A.4.5.2 Registration with “reg” files

FeResPost COM component is delivered with registration files in the “OUTPUTS/COM/REGFILES” directory. Four such files are available: “addAllUsers.reg”, “addCurrentUser.reg”, “removeAllUsers.reg” and “removeCurrentUser.reg”. The four files can be distinguished according to two criteria:

Before using the reg files that add information to Windows registry, you must ensure that the paths to “FeResPost.dll” and “FeResPost.tlb” match what their actual location on your computer. For example, the registry files delivered with COM binaries contain this kind of information:

 [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Classes\TypeLib\{0A88E969-53D5-492B-FABB-A0DF12862BE8}\1.0\0\win32]
 @="C:\\Users\\ferespost\\Documents\\SRC\\OUTPUTS\\COM\\lib\\FeResPost.tlb"
 ...
 [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Classes\CLSID\{52FEFC92-63E7-4500-768B-84B08E1262C1}\InprocServer32]
 @="C:\\Users\\ferespost\\Documents\\SRC\\OUTPUTS\\COM\\lib\\FeResPost.dll"
 "ThreadingModel"="apartment"

(Of course, the paths must be modified to match your installation.)

The sources come with a ruby script that is used to generate the registration files. The script can be used as follows:

 ruby bin/createRegFiles.rb  C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC
   C:/Users/ferespost/Documents/SRC/OUTPUTS/COM 5.0.7 32

The three arguments of the ruby script are:

X.A.4.6 .NET assembly

FeResPost assembly should be installed in the global assembly cache. This can be done by copying the “FeResPost.dll” dynamic link library found in “NET” directory to the Global Assembly Cache. This can be done simply by dragging and dropping “FeResPost.dll” into the “C:/Windows/assembly” directory. Note however that:

The advantage of installing FeResPost in the Global Assembly Cache is that this allows to use from a program anywhere without minding where to find it.

Appendix X.B
Coordinate system transformations

The modification of coordinate system into which the components of vectorial or tensorial results are expressed is a common operation performed when post-processing finite element results. To perform the transformation some vectorial and tensorial calculation is necessary. A summary of the theoretical background necessary to understand the operations performed with FeResPost.

X.B.1 Components of vectors and tensors

When performing tensorial calculations, or post-processing results, one manipulates 1D or 2D arrays of real values corresponding to the components of vectors or tensors in a specified coordinate system. Higher order tensors also exist, but they are not manipulated in FeResPost and the theory for tensor order larger than 2 is not presented here.

X.B.1.1 Vectors in a Cartesian coordinate system

A vectorial force f can be expressed by its components {f1,f2,f3} in the Cartesian coordinate system {O,e1,e2,e3} characterized by its origin O and its three unit length mutually orthogonal vectors e1, e2 and e3. Then the vector f corresponds to:

f = ∑ i=13f iei.

In the rest of the text the components of a vector f are denoted fi and the Einstein convention of summation on repeated indices is used, so that the previous expression is simply written:

f = fiei.

X.B.1.2 Order 2 tensor in a Cartesian coordinate system

A Cauchy stress tensor σ is characterized by its components σij in the Cartesian coordinate system {O,ei}. (One uses the same notations as in section X.B.1.1).

σ = σij(ei ⊗ej).

The nine quantities (ei ⊗ej) can be considered as the basic tensors from which all other tensors are obtained as linear combinations. Note that the Cauchy stress tensor is always symmetrical so that σij = σji.

X.B.1.3 Cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems

In sections X.B.1.1 and X.B.1.2, vector and tensor components in Cartesian coordinate systems were presented. The same definition is also worthy in curvilinear coordinate systems. However, the director vectors depend on the point on which the vector or tensor is attached. Conventionally, the director vectors are chosen tangent to the coordinate lines and are of unit length.

For example, for a cylindrical coordinate system, the position p of a point depends on three coordinates r, z and θ. Thus:

p = p(r,z,θ).

Then three tangent vectors gi are obtained by differentiating the position p with respect to the coordinates:

g1 = gr = ∂p ∂r, g2 = gθ = ∂p ∂θ, g3 = gz = ∂p ∂z.

Finally, the three tangent vectors are normalized as follows:

ei = gi ∥gi∥ .

This process to define base vectors at any point can be generalized to all curvilinear coordinate systems. However, the cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems have a particular property: at a given point, the three base vectors ei are mutually orthogonal. This is not a general characteristic of curvilinear coordinate systems.

The orthogonality property of the coordinate systems used in FeResPost simplifies the transformation of components from one coordinate system to another. Indeed such transformations reduce to transformations between Cartesian coordinate systems. There is only one difficulty in this process: to calculate the base vectors at every point.

X.B.2 Transformation of components

Only the particular case of two Cartesian coordinate systems is considered here with the same origin. In section X.B.1.3, it was shown that even for cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems it is possible to reduce the complexity of the problem to a transformation of the components between two Cartesian coordinate systems.

X.B.2.1 Transformation of vector components

Consider a vector v with components expressed in two Cartesian coordinate systems with base vectors ei and ei′ respectively. Thus:

v = viei = vi′e i′.

In the last expression we introduce the notations vi and vi′ for the components of vector v in ei and ei′ respectively.

It is possible to decompose the vectors ei′ as a linear combination of vectors ej:

ei′ = A ijej.

The coefficients Aij are easily calculated. Indeed, the scalar multiplication of the previous equality by ek gives successively:

ei′⋅e k = (Aijej ⋅ek) , ei′⋅e k = (Aijδjk) , ei′⋅e k = Aik,

or finally:

Aij = ei′⋅e j.

By a similar calculation, it is possible to identify the relations between the components of vector v expressed in the two coordinate systems:

ek′⋅v = e k′⋅ (v iei) = ek′⋅ (v i′e i′), vi (ek′⋅e i) = vi′ (e k′⋅e i′), viAki = vi′δ ki, Akivi = vk′,

Finally, it can be seen that the relation between base vectors and vector components are the same:

ei′ = A ijej,

vi′ = A ijvj.

This is why the transformation is called a covariant transformation. The quantities vi and vi′ are called covariant components of vector v in coordinate systems ei and ei′ respectively. In the last vector component transformation one recognizes a classical algebraic result:

V ′ = A⋅V .

The matrix Aij is orthogonal: (Aij) -1 = A ji and the reverse relation for vector components is:

vj = Ajivi′.

X.B.2.2 Transformation of tensor components

Similarly to what has been done for vectors in section X.B.2.1, one derives transformations of the components of tensors. One considers the components of tensor T in two coordinate systems:

T = Tkl(ek ⊗el) = Tij′(e i′⊗e j′).

Using the same definition of transformation matrix Aij as in section X.B.2.1, one writes:

ek = Aikei′,

el = Ajlej′.

Then, the substitution of the two expressions in the equations defining components gives:

T = Tkl(ek ⊗el) = Tij′(e i′⊗e j′), Tkl(Aikei′⊗ A jlej′) = T ij′(e i′⊗e j′), AikTklAjl(ei′⊗e j′) = T ij′(e i′⊗e j′).

The last expression allows us to extract a relation involving only the components of tensors, and not the base vectors:

Tij′ = A ikTklAjl.

Here again, one recognizes a classical matricial expression:

T′ = A⋅T⋅At.

X.B.3 Rotation of a coordinate system

A transformation of coordinate systems commonly done is a rotation of the coordinate system around a specified axis passing through the origin of the coordinate system. The resulting coordinate system has the same origin, but its base vectors are modified. A classical use of this operation corresponds to the transformation of vector or tensor results in material, ply or element axes of 2D elements.

For example, let v be a unit vector defining the rotation axis and θ the rotation angle. Then the three transformed base vectors are given by:

ei′ = cos ⁡ θe i + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)(v⋅ei)v + sin ⁡ θ(v×ei).
(X.B.1)

In particular, if v corresponds to e3, the three

e1′ = cos ⁡ θe 1 + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)(e3 ⋅e1)e3 + sin ⁡ θ(e3 ×e1), = cos ⁡ θe1 + sin ⁡ θ(e2), = cos ⁡ θe1 + sin ⁡ θe2.

e2′ = cos ⁡ θe 2 + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)(e3 ⋅e2)e3 + sin ⁡ θ(e3 ×e2), = cos ⁡ θe2 + sin ⁡ θ(-e1), = cos ⁡ θe2 - sin ⁡ θe1. e3′ = cos ⁡ θe 3 + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)(e3 ⋅e3)e3 + sin ⁡ θ(e3 ×e3), = cos ⁡ θe3 + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)(1)e3, = e3.

X.B.4 Modification of coordinate systems

Additional information on the modification of coordinate systems with Result method “modifyRefCoordSys”. When developing the various transformations possible with this function, an attempt was made to keep, as much as possible, the correspondence with Patran (Patran 90) transformations. Sometimes, this process has been partially done by trials and guesses until an agreement was found.

In the rest of the section, one gives the information allowing the user to determine exactly the operations that are performed on finite element entities and coordinate systems to defined the transformed coordinate system. One makes the distinction between local, global and projected coordinate systems.

X.B.4.1 Local coordinate systems

Several types of local coordinate systems may be defined, and the operations performed to define the coordinate system depend on the case:

1.

The “elemIJK” coordinate system definitions may be found in Patran User Manual. It is also common to the element coordinate systems of most finite element programs. Usually, it is defined with the three first definition nodes of the element. Direction X corresponds to the vector from node 1 to node 3. Direction Y is determined from the position of node 3.

2.

The “plyCS” coordinate system is obtained on surfacic elements with “PCOMP” or “PCOMPG” properties by rotating the local material coordinate system with the appropriate angle around its axis Z. For other elements, the ”plyCS” coordinate system is identical to the material coordinate system.

3.

The “matCS” coordinate system definition depends on the type of element:

(a)

For 0D elements, no material coordinate system exists.

(b)

For 1D elements, the material coordinate system corresponds the element coordinate systems (i.e. Nastran element coordinate system).

(c)

For 2D elements, the material coordinate system can be defined by two methods:

i.

If the material coordinate system is defined by an integer, this integer corresponds to the index of the coordinate system defined in the DataBase. Then the new coordinate system as follows:

  • The First vector of the coordinate system is extracted.

  • It is projected on the XY plane defined by the Nastran element coordinate system. This gives the vector X of the local material Cartesian coordinate system.

  • The Vector Z of the local material Cartesian coordinate system is identical to the vector Z of Nastran element coordinate system.

ii.

if the material coordinate system is defined by a real argument, the value corresponds to a rotation angle θ. Then the local material Cartesian coordinate system is defined as follows:

  • One first builds the IJK Cartesian coordinate system.

  • Then the vector X of IJK coordinate system is rotated by an angle θ around axis Z of IJK coordinate system.

  • This rotated vector s projected on the XY plane defined by the Nastran element coordinate system. This gives the vector X of the local material Cartesian coordinate system.

  • The Vector Z of the local material Cartesian coordinate system is identical to the vector Z of Nastran element coordinate system.

(d)

For 3D elements, the material coordinate is generally identified by an integer in the “PSOLID” card. It is then retrieved from the DataBase. If no material coordinate system is specified in the “PSOLID” card, then the material coordinate system corresponds to the Nastran element coordinate system.

4.

The “nodeCS” coordinate system corresponds to the node analysis coordinate system. See Nastran reference guide for more information.

5.

The “elemCS” coordinate system corresponds to the Nastran local coordinate system. See Nastran reference guide for more information. Note that the construction of Nastran local coordinate system for CQUAD and 3D elements is complicated. (See sections X.B.4.4 and X.B.4.5 for more information.)

X.B.4.2 Global coordinate systems

Global coordinate systems correspond to CoordSys objects. However one makes the distinction between:

1.

The basic coordinate system identified with integer 0.

2.

Coordinate systems which have a correspondence in the DataBase from which they have been or may be extracted. Those coordinate systems are identified with an integer larger than 0.

3.

Other user defined coordinate systems which have no correspondence in the DataBase. They are identified with integer -2000.

Not that the user is responsible for the use he makes on coordinate systems defined in DataBase. In particular, it is true when several DataBases are used.

X.B.4.3 Projected coordinate systems

The projected coordinate system is a local Cartesian coordinate system the definition of which depends on the type of element:

1.

For 0D elements, no coordinate system is build.

2.

For 1D and 3D elements, the Nastran element coordinate system is returned.

3.

For 2D elements, the projection makes sense. The coordinate system is build as follows:

(a)

The Z vector is the normal to the surface of the 2D element. For a CTRIA3, the vector Z is constant on the element. But for a CQUAD4 the nodes of which are not co-planar, the vector Z depends on the location on the element.

(b)

The direction vector is projected on a plane perpendicular to Z and defines direction X. Note that the direction vector is associated to a coordinate system which may be curvilinear.

Note that for 2D elements, the definition of projected coordinate system is more general that in Patran. Indeed, in Patran, only the vector X of the specified coordinate system is projected.

X.B.4.4 Local coordinate systems of CQUAD4 elements

For CQUAD4 Nastran elements, the origin of the element coordinate system is defined to be the intersection of straight lines AC and BD( A, B, C, and D being the corners of the element). As long as the four defining nodes are co-planar, this definition is sufficient. But otherwise, the two straight lines do not intersection, and a generalization of the definition of the origin has to be found. We decide that the origin of the coordinate system shall be the point closest to the two straight lines AC and BD.

The two straight lines can be defined with corresponding parameterized equations:

x1 = (1 2 + ξ)xA + (1 2 - ξ)xC,

x2 = (1 2 + η)xB + (1 2 - η)xD.

So, one has to find the parameters ξ and η that minimize ∥x1 -x2∥. The vector x1 -x2 can be developed as follows:

x1 -x2 = (xA -xB + xC -xD) + (xA -xC) ξ + (xD -xB) η, = v3 + v1ξ + v2η,

where

v1 = xA -xC, v2 = xD -xB, v3 = xA -xB + xC -xD.

The square of the norm defined above (x1 -x2) 2 depends on parameters ξ and η and is given by:

f(ξ,η) = v32 + 2v 3 ⋅v1ξ + 2v3 ⋅v2η + v12ξ2 + v 22η2 + 2v 1 ⋅v2ξη.

This function must be stationary at the optimum point. Therefore its first derivatives wrt ξ and η must be zero:

f,ξ(ξ,η) = f,η(ξ,η) = 0.

This leads to a system of two linear equations with the two unknowns ξ and η:

v3 ⋅v1 + v12ξ + v 1 ⋅v2η = 0,

v3 ⋅v2 + v1 ⋅v2ξ + v22η = 0.

These two equations may be rewritten as follows:

v1 ⋅ (v3 + v1ξ + v2η) = 0,

v2 ⋅ (v3 + v1ξ + v2η) = 0,

Or simply

v1 ⋅ (x1 -x2) = 0,

v2 ⋅ (x1 -x2) = 0.

This equation simply means that the vector connecting the two optimum points is perpendicular to both lines AC and BD. Finally, after resolution of the system of equations and various substitutions, on finds the origin of coordinate system at:

x0 = x1 + x2 2 , = xA + xB + xC + xD 4 + xA -xC 2 ξ + xB -xD 2 η.

X.B.4.5 Local coordinate systems of 3D elements

In Nastran, for 3D elements, the definition of the local element coordinate system is a little tricky, and it is not easy to interpret the information found in the reference manuals. One provides here the interpretation that has been used to build the coordinate systems of 3D elements in FeResPost.

The first step of the local element construction is to build three vectors R, S and T related to the geometry of the element. The way those three vectors are constructed depends on the 3D element that is being constructed. Then the R, S and T vectors are used to build a local Cartesian coordinate system. In Nastran Quick Reference Guide [Sof04b], on gives the following explanation for the CTETRA element:

The element coordinate system is chosen as close as possible to the R, S, and T vectors and points in the same general direction. (Mathematically speaking, the coordinate system is computed in such a way that, if the R, S, and T vectors are described in the element coordinate system, a 3x3 positive definite symmetric matrix would be produced.)

In FeResPost, it is assumed that this information is also true for the other 3D elements CHEXA and CPENTA. The mathematical development that leads to the definition of the local coordinate system is given here.

First, let us introduce the notations: r1 = R, r2 = S, r3 = T. So the element coordinate system is {O,ei} and the three vectors R, S and T are denoted ri. Then one defines with matrix A corresponding to the description of vectors ri on the base ei. One has:

ri = Aijej,

Aij = ri ⋅ej.

The above statement is equivalent to state that matrix Aij must be symmetric. So the problem reduces to “find three base vectors ei such that:

ri ⋅ej = rj ⋅ei.

Note also that this condition makes us think to the polar decomposition theorem that states that a positive definite tensor can be decomposed in the product of an orthogonal tensor and a pure symmetric positive definite tensor. This means that any deformation of a continuum medium can be decomposed in a rigid rotation and a pure deformation. One is actually interested in the rigid rotation that can be expressed by its rotation vector (see section X.B.3). So considering an initial set of base vectors ei and the three vectors ri provided as data, one must find the three components of the vector w = θv such that the new base vector ei′ obtained with equation (X.B.1) satisfy the relation

ri ⋅ej′-r j ⋅ei′ = 0.
(X.B.2)

This set of equations is non linear in the primary unknowns wi and one solves them by a Newton-Raphson in which successive approximations of the three vectors ei are calculated. One performs a Taylor expansion of the relation (X.B.2) stopped at the first order:

ej′ ≈e j + Δej,

Δej ≈Δw×ej.

Substituting the two previous expressions in (X.B.2), one obtains successively:

ri ⋅ (ej + Δej) -rj ⋅ (ei + Δei) = 0,

ri ⋅ (ej + Δw×ej) -rj ⋅ (ei + Δw×ei) = 0,

ri ⋅ (Δw×ej) -rj ⋅ (Δw×ei) = rj ⋅ei -ri ⋅ej,

(ej ×ri -ei ×rj) ⋅Δw = rj ⋅ei -ri ⋅ej.
(X.B.3)

This last expression allows to derive three independent linear equations, with three unknowns wi. The Newton-Raphson algorithm used looks as follows:

1.

Determine a first estimate of the three vectors ei. In FeResPost, one chooses e1 parallel to R, e2 perpendicular to plane defined by vectors R and T, and e3 perpendicular to e1 and e2.

2.

Then one iterates until convergence:

(a)

Vector Δw is obtained by solving (X.B.3).

(b)

One then obtains the rotation angle θ and unit rotation vector v:

θ = ∥Δw∥,

v = Δw ∥Δw∥.
(c)

New estimates of the base vectors are obtained using (X.B.1).

One assumes convergence if θ < 10-5.

X.B.5 Coordinate systems and laminate properties

Vectorial and tensorial components of Results are sometimes expressed in coordinate systems related to material properties. Of course, this is also the case when laminated properties are attributed to the elements. Then, three different coordinate systems can be used: “plyCS”, “lamCS” and “matCS”.

When vectorial or tensorial Results on composite elements are imported, they are expressed:

1.

In “plyCS” coordinate system if the values are associated to a laminate ply (layerId>0).

2.

In “lamCS” coordinate system for Nastran Results when the values are not associated to a ply (layerId<=0).

3.

In “matCS” coordinate system for Samcef Results when the values are not associated to a ply (layerId<=0).

The difference between Samcef and Nastran is related to the fact that Nastran does not make a difference between material and laminate coordinate systems. Then, one considers that “matCS” == “lamCS”.

When one modifies the reference coordinate system of a Result, the components are actually modified according to the rules presented in Table X.B.1.


Table X.B.1: New coordinate system associations to Results for different combination of modification of reference coordinate system, software, element property types, and layers to which the values are associated.
Software Prop. type layerId“matCS”“lamCS”“plyCS”
Nastran homogenous <0 “matCS”“matCS”“matCS”
Samcef homogenous <0 “matCS”“matCS”“matCS”
Nastran homogenous >0 — — —
Samcef homogenous >0 — — —
Nastran laminate <0 “lamCS”“lamCS”“lamCS”
Samcef laminate <0 “matCS”“lamCS”“lamCS”
Nastran laminate >0 “lamCS”“lamCS”“plyCS”
Samcef laminate >0 “matCS”“lamCS”“plyCS”

X.B.6 Eigenvectors of symmetric tensors and orthogonal matrices

Most of the tensors corresponding to finite element results are order 2 symmetric tensors. The three eigenvectors of these tensors are mutually orthogonal, and it is possible to find a coordinate system with respect to which tensor T has a diagonal form. More precisely, this is done as follows:

X.B.7 Building rotation tensor from rotation vector

A rotation can be defined with a vector. Then, the axis of rotation is parallel to the vector and the amplitude of rotation in radians corresponds to the magnitude of rotation vector:

r = θk,

in which k is the unit vector defining rotation axis. The rotation vector r corresponds typically to the rotational displacements calculated by finite element solver.

This section explains how the rotation matrix Q introduced in section X.B.6 can be derived from rotation vector r. To do this, we first justify how a vector u is transformed to rotated vector v by rotation r.

Note first that vector v can be decomposed in a sum of two vectors respectively parallel and orthogonal to axis of rotation:

v∥ = (k⋅v)k = (kk)⋅v,
v⊥ = v-v∥ = (δ-kk)⋅v.

A third vector perpendicular to the first two vectors is also built:

v⊤ ⁡ = k×v⊥.

Note that as k and v⊥ are orthogonal, and k has unit length, the magnitude of v⊤ ⁡ is the same as the magnitude of v⊥. Also, as k×v∥ = 0, one can also write:

v⊤ ⁡ = k×v.
(X.B.4)

We also have

v⊥ = -k×v⊤ ⁡ = -k×k×v.

In equation (X.B.4), we have a linear relation between vectors v and v⊤ ⁡. This means that a matrix K can be introduced such that:

v⊤ ⁡ = K⋅v.

Using indicial notation and Einstein summation convention on repeated indices we write:

v⊤ ⁡i = Kilvl = ϵijlkjvl,

and

Kil = ϵijlkj = ( 0 - kz ky kz 0 - kx - ky kx 0 ) .

Using matrix K, we write:

v⊥ = -K2 ⋅v,
v∥ = (I + K2) ⋅v,
v⊤ ⁡ = K⋅v.

The rotated vector v′ is obtained as follows:

v′ = v ∥ + cos ⁡ θv⊥ + sin ⁡ θv⊤ ⁡, = (I + K2) ⋅v- cos ⁡ θK2 ⋅v + sin ⁡ θK⋅v, = (I + K2 - cos ⁡ θK2 + sin ⁡ θK)⋅v, = R⋅v,

where R is defined as:

R = I + K2 - cos ⁡ θK2 + sin ⁡ θK, = I + sin ⁡ θK + (1 - cos ⁡ θ)K2. (X.B.5)

The rotation matrix R corresponds to matrix QT in section X.B.6. Tensor Q can be obtained by using -r instead of r in the derivation of R. It can be used to transform the components of vectors and tensors as explained in section X.B.6.

The derivation of R matrix via expression (X.B.5) corresponds to Rodrigues’ rotation formula.

Appendix X.C
Results characteristics

The different Results pre-defined in FeResPost are presented in this Appendix. All these Results can be read from results files produced by different finite element solvers described in Part III. The characteristics of the different Results are described in Tables X.C.1 to X.C.10. The following notations have been adopted:

In the description of Results, a distinction is made between Real and Complex Results (section X.C.1 and X.C.2 respectively).

X.C.1 Real Results

A summary of the Results that can be read is given in Table X.C.1 to X.C.10.


Table X.C.1: Nodal Results
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Coordinates” N V
“Displacements, Translational” N V
“Displacements, Rotational” N V
“Displacements, Scalar” N S
“Velocities, Translational” N V
“Velocities, Rotational” N V
“Velocities, Scalar” N S
“Accelerations, Translational” N V
“Accelerations, Rotational” N V
“Accelerations, Scalar” N S
“Applied Loads, Forces” N V
“Applied Loads, Moments” N V
“MPC Forces, Forces” N V
“MPC Forces, Moments” N V
“MPC Forces, Scalar” N S
“SPC Forces, Forces” N V
“SPC Forces, Moments” N V
“SPC Forces, Scalar” N S
“Reaction Forces, Forces” N V
“Reaction Forces, Moments” N V
“Reaction Forces, Scalar” N S
“Contact, Contact Pressure” N S
“Contact, Friction Stress” N S
“Contact, Nodal Distance” N S
“Contact, Normal Distance” N S
“Temperature” N S
“Temperature Variation Rate” N S


Table X.C.2: Grid Point Forces.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Grid Point Forces, Internal Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Internal Moments” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, MPC Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, MPC Moments” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, SPC Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, SPC Moments” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Applied Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Applied Moments” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Reaction Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Reaction Moments” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Total Forces” EN V
“Grid Point Forces, Total Moments” EN V


Table X.C.3: Element General Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Mechanical Strain Tensor” (5) E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Strain Tensor” (5) E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Stress Tensor” E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Effective Plastic Strain” (10) E, EN, EL, ENL S
“Effective Creep Strain” (10) E, EN, EL, ENL S
“Element Strain Energy” E S
“Element Strain Energy (Density)” E S
“Element Strain Energy (Percent of Total)” E S
“Element Kinetic Energy” E S
“Element Kinetic Energy (Density)” E S
“Element Kinetic Energy (Percent of Total)” E S
“Element Energy Loss” E S
“Element Energy Loss (Density)” E S
“Element Energy Loss (Percent of Total)” E S


Table X.C.4: Beam element Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Beam Axial Strain for Axial Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Bending Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Total Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Strain for Torsion Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Strain for Total Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Axial Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Bending Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Stress for Torsion Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Stress for Total Loads” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Forces” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Moments” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Warping Torque” E, EN T
“Beam Deformations” (2) E, EN T
“Beam Velocities” (2) E, EN T


Table X.C.5: Bush, Gap and Scalar elements specific Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Gap Slips” (8) E, EN T
“Bush Forces Stress Tensor” (9) E T
“Bush Forces Strain Tensor” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Stress Tensor” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Strain Tensor” (9) E T
“Bush Plastic Strain” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Strain” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Stress” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Forces” (3) E, EN S


Table X.C.6: Shell elements specific Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Curvature Tensor” E, EN T
“Shell Forces” E, EN T
“Shell Moments” E, EN T


Table X.C.7: Results specific to shear panels.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Shear Panel Strain, Max” E, EN T
“Shear Panel Strain, Average” E, EN T
“Shear Panel Stress, Max” E, EN T
“Shear Panel Stress, Average” E, EN T


Table X.C.8: Composite Results, layered failure indices (10).
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 3” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Tsai-Wu” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Hoffman” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 1” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 2” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Hashin Version 3” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Strain” EL, ENLT (11)
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Strain, CompMax”EL, ENLS (11)
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Stress” EL, ENLT (11)
“Composite Failure Index, Maximum Stress, CompMax”EL, ENLS (11)
“Composite Failure Index, Stress Ratio” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Strain Ratio” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Rice and Tracey” EL, ENL S
“Composite Failure Index, Interlaminar Shear Stress” EL, ENL S


Table X.C.9: Composite Results, critical ply failure indices (10).
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 1” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 2” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Hill Version 3” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Tsai-Wu” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hoffman” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 1” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 2” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Hashin Version 3” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Maximum Strain, CompMax” E, EN S (11)
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Maximum Stress, CompMax” E, EN S (11)
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Stress Ratio” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Strain Ratio” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Rice and Tracey” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply Failure Index, Interlaminar Shear Stress” E, EN S


Table X.C.10: Composite Results, critical plies (10).
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 1” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 2” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Hill Version 3” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Tsai-Wu” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Hoffman” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 1” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 2” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Hashin Version 3” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Maximum Strain, CompMax” E, EN S (11)
“Composite Critical Ply, Maximum Stress, CompMax” E, EN S (11)
“Composite Critical Ply, Stress Ratio” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Strain Ratio” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Rice and Tracey” E, EN S
“Composite Critical Ply, Interlaminar Shear Stress” E, EN S


Table X.C.11: Element Thermal Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Temperature Gradient” E, EN V
“Conductive Heat Flux” E, EN V
“Specific Heat Energy” E, EN S
“Applied Heat Flux” E, EN S

In the following remarks about the information given in Tables X.C.1 to X.C.10, the international unit system is assumed.

1.

“Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments” are assumed in FeResPost to be tensorial Results expressed in N or Nm respectively. However several components of the tensor are systematically zero. The non-zero components are:

F = ( FxxFxyFxz Fxy 0 0 Fxz 0 0 ) ,M = ( MxxMxyMxz Mxy 0 0 Mxz 0 0 ) .

There is an approximation for the moments above because the torsional component is calculated with respect to the cross-section shear centre, and bending components are calculated with respect to the cross-section centre of inertia.

The beam forces are assumed to be calculated from the Cauchy stress tensor components as follows:

{F } = ( Fxx Fxy Fxz ) = ∫ Ω ( σxx τxy τxz ) dΩ.

In which Ω is the surface defined by a cross-section through the beam orthogonal to beam longitudinal axis. (It is assumed here that the beam longitudinal direction corresponds to the “x” axis.) Similarly, the bending moments tensor is assumed to be calculated from the Cauchy stress tensor components as follows:

{M } = ( Mxx Mxy Mxz ) = ∫ Ω ( (y - yC) τxz - (z - zC) τxy (z - z0) σxx - (y - y0) σxx ) dΩ.

In which y and z are the components of coordinates in Ω section, y0 and z0 correspond to the coordinates of center of gravity of the section, and yC and zC correspond to the shear center coordinates. Note also that “Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments” are Results that correspond to most 1D elements. (Bars, beams, rods, bushing elements...). However spring elements do not produce “Beam Forces” and “Beam Moments”.

These conventions ensure that beam forces and moments behave like real order 2 tensors when transformation of coordinates systems are performed. The vectorial forces and moments at the two extremities are easily obtained. Vectors

{F } = ( Fxx Fxy Fxz )  and  {M } = ( Mxx Mxy Mxz )

correspond to the forces and moments that must be applied on + x side of the beam. On the - x side of the beam the components of these vectors must be multiplied by -1.

2.

“Beam Deformations” is a tensorial Result corresponding to the difference of displacements of grids B and A of the beam element. The tensor is expressed in element axes. The “Beam Velocities” Result is the time derivative of the “Beam Deformations”.

3.

Spring forces are scalar. The units depend on the connected components: N for displacements and Nm for rotations. (Of course, it is also possible to define springs connecting translational and rotational degrees of freedom, but it is generally an error.)

4.

“Shell Forces” and “Shell Moments” are tensorial Results expressed in N/m or N respectively. These Results contain all the force and moment tensors produced by 2D elements. The non-zero components are:

F = ( FxxFxyQxz FxyFyyQyz QxzQyz 0 ) ,M = ( MxxMxy0 MxyMyy0 0 0 0 ) .

(Symbol Q has been used for the out-of-plane shear force.)

The shell in-plane forces are assumed to be calculated from the Cauchy stress tensor components as follows:

Fxx = ∫ -h∕2h∕2σ xx dz, Fxy = ∫ -h∕2h∕2σ xy dz, ...

Similarly, the bending moments tensor is assumed to be calculated using the distribution through the thickness of the Cauchy stress tensor components as follows:

Mxx = ∫ -h∕2h∕2zσ xx dz, Mxy = ∫ -h∕2h∕2zσ xy dz, ...

This is a usual convention for shell elements. For example, this is generally the convention used to present the theory of classical laminate analysis. When a component of the bending tensor is positive, the corresponding component is positive on the upper surface of the shell, and negative on the other face.

5.

The shear components of strain tensors Results stored in FeResPost are the ϵij = γij∕2.

6.

The shell curvature tensor is defined as follows:

{κ} = ( κxx κyy κxy ) = 12 h3 ∫ -h∕2h∕2z ( ϵxx ϵyy ϵxy ) dz = ( w,xx0 w,yy0 w,xy0 ) .

Here again, a positive curvature means that the corresponding component of strain tensor is in tension on the upper face, and in compression on the lower face of the shell.

7.

Beam stresses and strains are always scalar Results corresponding either to the axial component, or to the norm of the shear components. Depending on the type of element, the axial stress may be calculated from the axial or bending loads, or to involve both contributions.

8.

Gap elements produce various results. Results are vectorial or tensorial and:

9.

Bushing elements produce Stress and Strain tensors obtained by multiplying the Beam Forces and Beam Moments by specified constants. These constants are by default set to 1. Therefore, stresses and strains have often values identical to the forces and moments. Note that the meaning of modifications of coordinate systems for bush stresses and strains have may be discussed. This is particularly so for stresses and strains corresponding to moments.

10.

Composite Results have non-linear dependence on the primary unknowns (displacements). Therefore, composite Results obtained by linear combination of elementary Results are false. This remark applies to all non-linear Results, plastification Results...

11.

Actually “Maximum Strain” and “Maximum Stress” composite Results are not tensorial because each component is a separate scalar Result. So no modification of coordinate system can be done for these Results.

The corresponding “CompMax” scalar Results are obtained by selecting the maximum failure index value among the six components.

X.C.2 Complex Results

The Complex Result types are summarized in Tables X.C.12 to X.C.16.


Table X.C.12: Complex Nodal Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Displacements (RI), Translational” N V
“Displacements (RI), Rotational” N V
“Displacements (MP), Translational” N V
“Displacements (MP), Rotational” N V
“Velocities (RI), Translational” N V
“Velocities (RI), Rotational” N V
“Velocities (MP), Translational” N V
“Velocities (MP), Rotational” N V
“Accelerations (RI), Translational” N V
“Accelerations (RI), Rotational” N V
“Accelerations (MP), Translational” N V
“Accelerations (MP), Rotational” N V
“Applied Loads (RI), Forces” N V
“Applied Loads (RI), Moments” N V
“Applied Loads (MP), Forces” N V
“Applied Loads (MP), Moments” N V
“MPC Forces (RI), Forces” N V
“MPC Forces (RI), Scalar” N S
“MPC Forces (MP), Forces” N V
“MPC Forces (MP), Scalar” N S
“SPC Forces (RI), Forces” N V
“SPC Forces (RI), Moments” N V
“SPC Forces (MP), Forces” N V
“SPC Forces (MP), Moments” N V


Table X.C.13: Element Complex General Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Strain Tensor (RI)” (5) E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Stress Tensor (RI)” E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Strain Tensor (MP)” (5)E, EN, EL, ENL T
“Stress Tensor (MP)” E, EN, EL, ENL T


Table X.C.14: Beam element Complex Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Beam Axial Strain for Axial Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Bending Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Total Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Strain for Torsion Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Axial Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Bending Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Strain for Total Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Strain for Torsion Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Axial Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Bending Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Stress for Torsion Loads (RI)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Axial Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Bending Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Axial Stress for Total Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Shear Stress for Torsion Loads (MP)” (7) E, EN S
“Beam Forces (RI)” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Moments (RI)” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Warping Torque (RI)” E, EN T
“Beam Forces (MP)” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Moments (MP)” (1) E, EN T
“Beam Warping Torque (MP)” E, EN T


Table X.C.15: Bush, Gap and Scalar elements specific Complex Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Bush Forces Stress Tensor (RI)” (9) E T
“Bush Forces Strain Tensor (RI)” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Stress Tensor (RI)” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Strain Tensor (RI)” (9) E T
“Bush Forces Stress Tensor (MP)” (9) E T
“Bush Forces Strain Tensor (MP)” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Stress Tensor (MP)” (9) E T
“Bush Moments Strain Tensor (MP)” (9) E T
“Spring Scalar Strain (RI)” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Stress (RI)” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Forces (RI)” (3) E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Strain (MP)” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Stress (MP)” E, EN S
“Spring Scalar Forces (MP)” (3) E, EN S


Table X.C.16: Shell elements specific Complex Results.
Result Target Tensor
Name Entities Type
“Curvature Tensor (RI)” E, EN T
“Shell Forces (RI)” E, EN T
“Shell Moments (RI)” E, EN T
“Curvature Tensor (MP)” E, EN T
“Shell Forces (MP)” E, EN T
“Shell Moments (MP)” E, EN T

Appendix X.D
Predefined criteria

The predefined criteria source code is located in file “SRC/Result/predfinedCriteria.cpp”. So far, five criteria are defined. They are presented in section X.D.1.

Note that the user can define their own criteria, and some preparatory work has already been done. Some explanation is given in section X.D.2.

X.D.1 List of the predefined criteria

Only five predefined criteria are available at the moment. They are presented and discussed in the sub-sections that follow. Additional information on what is done in the criterion can be obtained by reading “SRC/COMMON/result/predfinedCriteria.cpp” source file.

X.D.1.1 “HoneycombAirbusMoS” criterion

This criterion is used to calculate honeycomb core margin of safety according to the so-called “Airbus” core failure criterion that combines the two components of out-of-plane stress tensor. The margin of safety is calculated according to the following expression:

MoS = 1 FoS (τL σL ) 2 + (τW σW ) 2 - 1,

in which τL and τW are the honeycomb longitudinal and transversal shear components of Cauchy stress tensor and σL and σW the corresponding allowables.

The arguments of the criterion are given in Table X.D.1. The method returns an Array of 8 elements according to Table X.D.2:


Table X.D.1: Arguments of the “HoneycombAirbusMoS” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning can be modified?
1 dB DataBase DataBase (or derived) NO
2 fos Real factor of safety NO
3 allL Real shear allowable in L-direction NO
4 allW Real shear allowable in W-direction NO
5 stressRes Result Cauchy Stress Tensor NO


Table X.D.2: Outputs of the “HoneycombAirbusMoS” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning
1 ElemId Integer Critical Element ID
2 NodeId Integer Critical Node ID
3 LayerId Integer Critical Layer ID
4 SubLayerIdInteger Critical Sub-Layer ID
5 sigLmax Real L OOP shear component of stress tensor at critical location
6 sigWmax Real W OOP shear component of stress tensor at critical location
7 mosMin Real Critical margin of safety
8 mosRes Result All the margins of safety that have been calculated

X.D.1.2 “HoneycombAirbusSR” criterion

This criterion is used to calculate honeycomb core margin of safety according to the so-called “Airbus” core failure criterion that combines the two components of out-of-plane stress tensor. The margin of safety is calculated according to the following expression:

MoS = 1 FoS (τL σL ) 2 + (τW σW ) 2 - 1,

in which τL and τW are the honeycomb longitudinal and transversal shear components of Cauchy stress tensor and σL and σW the corresponding allowables. In fact, a strength ratio is calculated instead of a margin of safety. The relation between strength ratio, reserve factor and margin of safety is as follows:

SR = 1 RF = 1 MoS + 1.

This leads to the following expression for the strength ratio:

SR = FoS ( τL σL ) 2 + (τW σW ) 2,

(The display of strength ratios instead of margins of safety allows usually a better identification of critical areas. This is true, for example, when results are saved in GMSH format.)

The arguments of the criterion are given in Table X.D.3. Compared to the “HoneycombAirbusMoS” discussed in section X.D.1.1, two new parameters are defined: “strL” and “strW” String arguments. These arguments allow specifying the Cauchy Stress Tensor components that should be considered for τL and τW respectively. Possible values are “XZ”, “ZX”, “YZ”, “ZY”, “XY” and “YX”. (This capability has been added to allow the post-processing of stress when the usual convention for honeycomb core material definition has not been followed.

The method returns an Array of 8 elements according to Table X.D.4:


Table X.D.3: Arguments of the “HoneycombAirbusSR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning can be modified?
1 dB DataBase DataBase (or derived) NO
2 fos Real factor of safety NO
3 allL Real shear allowable in L-direction NO
4 allW Real shear allowable in W-direction NO
5 strL String shear allowable in L-direction NO
6 strW String shear allowable in L-direction NO
7 stressRes Result Cauchy Stress Tensor NO


Table X.D.4: Outputs of the “HoneycombAirbusSR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning
1 ElemId Integer Critical Element ID
2 NodeId Integer Critical Node ID
3 LayerId Integer Critical Layer ID
4 SubLayerIdInteger Critical Sub-Layer ID
5 sigLmax Real L OOP shear component of stress tensor at critical location
6 sigWmax Real W OOP shear component of stress tensor at critical location
7 srMax Real Critical strength ratio
8 srRes Result All the strength ratios that have been calculated

X.D.1.3 “VonMisesMoS” criterion

This criterion is used to calculate Von Mises margin of safety. The margin of safety is calculated according to the following expression:

MoS = σall FoSσV M - 1,

σV M = (σxx - σyy )2 + (σyy - σzz )2 + (σzz - σxx )2 2 + 3σxy2 + 3σxz2 + 3σyz2.

The arguments of the criterion are given in Table X.D.5. The method returns an Array of 7 elements according to Table X.D.6:


Table X.D.5: Arguments of the “VonMisesMoS” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning can be modified?
1 dB DataBaseDataBase (or derived) NO
2 fos Real factor of safety NO
3 sigAll Real allowable stress NO
4 stressRes Result Cauchy Stress Tensor NO


Table X.D.6: Outputs of the “VonMisesMoS” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning
1 ElemId Integer Critical Element ID
2 NodeId Integer Critical Node ID
3 LayerId Integer Critical Layer ID
4 SubLayerIdInteger Critical Sub-Layer ID
5 vmMax Real Von Mises equivalent stress tensor at critical location
6 mosMin Real Critical margin of safety
7 mosRes Result All the margins of safety that have been calculated

X.D.1.4 “VonMisesSR” criterion

This criterion is used to calculate Von Mises strength ratios. The relation between strength ratio, reserve factor and margin of safety is as follows:

SR = 1 RF = 1 MoS + 1.

This leads to the following expression for the strength ratio:

SR = FoSσV M σall ,

in which

σV M = (σxx - σyy )2 + (σyy - σzz )2 + (σzz - σxx )2 2 + 3σxy2 + 3σxz2 + 3σyz2.

The arguments of the criterion are given in Table X.D.7. The method returns an Array of 7 elements according to Table X.D.8:


Table X.D.7: Arguments of the “VonMisesSR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning can be modified?
1 dB DataBaseDataBase (or derived) NO
2 fos Real factor of safety NO
3 sigAll Real allowable stress NO
4 stressRes Result Cauchy Stress Tensor NO


Table X.D.8: Outputs of the “VonMisesSR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning
1 ElemId Integer Critical Element ID
2 NodeId Integer Critical Node ID
3 LayerId Integer Critical Layer ID
4 SubLayerIdInteger Critical Sub-Layer ID
5 vmMax Real Von Mises equivalent stress tensor at critical location
6 srMax Real Critical strength ratio
7 srRes Result All the strength ratios that have been calculated

X.D.1.5 “SGI_SR” criterion

This criterion is used to calculate with a single call three connection failure criteria: sliding, gapping and insert. The calculation is done by calculating strength ratios. The relation between strength ratio, reserve factor and margin of safety is as follows:

SR = 1 RF = 1 MoS + 1.

In this case, three strength ratios are calculated:

In these expressions, various scalar values related to the connection force and moment vectors are calculated:

Faxial = F⋅d,

Fshear = F ⋅ F - F axial 2,

Mtorsion = M⋅d,

Mbending = M ⋅ M - Mtorsion 2.

The arguments of the criterion are given in Table X.D.9:

The method returns an Array of 15 elements (5 elements for each criterion):


Table X.D.9: Arguments of the “SGI_SR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning can be modified?
1 dB DataBase DataBase (or derived) NO
2 extractionMethod String Forces and Moments extraction method NO
3 fRes Result Vectorial Forces YES
4 mRes Result Vectorial Moments YES
5 csId String/Integer Reference coordinate system NO
6 vx Real X component of connection axis vector NO
7 vy Real Y component of connection axis vector NO
8 vz Real Z component of connection axis vector NO
9 FoSs Real Sliding criterion safety factor NO
10 FoSg Real Gapping criterion safety factor NO
11 FoSi Real Insert criterion safety factor NO
12 Pmin Real Bolt minimum pretension for sliding or gapping NO
13 Cf Real Friction coefficient for sliding criterion NO
14 Lg Real Prying length for gapping criterion NO
15 PSS Real Insert tensile allowable NO
16 QSS Real Insert shear allowable NO


Table X.D.10: Outputs of the “SGI_SR” predefined criterion
.
Pos. Name Type meaning
1 ssrMax Real/Boolean Maximum Strength Ratio (for sliding)
2 ENId Integer/Boolean Critical Element/Node ID (for sliding)
3 sfAxialMax Real/Boolean Axial force in critical connection (for sliding)
4 sfShearMax Real/Boolean Shear force in critical connection (for sliding)
5 ssrRes Result/Boolean All the strength ratios (for sliding)
6 gsrMax Real/Boolean Maximum Strength Ratio (for gapping)
7 ENId Integer/Boolean Critical Element/Node ID (for gapping)
8 gfAxialMax Real/Boolean Axial force in critical connection (for gapping)
9 gmBendingMax Real/Boolean Bending moment in critical connection (for gapping)
10 gsrRes Result/Boolean All the strength ratios (for gapping)
11 isrMax Real/Boolean Maximum Strength Ratio (for inserts)
12 ENId Integer/Boolean Critical Element/Node ID (for inserts)
13 ifAxialMax Real/Boolean Axial force in critical connection (for inserts)
14 ifShearMax Real/Boolean Shear force in critical connection (for inserts)
15 isrRes Result/Boolean All the strength ratios (for inserts)

X.D.1.6 Interaction criteria

Semi-empirical failure criteria corresponding to the combination of elementary failure modes with different load components are often found in the literature. For example, [otNCE21] gives two criteria for the verification of ultimate failure of bolt under combined tensile, shear and bending loads:

( Psu Psu-allow ) 2.5 + ( Ptu Ptu-allow + fbu Ptu-allow ) 1.5 ≤ 1.
(X.D.1)

( Psu Psu-allow ) 2.5 + ( Ptu Ptu-allow ) 1.5 + ( fbu Ptu-allow ) ≤ 1.
(X.D.2)

The derivation of a reserve factor from expressions (X.D.1) or (X.D.2) is not straightforward. Starting from the definition of reserve factor (value by which loads can be multiplied to reach failure), it can be verified that for (X.D.1) it corresponds to the value x such that

(x Psu Psu-allow ) 2.5 + [x ( Ptu Ptu-allow + fbu Ptu-allow )] 1.5 - 1 = 0.
(X.D.3)

Similarly, for interaction expression (X.D.2), RF is the solution in x of

(x Psu Psu-allow ) 2.5 + (x Ptu Ptu-allow ) 1.5 + (x fbu Ptu-allow ) - 1 = 0.
(X.D.4)

An analytic expression of the solution x of equations (X.D.3) or (X.D.4) as a function of the different parameters is generally not available. Then, other ways to calculate x numerically must be tried. For the three methods “Interaction_2_SR”, “Interaction_3_SR” and “Interaction_N_SR”, a dichotomous solver is proposed. The two first methods are specializations of the general case solved by predefined criterion “Interaction_N_SR”. This corresponds to the resolution in x of equation:

∑ i=1N (α ix)βi - 1 = 0.
(X.D.5)

The 2N arguments of the “Interaction_N_SR” predefined criterion are parameters in the following order: α1, β1, α2... and βN:

(“Interaction_2_SR”, “Interaction_3_SR” criteria need 4 and 6 arguments respectively.) “Interaction_N_SR” predefined criterion returns an Array of two values:

A modified version of the “Interaction_abg_N_SR” predefined criterion corresponds to the resolution in x of the following equation:

∑ i=1N (α ix + γi) βi - 1 = 0.
(X.D.6)

The 3N arguments of the “Interaction_abg_N_SR” predefined criterion are parameters in the following order: α1, β1, γ1, α2... and γN:

X.D.2 User predefined criteria

A user who wishes to define their own criteria can do so by inserting code in “SRC/Result/predfinedCriteria.cpp” source file and re-compiling the library. Three areas are to be modified:

Appendix X.E
An Excel workbook devoted to post-processing

In directory “COM/EX99_XL_POST”, an Excel workbook “PostProject.xlsm” is provided, devoted to the automation of stressing of the satellite.

This example shows how FeResPost COM component can be used to build an excel project defining post-processing methods and data. More precisely, the purpose of this example is to define with excel a post-processing similar to the example of Chapter IV.4 with FeResPost ruby extension.

The advantage of using Excel and COM component, is that it is now possible to use Excel to define the different data of the detailed calculation, and several formatting functions. In fact, the definition of data is no longer dispersed in the Ruby programming code. At the same time, The use of functions in Excel allows defining many things such as the sequencing of calculations, the formatting of results, the calculation and archive of results for load cases or not...

Here again, the example is defined in a workbook that contains both worksheets (section X.E.2) and VBA modules (section X.E.3).

X.E.1 Preparing the application

X.E.1.1 “Optimizing” excel

FeResPost is not programmed as a multi-threaded library, but some versions of excel are (2007 and later versions). Therefore, the multi-threaded calculation should be disabled in excel when FeResPost is used. (See the “advanced options” in excel.)

The use of FeResPost with excel “multi-threaded” option enabled may result in a multiplication of elapsed computing time by a factor 2 approximately.

X.E.1.2 Referencing FeResPost in VBA

Before using the excel workbook, the FeResPost COM component must be referenced. This is done as follows:

Once this has been done, you may save the excel workbook so that the references to FeResPost library shall be “remembered” the next time you open the workbook.

If a FeResPost COM server is already referenced in the workbook when you open it the first time. (As it probably will be the case with the workbook you download from FeResPost web site.) You must first un-select the old reference to FeResPost server, before selecting the new one. You will have to perform this operation each time you install a new version of FeResPost COM server on your computer.

When you change the version of FeResPost, you will also have to modify the variable “appName” in “DbAndLoadCases” VBA module of the workbook.

X.E.1.3 Installing “SQLite for Excel”

The application outputs an SQLite database that stores Results for different loadcases. (See “ResultsGMSH” module in section X.E.3.5.) This means that the corresponding libraries must be installed on your computer. Note that these libraries are provided in
“TESTSAT/COM/EX99_XL_SQLITE_4_EXCEL” directory.

The variable “sqliteLibDirName” contains the path to the directory containing the “SQLite3” shared libraries. This variable must be adapted to match your installation.

X.E.2 Worksheets

Several types of worksheets are defined in the workbook:

X.E.2.1 “LcSelector” worksheet

This worksheet is used to select the definition of databases and load cases, and to select a sub-set of load cases that shall be post-processed. Two data must be entered “manually” (they appear in blue in the worksheet):

The worksheet also defines several automation buttons:

More information on the archiving of Results and the creation of GMSH files is provided in the sections devoted to the corresponding VBA modules.

X.E.2.2 Worksheet for Definition of databases and load cases

One or several worksheets defining databases and load cases can be defined in the workbook. However, only one such worksheet can be selected in “LcSelector” worksheet. The content of the worksheet must comply with certain conventions:

X.E.2.3 Worksheet for Selection of load cases and associated parameters

One or several worksheets define selections of load cases and associated parameters. The first line is a title line. It also defines the names of parameters that are defined for each selected load case. The following lines define the load cases and parameters:

One notes that one load case can be defined in different “selection” worksheets with identical or different parameter values. The “TempLoad” parameter is used here to associate a load case name to an integer ID corresponding to the name of the temperature field used by Nastran to load the structure. This value is used by some post-processing functions to retrieve the temperature fields stored in an SQLite database. (See the “recoverTemp.rb” example in section IV.2.8.5.)

The “FEMDB” parameter name is reserved. It allows the forcing of the association of one or several load cases to a particular finite element database. This can be handy when one tries to avoid the definition of too many different databases. The associated value is a String corresponding to the identifier attributed to the database in the databases and load cases definition worksheet.

X.E.2.4 Post-processing worksheets

Those are the worksheets in which the detailed data of post-processing are defined. Four such worksheets are defined so far: “post_connect” is devoted to the post-processing of connection loads, “post_sandwich” is devoted to the post-processing of stresses in sandwich panels, and “post_composite” uses the function “getCompositeRf” that calculates reserve factors using the classical laminate analysis. Worksheet “post_extract” has been added to illustrate the extraction of Results on lists of elements and/or nodes defined explicitly in ranges of cells.

These worksheets mainly use the functions defined in “ExtractionCriteria”, "ResultsExtraction", and “ResultsArchiver” modules. Basically, they define the data, and perform the call to functions of these modules. One makes several remarks about the use of these worksheets:

X.E.2.5 “envelopeGMSH” worksheet

This worksheet is used to generate “manually” the GMSH files containing the envelopes of Results. More precisely, a selection of load cases is read, and the corresponding Results retrieved from “” SQLITE database are retrieved and used to generate envelopes of Results that shall be saved in GMSH files.

This is done by clicking the “Save GMSH envelope” button. The arguments of the corresponding subroutine are stored in two cells:

X.E.3 VBA modules

One presents below the different modules that have been defined in the project.

X.E.3.1 “DbAndLoadCases” VBA module

This module is closely related to the definition of databases and load cases. It manages the recovery of information needed to create the databases, and to generate and read the Results corresponding to the different load cases. Several variables corresponding to the lists of databases, elementary and combined load cases are defined in the module. For example:

This module also provides functions that allow retrieval of Results or load case information. Several such functions deserve more explanation:

These methods are mentioned here because they are used in “ExtractCriteria” module to program post-processing operations. The user that wishes to modify the post-processing criteria will use these functions.

X.E.3.2 “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module

Among other things, the different functions called in post-processing are defined in that module worksheets to perform specific post-processing operations. As this module defines many functions that can be called from post-processing worksheets, a separate section is specifically devoted to this module. (See section X.E.4.)

X.E.3.3 “ResultsExtraction” VBA module

The module defines the “extract” function that is used to extract values on selections of elements and nodes explicitly defined in the post-processing worksheet. This function is matricial as the different functions defined in “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module. The arguments of this function are:

1.

A String corresponding to the type of entities on which the values are extracted. Possible values are “E” for elements, “N” for nodes or “EN” for pairs of elements and nodes.

2.

A selection defining the list of entities on which the values are extracted. The values in the selection must be of integer type. The selection must have two columns if the first parameter is “EN”, one column otherwise.

The number of lines or the matrix returned by the function matches the number of lines of this selection.

3.

A String corresponding to the name of the current load case.

4.

A String corresponding to the type of Result that is requested.

5.

A String or Integer corresponding to the layer on which values are extracted.

6.

A String or Integer corresponding to the coordinate system in which the components are given.

7.

A String corresponding to the name of the component that is requested. If this argument is “NONE”, all the components are returned.

The use of this function is illustrated in “post_extract” worksheet. So far the example worksheet only performs extraction operations without using the extracted values in post-processing.

The actual exploitation of extracted Results could be done directly by calculations in the excel worksheet. ‘ResultsExtraction” VBA module corresponds to a type of operation that is very often done in aeronautics. For example, when wings or fuselages are stressed, one often works with finite element models characterized by a structured numbering of elements and nodes that make it easy to extract shell forces or stresses for panels, beam forces for elements representing stringers or frames... This allows estimation of loads on rows of connections, assess the risk for a panel to buckle...

X.E.3.4 “ResultsArchiver” VBA module

This module and the associated variables manage the archiving of Results. One of the module variables is a collection of arrays called “archiveList”. Each element in the collection contains the information necessary to archive one Result for later re-use:

The elements of each array in fact correspond to the arguments of function “saveToArchive” used in post-processing worksheets. ‘saveToArchive” function returns a string that allows a check of the validity of arguments. It is the calculation of these functions that fills the “archiveList” collection in the module. This means that a recalculation of the worksheets must be performed before the archiving of Results. (By pressing “ArchiveResults” button in “LcSelector” worksheet for example). Also, the calculation of worksheets must be redone after pushing “ReinitArchiveResults” button in “LcSelector” worksheet. Indeed, the “ReinitArchiveResults” button clears the “archiveList” collection. This “clearing” operation may be useful to re-create the “archiveList” collection after a modification of the post-processing worksheets.

X.E.3.5 “ResultsGmsh” VBA module

This module is used in the management of Results to be saved in GMSH files. To some extent, this module is similar to “ResultsArchiver” VBA module: it manages a outputsList module collection that contains the characteristics of Results to be saved, and the Results themselves.

One difference with “ResultsArchiver” VBA module is that the methods of “ResultsGmsh” are never called directly from the post-processing worksheets. Instead, methods from other VBA modules in the project call the methods of “ResultsGmsh”. For example, nearly all the methods of “ExtractionCriteria” module use “ResultsGmsh” to save envelope of Results in GMSH files. Indirectly, the user defines associated parameters in optional arguments of the post-processing functions defined in “ExtractionCriteria” module. (See section X.E.4.)

The module defines several global variables:

X.E.3.6 “Sqlite3” VBA module

Sqlite3 VBA module contains the VBA code devoted to the management of SQLite databases in Excel. This module is exactly the same as the one used in Small COM example “EX20”.

In this workbook, “Sqlite3” VBA module is used to generate a database containing for each load case the maximum stress or “failure indices”. These can be read a posteriori to save envelopes generated “manually” in GMSH files.

Note that the SQLite3 module is used by “ResultsGmsh” VBA module. This module generates all the SQLite3 operations, from the generation to the exploitation.

X.E.3.7 “UTIL” VBA module

This module defines subroutines and functions that can be used from several different locations in the VBA project. For example:

These methods are called from several locations in the VBA module, but should never be used directly from an excel spreadsheet of the project.

X.E.4 “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module

The module defines several functions for extracting and manipulating Results. For example, the extraction of maximum Von Mises stress on a Group of elements, the calculation of honeycomb worst element and associated reserve factor, or the calculation of reserve factors for different connection criteria. One notes that:

The module is the one that the user is most likely to modify to define new post-processing criteria. However, one advises those who wish to create their own criteria to define a new module called for example “UserCriteria” to develop their own functions.

X.E.4.1 Post-processing of stress Results

X.E.4.1.1 “getVonMisesMax” function

Function “getVonMisesMax” in “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module extracts the maximum Von Mises equivalent stress on a Group of elements and on a selection of layers. The arguments of the function are:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which stresses are extracted.

2.

A String corresponding to the location of extraction points on the elements. (For example: “Elements”, “ElemCenters” or “ElemCorners”.)

3.

A selection of layers. This is a range of cells containing Integer or String values that are converted to a list of layers by “layersFromRange” method of “UTIL” VBA module.

4.

A String corresponding to the Group of elements on which stresses are extracted.

5.

Two optional String arguments corresponding to the name of the GMSH file in which the envelope of maximum equivalent stress shall be saved, and the name of the Result by which the Result is referred to in GMSH.

The function returns an Array of one line and six columns:

1.

The element ID for maximum equivalent stress,

2.

The node ID for maximum equivalent stress,

3.

The layer ID for maximum equivalent stress,

4.

The sub-layer ID for maximum equivalent stress,

5.

The coordinate system ID which is always “NONE”,

6.

The maximum Von Mises equivalent stress.

The use of “getVonMisesMax” is illustrated in “post_sandwich” spreadsheet.

X.E.4.1.2 “getShellVonMisesMax” function

Function “getShellVonMisesMax” in “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module extracts the maximum Shell Von Mises equivalent stress on a Group of elements and on a selection of layers. The arguments of the function are:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which stresses are extracted.

2.

A String corresponding to the location of extraction points on the elements. (For example: “Elements”, “ElemCenters” or “ElemCorners”.)

3.

A String corresponding to the Group of elements on which stresses are extracted.

4.

Two optional String arguments corresponding to the name of the GMSH file in which the envelope of maximum equivalent stress shall be saved, and the name of the Result by which the Result is referred to in GMSH.

The function returns an Array of one line and six columns:

1.

The element ID for maximum equivalent stress,

2.

The node ID for maximum equivalent stress,

3.

The layer ID for maximum equivalent stress,

4.

The sub-layer ID for maximum equivalent stress,

5.

The coordinate system ID which is always “NONE”,

6.

The maximum Von Mises equivalent stress.

The difference between “getShellVonMisesMax” and “getVonMisesMax” is that one does not need to provide a selection of layers argument: the extraction is automatically done on layers “Z1” and “Z2”. The function returns a single value: the maximum Von Mises equivalent stress. The use of “getShellVonMisesMax” is illustrated in “post_sandwich” spreadsheet.

X.E.4.1.3 “getHoneycombCoreAirbusRF” function

Function “getHoneycombCoreAirbusRF” in “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module calculates the minimum honeycomb reserve factor on a Group of elements using the so-called “Airbus” criterion:

RF = 1 FoS (τL σL ) 2 + (τW σW ) 2,

in which τL and τL are the honeycomb longitudinal and transverse shear components of Cauchy stress tensor and σL and σW the corresponding allowables.

The arguments of the function are:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Cauchy stress tensor is extracted.

2.

A String corresponding to the location of extraction points on the elements. (For example: “Elements”, “ElemCenters” or “ElemCorners”.)

3.

A String corresponding to the Group of elements on which stresses are extracted.

4.

A String corresponding to the layer on which stresses are extracted.

5.

A Real safety factor.

6.

A Real value corresponding to the honeycomb longitudinal shear stress allowable σL.

7.

A Real value corresponding to the honeycomb transverse shear stress allowable σW .

8.

Two optional String arguments corresponding to the name of the GMSH file in which the envelope of maximum equivalent stress shall be saved, and the name of the Result by which the Result is referred to in GMSH.

The function returns an Array of one line and eight columns:

1.

The element ID for minimum reserve factor,

2.

The node ID for minimum reserve factor,

3.

The layer ID for minimum reserve factor,

4.

The sub-layer ID for minimum reserve factor,

5.

The coordinate system ID for minimum reserve factor,

6.

The value of longitudinal shear stress τL for minimum reserve factor,

7.

The value of transverse shear stress τW for minimum reserve factor,

8.

The minimum reserve factor.

The use of “getHoneycombCoreAirbusRF” is illustrated in “post_sandwich” spreadsheet.

X.E.4.1.4 “getHoneycombCoreMaxShearRF” function

Function “getHoneycombCoreMaxShearRF” in “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module calculates the minimum honeycomb reserve factor on a Group of elements using a maximum shear criterion:

MoS = σW FoS * τ - 1,

in which τ is the maximum shear stress and σW the transverse shear allowable.

The arguments of the function are:

1.

A String corresponding to the name of the load case for which Cauchy stress tensor is extracted.

2.

A String corresponding to the location of extraction points on the elements. (For example: “Elements”, “ElemCenters” or “ElemCorners”.)

3.

A String corresponding to the Group of elements on which stresses are extracted.

4.

A String corresponding to the layer on which stresses are extracted.

5.

A Real safety factor.

6.

A Real value corresponding to the honeycomb longitudinal shear stress allowable σL. (This allowable is not used in the calculation.)

7.

A Real value corresponding to the honeycomb transverse shear stress allowable σW . (Only this allowable is used in the calculation.)

8.

Two optional String arguments corresponding to the name of the GMSH file in which the envelope of maximum equivalent stress shall be saved, and the name of the Result by which the Result is referred to in GMSH.

The function returns an Array of one line and eight columns:

1.

The element ID for minimum reserve factor,

2.

The node ID for minimum reserve factor,

3.

The layer ID for minimum reserve factor,

4.

The sub-layer ID for minimum reserve factor,

5.

The coordinate system ID for minimum reserve factor,

6.

The value of longitudinal shear stress τL for minimum reserve factor,

7.

The value of transverse shear stress τW for minimum reserve factor,

8.

The minimum reserve factor.

The use of “getHoneycombCoreMaxShearRF” is illustrated in “post_sandwich” spreadsheet.

X.E.4.2 Post-processing of connection loads

For the post-processing of connection loads, the first step of the calculations is always to estimate for each connection the axial force, the shear force, the torsional moment and the bending moment. Afterwards the criterion for the connection is calculated (sliding, gapping, insert, rivet...). More precisely, one calculates the critical connection (node or element) and the associated reserve factor.

X.E.4.2.1 Calculation of the different components of connection loads

One explains here how the components of loading (axial and shear forces, torsional and bending moments) are first calculated for the different connections before the calculation of reserve factors for a selected criterion.

The parameters used for the calculation of these connection load components are always the first 6 parameters of the connection criterion function:

1.

The name of the load case for which the calculation is done.

2.

The name of a first Group (group1) corresponding generally to a part of the structure to which the connections are connected (sandwich panel, shell, metallic fitting...).

3.

The name of second Group (group2) of finite element entities corresponding generally to the modeling of the connections (For example RBE2 elements, CBAR or CBUSH elements...).

4.

A String corresponding to the type of operations done to build the different components of connection loads. This String determines which Results are first read from Result files, and how they are manipulated afterwards. More information about this parameter is given below.

5.

An integer or String value corresponding to the coordinate system in which the force and moment vectors are to be expressed before extracting the different force and moment components.

6.

A vector of three real values corresponding to the axis of the connection in the coordinate system given by the previous argument. The direction of this vector must be defined in such a way that a positive axial force corresponds to a tension in connection. For example, when internal forces are extracted from Grid Point Forces results, this is achieved by defining the vector pointing from grp2 to grp1 (to the direction of the group containing the elements from which Grid Point Forces are extracted.)

Presently, the available extraction methods for the load components, given by the fourth argument above are the following:

When the option “BMFRC” is adopted, the loads are extracted on the “beam-type” elements modeling the connections (CBUSH elements for example). This means that the only the second Group argument (third argument of the function) matters. The first Group argument is not considered. In all other cases, Group operations are done to obtain a list of nodes which is the intersection of the two Group arguments provided. More precisely, the Group “targetGrp” is build as follows:

    If extractionMethod = "BMFRC" Then
        Set targetGrp = grp2
    Else
        Set nodeGrp1 = db.getNodesAssociatedToRbes(grp1)
        Set tmpGrp1 = db.getNodesAssociatedToElements(grp1)
        nodeGrp1.importEntitiesByType "Node", tmpGrp1

        Set nodeGrp2 = db.getNodesAssociatedToRbes(grp2)
        Set tmpGrp2 = db.getNodesAssociatedToElements(grp2)
        nodeGrp2.importEntitiesByType "Node", tmpGrp2

        Set tmpGrp3 = nodeGrp1.opMul(nodeGrp2)
        Set tmpGrp2 = db.getElementsAssociatedToNodes(tmpGrp3)
        Set tmpGrp1 = grp1.opMul(tmpGrp2)
        Set targetGrp = tmpGrp1.opAdd(tmpGrp3)
    End If
        

Depending on the type of extraction, and on specific aspects of the problem, the correspondence between grp1 and grp2 on one side and the connections or assembled part may differ. For example:


PICTPICT

Figure X.E.1: Example of assembly of different layers with a single connection.

All the operations are managed by subroutine “getConnectionLoads” of “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module. This subroutine is called by each of the connection post-processing function. This is why the six parameters (eight values) of these connection post-processing functions are always the same.

X.E.4.2.2 “getSlidingRF” function

This function calculates reserve factors for the sliding criterion with the following expression:

RF = Cf * Pmin FoS * (Cf * max ⁡ (Faxial, 0) + Fshear) ,

in which Cf is the friction coefficient between assembled elements and Pmin is an estimate of the minimum possible pretension of the bolt. Parameters specific to this function are:

The function returns an Array of one line and four columns containing:

X.E.4.2.3 “getGappingRF” function

This function calculates reserve factors for the gapping criterion with the following expression:

RF = Pmin FoS * (max ⁡ (Faxial, 0) + Mbending∕R),

in which R is a parameter that allows one to take into account the prying effect related to the bending moment in the connection and Pmin is an estimate of the minimum possible pretension of the bolt. Parameters specific to this function are:

The function returns an Array of one line and four columns containing:

X.E.4.2.4 “getInsertRF” function

This function calculates reserve factors for the insert criterion with the following expression:

RF = 1 FoS (Faxial PSS ) 2 + (Fshear QSS ) 2,

In which “PSS” is the axial allowable of the insert and “QSS” is its shear allowable. Parameters specific to this function are:

The function returns an Array of one line and four columns containing:

X.E.4.2.5 “getShearBearingRF” function

This function calculates reserve factors for the shear-bearing failure mode with the following expression:

RF = ShrAll FoS * Fshear,

in which ShrAll is the shear bearing allowable. Parameters specific to this function are:

The function returns an Array of one line and three columns containing:

X.E.4.2.6 “getPullThroughRF” function

This function calculates reserve factors for the pull-through failure mode with the following expression:

RF = PullAll FoS *max (Faxial,PullAll * 10-9) ,

in which PullAll is the pull-through tensile allowable. Parameters specific to this function are:

The function returns an Array of one line and three columns containing:

X.E.4.3 composite post-processing

Function “getCompositeRF” of “ExtractionCriteria” VBA module calculates reserve factors using the classical laminate analysis. More precisely, the Shell Forces and Moments are recovered on shell elements with laminated properties (PCOMP or PCOMPG properties), and the layered reserve factors are calculated using “calcFiniteElementResponse” method of the generic Database class. Note however that one limitation of this post-processing function is that no thermo-elastic or hygro-elastic contribution is taken into account in the post-processing. Reserve factors are generally calculated at mid thickness of each layer. One exception is the inter-laminar shear stress reserve factor which is calculated at bottom sub-layer of the selected plies.

Function “getCompositeRF” has the following arguments:

1.

The name of the load case for which the calculation is done.

2.

The location(s) in elements of the points at which reserve factors will be calculated. (For example “ElemCenters” or “ElemCorners”.)

3.

The name of a Group on which the reserve factors are calculated.

4.

The name of the failure criterion for which reserve factors are calculated. (The list of available criteria is summarized in Table II.1.2.)

5.

A selection of cells containing the list of layers on which the composite criterion is to be estimated.

6.

The factor of safety.

7.

Two optional String arguments corresponding to the name of the GMSH file in which the envelope of inverse reserve factors shall be saved, and the name of the Result by which the Result is referred to in GMSH.

The function returns an Array of one line and five columns containing:

1.

The element ID for minimum reserve factor.

2.

The node ID for minimum reserve factor.

3.

The layer ID for minimum reserve factor.

4.

The sub-layer ID for minimum reserve factor.

5.

The minimum reserve factor.

The use of “getCompositeRF” function is illustrated in “post_composite” worksheet.

“getCompositeRF2” function defined in “UserCriteria” Module is a variant of “getCompositeRF” with two additional arguments:

Note that one explains in section IV.2.8.5 how the SQLite database containing the temperature Results can be produced.

“getCompositeRF3” function defined in “UserCriteria” Module is a variant of “getCompositeRF” that calculates laminate failure criteria directly from the stresses extracted from finite element model results. This function has been used to test the different variants of the functions calculating laminate criteria. The arguments of this function are the same as those of “getCompositeRF” function.

Appendix X.F
Bolt group redistribution of connection loads

Sometimes, the finite element model of part of a structure does not allow to obtain reliable estimates of connection loads. This is the case for example:

Then, bolt group re-distributions allow the production of smoother distributions of connection loads from an initial distribution produced by FEM solver.

The equations governing the redistribution of loads on a bolt group are presented here. The equations are inspired by similar equations developed in [eEL94] for the calculation of a solid motion.

X.F.1 Assumptions

Several assumptions are made to simplify the developments that follow:

The calculation of bolt group center of gravity is made easier by the fact that connection translational stifnesses are scalar. If connection coordinates in the initial extraction Cartesian coordinate system are noted xji′, center of gravity is calculated as follows:

xjCoG = ∑ i=1Nk T ix ji′ ∑ i=1NkT i .
(X.F.1)

Note that this simplification is possible only because connection translational stiffnesses are scalar (isotropy assumption). Once the center of gravity has been calculated, a new Cartesian coordinate system parallel to the initial one and with origin as center of gravity is defined. In this translated coordinate system, connection locations are simply calculated as:

xji = x ji′- x jCoG
(X.F.2)

and all the following calculations will be done using these coordinates.

Note that the definition of a bolt group center of gravity is possible only because connection stiffnesses are scalar. Otherwise, a different center of gravity would be calculated for each direction. In fact, it would be even worse than that: the deformation of the assembly in one direction could lead to a global force with a different direction. This means that no center of gravity could be calculated.

The total force and moment transmitted by an interface are calculated as follows:

F = ∑ i=1Nf FEMi,
(X.F.3)

M = ∑ i=1Nxi ×f FEMi + ∑ i=1Nm FEMi,
(X.F.4)

in which fFEMi and mFEMi are the connection loads extracted from FEM results before bolt group redistribution.

X.F.2 Group global stiffness

As shown in section X.F.1, the parts are assumed infinitely stiff compared to the connections. The only source of flexibility in the assembly is the flexibility of connections. Here, to fix ideas, it is considered that part “A” is fixed, and that only part “B” moves slightly. This means that only the motions of part “B” must be considered in the development of expressions leading to the estimation of group global stiffnesses.

As part “B” is rigid, its motion can be characterized by a vectorial translation T and a vectorial rotation Ω of components Tj and Ωj respectively. These components are expressed in bolt group center of gravity Cartesian coordinate system defined in section X.F.2. The motion of “B” side of connection i is then

Δxji = T j + ϵjklΩjxli,

in which Einstein’s convention is used for the notation of components, except that no distinction is made between the covariant and contravariant types of components as coordinate system is a Cartesian one. Previous expression can also simply be written:

Δxi = T + Ω×xi.
(X.F.5)

This equation shows that the translational elongation of each connection depends on its location with respect to the bolt group center of gravity. On the other hand, all the rotational deformations are exactly equal to part “B” global rotation:

Δωi = Ω.
(X.F.6)

To these connection deformations correspond connection forces and moments:

fi = k T iΔxi = k T i (T + Ω×xi) .
(X.F.7)

mi = k RiΔωi = k RiΩ.
(X.F.8)

With these expressions for connection deformations, bolt group total strain energy can be developed as follows:

U = 1 2 ∑ i=1NΔxi ⋅fi + 1 2 ∑ i=1NΔωi ⋅mi, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i (Δxi) 2 + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk Ri (Δωi) 2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i [T + Ω×xi) ⋅ (T + Ω×xi] + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i [T⋅T + 2T⋅ (Ω×xi) + (Ω×xi) ⋅ (Ω×xi)] + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T iT⋅T + ∑ i=1Nk T i (T×Ω)⋅xi + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i (Ω×xi) ⋅ (Ω×xi) + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T iT⋅T + (T×Ω)⋅∑ i=1Nk T ixi + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i (Ω×xi) ⋅ (Ω×xi) + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T iT⋅T + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i (Ω×xi) ⋅ (Ω×xi) + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2. (X.F.9)

In the last expression, one term vanishes because ∑ ⁡ i=1Nk T ixi = 0 (origin of coordinate system located at bolt group center of gravity). Finally, this expression is developed following a development similar to that of the inertia tensor in Chapter 32 of [eEL94]:

U = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T iT⋅T + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i (Ω×xi) ⋅ (Ω×xi) + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T iT⋅T + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk T i [Ω2 (xi ⋅xi) - (Ωxi) 2] + 1 2 ∑ i=1Nk RiΩ2, = 1 2 (∑ i=1Nk T i) T2 + 1 2Ω⋅ {∑ i=1Nk T i [ (xi ⋅xi) δ-xixi]} ⋅Ω + 1 2 (∑ i=1Nk Ri) Ω⋅δ⋅Ω. (X.F.10)

The last expression allows introduction of one scalar and one tensorial quantity characterizing bolt group total stiffness:

kT BG = ∑ i=1Nk T i,
(X.F.11)

JBG = ∑ i=1Nk T i [ (xi ⋅xi) δ-xixi] + (∑ i=1Nk Ri) δ.
(X.F.12)

The scalar quantity corresponds to a interface global translational stiffness. The tensorial quantity is the interface total rotational stiffness. Using these expressions, the bolt group strain energy is given by

U = 1 2kT BGT⋅T + 1 2Ω⋅JBG ⋅Ω.

The strain energy is also given by:

U = 1 2F⋅T + 1 2M⋅Ω.

This allows one to write an expression relating the interface global force and moment to interface deformation:

( F M ) = ( kT BGδ 0 0 JBG ) ( T Ω ),

that can be inverted as follows:

( T Ω ) = ( 1 kTBGδ 0 0 1 JBG ) ( F M ).
(X.F.13)

It is assumed here that JBG can be inverted.

X.F.3 Distribution on a group of connections

The equations developed in section X.F.2 allow definition of the different steps involved in bolt group redistribution of connection loads. These steps are summarized below:

1.

Bolt group center of gravity is calculated using (X.F.1).

2.

This allows calculation of connection locations in a new coordinate system with origin on this center of gravity using expression (X.F.2)

3.

The bolt group global stiffnesses kT BG and JBG are calculated with expressions (X.F.11) and (X.F.12) respectively.

4.

The 6 × 6 compliance matrix in (X.F.13) can then be calculated. Note that the calculations so far do not depend on connection loads. This means that they can be performed only once before the actual post-processing of FEM results.

5.

For a given load case, connection loads fFEMi and mFEMi can be extracted from the solver result file.

6.

Bolt group global forces and moments are then calculated with (X.F.3) and (X.F.4).

7.

Expression (X.F.13) is used to calculate the bolt group global translational and rotational deformation.

8.

Connection forces and moments are then calculated with expressions (X.F.7) and (X.F.8).

X.F.4 Final remarks

The values attributed to the connection translational stiffness kT i can be an issue. Generally test results are not available. The estimation of connection stiffness via detailed FEM is a possibility, but this might prove very complicated and expensive. Note, however, that as far as the distributed loads are concerned, only the relative stiffnesses of the different connections in an interface matter. This means that if all connections have common characteristics, the use of any common value kT i = k T for stiffnesses will lead to the same results. If bolt group involves several types of connections, the stiffnesses considered in the calculations should be estimated using reasonable assumptions. For example, a proportionality to bolt section area can be considered, of the kind kT i = k T 0 (Φi∕Φ 0) 2, in which Φi is the nominal diameter of connection i.

The bolt group equations that are developed in this Appendix consider connections that have translational and rotational stiffnesses. In many cases, the rotational stiffness is not necessary to redistribute interface loads. Setting kRi = 0 will lead to a redistribution in which the connections of the interface are loaded with forces only (mi = 0). This approach works only when setting kRi = 0 does not lead to a singular matrix JBG. This will be the case when interface connections are not aligned along a straight line. Would the connections be distributed along a straight line, and the particular case of a group of two connections satisfies this condition, a rotational stiffness must be attributed to connections to allow a bolt group redistribution.

Then appears the issue of the rotational stiffness to be attributed to the connections. As test results are generally not available, it is recommended to use a rotational stiffness corresponding approximately to kRi ≈ 0.5 ⋅ Φi ⋅ k T i.

Appendix X.G
Copying FeResPost

X.G.1 Copyright

Copyright 2005-2026 Renaud Sizaire

This document is the User Manual of FeResPost.

FeResPost is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

FeResPost is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with FeResPost; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

X.G.2 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007

Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this

license document, but changing it is not allowed.

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.

The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program–to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.

Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.

Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

0.

Definitions.

“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.

“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.

To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.

A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.

To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.

To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.

An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.

1.

Source Code.

The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.

A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.

The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.

The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.

The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.

The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.

2.

Basic Permissions.

All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.

You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.

Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.

3.

Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.

When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

4.

Conveying Verbatim Copies.

You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

5.

Conveying Modified Source Versions.

You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

(a)

The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.

(b)

The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.

(c)

You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.

(d)

If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.

A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

6.

Conveying Non-Source Forms.

You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:

(a)

Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.

(b)

Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.

(c)

Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.

(d)

Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.

(e)

Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.

A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.

A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.

“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.

If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.

Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

7.

Additional Terms.

“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.

When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:

(a)

Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or

(b)

Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or

(c)

Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or

(d)

Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or

(e)

Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or

(f)

Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.

All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.

If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.

Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.

8.

Termination.

You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).

However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.

Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.

9.

Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.

10.

Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.

11.

Patents.

A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.

A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.

Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.

In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.

If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.

If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.

Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.

12.

No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.

If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.

13.

Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.

14.

Revised Versions of this License.

The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.

15.

Disclaimer of Warranty.

THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16.

Limitation of Liability.

IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

17.

Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

X.G.3 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 3, 29 June 2007

Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.

0.

Additional Definitions.

As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.

"The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License, other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.

An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library.

A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked Version".

The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.

The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.

1.

Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.

You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.

2.

Conveying Modified Versions.

If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified version:

a)

under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the function or data, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or

b)

under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of this License applicable to that copy.

3.

Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.

The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates (ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:

a)

Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License.

b)

Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.

4.

Combined Works.

You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of the following:

a)

Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License.

b)

Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.

c)

For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.

d)

Do one of the following:

1)

Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.

2)

Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time a copy of the Library already present on the user’s computer system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked Version.

e)

Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise be required to provide such information under section 6 of the GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is necessary to install and execute a modified version of the Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.)

5.

Combined Libraries.

You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your choice, if you do both of the following:

a)

Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities, conveyed under the terms of this License.

b)

Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

6.

Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.

The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that published version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall apply, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of any version is permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the Library.

Appendix X.H
Summary of changes

Versions 1.*.*

Versions 1.0.*

Version 1.0.0

First issue of the library (2005/08/21). Creation of the manual.

Version 1.0.1

The new version of the library is issued 2005/08/28. A few bugs have been corrected:

Addition of new capabilities:

The modifications of the manual correspond to the modifications of the library and of the examples:

Version 1.0.2

The new version of the library is issued 2005/09/11.

The modifications of the manual correspond to the modifications of the library and of the examples:

Version 1.0.3

The new version of the library is issued 2005/11/06.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library, and a little more:

Version 1.0.4

The new version of the library is issued 2005/11/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library, and a little more:

Version 1.0.5

The new version of the library is issued 2005/12/02.

he modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library, and a little more: an example, presented in section IV.2.4.5 illustrates the manipulation of coordinate systems.

Version 1.0.6

The new version of the library is issued 2006/01/02.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library, and a little more:

Version 1.0.7

The new version of the library is issued 2006/02/05.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 1.0.8

The new version of the library is issued 2006/03/26.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.*.*

Versions 2.0.*

Version 2.0.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/05/26.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.1.*

Version 2.1.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/07/02.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.2.*

Version 2.2.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/07/23.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.3.*

Version 2.3.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/08/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.4.*

Version 2.4.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/11/05.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.5.*

Version 2.5.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/12/10.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Let us mention however:

Versions 2.6.*

Version 2.6.0

The new version of the library is issued 2006/12/18.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Let us mention however:

Versions 2.7.*

Version 2.7.0

The new version of the library is issued 2007/02/04.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Let us mention however:

Versions 2.8.*

Version 2.8.0

The new version of the library is issued 2007/02/18.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 2.9.*

Version 2.9.0

The new version of the library is issued 2007/04/15.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.1

The new version of the library is issued 2007/05/01.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library (among other things the modifications of the thermo-elastic and hygrometric aspects of the CLA calculations). The theoretical Chapter has been deeply transformed.

Version 2.9.2

The new version of the library is issued 2007/05/06.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.3

The new version of the library is issued 2007/05/13.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.4

The new version of the library is issued 2007/05/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.5

The new version of the library is issued 2007/07/01.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 2.9.6

The new version of the library is issued 2007/07/11.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 2.9.7

The new version of the library is issued 2007/07/29.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 2.9.8

The new version of the library is issued 2007/08/05.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.9

The new version of the library is issued 2007/08/26.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.10

The new version of the library is issued 2007/09/02.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 2.9.11

The new version of the library is issued 2007/09/30.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. A few examples illustrating the modification of CLA classes have been added. Several correction in CLA theory and classes descriptions.

Version 2.9.12

The new version of the library is issued 2007/10/07.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Versions 3.*.*

Versions 3.0.*

Version 3.0.0

The new version of the library is issued 2007/11/04.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.1

The new version of the library is issued 2008/01/01.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.2

The new version of the library is issued 2008/01/13.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.3

The new version of the library is issued 2008/01/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.4

The new version of the library is issued 2008/01/27.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.5

The new version of the library is issued 2008/02/03.

he modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Version 3.0.6

The new version of the library is issued 2008/02/10.

he modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.0.7

The new version of the library is issued 2008/02/24.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library.

Versions 3.1.*

Version 3.1.0

The new version of the library is issued 2008/03/30.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.1.1

The new version of the library is issued 2008/04/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library. Moreover:

Version 3.1.2

The new version of the library is issued 2008/04/27.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.1.3

The new version of the library is issued 2008/05/25.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.1.4

The new version of the library is issued 2008/06/08.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.1.5

The new version of the library is issued 2008/06/15.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.1.6

The new version of the library is issued 2008/07/06.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Versions 3.2.*

Version 3.2.0

The new version of the library is issued 2008/09/07.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.2.1

The new version of the library is issued 2008/10/06.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.2.2

The new version of the library is issued 2008/10/19.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Description of the “CLA in excel” example has been improved and the example modified.

Version 3.2.3

The new version of the library is issued 2008/10/26.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.2.4

The new version of the library is issued 2008/11/16.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. New examples illustrating the manipulation of Groups and the use of iterators with the COM component are given.

Version 3.2.5

The new version of the library is issued 2008/11/23.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.2.6

The new version of the library is issued 2008/12/07.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. The “CLA in excel” example has been modified to illustrate the use of new methods.

Version 3.2.7

The new version of the library is issued 2008/12/14.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Versions 3.3.*

Version 3.3.0

The new version of the library is issued 2009/01/04.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.3.1

The new version of the library is issued 2009/03/01.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.3.2

The new version of the library is issued 2009/03/08.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.3.3

The new version of the library is issued 2009/03/29.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Versions 3.4.*

Version 3.4.0

The new version of the library is issued 2009/05/24.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Moreover, excel examples using COM component have been improved. In particular, one added an example illustrating random access to XDB results. Also small ruby examples illustrating the use of random access have been added.

Version 3.4.1

The new version of the library is issued 2009/06/07.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.4.2

The new version of the library is issued 2009/06/21.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Moreover, a post-processing project in excel using COM component is presented. (See Chapter X.D.2.)

Version 3.4.3

The new version of the library is issued 2009/07/12.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

The excel post-processing project has been improved.

Version 3.4.4

The new version of the library is issued 2009/08/02.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

The excel post-processing project has been improved and several corrections have been done in the manual.

Also the presentation of the examples has been improved. One separates the examples with FeResPost ruby extension on one side, and with FeResPost component on the other side. The excel examples are presented in separate chapters.

Versions 3.5.*

Version 3.5.0

The new version of the library is issued 2009/08/23.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Moreover:

Version 3.5.1

The new version of the library is issued 2009/11/08.

Version 3.5.2

The new version of the library is issued 2009/12/13.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Version 3.5.3

The new version of the library is issued 2010/01/03.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected.

Moreover:

Version 3.5.4

The new version of the library is issued 2010/01/24.

he modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.5.5

The new version of the library is issued 2010/01/31.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.5.6

The new version of the library is issued 2010/02/07.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.5.7

The new version of the library is issued 2010/02/21.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.5.8

The new version of the library is issued 2010/04/11.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 3.5.9

The new version of the library is issued 2010/05/02.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Versions 4.*.*

Versions 4.0.*

Version 4.0.0

The new version of the library is issued 2010/08/18.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.1

The new version of the library is issued 2010/10/17.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.2

The new version of the library is issued 2010/11/01.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.3

The new version of the library is issued 2010/11/14.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.4

The new version of the library is issued 2011/02/20.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.5

The new version of the library is issued 2011/03/13.

The modifications of the manual correspond to some of the modifications of the library and a few errors in the manual have been corrected. Moreover:

Version 4.0.6

The new version of the library is issued 2011/04/25.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.0.7

The new version of the library is issued 2011/06/05.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.0.8

The new version of the library is issued 2011/07/24.

Version 4.0.9

The new version of the library is issued 2011/09/18.

Version 4.0.10

The new version of the library is issued 2011/09/25.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.0.11

The new version of the library is issued 2011/11/06.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.0.12

The new version of the library is issued 2012/01/02.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Versions 4.1.*

Version 4.1.0

The new version of the library is issued 2012/02/26.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.1.1

The new version of the library is issued 2012/06/10.

Modification of the manual and examples:

Version 4.1.2

The new version of the library is issued 2012/06/17.

Version 4.1.3

The new version of the library is issued 2012/08/19.

Version 4.1.4

The new version of the library is issued 2012/11/04.

Version 4.1.5

The new version of the library is issued 2013/01/27.

Version 4.1.6

The new version of the library is issued 2013/02/17.

Version 4.1.7

The new version of the library is issued 2013/04/14.

Version 4.1.8

The new version of the library is issued 2013/05/19.

Version 4.1.9

The new version of the library is issued 2013/07/07.

Versions 4.2.*

Version 4.2.0

The new version of the library is issued 2013/08/04.

Version 4.2.1

The new version of the library is issued 2013/08/18.

Version 4.2.2

The new version of the library is issued 2013/09/22.

Version 4.2.3

The new version of the library is issued 2013/11/11.

Version 4.2.4

The new version of the library is issued 2014/01/04:

The examples are also modified:

Version 4.2.5

The new version of the library is issued 2014/02/02:

Version 4.2.6

The new version of the library is issued 2014/08/24:

Version 4.2.7

The new version of the library is issued 2015/01/01:

A few corrections in the User Manual.

Version 4.2.8

The new version of the library is issued 2015/01/18:

A few corrections in the User Manual.

Version 4.2.9

The new version of the library is issued 2015/04/06:

A few corrections in the User Manual.

Versions 4.3.*

Version 4.3.0

The new version of the library is issued 2015/04/19:

The major modification in this issue of FeResPost is that it is now distributed under the Lesser General Public License. Practically, this means that it is now allowed to distribute proprietary applications linked with the library. (See Appendix X.F.4 for more information.)

Version 4.3.1

The new version of the library is issued 2015/08/26:

Version 4.3.2

The new version of the library is issued 2015/11/22:

Version 4.3.3

The new version of the library is issued 2016/01/01:

A few corrections in the examples, and in the user manual.

Version 4.3.4

The new version of the library is issued 2016/03/06:

Some modifications on the manual and the distributed binaries:

Version 4.3.5

The new version of the library is issued 2016/06/05:

Version 4.3.6

The new version of the library is issued 2016/08/16:

Version 4.3.7

The new version of the library is issued 2016/11/01:

Version 4.3.8

The new version of the library is issued 2017/01/02:

Version 4.3.9

The new version of the library is issued 2017/03/19:

Version 4.3.10

The new version of the library is issued 2017/05/28:

Versions 4.4.*

Version 4.4.0

The new version of the library is issued 2017/08/27:

Version 4.4.1

The new version of the library is issued 2017/10/22:

Version 4.4.2

The new version of the library is issued 2018/01/01:

Version 4.4.3

The new version of the library is issued 2018/04/29:

Version 4.4.4

The new version of the library is issued 2018/08/05:

Versions 4.5.*

Version 4.5.0

The new version of the library is issued 2019/02/10:

Version 4.5.1

The new version of the library is issued 2019/03/02:

Version 4.5.2

The new version of the library is issued 2019/07/16:

Version 4.5.3

The new version of the library is issued 2020/01/01:

Version 4.5.4

The new version of the library is issued 2020/02/09:

Version 4.5.5

The new version of the library is issued 2020/03/15:

Version 4.5.6

The new version of the library is issued 2020/03/17:

Version 4.5.7

The new version of the library is issued 2020/07/27:

Version 4.5.8

The new version of the library is issued 2021/01/01. Modifications of the library:

Modification of the examples:

Versions 5.*.*

Versions 5.0.*

Version 5.0.0

The new version of the library is issued 2021/03/28. Modifications of the library:

Table X.H.1: FeResPost methods modifications that may correspond to a modification of users’ scripts.
Old Method New MethodComments
Methods in “Group” class
each_mpc each_rbe method is renamed
NbrMpcs NbrRbes method is renamed
Methods in “NastranDb” class
getNbrRbes NbrRbes Becomes an attribute “getter”
NbrMpcs New method
getMpcNodes getRbeNodes for rigid body elements
getMpcDependentNodes getRbeDependentNodes for rigid body elements
getMpcIndependentNodesgetRbeIndependentNodes for rigid body elements
getMpcNodes getMpcNodes for MPC/MPCADD cards
getMpcDependentNodes getMpcDependentNodes for MPC/MPCADD cards
getMpcIndependentNodesgetMpcIndependentNodes for MPC/MPCADD cards
fillCard fillCard RBE and MPC cards are distinguished
fillCards new method
each_mpcId New method
Methods in “SamcefDb” class
getNbrRbes NbrRbes Becomes an attribute “getter”

Version 5.0.1

The new version of the library is issued 2021/07/30. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.0.2

The new version of the library is issued 2022/01/01. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.0.3

The new version of the library is issued 2022/08/15. Modifications of the library:

Also a few corrections in User Manual.

Version 5.0.4

The new version of the library is issued 2023/01/01. Modifications of the library:

The ruby post-processing example is modified as follows:

Also a few corrections in User Manual.

Version 5.0.5

The new version of the library is issued 2023/04/10. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.0.6

The new version of the library is issued 2023/08/14. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.0.7

The new version of the library is issued 2024/01/01. Modifications of the library:

A few modifications in the ruby post-project:

Finally, the binaries are no longer compiled with the “static” option as it lead to problems in the management of C++ exceptions. The Windows libraries are compiled on two different computers with Windows 10 and Windows 11. corresponding archives are duffixed with “w10” and “w11” respectively. Let us hope that, provided you choose the appropriate archive, this will prevent dll compatibility issues when installed on your computer.

Version 5.0.8

The new version of the library is issued 2024/06/16. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.0.9

The new version of the library is issued 2024/08/24. Modifications of the library:

Several corrections have been done in the manual and a few examples illustrating new capabilities are presented. The description of ruby post-processing projects in chapter IV.4 has been improved:

Version 5.0.10

The new version of the library is issued 2025/06/09. Modifications of the library:

Several corrections have been done in the manual and a few examples illustrating new capabilities are presented.

Versions 5.1.*

Version 5.1.0

The new version of the library is issued 2025/08/09. Modifications of the library:

Several corrections have been done in the manual and a few examples illustrating new capabilities are presented. For example:

Version 5.1.1

The new version of the library is issued 2025/11/15. Modifications of the library:

Several corrections have been done in the manual and a few examples illustrating new capabilities are presented. For example:

Version 5.1.2

The new version of the library is issued 2026/02/22. Modifications of the library:

Version 5.1.3

The new version of the library is issued 2026/05/16. Modifications of the library:

Versions 5.2.*

Version 5.2.0

The new version of the library was released on 2026/08/14.

The code has been reviewed with the help of AI, and many bugs have been fixed. Most of them are minor, but a few more serious issues have also been resolved. The redaction of the User Manual has likewise been improved with the help of AI. All the Ruby examples have been translated to Python, COM and .NET using AI. As a result, the discussion of the Ruby examples in Part IV can help the reader understand the newly translated examples as well.

In addition, the FeResPost library has been modified as follows:

Part XI
References

Bibliography

[eEL94]    L. Landau et E. Lifchitz. Physique Théorique, Volume 2 : Mécanique. Cinquième edition, 1994.

[Gay97]    Daniel Gay. Matériaux Composites. Hermès, 1997.

[Hex22]    Hexagon, editor. MSC Nastran 2022.4 Superelements and Modules User’s Guide. Hexagon, 2022.

[LL13]    L.D. Landau and E.M. Lifshitz. Statistical Physics: Volume 5. Number vol. 5. Elsevier Science, 2013.

[LLK+86]    L.D. Landau, E.M. Lifshitz, A.M. Kosevich, J.B. Sykes, L.P. Pitaevskii, and W.H. Reid. Theory of Elasticity: Volume 7. Course of Theoretical Physics. Elsevier Science, 1986.

[Nas05]    MSC.Access User’s Manual. MSC.Software Corporation, 2005.

[otNCE21]   Office of the NASA Chief Engineer. NASA-STD-5020-B, Requirements for the Threading Fastening Systems in Spaceflight Hardware. Nasa Technical Standard. NASA, 2021.

[Pal99]    Markku Palanterä, editor. Theoretical Background of ESAComp Analyses, Version 1.5. april 1999.

[Rey04]    Michael Reymond. MSC.Nastran 2005, DMAP Programmer’s Guide, volume 1. MSC.Software Corporation, 2004.

[Sof04a]    MSC Software, editor. MSC.Nastran 2004, Reference Manual. MSC.Software Corporation, 2004.

[Sof04b]    MSC Software, editor. MSC.Nastran 2005, Quick Reference Guide. MSC.Software Corporation, 2004.

[Sof10]    MSC Software, editor. MD/MSC. Nastran 2010, Dynamic Analysis User’s Guide. MSC.Software Corporation, 2010.